Terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method using IP transfer network

ABSTRACT

Both a connection server and a relay connection server are installed in an IP transfer network; a function similar to a line connection control of a subscriber exchanger is applied to a connection server; a function similar to a line connection control of a relay exchanger is applied to the relay connection server; and a terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method with using the IP transfer network is realized in such a manner that a telephone set and a terminal such as an IP terminal and a video terminal transmit/receive an initial address message, an address completion message, a call pass message, a response message, a release message and a release completion message, which can be made in a 1-to-1 correspondence relationship with line connection control messages of the common line signal system. Furthermore, while an address administration table is set to a network node apparatus of an IP transfer network, means for registering addresses of the terminals into this address administration table is employed, so that an IP packet communication by a multicast manner can be realized with improving information security performance.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

1. Field of the Invention

The present invention is related to a terminal-to-terminal(inter-terminal) communication connection control method using anIP(Internet Protocol) transfer network, which is applicable to an IPcommunication established between two terminal units such as an IPterminal, an IP telephone, and a voice/image apparatus(audio/visualapparatus), and also applicable to a 1:n type IP communication utilizinga multicast IP technique.

2. Description of the Prior Art

As a method capable of realizing various terminal-to-terminalcommunications such as mail transmissions/receptions, telephone, andimage communications while an IP transfer network is utilized, JapanesePatent Application No. 128956/1999 (will be referred to as a “priorpatent application” hereinafter) has been filed by the Applicant. Thisprior patent application discloses the method of realizing “integratedIP transfer network” containing therein a plurality of IP transfernetworks having various characteristics, while separating these IPtransfer networks. These IP transfer networks are known as an IPtelephone network, an IP image network, and IP electronic datageneral-purpose network. To realize the IP transfer network for unitingvarious sorts of terminal-to-terminal communications, contents disclosedby the above-explained prior patent application will now be brieflyexplained with reference to FIG. 1.

Inside integrated IP transfer network 901, a plurality of IP transfernetworks having different characteristics such as the IP image network902, the IP electronic data general-purpose network 903, and the IPtelephone network 904 are virtually installed. While the addressmanagement tables are set inside the network node apparatus 905-X andthe network node apparatus 905-Y, which are provided at the input pointsto the integrated IP transfer network 901 from the external unit for theintegrated IP transfer network 901, the address of the terminal unit ispreviously registered into the address management table. Since theaddress written into the IP packet entered into the integrated IPtransfer network 901 is compared with the address registered in theaddress management table, the IP packets can be transmitted, while theseIP packets are separated to the individual IP transfer networks withinthe integrated IP transfer network 901.

Next, in connection with the present invention, the terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control method (No. 7-common line signalsystem) employed in a public switched telephone network(PSTN) will nowbe simply explained.

In FIG. 2, reference numerals 98-1 and 98-3 show exchangers (subscriberexchangers) to which telephone sets are connected, reference numeral98-2 indicates a relay exchanger, and also reference numerals 98-4 and98-5 represent telephone sets. Reference numerals 98-6 to 98-8 showcommunication path control units of the exchangers, reference numerals98-9 to 98-11 indicate internal control units of the exchangers, andalso reference numerals 98-12 to 98-14 indicate signalling points forcontrolling terminal-to-terminal connections of telephone sets. Theinternal control units of the exchangers perform information exchangesused to set/recover communication lines between the communication pathcontrol units and the signalling points in conjunction with the internaloperation controls of the exchangers.

In particular, reference numerals 98-12 and 98-14 will be referred to assignalling end points(SEP). More specifically, reference numeral 98-13is called as a signalling transfer point(STP). Also, reference numeral98-15 denotes another signalling end point. These signalling end points98-12 to 98-15 are connected via signal lines 98-24 to 98-27 to a signalnetwork 98-16. While information used to control terminal-to-terminalcommunication connections and also execute maintenance/operations ofnetworks is stored into a signalling unit(SU), these signalling endpoints 98-12 to 98-15 mutually transmit/receive the stored informationto each other. A 16-bit point code(PC) is applied to one signalling endpoint in order to discriminate the own signalling end point from anothersignalling end point. On the other hand, reference numerals 98-21 to98-22 show communication lines used to transfer telephone voice(speech),but not used to transfer information for controllingterminal-to-terminal communication connections. The telephone lines98-20 and 98-23 correspond to interfaces(UNI) through which acombination between voice and control information ofterminal-to-terminal communication connections is transferred in anintegral form. Namely, both the voice and the control information ofterminal-to-terminal communication connections are transferred throughthe interfaces without being separated from each other. The No. 7-commonline signal system is featured by that the signal lines 98-24 to 98-26are separated from the communication lines 98-21 and 98-22 inside thepublic switched telephone network(PSTN).

A signalling unit indicated in FIG. 3 contains a “destination pointcode(DPC)”, an “origin point code(OPC)”, a “circuit identificationcode(CIC)”, a “message type(MSG)” and a parameter of the message.

The destination point code shows a destination to which a signallingunit is transmitted, the origin point code indicates a transmissionsource of a signalling unit, and the circuit identification coderepresents an identification number for identifying a communication lineset between a transmission source signal point and a destination signalpoint. As the message, for example, there are IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL,RLC, SUS, RES and CON, which are used to control terminal-to-terminalcommunication connections. Such a signalling unit which is written as“IAM” into a message area of the signalling unit is referred to as aninitial address message(IAM). Similarly, such a signalling unit which iswritten as “ACM” into the message area of the signalling unit isreferred to as an address completion message(ACM), such a signallingunit which is written as “CPG” into the message area of the signallingunit is referred to as a call pass message(CPG), and also such asignalling unit which is written as “ANM” into the message area of thesignalling unit is referred to as an answering message(ANM). Similarly,such a signalling unit which is written as “REL” into the message areaof the signalling unit is referred to as a release message(REL), such asignalling unit which is written as “RLC” into the message area of thesignalling unit is referred to as a release completion message(RLC), andalso such a signalling unit which is written as “SUS” into the messagearea of the signalling unit is referred to as an interrupt message(SUS).Similarly, such a signalling unit which is written as “RES” into themessage area of the signalling unit is referred to as a restartmessage(RES), and such a signalling unit which is written as “CON” intothe message area of the signalling unit is referred to as a connectionmessage(CON).

Referring now to FIG. 2, a description will be made of a method forcontrolling a terminal-to-terminal connection control by which atelephone communication is established from the telephone set 98-4 viathe exchangers 98-1, 98-2, 98-3 to the telephone set 98-5, as shown inFIG. 2. It should be noted that the respective signalling pointsexchange such a signalling unit via the signal lines 98-24 to 98-27 andthe common line signal network 98-16 to each other. In the signallingunit, the signalling point codes applied to the respective signallingpoints are set as addresses indicative of designations and transmissionsources. The telephone set 98-4 is connected via the telephone line98-20 to the exchanger 98-1. The terminal-to-terminal connection controlof the telephone set 98-4 is loaded to the signalling point 98-12 withinthe exchanger 98-1. Similarly, the telephone set 98-5 is connected viathe telephone line 98-23 to the exchanger 98-3. The terminal-to-terminalconnection control of the telephone set 98-5 is loaded to the signallingpoint 98-14 within the exchanger 98-3.

When a user issues a call request from the telephone set 98-4, thesignalling point 98-12 receives this call request (Step X1 of FIG. 4),and a communication line is determined by using a destination telephonenumber received from the telephone number 98-4 because of the functionsof both the communication path control unit 98-6 and the exchangerinternal control unit 98-9 of the exchanger 98-1. A signalling unit intowhich a circuit line identifier(CIC) of the determined communicationline is written is formed as an initial address message(IAM). In theparameter area of the initial address message(IAM), at least thetelephone number of the telephone set 98-5, namely a destinationtelephone number “Tel-No-98-5” is written. Furthermore, the telephonenumber of the telephone 98-4, namely, a telephone number of atransmission source “Tel-No-98-4” may be written thereinto.

Next, the signalling point 98-12 sends the initial address message(IAM)for issuing the telephone call to the signalling point 98-13 provided inthe exchanger 98-2 (Step X2). The initial address message IAM contains aline number “98-4-98-5” of a communication line corresponding to thelogic communication line inside the telephone communication line 98-21,the destination telephone number “Tel-No-98-5”, the transmission sourcetelephone number “Tel-No-98-4” (omittable option), and the like. Afterthe signalling point 98-12 has sent the IAM, the operation of thesignalling point 98-12 is advanced to a waiting condition for an addresscompletion message(ACM: will be explained later), and also initiates anACM waiting timer.

The signalling point 98-13 provided within the exchanger 98-2 receivesthe above-explained IAM, and then notifies the line number “98-4-98-5”via the exchanger internal control unit 98-10 to the telephonecommunication line control unit 98-7. The telephone communication linecontrol unit 98-7 executes a conducting test in order that the telephonecommunication line 98-21 can be used for the telephone communication.The signalling point 98-13 sends the IAM to the signalling point 98-14provided in the exchanger 98-3 (step X3). The signalling point 98-14checks the content of the received IAM in order that the telephonecommunication line 98-22 can be used for the telephone communication viathe control unit 98-11 and the telephone communication line control unit98-8. Furthermore, while the signalling point 98-14 connects thetelephone set 98-5 to the exchanger 98-3, this signalling point 98-14checks as to whether or not a call reception is permitted. When the callreception is allowed, the signalling point 98-14 issues a call settingrequest to the telephone set 98-5 (Step X4). Further, the signallingpoint 98-14 returns such an address completion message(ACM) whichnotifies that the IAM is received (Step X5). The ACM message is reachedvia the signalling point 98-13 to the signalling point 98-12 (Step X6).Upon receipt of the ACM message, the signalling point 98-12 stops thecounting operation of the ACM waiting timer which has been set. In sucha case that the counting operation of the ACM waiting timer is completedat a time instant before the ACM message is received, the telephonecommunication line is released.

When the signalling point 98-14 within the exchanger 98-3 receivesinformation for implying such a fact that the calling request is beingreceived from the telephone set 98-5 (Step X7), the signalling point98-14 transmits the call pass message(CPG) to the signalling point 98-13(Step X8). The signalling point 98-13 transmits the received CGP to thesignalling point 98-12 (Step X9). The signalling point 9-12 within theswitching point 98-1 receives the CPG message. Next, the signallingpoint 98-12 sends a calling sound to the telephone set 99-4 (Step X10).When the telephone set 98-5 responds to the above-described call settingrequest (Step X11), the telephone communication line 98-23 between thetelephone set 98-5 and the exchanger 98-4 can be used for the telephonecommunication, and further the response message(ANM) for indicating thatthe telephone set 98-5 responds to the call setting request is sent tothe signalling point 98-13 (Step X12).

The signalling point 98-13 transmits the received ANM to the signallingpoint 98-12 (Step X13), the signalling point 98-12 notifies stopping ofthe calling sound under transmission to the telephone set 98-4 (StepX14), and thus, telephone voice(speech) can be transmitted/receivedbetween the telephone set 98-4 and the telephone set 98-5. The operationis advanced to a telephone communication phase (Step X15). In the casethat the handset of the telephone set 98-4 is put on (on-hook), therelease request(REL) is sent out (Step X16), and the signalling point98-12 receives the release request(REL), the signalling point 98-12sends out a next release request(REL) to the signalling point 98-13(StepX17), and furthermore, notifies to the telephone set 98-4, such arelease completion(RLC) for indicating that the telephone communicationline is brought into an empty state (Step X18). Then, upon receipt ofthe release request(REL), the signalling point 98-13 sends out the nextrelease request(REL) to the signalling point 98-14 (Step X19), andfurther, notifies such a release completion(RLC) for indicating that thetelephone communication line is brought into the empty state to thesignalling point 98-12 (Step X20). Then, upon receipt of the releaserequest(REL), the signalling point 98-14 sends out the next releaserequest(REL) to the telephone set 98-5 (Step X21), and further, notifiessuch a release completion(RLC) for indicating that the telephonecommunication line is brought into the empty state to the signallingpoint 98-13 (Step X22). There are several variations in the sequentialoperations of the terminal-to-terminal communication connection controlswhich are transmitted/received between the telephone set 98-4 and thesignalling point 98-12, and also between the signalling point 98-14 andthe telephone set 98-15, depending upon sorts of telephone sets. Forinstance, a confirmation notification with respect to a releasecompletion may be issued from the telephone set 98-4 to the signallingpoint 98-12 just after the above-explained Step X18. Alternatively, aconfirmation notification with respect to the release completion may beissued from the signalling point 98-14 to the telephone set 98-5 justafter the Step X23.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining another control methodfor controlling terminal-to-terminal connections by which a telephonecommunication is made from the telephone set 98-4 via the exchanger 98-1through the exchanger 98-3 to the telephone set 98-5. Thisterminal-to-terminal communication connection control method correspondsto such a communication connection control method made by eliminatingthe process operations defined at the Steps X5 and X6 (namely, byeliminating address completion message ACM) from theterminal-to-terminal communication connection control method asexplained in FIG. 4. It should be understood that at the Step X2, thesignalling point 98-12 sets the CPG waiting timer instead of theabove-explained ACM waiting timer, and the signalling point 98-12 stopsthe CPG waiting timer after the Step X9. The above-explainedterminal-to-terminal communication connection control method is such acontrol method applied to such a case that the exchanger is not an ISDNexchanger, but is an analog exchanger.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining another method ofcontrolling terminal-to-terminal communication connections between thetelephone set 98-4 and the telephone set 98-5. This terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control method corresponds to such a controlmethod example that in the above-described terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control method, a series of process steps forinterrupting a telephone communication without waiting for the responsecompletion message (Step X14) and the telephone communication phase(Step X15) is carried out (Step X16 to Step X23).

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a further control methodfor controlling terminal-to-terminal communication connections by whicha telephone communication is made from the telephone set 98-4 via theexchanger 98-1 through the exchanger 98-3 to the telephone set 98-5.This terminal-to-terminal communication connection control methodcorresponds to such a control method. That is, while a telephonecommunication is carried out (Step X15), the handset of the telephoneset 98-4 is positioned only for a short time period(on hook), and aninterrupt message is transmitted in order to temporarily stop thetelephone communication (Steps X30 to X33). Then, the handset isreturned to the original setting position(off hook), and the restartmessage for restarting the telephone communication is transmitted (StepsX35 to X38), and thus, the process operation is returned to thetelephone communication (Step X39). The subsequent steps of therelease(REL) and the release completion(RLC) are similar to those asexplained with reference to FIG. 5 (Steps X40 to X47).

Next, with respect to the IP telephone communication, there is proposed“multimedia communication system based on JT-H323” of TTC standard,which is described in, for instance, ITU-T recommendation H323 ANNEX Dregulation (version of April, 1999). The technical idea “SIGNALLINGPROTOCOL AND PACKETING OF MEDIA SIGNAL” by which the call connectionsare controlled in the multimedia terminal-to-terminal communication isdefined as JT-H225. Also, the technical idea “CONTROL PROTOCOL FORMULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION” in the multimedia terminal-to-terminalcommunication is defined as JT-H245.

Next, referring to FIG. 8 to FIG. 11, the basic functions of the JT-H323gateway defined by ITU will be described. The present invention alsorefers to the basic functions.

In FIG. 8, a block 800 indicates the JT-H323 gateway. In this gateway800, a voice(speech) signal and/or an image(picture) signal entered froman SCN line 801 is converted into a digital signal in an SCN terminalfunction 802, a data format and/or a signal transmission/reception ruleis converted in a conversion function 803, and then, the data format isconverted into the format of the IP packet in a terminal function 804.The resulting IP packet is sent out to an IP communication line 805.Also, as to a packet flow along an opposite direction, namely, an IPpacket containing voice(speech) data and/or image data entered from theIP communication line 805 is decoded in a digital data format by theterminal function 804, and a data format and/or a signaltransmission/reception rule are converted by the conversion function803. The resultant digital data is converted into a signal flowingthrough the SCN line by the SCN terminal function 802 and sent to theSCN line 801. In this case, both a voice signal and an image signal maybe separated into both “call control data” and “net data.” This callcontrol data is used so as to send/receive a telephone number withrespect to a communication third party. The net data constitutes voiceand/or images itself. Through a communication line 805, an IP packet 810(refer to FIG. 9) functioning as the call control data flows, an IPpacket 811 (refer to FIG. 10) functioning as the net data whichconstitutes the voice itself flows, and an IP packet 812 (refer to FIG.11) functioning as the net data which constitutes the image itselfflows. In the case of an ISDN line, the SCN terminal function 802corresponds to a data line terminating apparatus (DSU). Also, theterminal function 804 owns such a terminal communication functionrequired for the bidirectional (interactive) communication between theJT-323 telephone set and the JT-323 voice/image apparatus.

Next, the integrated information communication network proposed inJapanese Patent No. 3084681-B2 closely related to theterminal-to-terminal communication connection control method of thepresent invention will now be briefly explained with reference to FIG.12.

A block 191 shows an integrated IP communication network, an IP terminal192-1 owns an IP address “EA01”, and another IP terminal 192-2 owns anIP address “EA02”. This example corresponds to such an example that anexternal IP packet 193-1 is transferred from the IP terminal 192-1 viathe integrated IP communication network to the IP terminal 192-2. Boththe IP addresses “EA01” and “EA02” are referred to as “external IPaddresses”, since these IP addresses are used outside the integrated IPcommunication network 191. In FIG. 12 to FIG. 15, as to head portions ofIPs, only IP address portions are described, and other items areomitted.

When the network node apparatus 195-1 receives the external IP packet193-1, this network node apparatus 195-1 confirms that the internal IPaddress is equal to “IA01”, and the destination external IP address ofthe IP packet 193-1 is equal to “EA02”. The internal IP address isapplied to the terminal unit(logic terminal) of the logic communicationline 194-1 into which the IP packet 193-1 is entered. Then, the networknode apparatus 195-1 retrieves the content of the address managementtable 196-1 shown in FIG. 12, and retrieves such a record in which theinternal IP address of the transmission source is equal to “IA01” in thebeginning, and thereafter, the destination external IP address is equalto “EA02”. Furthermore, the network node apparatus 195-1 checks as towhether or not the external IP address “EA01” of the transmission sourcewithin the IP packet 193-1 is contained in the previously detectedrecord. It should be understood that such a check operation as towhether or not the external IP address “EA01” of the transmission sourcewithin the IP packet 193-1 is contained in the previously-detectedrecord may be omitted.

In the present example, while it is such a record containing the IPaddresses “EA01, EA02, IA01, IA02” on the second row from the top row,an IP packet 193-2 having such an IP header is formed(namely, IP packetis encapsulated) using the IP addresses “IA01” and “IA02” located insidethe record. The IP header is such that the transmission source IPaddress is “IA01”, and the destination IP address is “IA02”. In thiscase, symbols “IA01” and “IA02” are called as internal IP addresses ofthe integrated IP communication network 191. The internal IP packet193-2 is reached through the routers 197-1, 197-2 and 197-3 to thenetwork node apparatus 195-2. The network node apparatus 195-2 removesthe IP header of the received internal IP packet 193-2(anti-encapsulation of IP packet), sends out the acquired external IPpacket 193-3 to the communication line 194-2, and then, the IP terminal192-2 receives the external IP packet 193-3. Is should also be notedthat 197-6 is an example of such a server that the external IP addressis “EA81”, and the internal IP address is “IA81”.

FIG. 13 indicates another embodiment of an address management table.That is, the address management table 196-1 of FIG. 12 is replaced by anaddress management table 196-3 of FIG. 13, the address management table196-2 of FIG. 12 is replaced by an address management table 196-4 ofFIG. 13, and other portions are identical to those of theabove-explained address management table. The known address masktechnique may be applied to the address management tables 196-3 and196-4.

In the beginning, the record of the address management table 196-3containing the internal IP address “IA01” is retrieved. This internal IPaddress is applied to the logic terminal of the terminal unit of thecommunication line 194-1. In this case, both the record of the first rowat the record of the second row in the address management table 196-3from the top row correspond to the records of interest. With respect tothe record of the first row, a check is made as to whether or not anAND-gating result between a destination-use external IP mask “Mask81”and the destination external IP address “EA02” within the external IPpacket 193-1 is coincident with a destination external IP address“EA81x” within the first row record(refer to the below-mentioned formula(1)). In this case, the AND-gating result is not coincident with theexternal IP address “EA81x”. With respect to the record of the secondrow, a check is made as to whether or not an AND-gating result between adestination-use external IP mask “Mask2” and the destination external IPaddress “EA02” within the external IP packet 193-1 is coincident with adestination external IP address “EA02y” within the second rowrecord(refer to the below-mentioned formula (2)). In this case, theAND-gating result is coincident with the external IP address “EA02y”.Also, with respect to the transmission source IP address, a comparisonis made in accordance with the below-mentioned formula (3) in a similarmanner:If (“Mask81” and “EA02”=“EA81x”)  (1)If (“Mask2” and “EA02”=“EA02y”)  (2)If (“Mask1y” and “EA01”=“EA01y”)  (3)

Based upon the above-explained comparison result, the record of thesecond row is selected, and both the internal records “IA01” and “IA02”contained in the record of the second row are employed so as to performthe encapsulation, so that the internal IP packet 193-2 is formed. Itshould be noted that the comparison using above-mentioned formula (3)can not be made when the regions of both the transmission sourceexternal IP address and the address mask in the record of the addressadministration table 196-3 are omitted.

FIG. 14 indicates a further embodiment of an address management table.That is, the address management table 196-1 of FIG. 12 is replaced by anaddress management table 196-5 of FIG. 14, the address management table196-2 of FIG. 12 is replaced by an address management table 196-6 ofFIG. 14, and other portions are identical to those of theabove-explained address management table. In this example, the addressmanagement tables 196-5 and 196-6 do not contain the transmission sourceexternal IP addresses, and the transmission source external IP addressis not cited in the IP encapsulation. When the IP packet 193-1 isencapsulated, the destination internal IP address “IA02” is determinedbased upon the transmission source internal IP address “IA01” and thedestination external IP address “EA02” inside the address managementtable 196-5.

FIG. 15 illustratively shows a further embodiment of the addressmanagement table. This embodiment corresponds to such an embodiment thatthe integrated IP communication network of FIG. 12 is replaced by anoptical network, and the internal IP packet is substituted by aninternal optical frame. This further embodiment will now be brieflyexplained. In this drawing, a block 191 x indicates an IP packettransfer network, and also represents an optical network in which an IPpacket is transferred by employing an optical frame. The optical frameis transferred to an optical communication path provided inside theoptical network 191 x. This optical communication path is equal to sucha function of a communication-1 layer and a communication-2 layer. Anoptical link address is applied to a header portion of an optical frame.In such a case that the optical frame corresponds to an HDLC frame, theoptical link address corresponds to an HDLC address employed in the HDLCframe.

An IP terminal 192-1 x owns an IP address “EA1”, and another IP terminal192-2 x owns an IP address “EA2”. This example corresponds to such anexample that an external IP packet 193-1 x is transferred from the IPterminal 193-1 x via the optical network 191 x to the IP terminal 192-2x. In FIG. 15, only IP address portion is described as to a headerportion of an IP, only header portion is similarly described as to anoptical frame, and other items are omitted.

When the network node apparatus 195-1 x receives the external IP packet193-1 x, this network node apparatus 195-1 x confirms such a fact thatan internal optical link address is equal to “IA1”, and an externaldestination IP address of the IP packet 193-1 x is equal to “EA2”, andthe internal optical link address is applied to a termination unit(logicterminal) of a logic communication line 194-1 x into which the IP packet193-1 x is inputted. Then, the network node apparatus 195-1 x retrievesa content of an address administration table 196-1 x shown in FIG. 15,and also retrieves a record containing such addresses that an internaloptical link address of a transmission source corresponds to “IA1” inthe beginning, and subsequently, an external destination IP addresscorresponds to “EA2”. Furthermore, the network node apparatus 195-1checks as to whether or not the transmission source external IP address“EA1” contained in the IP packet 193-1 x is included in theabove-detected record. Alternatively, the checking operation as towhether or not the transmission source external IP address “EA1”contained in the IP packet 193-1 x is included in the detected recordmay be omitted.

In this example, while the record is equal to such a record containingaddresses of “EA1, EA2, IA1, IA2” on the second column from the topcolumn, an optical frame 193-2 x is produced by employing to opticallink addresses “IA1” and “IA2” present inside the record(namely, IPpacket is capsulated). This optical frame 193-2 x owns such a headerthat the optical link address of the transmission link address is “IA1”and the optical link address of the destination is “IA2”. In this case,symbols “IA1” and “IA2” correspond to internal addresses of the opticalcommunication network 191 x. The internal optical frame 193-2 x isreached to the network node apparatus 195-2 x via routers 197-1 x, 197-2x and 197-3 x, which own an optical frame transfer function. The networknode apparatus 195-2 x removes a header of the received internal opticalframe 193-2 x (namely, optical frame is inverse-capsulated), sends outthe acquired external IP packet 193-3 x to a communication line 194-2 x,and the IP terminal 192-2 x receives an external IP packet 193-3 x.

In accordance with the present invention, while IP addresses are appliedto an IP telephone set, a media router(will be explained later), andvarious sorts of servers(these appliances will be referred to as “IPtransmittable/receivable nodes” hereinafter), the IP packets aretransmitted/received, so that the data may be exchanged in a mutualmanner. These appliances will be referred to as “IP communicationmeans”. FIG. 15 shows such an example that while an IPtransmittable/receivable node 340-1 and another IPtransmittable/receivable node 340-2 own IP addresses “AD1” and “AD2”respectively, an IP packet 341-1 having the transmission source IPaddress “AD1” and the destination IP address “AD2” is transmitted fromthe terminal 340-1 to the terminal 340-2. Also, both the IPtransmittable/receivable nodes 340-1 and 340-2 receive the IP packet341-2 along the opposite direction, so that the various sorts of dataare mutually transmitted/received. A data portion from which the headerof the IP packet is removed may also be called as a “payload”.

Next, there are provided with IP data multicast networks, IP base TVbroadcast networks and, IP base movies distribution networks, while themulticast technique corresponding to one of the IP techniques isemployed as the IP transfer networks in the IP data multicast network,IP data such as electronic books and electronic newspapers istransferred from one distribution source to a plurality of destinations.In both the IP base TV broadcast networks and IP base movie distributionnetworks, which may function as IP sound(speech)/image networks, both TVsound data and TV picture(image) data are transferred(broadcasted) to aplurality of destinations. Referring now to FIG. 16, a multicast type IPtransfer network 27-1 for transferring from one distribution source to aplurality of destinations will now be explained.

In FIG. 16, reference numerals 27-11 to 27-20 show routers. Each ofthese routers 27-11 to 27-20 holds a router-sort multicast table. Thisrouter-sort multicast table represents that a received IP packet shouldbe transferred to a plurality of communication lines in accordance withmulticast addresses contained in the received IP packets. In thisembodiment, a multicast address designates “MA1”. In such a case that anIP packet 29-1 having the multicast address “MA1” is transmitted from anIP terminal 28-1, and then is reached via the router 27-11 to the router27-18, this router 27-18 copies an IP packet 29-2, and transfers both anIP packet 29-3 and another IP packet 29-4 to a communication line bycitating the router-sort multicast table held in the router 27-18. Also,the router 27-17 copies the received IP packet 29-3, and transfers an IPpacket 29-5 to a communication line 29-17 by referring to therouter-sort multicast table held in the router 27-18. Also, this router27-17 transfers an IP packet 29-6 to a communication line 29-18 byreferring to the router-sort multicast table. Since the router 27-19owns no router-sort multicast table, the IP packet 29-4 directly passesthrough the router 27-19 to become another IP packet 29-7 which will betransferred to the router 27-14.

As indicated in FIG. 17, the router 27-17 inputs the IP packet 29-3 fromthe communication line 29-16, and makes such a confirmation that thetransmission source IP address of the IP packet 29-3 is equal to “SRC1”and the destination IP address thereof is equal to the multicast address“MA1”. Since the output interfaces with respect to the multicast address“MA1” are designated as “IF-1” and “IF-2” in the multicast table 29-15,the router 27-17 copies the IP packet 29-3, and outputs the copied IPpacket as an IP packet 29-5 to the communication line 29-17 whose outputinterface is equal to “IF-1”. Furthermore, the router 27-17 copies theIP packet 29-3, and then outputs the copied IP packet as an IP packet29-6 to the communication line 29-18 whose output interface is equal to“IF-2”.

The router 27-12 copies the received IP packet 29-5, and then transfersthe IP packet 29-8 to the IP terminal 28-2 and also the IP packet 29-9to the IP terminal 28-3 by referring to the route-sort multicast table.Also, the router 27-13 copies the received IP packet 29-6, and thentransfers the IP packet 29-10 to the IP terminal 28-4 and also the IPpacket 29-11 to the IP terminal 28-5 by referring to the route-sortmulticast table. Also, the router 27-14 copies the received IP packet29-7, and then transfers the IP packet 29-12 to the IP terminal 28-6 andalso the IP packet 29-13 to the IP terminal 28-7 by referring to theroute-sort multicast table. In the case that the IP terminal 28-1 of thetransmission source transfers a digital-formatted electronic book and adigital-formatted electronic newspaper to the IP transfer network 27-1,this IP transfer network 27-1 corresponds to an IP data multicastnetwork which is employed so as to distribute an electronic book and anelectronic newspaper, whereas the IP terminals 28-2 to 28-8 constituteIP terminals of users who purchase the electronic books and theelectronic newspapers. In such a case that the IP terminal 28-1 of thetransmission source is replaced by a TV broadcasting sound/imagetransmission apparatus so as to broadcast a TV program (both sound andimage), the IP transfer network may constitute an IP base TV broadcastnetwork, whereas the IP terminals 28-2 to 28-7 may constitute IPterminals equipped with TV reception functions for TV audiences.

In the above-described embodiment of the multicast system shown in FIG.16, the IP terminal 28-1 constitutes the transmitter to transmit themulticast data, whereas the IP terminals 28-2 to 28-7 constitute thereceivers to receive the multicast data. The multicast system withemployment of such a method is utilized in the Internet and broadbandLANs as a test purpose. However, in the multicast system, since any ofthe IP terminals may constitute the transmission source for transmittingthe multicast data, the following risk may occur. That is, while atransmitter having a ill-intention appears, the transmitter continuouslytransmits multicast data in an endless manner, so that a network may becongested by the multicast data, and thus, a network function should bestopped. There is another risk that since multicast tables contained inrouters are rewritten and/or a very large amount of data are suppliedinto routers in an endless manner, source routers are brought intooverload conditions, and finally shut down. A large expectation is madeof realizing such a multicast system with highly improved informationsecurities, while employing the following security methods. That is,while a multicast data transmission source is limited, any of unfairusers may be eliminated, and/or attacking of overload/shut-down ofrouters may be avoided.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

Terminal-to-terminal(inter-terminal) communication connection controlmethods for IP terminals which mainly transmit/receive data have beenestablished as, for example, a terminal-to-terminal communicationconnection control method capable of transmitting/receiving anelectronic mail in the Internet. In accordance with the presentinvention, such a terminal-to-terminal communication connection controlmethod could be established, in which the terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control method among the IP terminals, whichhas been established in the Internet and the like and mainlytransmits/receives data, may be applied to multimedia communicationssuch as communications among IP telephone sets, voice/imagecommunications, and IP multicast communications by employing a technicalidea different from the above-explained TTC standard.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-explainedproblem, and has an object to provide a terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control system which can be applied tomultimedia communications such as communications established among IPtelephones, voice (speech)/image communications, and IP multicastcommunications.

In accordance with the present invention, since the line connectioncontrol method of the No. 7-common line signal system is rearranged soas to be fitted to an IP transfer network, the terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control method may be realized in which IPpackets are transferred via the IP transfer network among terminalsknown as telephone sets, IP terminals, audio-moving imagetransmitting/receiving terminals and facsimiles.

In FIG. 18, reference numeral 1 shows an IP transfer network having anIP packet transmission/reception function, reference numerals 1-1 and1-2 indicate terminals (telephone set, IP terminal, audio-moving imagetransmitting/receiving terminal, facsimiles etc.), reference numerals1-3 and 1-4 represent media routers for connecting one, or moreterminals to the IP transfer network, and reference numerals 1-5 and 1-6show connection servers, and further reference numeral 1-7 denotes arelay connection server. A function similar to the line connectioncontrol of the subscriber exchanger(LS) of the public switched telephonenetwork(PSTN) is applied to each of the connection servers 1-5 and 1-6.A function similar to the line connection control of the relayexchanger(TS) is applied to the relay connection server 1-7.

A user inputs a destination telephone number from the terminal 1-1 so asto send a call setting signal (Step Z1), and then, the media router 1-3returns a call setting acceptance (Step Z2). Next, the media router 1-3transmits an IP packet to the connection server 1-5 (Step Y1). This IPpacket contains the destination telephone number and a telephone numberof a transmission source, and is to set a telephone call. The connectionserver 1-5 determines a communication line for a terminal communicationprovided in an IP transfer network by using the received destinationtelephone number, and produces both a line number(circuit number: CIC)used to identify a communication line, and an IP packet containing boththe destination telephone number and the transmission source telephonenumber. In this case, the line number(CIC) is exclusively determined insuch a manner that the circuit number is capable of identifying a set ofboth the destination telephone number and the transmission sourcetelephone number. The IP packet will be referred to as an IP packetcontaining an initial address message(IAM), or simply referred to as aninitial address message(IAM). The above-explained communication line forthe terminal communication corresponds to, for example, such an IPcommunication line used to transfer a digitalized voice packet. The IPcommunication line may be defined as a set of a transmission source IPaddress and a destination IP address, which is set to a voice IP packet,or a label of an MPLS technique applied to an IP packet. When otherterminals such as an IP terminal, an audio-moving image data, facsimiledata are used, a communication line corresponds to a data transferringcommunication line for an IP terminal, and/or a data transferringcommunication line for an audio-moving image data and facsimile data.

Next, the connection server 1-5 sends the initial address message(IAM)to the connection server 1-7 (Step Y2), and operation of the connectionserver is advanced to an address completion message(ACM) waitingcondition and initiates an ACM waiting timer(will be explained later).The relay connection server 1-7 receives the message IAM, and then sendsthis message IAM to the connection server 1-6 (Step Y3). The connectionserver 1-6 checks the content of the received IAM message, and alsoJudges as to whether or not a communication line is set to such a mediarouter 1-4 which is connected to the telephone set 1-2 having thedestination telephone number. In other words, the connection server 1-6checks as to whether or not the media router 1-4 is allowed to receive aconnection request call. When the connection request call reception isallowed, the connection server 1-6 requests the media router 1-4 to setthe connection request call (Step Y4). The media router 1-4 requests thetelephone set 1-2 to set the telephone call (Step Z4). Furthermore, theconnection server 1-6 produces such an IP packet for notifying such afact that the message IAM is received. The connection server 1-6 returnsthe produced IP packet(called as address completion message: ACM) to therelay connection server 1-7 (Step Y5). The message ACM is reached viathe relay connection server 1-7 to the relay connection server 1-5 (StepY6). When the connection server 1-5 receives the message ACM, theconnection server 1-5 stops the previously set ACM waiting timer. In thecase that the ACM waiting timer is fully counted up before the messageACM is received, the telephone communication line is released.Alternatively, the message ACM may succeed the line number(CIC) from themessage IAM and may save it inside the message ACM or the message ACMforms a line number from the caller's telephone number and the addresstelephone number at the Step Y5 and save it inside the message ACM.

The terminal 1-2 produces a connection request call reception sound, andreports the call reception to the media router 1-4 (Step Z7). The mediarouter 1-4 sends to the connection server 1-6, the connection requestcall reception notice. The connection server 1-6 produces such an IPpacket for notifying such a fact that the telephone set 1-2 issues thetelephone set 1-2 receives the connection request call. This produced IPpacket is referred to as an “IP packet containing a call passmessage(CPG)”, or simply called as a call pass message(CPG). Theconnection server 1-6 sends this call pass message “CPG” to the relayconnection server 1-7 (Step Y8). The relay connection server 1-7 sendsthe received message CPG to the connection server 1-5 (Step Y9), and theconnection server 1-5 receives the message CPG. Then, the connectionserver 1-5 notifies such a fact that the terminal 1-2 is being called byconsidering the content of the message CPG to the media router 1-3 (StepY10). The media router 1-3 notifies the telephone calling sound to thetelephone set 1-1 (Step Z10). It should be noted that as to the messageCPG, at the Step Y5, while the line number is formed from the set of thetransmission source telephone number and the destination telephonenumber, and then may be saved in the message CPG.

When the terminal 1-2 responds to the call setting request made at theStep Z4 (Step Z11), the media router 1-4 notifies such a fact that theterminal 1-2 responds the connection request call to the connectionserver 1-6 (Step Y11). The connection server 1-6 produces such an IPpacket for indicating that the terminal 1-2 responds to the request ofthe call setting operation. The IP packet is referred to as an IP packetcontaining a response message(ANM), or simply called as a responsemessage(ANM). The connection server 1-6 transmits the produced ANMmessage packet to the relay connection server 1-7 (Step Y12). The relayconnection server 1-7 sends the received ANM message to the connectionserver 1-5 (Step Y13). Then, this connection server 1-5 notifies such afact that the destination terminal 1-2 responds to the media router 1-3(Step Y14). The media router 1-3 notifies the calling sound stoptransmitted to the terminal 1-1 (Step Z14), so that the IP packet onwhich the digital voice is superimposed can be transmitted/received byemploying the communication which is specified by the line number(CIC)between the terminals 1-1 and 1-2. Then, the operation is advanced to aterminal communication phase (Step Y15). As to the ANM message IPpacket, at the Step Y5, the line number may be formed from a set of thetransmission source telephone number and the destination terminalnumber, and may be saved in the message ANM. When a call interruptrequest is issued (Step Z16), the media router 1-3 notifies the callinterrupt request to the connection server 1-5 (Step Y16) and notifies acut confirmation to the terminal 1-1 (Step Z18).

When the connection server 1-5 receives the interrupt request, thisconnection server 1-5 discriminates the line number(CIC) from the set ofthe transmission source terminal number and the destination terminalnumber, and then produces such an IP packet employing a releaserequest(REL) of the communication line. The produced IP packet isreferred to as an IP packet containing a release(REL), or simplyreferred to as a release message(REL). The release message(REL) containsthe line number(CIC). The connection server 1-5 sends the releasemessage(REL) to the relay connection server 1-7 (Step Y17), and further,returns to the media router 1-3, such a recovery completion forindicating a completion of the interrupt request (Step Y18). The relayconnection server 1-7 sends out the release request(REL) to theconnection server 1-6 (Step Y19), and furthermore, produces such an IPpacket indicative of a completion of the release request(REL). Theproduced IP packet is called as an IP packet containing a releasecompletion(RLC), or simply referred to as a release completionmessage(RLC). This release completion message(RLC) is returned to theconnection server 1-5 (Step Y20).

When the connection server 1-6 receives the release request(REL), theconnection server 1-6 sends out an interrupt request to the media router1-4 (Step Y21), and also returns a release completion message(RLC) tothe relay connection server 1-7 (Step Y22). The release completionmessage(RLC) implies that the release request(REL) is completed. Whenthe media router 1-4 receives the interrupt request, the media router1-4 notifies an interrupt instruction of a connection request call tothe terminal 1-2 (Step Z22), and also to the connection server 1-6, aninterrupt completion for indicating that the interrupt instruction iscarried out (Step Y23). The terminal 1-2 notifies a recovery completionto the media router (Step E23). In the procedure for accomplishing theterminal communication, the terminal 1-2 may send the interrupt requestof the terminal communication to the media router 1-4, which is similarto the above-explained procedure. Alternatively, while the relayconnection server 1-7 is not present, a method for aterminal-to-terminal communication control between the connectionservers 1-5 and 1-6 may be realized. After the terminal communicationbetween the terminals 1-1 and 1-2 has been accomplished, namely at theSteps Y18 and Y22, both the connection servers 1-5 and 1-6 may acquire aterminal communication record including a line number(CIC), acommunication time instant, and a telephone number, and may record theterminal communication record inside the connection server so as to beused for the charging and operation managing purposes.

In the above described terminal-to-terminal communication connectioncontrol, when the terminal is a telephone set, the digital media isdigitalized voice and the media communication is telephonecommunication, when the terminal is an IP terminal, the digital media ischaracters or digitalized still images and the media communication is IPdata communication, when the terminal is an audio-moving imagetransmission/reception terminal, the digital media is digitalizedaudio-moving image and the media communication is voice-moving imagecommunication, and when the terminal is a facsimile terminal, thedigital media is digitalized facsimile image and the media communicationis facsimile communication. The telephone number to discriminate thecommunicating terminals may be a terminal discrimination number toindividually define specified terminals, for example, a terminaloriginal number which is effective within the specified communicationnetwork.

Also, there are various sorts of modified terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control methods between a media router and aconnection server, and between connection servers. Alternatively, theinitiation of the ACM waiting timer defined at the Step Y2 may beomitted, and also the above-mentioned Step Y5 and Y6, namely addresscompletion message(ACM) can be omitted. However, CPG waiting timer isset instead of the ACM waiting timer and is stopped after Step Y9. Thesemeans will be explained with reference to a following embodiment.

The present invention is related to a terminal-to-terminal communicationcontrol method with employment of an IP transfer network. Theabove-explained object of the present invention may be achieved by sucha terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method withemployment of an IP transfer network wherein: in order to perform amultimedia IP communication between a first IP terminal and a second IPterminal, the first terminal transmits such an IP packet containing ahost name of the second IP terminal via a domain name server containedin a media router and a network node apparatus to a domain name servercontained in a integrated IP transfer network; the domain name servercontained in the integrated IP transfer network returns such an IPaddress corresponding to the host name of the second IP terminal in an1-to-1 correspondence relationship via the domain name server containedin the media router, or directly to the first IP terminal; when thefirst terminal sends out an IP packet to be transmitted to the second IPterminal, the IP packet reaches another network node apparatus connectedto said second IP terminal via the media router connected to said firstIP terminal and then the network node apparatus and more than onerouters inside the IP transfer network, so as to deliver the IP packetto said IP terminal via another media router through a communicationline and the domain name server is utilized.

Also, the above-explained object of the present invention may beachieved by such a terminal-to-terminal communication connection controlmethod with employment of an IP transfer network, wherein: in order toperform a telephone communication between a first dependent type IPtelephone set and a second dependent type IP telephone set, when ahandset of the first dependent type IP telephone set is taken up, suchan IP packet for notifying a telephone call is transmitted from thefirst dependent type IP telephone set; a first H323 termination unitinside a first media router detects the IP packet, and returns aresponse IP packet to the first dependent type IP telephone set; thefirst dependent type IP telephone set transmits an IP packet containingthe telephone number of the second dependent type IP telephone set viathe first H323 termination unit and reach a first domain name serverinside the first media router and a first network node apparatusconnected with the first media router via the communication line; thefirst network node apparatus transmits the IP packet to a second domainname server inside a integrated (IP transfer network; the second domainname server returns a second IP address corresponding to the telephonenumber of the first dependent type IP telephone set in an 1-to-1correspondence relationship via the first domain name server or withoutpassing through the first domain name server to the first H323termination unit; when a first IP address is a source IP address in an1-to-1 correspondence relationship with the first dependent type IPtelephone set and the first H323 termination unit generates and sends anIP packet with a destination IP address as being the second IP address,the IP packet passes through the second H323 termination unit, thesecond network node apparatus, the more than one router inside the IPtransfer network, the first network node apparatus and the first H323termination unit, and reaches the first dependent IP telephone set; whenthe first user hangs up a handset upon completion of telephonecommunication, an IP packet indicating the completion of telephonecommunication is generated/transmitted with a source IP address as beingthe first IP address and a destination IP address as being the second IPaddress; when [the IP packet] passes through the first H323 terminationunit, the first network node apparatus, the more than one router insidethe IP transfer network, the second network node apparatus and thesecond H323 termination unit, and reaches the second dependent IPtelephone set, thereby enabling the second user to acknowledge thecompletion of telephone communication;

when the second user hangs up the telephone set and an IP packet foracknowledgement of completed telephone communication is generated andsent with a source IP address as being the second IP address and adestination IP address as being the first IP address, the IP packetpasses through the second H323 termination unit, the second network nodeapparatus, the more than one router inside the IP transfer network andthe first network node apparatus, and reaches the first H323 terminationunit; when telephone communication is completed between the firstdependent type IP telephone set and the second dependent type IPtelephone set and an IP packet for transmitting the second dependenttype IP telephone set from the H323 termination unit, the IP packetpasses through the network node apparatus and the more than one routerinside the IP transfer network and reaches another network nodeapparatus connected to the second dependent type IP telephone set, andthe IP packet enters another media router via a communication linethereby enabling the same to reach the second dependent IP telephone setvia the H323 termination unit; the IP packet reaches another secondnetwork node apparatus connected to the second dependent IP telephoneset via the first network node apparatus and more than one routersinside the IP transfer network and arrives via the communication line ata second H323 termination unit which is inside another second router andconnected to the second type dependent type telephone set;

when a first user starts a telephone call, the first dependent IPtelephone set sends an IP packet containing a voice sound expressed indigital form with a source IP address as being the first IP address anda destination IP address as being the second IP address; the IP packetpasses through the first H323 termination unit, and reaches the seconddependent IP telephone set; and

when a second user causes a voice sound, the second dependent IPtelephone set sends an IP packet containing a voice sound expressed indigital form with a source address as being the second IP address and adestination IP address as being the first IP address.

The present invention is featured by that while an address managementtable is set to a network node apparatus employed in an IP transfernetwork, the means for registering an address of a terminal into thisaddress management table(refer to Japanese Patent Application No.128956/1999) is applied to the multicast technique, which will now bedescribed. As a network in which an IP transfer network isoperated/managed by a communication company, a network node apparatus isprovided in this IP transfer network. Since the IP addresses of the IPterminals are registered into the network node apparatus, the IP packettransmission by the multicast method with improving the informationsecurity performance can be realized. When such an IP packet containinga multicast IP address which is not yet registered into the network nodeapparatus is received, this received IP packet is discarded(IP addressfiltering operation).

Referring now to FIG. 19, both network node apparatus 1-11 to 1-14 androuters 1-15 to 1-20 are installed into an IP transfer network 1-10.These network node apparatus are directly connected to the routers byusing an IP communication line, or in directly connected to the routersvia the network node apparatus and the routers. IP terminals 1-21 to1-27 having an IP packet transmission/reception function are connectedto the network node apparatus by way of an IP communication line. An IPterminal does not directly allow the connection to the router. Thenetwork node apparatus 1-11 to 1-14 register thereinto at least an IPaddress among the IP terminal information about the IP terminalsconnected to the own node apparatus.

As a first IP packet acceptance check, a check is made as to whether ornot a destination IP address contained in a header of an external IPpacket which is entered into an IP transfer network is registered intothe address management table of the node apparatus. In the case that thedestination IP address is not registered, this IP packet is discarded.As a second IP packet acceptance check, a check is made as to whether ornot a transmission source IP address contained in a header of anexternal IP packet which is entered into an IP transfer network isregistered into the address management table of the node apparatus. Inthe case that the destination IP address is not registered, this IPpacket is discarded. As a first address registration check, while adestination multicast address is registered into the address managementtable of the network node apparatus, in such a case that a destinationmulticast address contained in a header of an external IP packet enteredinto the network node apparatus is not registered into the addressmanagement table, the network node apparatus discards the entered IPpacket. As a result, it is possible to avoid such a condition that anunexpected IP packet is mixed into the IP transfer network. Also, sincean address of a multicast transmission person is not allowed to beregistered into an address management table of a network node apparatusof a packet reception person, an ACK packet cannot pass through thenetwork node apparatus. The ACK packet is sent so as to confirm areception of an IP packet, and is directed from the multicast IP packetreception person to the multicast IP packet transmission person. As aconsequence, it is possible to prevent an occurrence of congestion ofthe IP transfer network, which is caused by ACK implosion of these ACKpackets.

Also, while an IP address of a router is not allowed to be registered asa destination address, a dangerous IP packet is not sent out from an IPtransfer network to a router of the IP transfer network. The dangerousIP packet may mistakenly rewrite a content of a multicast table.Alternatively, while an IP address of an operation management server formulticast operation provided in an IP transfer network is not allowed tobe registered, such an access operation from the IP transfer net workinto the operation management server employed in the IP transfer networkcannot be carried out, so that the information security performance canbe improved. As a second address registration check, a transmissionsource of an IP packet containing multicast data is limited, so that anoccurrence of unfair user can be suppressed. Also, in such a case thatunfair action is carried out, an IP packet transmission source can beeasily specified, so that the information security performance of the IPtransfer network can be improved.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

In the accompanying Drawings:

FIG. 1 is a block diagram for simply indicating a integrated IP transfernetwork;

FIG. 2 is a block diagram for explaining a relationship between aexchanger and a signal network;

FIG. 3 is a diagram for indicating an example of a signalling unit ofthe No. 7-common line signal system;

FIG. 4 is a flow chart for explaining a relationship between a exchangerand a signal network;

FIG. 5 is a flow chart for explaining a relationship between a exchangerand a signal network;

FIG. 6 is a flow chart for explaining a relationship between a exchangerand a signal network;

FIG. 7 is a flow chart for explaining a relationship between a exchangerand a signal network;

FIG. 8 is block structural diagram for indicating a basic function of agateway;

FIG. 9 is a diagram for representing an example of call control datacontained in an IP packet;

FIG. 10 is a diagram for showing an example of voice data contained inan IP packet;

FIG. 11 is a diagram for showing an example of image data contained inan IP packet;

FIG. 12 is a block diagram for indicating a basic idea of a integratedinformation communication network;

FIG. 13 is a block diagram for indicating a basic idea of a integratedinformation communication network;

FIG. 14 is a block diagram for indicating a basic idea of a integratedinformation communication network;

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining operation of the integratedinformation communication network;

FIG. 16 is a block diagram for showing a structural example of amulticast IP transfer network;

FIG. 17 shows an example of a multicast table used in the multicast IPtransfer network;

FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a terminal-to-terminal communicationconnection control method of an IP transfer network to which the commonline communication signal system is applied;

FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram for describing a structure of amanagement type IP network for registering terminals according to thepresent invention;

FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram for showing a node of an IP transfernetwork directed to the present invention;

FIG. 21 is an auxiliary diagram for explaining a function of a mediarouter disclosed as a first embodiment of the present invention, and afunction of a gateway disclosed as a second embodiment;

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining one mode of an IPpacket used to describe the functions of the media router/gatewaysaccording to the first embodiment and the second embodiment of thepresent invention;

FIG. 23 is an auxiliary diagram for schematically representing anarrangement of the media router according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention, and for explaining operation sequence of this mediarouter;

FIG. 24 is an auxiliary diagram for schematically representing anarrangement of the media router according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention, and for explaining operation sequence of this mediarouter;

FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining an address management tablecontained in a network node apparatus according to the first embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP terminal-to-terminal communications;

FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP terminal-to-terminal communications;

FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP terminal-to-terminal communications;

FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP terminal-to-terminal communications;

FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication.

FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining a mode of an IP packet appearing intwo IP telephones communication;

FIG. 47 is a diagram for showing an example of a media router conditiontable provided in the media router;

FIG. 48 is a block diagram for representing a conceptional structure ofan independent type telephone set;

FIG. 49 is a block diagram for representing a conceptional structure ofan independent type IP voice/image apparatus;

FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication in the firstembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication in the firstembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram for explaining a RAS management of themedia router in the first embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 68 is an auxiliary diagram for schematically showing a structure ofa gateway according to a second embodiment of the present invention, andfor explaining operation sequence of this gateway;

FIG. 69 is an auxiliary diagram for schematically showing a structure ofa gateway according to a second embodiment of the present invention, andfor explaining operation sequence of this gateway;

FIG. 70 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 71 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 72 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication in the secondembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 74 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 75 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 76 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 77 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 78 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 79 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 80 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 81 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 82 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 83 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 84 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 85 is a diagram for describing another embodiment mode of an IPpacket appearing in two IP telephone sets communication;

FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining another address management tableemployed in the network node apparatus according to the secondembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 87 is a description example of a gateway condition table in thesecond embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram for showing an arrangement of a mediarouter mounted inside a CATV system according to a third embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining a method of connecting various sortsof terminals by using a wireless terminal storage apparatus and agateway apparatus according to a fourth embodiment of the presentinvention;

FIG. 90 is a block diagram for indicating a structural example of agateway according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 91 is a block diagram for showing a structural diagram in the caseof employing a telephone communication control server in a sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 92 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 93 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 94 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 95 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 96 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 97 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 98 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 99 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 100 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 101 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 102 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 103 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 104 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 105 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 106 is a flow chart for explaining operations of the sixthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 107 is a flow chart for explaining a sixth embodiment(releasephase) of the present invention;

FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining a sixth embodiment(onecommunication company) of the present invention;

FIG. 109 is a flow chart for explaining the sixth embodiment of thepresent invention;

FIG. 110 is a flow chart for explaining the sixth embodiment of thepresent invention;

FIG. 111 is a diagram for indication an example of a communicationcompany segment table of telephone numbers;

FIG. 112 is a diagram for representing an example of a telephonemanagement server segment table of telephone numbers;

FIG. 113 is a block diagram for indicating a structural example of amedia router according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the seventh embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 115 is a block diagram for representing an arrangement of an eighthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 116 is a flow chart for showing an operation example of the eighthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the eighth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the eighth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 119 is a flow chart for indicating an operation example of theeighth embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the eighth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the eighth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the eighth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sixth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the eighth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sixth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the eighth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the eighth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining an eighth embodiment(anotherexample of media router) of the present invention;

FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the eighth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the eighth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the eighth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram for indicating an internal portion of amedia router, and a connection condition of IP terminal and LAN,connected to this media router;

FIG. 133 is a diagram for indicating an example of a calling priorityorder control management table;

FIG. 134 is a diagram for indicating an example of a calling priorityorder control management table;

FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining a ninth embodiment of the presentinvention;

FIG. 136 is a block diagram for indicating an arrangement of the ninthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 137 is a flow chart for explaining an operation example of theninth embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ninth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 139 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ninth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ninth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ninth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 142 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ninth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 143 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ninth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ninth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 145 is a block diagram for indicating an arrangement of the tenthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 146 is a flow chart for explaining an operation example of thetenth embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 157 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 171 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 172 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 173 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 178 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 179 is a flow diagram for showing an operation example of the tenthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 180 is a flow diagram for showing an operation example of the tenthembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 181 is a flow chart for describing an operation example(TCP-IAM) ofthe tenth embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 182 is a flow chart for explaining an operation example(TCP-ACM) ofthe tenth embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 183 is a flow chart for describing an operation example(TCP-CPG) ofthe tenth embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 184 is a flow chart for explaining an operation example(TCP-ANM) ofthe tenth embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 185 is a flow chart for describing an operation example(TCP-REL) ofthe tenth embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 186 is a flow chart for explaining an operation example(TCP-RLC) ofthe tenth embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 187 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 188 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 192 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 193 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 197 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tenth embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 198 is a block diagram for showing an arrangement of an 11-thembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 199 is a flow chart for showing operations of the 11-th embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 200 is a flow chart for showing operations of the 11th embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 201 is a flow chart for showing operations of the 11th embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 202 is a block diagram for showing an arrangement of a 12-thembodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 12th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 204 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 12th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 205 is a flow chart for showing operations of the 12th embodimentof the present invention.

FIG. 206 is a flow chart for showing operations of the 12th embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 207 is a flow chart for showing operations of the 12th embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 208 is a flow chart for showing operations of the 12th embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 209 is a flow chart for showing operations of the 12th embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 210 is a flow chart for showing operations of the 12th embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 211 is a flow chart for showing operations of the 12th embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 212 is a flow chart for showing operations of the 12th embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 213 is a flow chart for showing operations of the 12th embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 214 is a block diagram for showing a 13-th embodiment of thepresent invention;

FIG. 215 is a flow chart for describing an operation example of the13-th embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 216 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 217 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 218 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 219 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 221 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 222 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 223 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 224 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 225 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 226 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 227 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 228 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 229 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13-th embodimentof the present invention;

FIG. 230 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 231 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 233 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 234 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 235 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 236 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 237 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 238 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 239 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 240 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 241 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 242 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 243 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 244 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 245 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 246 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 247 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 248 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 13th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 249 is a block diagram for showing a 14-th embodiment of thepresent invention;

FIG. 250 is a flow chart for describing an operation example of the14-th embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 251 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 252 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 253 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 254 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 255 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 256 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 257 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 258 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 259 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 260 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 261 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 262 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 263 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 264 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 265 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 266 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 267 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 268 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 269 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 270 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 271 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 272 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 273 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14-th embodimentof the present invention.

FIG. 274 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 275 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 276 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 14th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 277 is a block diagram for showing a 15-th embodiment of thepresent invention;

FIG. 278 is a flow chart for describing an operation example of the15-th embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 279 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 280 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 281 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 282 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 283 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 284 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 285 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 286 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 287 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 288 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 289 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 290 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 291 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 292 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 293 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 294 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 295 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 296 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 297 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 298 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 299 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 300 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 301 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 302 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 303 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 304 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 15th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 305 is a block diagram for showing a 16-th embodiment of thepresent invention;

FIG. 306 is a flow chart for describing an operation example of the16-th embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 307 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 16th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 308 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 16th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 309 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 16th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 310 is a part of a block diagram for showing a 17-th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 311 is a part of a block diagram for showing a 17-th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 312 is a part of a block diagram for showing a 17-th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 313 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 314 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 315 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 316 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 317 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 318 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 319 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 320 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 321 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 322 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 323 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 324 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 325 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 326 is a part of a diagram for explaining the address managementtable in the 17-th embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 327 is a part of a diagram for explaining the address managementtable in the 17-th embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 328 is a part of a diagram for explaining the address managementtable in the 17-th embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 329 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 330 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 331 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 332 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 333 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 334 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 335 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 336 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 337 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 17th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 338 is a part of a block diagram for showing the 18th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 339 is a part of a block diagram for showing the 18th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 340 is a part of a block diagram for showing the 18th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 341 is a part of a block diagram for showing the 18th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 342 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 18th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 343 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 18th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 344 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 18th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 345 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 18th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 346 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 18th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 347 is a part of a block diagram for showing a 19-th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 348 is a part of a block diagram for showing a 19-th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 349 is a part of a block diagram for showing a 19-th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 350 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 19th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 351 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 19th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 352 is a block diagram for showing a 20-th embodiment of thepresent invention;

FIG. 353 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 20th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 354 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 20th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 355 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 20th embodiment ofthe present invention;

FIG. 356 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the present invention;

FIG. 357 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the present invention;

FIG. 358 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the present invention;

FIG. 359 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the present invention;and

FIG. 360 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the present invention.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS

It should be understood that both the IP-capsulation operation and theIP-inverse-capsulation operation, which are explained in the embodimentof the present invention, may be replaced by both a capsulationoperation and an inverse-capsulation operation executed in a layer lowerthan the communication layer-3 layers, for instance, may be substitutedby both a capsulation operation and an inverse-capsulation operation bya header of an optical HDLC-frame of the communication layer-2 layers.Furthermore, an internal address of a transmission source is notcontained in a header which is applied in a capsulation operation and aninverse-capsulation operation. In other words, both a simple capsulationoperation and a simple inverse-capsulation operation may be realized towhich a simple header is applied. It should also be noted that similarlyin this simple capsulation operation, an address administration tablehaving the same function is employed, which is used in the capsulationoperation and the inverse-capsulation operation. Referring now to FIG.357, the simple capsulation operation will be described.

In this drawing, block 2300 indicates an IP communication network;reference numerals 2301, 2302, 2303, 2304, 2305 denote network nodeapparatus; reference numerals 2301-1, 2302-1, 2303-1, 2304-1, 2305-1show address administration tables; and reference numerals 2301-1,2301-3, 2302-2, 2302-3, 2303-2, 2303-3, 2304-2, 2304-3 representcontents(logic terminals) between termination units of communicationlines and the network node apparatus. Internal addresses “IA1”, “IA2”,“IA3”, “IA4”, “IA5”, “IA6”, “IA7”, “IA8” are applied to these logicterminals. Reference numerals 2306-1 to 2306-9 show IP terminals havingfunctions for transmitting/receiving IP packets, and own external IPaddresses “EA1” to “EA9”. Reference numerals 2307-1 to 2307-4 shownrouters. The above-explained network node apparatus and routers aredirectly connected via a communication line to each other, or areindirectly connected via routers to each other. The terminals areconnected via a communication line to the network node apparatus. In thedescription of FIG. 357, only an IP header portion is described as aheader portion of an IP, and other items are omitted.

In the case that the terminal 2306-1 transmits such a IP packet 2310whose transmission source address is equal to “EA1” and whosedestination address is equal to “EA3” and also the network nodeapparatus 2301 receives an IP packet 2310, the network node apparatus2301 confirms such a fact that an internal address applied to a logicterminal of a terminal of a communication line into which the IP packet2310 is entered is equal to “IA1”, and furthermore, a destinationexternal IP address of the IP packet 2310 is equal to “EA3”. Then, thenetwork node apparatus 2301 retrieves a content of the addressadministration table 2301-1, and also retrieves a record containing suchaddresses that an internal IP address of a transmission sourcecorresponds to “IA1” in the beginning, and subsequently, an externaldestination IP address corresponds to “EA3”. Furthermore, the networknode apparatus 2301 checks as to whether or not the transmission sourceexternal IP address “EA1” contained in the IP packet 2310 is included inthe above-detected record.

In this example, a record of a first column of the addressadministration table 2301-1 from a top column is equal to “EA1, EA3,IA1, IA3”. While using the address of “IA3” present in this record, asimple header is applied to the IP packet 2310 so as to form an internalpacket 2313 (namely, simple capsulation operation). It should be notedthat the simple header does not contain the transmission source internaladdress “IA1”. The formed internal packet 2313 is reached via therouters 2307-1 and 2307-2 to the network node apparatus 2302. Thenetwork node apparatus 2302 removes the simple header of the receivedinternal packet 2313 (simple inverse-capsulation operation), and sendsout the acquired external IP packet 2317 (having the same content of IPpacket 2310) to the communication line. Then, the IP terminal 2306-3receives this IP packet 2317. It should also be noted that the record“EA3, EA1, IA3, IA1” of the first column of the address administrationtable 2302-1 is used so as to transfer the IP packet by employing amethod similar to the above-described method along a direction oppositeto the above-explained direction.

When the simple capsulation operation is carried out in the network nodeapparatus 2301, such a checking operation may be omitted. That is, thenetwork node apparatus 2301 checks as to whether or not the transmissionsource external IP address “EA1” contained in the IP packet 2310 isincluded in the detected record within the address administration table2301-1. In such a case of the above-explained checking operation of theIP address “EA1”, the respective records of the address administrationtable 2301-1 can be made excluding the transmission source external IPaddress. Furthermore, with respect to two external IP addresses(namely,transmission source IP address and destination IP address) contained ineach of the records of the address administration table 2301-1, such asimple capsulation technical method which is made based upon a similarprinciple idea to an address mask technical method (will be discussedlater) may be applied.

A description will now be made of another example where an IP packet istransferred.

In the case that the terminal 2306-5 transmits such an IP packet 2312whose transmission source address is equal to “EA5” and whosedestination address is equal to “EA4” and also the network nodeapparatus 2303 receives an IP packet 2312, the network node apparatus2303 confirms such a fact that an internal address applied to a logicterminal of a terminal of a communication line into which the IP packet2312 is entered is equal to “IA5”, and furthermore, a destinationexternal IP address of the IP packet 2312 is equal to “EA4”. Then, thenetwork node apparatus 2303 retrieves a content of the addressadministration table 2303-1, and also retrieves such a record that thetransmission source internal IP address is equal to “IA5” in thebeginning. In this case, a record “Mask7, EA7x, IA5, IA7” of a firstcolumn of the address administration table 2303-1 from a top columncorresponds to a record “Mask4, EA4x, IA5, IA4” of a second column ofthis address administration table. As to the record of the first column,the network node apparatus 2303 checks as to whether or not a result of“AND”-gating operation between the mask “Mask7” and the destinationexternal IP address “EA4” contained in the external IP packet 2312 ismade coincident with the destination external IP address “EA7x”contained in the record of the first column (refer to below-mentionedformula (4)). In this case, the “AND”-gating result is not madecoincident with the destination external IP address “EA7x”. Next, as tothe record of the second column, the network node apparatus 2303 checksas to whether or not a result of “AND”-gating operation between thedestination external IP mask “Mask4” and the destination external IPaddress “EA4” contained in the external IP packet 2312 is madecoincident with the destination external IP address “EA4x” contained inthe record of the second column (refer to below-mentioned formula (5)).In this case, this “AND”-gating result is made coincident with thedestination external IP address “EA4x”.If (“Mask7” and “EA4”=“EA7x”)  (4)If (“Mask4” and “EA4”=“EA4x”)  (5)

In this example, a record of a second column of the addressadministration table 2303-1 from a top column is equal to “Mask4, EA4x,IA5, IA4”. While using the address of “IA4” present in this record, asimple header is applied to the IP packet 2312 so as to form an internalpacket 2314 (namely, simple capsulation operation). It should be notedthat the simple header does not contain the transmission source internaladdress “IA5”. The formed internal packet 2314 is reached via therouters 2307-3, 2307-4 and 2307-2 to the network node apparatus 2302.The network node apparatus 2302 removes the simple header of thereceived internal packet 2314 (simple inverse-capsulation operation),and sends out the acquired external IP packet 2318 (having the samecontent of IP packet 2312) to the communication line. Then, the IPterminal 2306-4 receives this IP packet 2318.

Next, in the network node apparatus 2301-1, an IP packet 2311 which issent from the terminal 2306-2 to the terminal 2306-7 issimple-capsulated in a capsulation manner similar to the above-explainedcapsulation manner by employing a record “EA2, EA7, IA2, IA7” of asecond column of the address administration table 2301-1 so as to becomean internal capsule 2316. This internal capsule 2316 is reached via therouters 2307-1, 2307-2 and 2307-4 to the network node apparatus 2304.This network node apparatus 2304 removes the simple header of thereceived internal packet 2316 (namely, simple reverse-capsulationoperation), and then sends out the acquired external IP packet 2319(having the same content of IP packet 2311) to the communication line,and the IP terminal 2306-7 receives this IP packet 2319.

It should also be understood that the above-explained address masktechnical method has a similar basic idea to that of the address masktechnical method as explained with reference to FIG. 351. As anotherexample of the capsulation operation and the inverse-capsulationoperation by employing the simple header, the known MPLS label by way ofthe MPLS technical method may be utilized. In this example, while theMPLS label contains the destination internal address, the MPLS labeldoes not contain the transmission source internal address.

Next, in the network node apparatus 2305, the IP packet 2321 sent outfrom the terminal 2306-9 to the terminal 2306-8 undergoes a simpleencapsulation using the record “Msk8, EA8y, IA8” in the second line ofthe address management table 2305-1 according to a method similar tothat of the above-mentioned case thereby to become an internal capsule2322, which goes through the router 2307-4 and then reaches the networknode apparatus 2304. The network node apparatus 2304 removes the simpleheader of the received internal packet 2322 (simple decapsulation), andthen sends out the external IP packet 2323 (having the same contents ofthe IP packet 2321) obtained as described above onto the communicationline. The IP terminal 2306-8 then receives the IP packet 2319.

FIG. 358 shows the form of an internal packet(referred to also as aninternal frame) formed in the above-mentioned simple encapsulation. Theinternal packet has a form in which a simple header is added to anexternal IP packet. The simple header includes a destination internaladdress and an information region, but does not include a transmissionsource internal address. The information region includes theinformation(protocol and the like) concerning the payload region of theinternal packet. Another embodiment of the above-mentioned simpleencapsulation and decapsulation is described below with reference toFIGS. 359 and 360. In the figure, reference numerals 2351-1 to 2351-7indicate IP transfer networks. Reference numerals 2352-1 to 2352-7indicate terminals having an external IP address “EA1”. Referencenumerals 2353-1 to 2353-7 indicate terminals having an external IPaddress “EA2”. Reference numerals 2354-1 to 2354-7 indicate internalpackets (internal frames). Reference numerals 2355-1 to 2355-7 and2356-1 to 2356-7 indicate network node apparatuses. Each referencenumeral 2359-1 to 2359-7 indicates a connection point(logical terminal)between a communication line and a network node apparatus, and aninternal IP address “IA1” is assigned. Each reference numeral 2360-1 to2360-7 indicates a connection point(logical terminal) between acommunication line and a network node apparatus, and an internal IPaddress “IA2” is assigned. Reference numerals 2357-1 to 2357-7 and2358-1 to 2358-7 indicate address administration tables. Each terminaland each network node apparatus are interconnected by a communicationline, and so are each network node apparatus and the other terminals. AnIP packet is transmitted and received between each terminal and eachnetwork node apparatus, while an above-mentioned internalpacket(internal frame) is transferred between the network nodeapparatuses.

The terminal 2352-1 transmits an IP packet having a transmission sourceaddress “EA1” and a destination address “EA2”. On receiving the IPpacket, the network node apparatus 2355-1 confirms that the internaladdress assigned to the logical terminal at the termination end of thecommunication line to which the IP packet is inputted is “IA1”, and thatthe destination external IP address of the IP packet is “EA2”. Thenetwork node apparatus then searches the inside of the addressadministration table 2357-1 thereby to find a record having firstly thetransmission source internal IP address “IA1” and secondly thedestination external IP address “EA2”. In this example, this is therecord “EA2, IA1, IA2” in the first line of the address administrationtable 2357-1. By using the address “IA2” within the record, a simpleheader is added to the IP packet, whereby an internal packet 2354-1 isformed (simple encapsulation). The formed internal packet 2354-1 goesthrough the communication line and then reaches the network nodeapparatus 2356-1. The network node apparatus 2356-1 removes the simpleheader of the received internal packet 2354-1 (simple decapsulation),and then sends out the obtained external IP packet to the communicationline. The IP terminal 2353-1 then receives the restored IP packet.

The terminal 2352-2 transmits an IP packet having a transmission sourceaddress “EA1” and a destination address “EA2”. On receiving the IPpacket, regardless of the internal address assigned to the logicalterminal at the termination end of the communication line to which theIP packet is inputted, the network node apparatus 2355-2 confirms thatthe transmission source external IP address of the IP packet is “EA1”,and that the destination external IP address is “EA2”. The network nodeapparatus then searches the inside of the address administration table2357-2. In this example, the result is the record “EA1, EA2, IA2” in thefirst line of the address administration table 2357-2. By using theaddress “IA2” within the record, a simple header is added to the IPpacket, whereby an internal packet 2354-2 is formed(simpleencapsulation). The formed internal packet 2354-2 goes through thecommunication line and then reaches the network node apparatus 2356-2.The network node apparatus 2356-2 removes the simple header of thereceived internal packet 2354-1 (simple decapsulation), and then sendsout the obtained external IP packet to the communication line. The IPterminal 2353-2 then receives the restored IP packet.

The terminal 2352-3 transmits an IP packet having a transmission sourceaddress “EA1” and a destination address “EA2”. On receiving the IPpacket, regardless of the internal address assigned to the logicalterminal at the termination end of the communication line to which theIP packet is inputted, the network node apparatus 2355-3 confirms thatthe destination external IP address of the IP packet is “EA2”. Thenetwork node apparatus then searches the inside of the addressadministration table 2357-1 thereby to find a record having thedestination external IP address “EA2”. In this example, the result isthe record “EA2, IA2” in the first line of the address administrationtable 2357-1. By using the address “IA2” within the record, a simpleheader is added to the IP packet, whereby an internal packet 2354-3 isformed(simple encapsulation). The formed internal packet 2354-3 goesthrough the communication line and then reaches the network nodeapparatus 2356-3. The network node apparatus 2356-1 removes the simpleheader of the received internal packet 2354-3 (simple decapsulation),and then sends out the obtained external IP packet to the communicationline. The IP terminal 2353-3 then receives the IP packet.

The terminal 2352-4 transmits an IP packet having a transmission sourceaddress “EA1” and a destination address “EA2”. On receiving the IPpacket, the network node apparatus 2355-4 confirms that the internaladdress assigned to the logical terminal at the termination end of thecommunication line to which the IP packet is input is “IA1”, and thatthe destination external IP address of the IP packet is “EA2”. Thenetwork node apparatus then searches the inside of the addressadministration table 2357-4 thereby to find a record having firstly thetransmission source internal IP address “IA1”. In this example, theresult is the record “Msk1, EA1x, Msk2, EA2x, IA1, IA2” in the firstline of the address administration table 2357-4. The network nodeapparatus checks first whether the result of the “and” operation betweenthe mask “Msk2” of the record in the first line and the destinationexternal IP address “EA2” of the input external IP packet coincides withthe destination external IP address “EA2x” of the record in the firstline or not(the following equation (6)), and further checks whether theresult of the “and” operation between the transmission source externalIP mask “Msk1” and the transmission source external IP address “EA1” inthe external IP packet coincides with the destination external IPaddress “EA1x” in the record or not (the following equation (7)). Theycoincide in this case.If (“Msk2” and “EA2”=“EA2x”)  (6)If (“Msk1” and “EA1”=“EA1x”)  (7)In this example, it is the above-mentioned record in the first line ofthe address administration table 2357-4. By using the address “IA2”within the record, a simple header is added to the IP packet, whereby aninternal packet 2354-4 is formed (simple encapsulation). The formedinternal packet 2354-4 goes through the communication line and thenreaches the network node apparatus 2356-4. The network node apparatus2356-4 removes the simple header of the received internal packet 2354-4(simple decapsulation), and then sends out the obtained external IPpacket to the communication line. The IP terminal 2353-4 then receivesthe IP packet.

The case that the terminal 2352-5 transmits an IP packet having atransmission source address “EA1” and a destination address “EA2” andthat the network node apparatus 2355-5 receives the IP packet is similarto the case that the terminal 2352-4 transmits the IP packet having atransmission source address “EA1” and a destination address “EA2”. Thepoint of difference is not to carry out the “and” operation between thedestination external IP mask and the destination external IP address inthe external IP packet. The other points are the same.

The case that the terminal 2352-6 transmits an IP packet having atransmission source address “EA1” and a destination address “EA2” andthat the network node apparatus 2355-6 receives the IP packet is similarto the case that the terminal 2352-4 transmits the IP packet having atransmission source address “EA1” and a destination address “EA2”. Thepoint of difference is not to carry out the confirmation on the internaladdress assigned to the logical terminal at the termination end of thecommunication line to which the IP packet is inputted. The other pointsare the same.

The case that the terminal 2352-7 transmits an IP packet having atransmission source address “EA1” and a destination address “EA2” andthat the network node apparatus 2355-7 receives the IP packet is similarto the case that the terminal 2352-5 transmits the IP packet having atransmission source address “EA1” and a destination address “EA2”. Thepoint of difference is not to carry out the confirmation on the internaladdress assigned to the logical terminal at the termination end of thecommunication line to which the IP packet is inputted. The other pointsare the same.

In accordance with the present invention, the terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control method applicable to IP transfernetworks may be realized, while combining several functions with eachother, or changing some functions, which are disclosed in JapanesePatent Application No. 128956/1999 filed by the Applicant, theline(circuit) connecting method of the No. 7-common line signal system,“JT-H323 gateway standardized by ITU-T recommendation H323 ANNEX D”,“SIP telephone protocol”, and the embodiment-36 of Japanese Patent No.3084681-B2. Furthermore, while a media router, a gateway, and an IPnetwork service operation/management server are conducted, thearrangements and the operation sequences of the media router and thegateway are concretely defined; modes of IP packets used interminal-to-terminal communications with employment of the media routerand the gateway are concretely defined; and also the functions whichshould be owned by the IP network service operation/management serversare concretely defined.

In accordance with Japanese Patent Application No. 128956/1999, theintegrated IP transfer network contains a plurality of IP transfernetworks. In other words, the integrated IP transfer network contains atleast two, or more networks of the IP data network, the IP telephonenetwork, the IP voice/image network (IP audio/visual network), the besteffort network, the IP data multicast network, the IP base TV broadcastnetwork, and the network node apparatus. The network node apparatus isconnected via the communication line to any one, or more of the IPtransfer networks. On the other hand, the network node apparatusterminal of the network node apparatus is connected via thecommunication line to the terminal externally provided with theintegrated IP transfer network.

In the present invention, an integrated IP transfer network containsthereinto one, or more gateways. Alternatively, the integrated IPtransfer network is directly connected via a communication lineconnected to a network node apparatus to one, or more media routers,otherwise, is indirectly connected to a media router provided inside aLAN. Both a gateway and a media router correspond to one sort of such arouter having a function that an IP terminal, an IP telephone set, an IPvoice/image(audio/visual) apparatus, and the like are directly connectedto the router so as to be stored thereinto. While either the gateway orthe media router, and a domain name server provided inside theintegrated IP transfer network, are employed, a connection control ofterminal-to-terminal communications is carried out by employing an IPtransfer network among terminals. In order that terminals areregistered/recorded into the IP transfer network, at least addresses ofthese terminals are recorded/saved in an address management tableemployed in the network node apparatus, or in the domain name serverinstalled in the IP transfer network. Also, an IP network serviceoperation/management server is provided in each of the IP transfernetworks. This IP network service operation/management server isprovided so as to manage resources of network in a batch mode everycommunication industry. As the network resources, there areoperation/management of the IP transfer network, services provided bythe IP transfer networks, the routers, and communication lines.

The sort of the above-explained IP service operation/management serversmay be determined with respect to each of the various IP transfernetworks. For instance, an IP data service operation/managementserver(DNS) for managing IP data communications in a batch mode may beinstalled inside the IP data network. Also, an IP telephone serviceoperation/management server(TES) for managing telephone communicationsin a batch mode may be installed inside the IP telephone network. Also,an IP voice/image service operation/management server(AVS) for managingvoice/image communications in a batch mode may be installed inside theIP voice/image network. A best effort service operation/managementserver(BES) for managing best effort communications in a batch mode maybe installed inside a best effort network. An IP data multicast serviceoperation/management server(DMS) for managing IP data multicastcommunications in a batch mode may be installed inside an IP datamulticast network. Further, an IP base TV broadcast serviceoperation/management server(TVS) for managing IP base TV broadcastingoperations in a batch mode may be installed in an IP base TV broadcastnetwork. It should be understood that a service operation/managementserver provided in each of the IP transfer networks may be subdividedinto a network service server and a network operation/management server.The network service server mainly manages network services provided bythe respective IP transfer networks, whereas the networkoperation/management server mainly manages resources of a network.

Referring now to drawings, various embodiments of the present inventionwill be described.

1. First Embodiment Using Media Router

In FIG. 20, reference numeral 2 shows an integrated IP transfer network,reference numeral 3 indicates an IP data network, reference numeral 4represents an IP telephone network, reference numeral 5-1 denotes an IPvoice/image network, reference numeral 5-2 shows a best effort network,reference numeral 6-1 indicates a range of an IP transfer networkoperated/managed by a communication company “X”, and reference numeral6-2 represents a range of an IP transfer network operated/managed by acommunication company “Y”. Also, reference numerals 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4,8-1, 8-2, 8-3 and 8-4 show a network node apparatus, respectively.Reference numerals 9-1 and 9-2 represent gateways. Reference numerals10-1 to 10-8 show communication lines, reference numerals 11-1 to 11-10denote IP terminals, reference numerals 12-1 and 12-2 show independenttype IP telephone sets, and reference numerals 13-1 to 13-4 representdependent type IP telephone sets. Further, reference numerals 16-1 to16-4 represent dependent type IP voice/image apparatus.

The network node apparatus is connected to any of the IP transfernetworks via a communication line. In other words, the network nodeapparatus is connected to one, or more networks of the IP data network3, the IP telephone network 4, the IP voice/image network 5-1 and thebest effort network 5-2. On the other hand, the network node apparatusis connected via the communication lines 10-1 to 10-8 to the IPterminals 11-1 and 11-2, the independent type IP telephone sets 12-1 and12-2, the media routers 14-1 and 14-2, and the LANs 15-1 and 15-2. TheIP terminals are installed outside the integrated IP transfer network.The media routers 14-3 and 14-4 are installed inside the LAN 15-1 andthe LAN 15-2, and are indirectly connected to the network nodeapparatus. The media routers 14-1 to 14-4 are directly connected to thedependent type IP telephone sets 13-1, 13-2, 13-4; the dependent type IPvoice/image apparatuses 16-1, 16-2, 16-3; and analog telephone sets 18-1to 18-4 so as to store thereinto them. Other analog telephone sets 18-5and 18-6 are connected via public switched telephone networks 26-1 and26-2 to the gateways 9-1 and 9-2. The gateway 9-1 is connected via acommunication line to the network node apparatus 8-4, and the gateway9-2 is connected via a communication line to the network node apparatus7-4.

Reference numerals 19-1 to 19-19 show routers which transfer IP packets,and reference numerals 26-1 and 26-2 represent public switched telephonenetworks (will be referred to as a “PSTN” hereinafter). The media router14-1 is connected via the communication line 10-1 to the network nodeapparatus 8-2, the media router 14-2 is connected via the communicationline 10-5 to the network node apparatus 7-2, the LAN 15-1 is connectedvia the communication line 10-3 to the network node apparatus 8-4, andthe LAN 15-2 is connected via the communication line 10-7 to the networknode apparatus 7-4.

The analog telephone set 18-5 is connected to the network node apparatus8-4 via the telephone line 17-3, the public switched telephone network26-1, the telephone line 17-1 and the gateway 9-1. Similarly, the analogtelephone set 18-6 is connected to the network node apparatus 7-4 viathe telephone line 17-4, the public switched telephone network 26-2, thetelephone line 17-2 and the gateway 9-2. The media router 14-1 containsa router 20-3, a connection control unit 22-1, an H323 termination unit23-1 and an SCN interface 24-1. The router 20-3 is connected to theconnection control unit 22-1. The connection control unit 22-1 isconnected to the H323 termination unit 23-1. The H323 termination unit23-1 is connected to the SCN interface. Similarly, the media router 14-2contains a router 20-4, a connection control unit 22-2, an H323termination unit 23-2 and an SCN interface 24-2.

The router 20-1 provided inside the LAN 15-1 is connected via thecommunication line 10-3 to the network node apparatus 8-4. The LAN 15-1is connected via a LAN communication line such as the Ethernet to boththe IP terminal 11-4 and the media router 14-3. Also, the media router14-3 is connected via the communication line to the IP terminal 11-5,the dependent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-2, and the analogtelephone set 18-2, respectively. Similarly, the router 20-2 providedinside the LAN 15-2 is connected via the communication line 10-7 to thenetwork node apparatus 7-4. The LAN 15-2 is connected via a LANcommunication line such as the Ethernet to both the IP terminal 11-8 andthe media router 14-4. Also, the media router 14-4 is connected via thecommunication line to the IP terminal 11-9, the dependent type IPtelephone set 13-4 and the analog telephone set 18-4, respectively.

Reference numerals 21-1 to 21-5 show routers which transfer IP packetsbetween the range 6-1 managed by the communication company “X” and therange 6-2 managed by the communication company “Y”. Also, referencenumerals 27-1 and 27-2 show ATM (asynchronous transfer mode) networks,reference numeral 27-3 indicates an optical communication network, andreference numeral 27-4 denotes a frame relay(FR) switching network,which are employed as a high speed main line network used to transfer anIP packet, respectively. It should also be noted that the ATM network,the optical communication network and the frame relay switching networkmay be employed as any of elements of sub-IP networks employed in theintegrated IP transfer network.

The IP data service operation/management server 35-1, the IP telephoneservice operation/management server 36-1, the IP voice/image serviceoperation server 37-1, and the best effort service operation/managementserver 38-1 are managed by the communication company “X”, respectively,and are provided within the range 6-1 of the network which is managed bythe communication company “X”. Also, the IP data serviceoperation/management server 35-2, the IP telephone serviceoperation/management server 36-2, the IP voice/image service operationserver 37-2 and the best effort service operation/management server 38-2are managed by the communication company “Y”, respectively, and areprovided within the range 6-2 of the network which is managed by thecommunication company “Y”.

Various sorts of multimedia terminals which are connected via thecommunication lines outside the integrated IP transfer network 2,namely, an IP telephone set and an IP voice/image apparatus can bespecified as to internal location positions of the integrated IPtransfer network 2 by using host names as addresses for identifyingmultimedia terminals in a similar manner to other IP terminals. The hostnames of the IP terminals and of the multimedia terminals are similar tohost names of computers used in the Internet. These host names may beapplied in correspondence with IP addresses applied to the respective IPterminals and multimedia terminals. In accordance with the presentinvention, telephone numbers which are applied to IP telephone sets andIP voice/image apparatus are employed as the host names of the IPtelephone sets and the IP voice/image apparatus.

A domain name server(will be referred to as a “DNS” hereinafter) holdsinformation as to a one-to-one correspondence relationship between ahost name and an IP address. A major function of the domain name serveris given as follows: When a host name is provided, an IP address isanswered. The major function owns a similar function used in theInternet.

With respect to the IP terminals 11-3, 11-1, 11-4, 11-6 and the like,which are employed in the IP data network connected to the network nodeapparatus managed by the communication company “X”, a domain name server30-1 dedicated to the IP data network holds information as to aone-to-one correspondence relationship among host names and IPaddresses, which are applied to the respective terminals. Also, withrespect to the IP terminals 11-7, 11-2, 11-8 and the like, which areemployed in the IP data network connected to the network node apparatusmanaged by the communication company “Y”, a domain name server 30-4dedicated to the IP data network holds information as to a one-to-onecorrespondence relationship among host names and IP addresses, which areapplied to the respective terminals.

With respect to the dependent type IP telephone sets 13-1, 13-3, and theanalog telephone sets 18-1, 18-2, 18-5, which are employed in the IPtelephone network connected to the network node apparatus managed by thecommunication company “x”, a domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IPtelephone network holds information as to a one-to-one correspondencerelationship among host names(telephone numbers) and IP addresses, whichare applied to the telephone sets. Also, with respect to the dependenttype IP telephone set 13-2 and the analog telephone sets 18-3, 18-4,18-6, which are employed in the IP telephone network connected to thenetwork node apparatus managed by the communication company “Y” a domainname server 31-2 dedicated to the IP telephone network holds informationas to a one-to-one correspondence relationship among hostnames(telephone numbers) and IP addresses, which are applied to thesetelephone sets.

With respect to the dependent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-1 and theindependent type IP voice/image apparatus 12-3, which are employed inthe IP voice/image network connected to the network node apparatusmanaged by the communication company “X”, a domain name server 32-1dedicated to the voice/image network holds information as to aone-to-one correspondence relationship among host names(numbers of IPvoice/image apparatus) and IP addresses, which are applied to the IPvoice/image apparatus. Also, with respect to the dependent type IPvoice/image apparatus 16-3 and 16-4 which are employed in the IPvoice/image network connected to the network node apparatus managed bythe communication company “Y”, a domain name server 32-2 dedicated tothe IP voice/image network holds information as to a one-to-onecorrespondence relationship among host names(numbers of IP voice/imageapparatus) and IP addresses, which are applied to the IP voice/imageapparatus.

With respect to the IP terminal 11-5 and the dependent type IPvoice/image apparatus 16-2, which are employed in the best effortnetwork connected to the network node apparatus managed by thecommunication company “X”, a domain name server 33-1 dedicated to thebest effort network holds information as to a one-to-one correspondencerelationship among host names and IP addresses, which are applied to theterminals. Also, with respect to the IP terminal 11-9, 11-10 and thedependent type IP telephone set 13-4, which are employed in the besteffort network connected to the network node apparatus managed by thecommunication company “Y”, a domain name server 33-2 dedicated to thebest effort network holds information as to a one-to-one correspondencerelationship among host names and IP addresses, which are applied to theterminals.

Next, both a basic function of a media router and a basic function of agateway, which constitute the major elements of the present invention,will now be described with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22.

An SCN terminal function 802-0, a conversion function 803-0 and aterminal function 804-0 contain the functions owned by theabove-explained SCN terminal function 802, conversion function 803 andterminal function 804, respectively. A voice signal and an image signal,which are entered from the analog telephone set 41-3 via the SCN line40-1, are converted into digital data signals in the SCN terminalfunction 802-0. In the conversion function 803-0, a data format and asignal transmission/reception rule are converted. In the terminalfunction 804-0, the converted digital data signal is converted into anIP packet format which is transmitted to the IP communication line 40-2.Also, a signal flow along a direction opposite to the above-describedsignal flow direction will now be explained.

That is, an IP packet containing voice data and image data, which isentered from the IP communication line 40-2, is decoded into a digitaldata format in the terminal function 804-0. In the conversion function803-0, both the data format and a signal transmission/reception rule areconverted. The converted digital data is further converted into a signalflowing through the SCN line in the SCN terminal function 802-0. Then,the signal is transmitted via the SCN line 40-1 to the analog telephoneset 41-3. An SCN interface 24-0 contains both an SCN terminal function802-0 and a conversion function 803-0. Since an H323 termination unit23-0 contains the terminal function 804-0 and this terminal function804-0 contains the above-explained H323 termination function, the H323termination unit 23-0 can perform an interactive communication throughthe terminal 41-2 and the communication line 40-5. The multimediaterminal 41-2 employed in the present invention corresponds to an IPtelephone set, an IP voice/image apparatus and the like, which aredesigned in accordance with the H323 specification.

A connection control unit 22-0 is connected via the communication line40-2 to the H323 termination unit 23-0, and via the line 40-3 to arouter 20-0. The router 20-0 is connected via the communication line40-4 to a network node apparatus 41-4, and also via the communicationline 40-6 to an IP terminal 41-1. An IP packet 810 functioning as callcontrol data flows through the communication line 40-2, another IPpacket 811 functioning as net data which constitutes voice flows throughthe communication line 40-2, and another IP packet 812 functioning asnet data which constitutes an image itself flows through thecommunication line 40-2.

The call control data corresponds to a host name such as a telephonenumber and a personal computer. On the other hand, the IP packet 43flowing through the communication line 40-3 may employ such a dataformat that a host name is notified to a DNS so as to obtain an inquiryresponse, namely a DNS inquiry/response format, for example, RFC 1996 (AMechanism for Prompt Notification of Zone Changes). A DNSinquiry/response function 42 has such a function that the H323 formatcall control data 810 is converted into the DNS inquiry/response formatdata 43, and the DNS is inquired to obtain an IP address correspondingto a host name. It should be understood that the IP packet 811 whichconstitutes the voice, and also the IP packet 812 which constitutes theimage itself will pass through the connection control unit 42 in thetransparent manner.

When the above-explained operations are summarized, the telephone numberentered from the analog telephone set 41-3 is changed into the digitaltelephone number by the SCN interface 24-0, and then the digitaltelephone number is inputted into the H323 termination unit 23-0.Otherwise, both the telephone number and the host name of the multimediaterminal are entered as the H323 format type call control data 810 intothe H323 termination unit 23-0. The telephone number and the host nameof the multimedia terminal are entered from the H323 format type IPtelephone set 41-2, and are designed in accordance with the H323specification. Both the telephone numbers correspond to the H323 formattype call control data 810 on the communication line 40-2, and the H323format type call control data 810 are converted into the DNSinquiry/response format 43, via the connection control unit 22-0. Itshould be understood that the call control data sent from the IPterminal 41-1 originally employs the DNS inquiry/response format 43 andneed not use the function of the connection control unit 22-0, the callcontrol data is directly connected to the router 20-0. In this case, therouter 20-0 collects both the communication lines 40-3 and 40-6, andalso penetrates the IP packet through the own router 20-0. It shouldalso be noted that the net data which constitutes the voice and theimage itself contained in the IP packets 811 and 812 may pass throughthe connection control unit 22-0 without being changed. The IP packetsare transmitted/received via the line 40-4 between the net nodeapparatus 41-4 and the router 20-0.

A concrete example of the DNS inquiry/response will now be explained. Inthe case that both a telephone number “81-47-325-3897” and an IP address“192.1.2.3” are applied to an IP telephone set, when the telephonenumber “81-47-325-3897” is inquired to the domain name server DNS, theDNS responds as the IP address “192.1.2.3”. Alternatively, in such acase that both a host name “host1.dname1.dname2.co.jp” and an IP address“128.3.4.5” are applied to a personal computer corresponding to an IPterminal, when the host name “host1.dname1.dname2.co.jp” is inquired tothe DNS, this DNS answers the IP address “128.3.4.5” of the personalcomputer.

Since an IP packet is transmitted/received among the IP terminal 41-1,the multimedia terminal 41-2 and the analog terminal 41-3, acommunication can be established. In other words, the IP terminal 41-1transmits/receives the IP packet with respect to the multimedia terminal41-2 via the router 20-0, the connection control unit 22-0, and the H323termination unit 23-0, so that the mutual communication can beestablished between the IP terminal 41-1 and the multimedia terminal41-2. Further, the IP terminal 41-1 may mutually communicate with theanalog telephone set 41-3 via the SCN interface 24-0. Also, themultimedia terminal 41-2 may mutually communicate with the analogtelephone set 41-3 via the H323 termination unit 23-0 and the SCNinterface 24-0.

<<Operation of Media Router>>

Operations of the media router 14-1 according to the present inventionwill now be explained with reference to FIG. 23. The router 20-3 whichconstitutes one element of the media router 14-1 owns the function ofthe router 20-0 shown in FIG. 21. A connection control unit 22-1 of FIG.23 owns the function of the connection control unit 22-0 shown in FIG.21. An H323 termination unit 23-1 of FIG. 23 owns the function of theH323 termination unit 23-0 indicated in FIG. 21. An SCN interface 24-1of FIG. 23 owns the function of the SCN interface 24-0 shown in FIG. 21.Reference numeral 48-1 of FIG. 23 owns a similar function as to theabove-explained DNS. An RAS mechanism 49-1 corresponds to such amechanism capable of registering/certificating a terminal into the mediarouter 14-1, and also capable of managing an internal condition of themedia router(for example, the internal components and their utilizationconditions are managed in a batch mode).

In this case, the registration by the RAS mechanism 49-1 implies thatthe terminal is connected to the media router, whereas the certificationthereof implies that the RAS mechanism 49-1 confirms as to whether ornot the terminal is formally utilized in accordance with the connectionpermission condition of the terminal. Reference numeral 50-1 shows aninformation processing mechanism capable of executing an informationprocessing operation within the media router 14-1. Reference numeral51-1 shows an operation input/output unit of the media router 14-1. As aconsequence, the respective functions owned by the connection controlunit 22-1, the H323 termination unit 23-1, and the SCN interface 24-1employed in the media router 14-1 of FIG. 23 may be apparent from thedescriptions as to the connection control unit 22-0, the H323termination unit 23-0, and the SCN interface 24-0 indicated in FIG. 21.

<<Communication Connection Control Between IP Terminals>>

Referring now to FIG. 23, FIG. 24, and FIG. 25 to FIG. 31, a descriptionwill be made of a sequential process operation that data stored in an IPpacket is transmitted, or received from the IP terminal 11-3 to the IPterminal 11-7. The IP terminal 11-3 transmits such an IP packet 45-1shown in FIG. 26 via a communication line 52-1 to a domain name server48-1. The IP packet 45-1 stores thereinto the own address, namely atransmission source IP address “A113”; an address of a domain nameserver 48-1 employed in the medic router 14-1, namely a destination IPaddress “A481”; and a host name “IPT-11-7 name” of the IP terminal 11-7of the communication party. In this case, the inquiry content shown inthe IP packet 45-1, namely “IPT-11-7 name” is stored in “inquiryportion” within the “DNS inquiry/response format” indicated in FIG. 22.

The domain name server 48-1 checks the content of the received IP packet45-1, and inquires to a domain name server 30-1 dedicated to the IP datanetwork via the communication line 10-1 and the network node apparatus8-2 (Step ST10). When the domain name server 30-1 returns an IP packetcontaining an IP address “A117” which corresponds to the above-explainedhost name “IPT-11-7 name” in a 1:1 correspondence to the domain nameserver 48-1 (Step ST11), the domain name server 48-1 returns an IPpacket 45-2 to the IP terminal 11-3. In the above-explained sequentialprocess operation, the network node apparatus 8-2 checks as to whetheror not the transmission source address “A113” contained in the receivedIP packet 45-1 is registered into an address administration table withreference to the address administration table 44-1 of FIG. 25. In thiscase, the address administration table 44-1 indicates that an externalIP address is “A113” on a record of a second row of the table from a toprow, and a communication line discrimination symbol “Line-10-1” is equalto such an IP packet entered from the communication line 10-1. As aresult, it can be confirmed that the IP terminal 11-3 isallowed/registered so as to be communicable through the network nodeapparatus. In the case that the IP terminal is not registered in theaddress administration table 44-1, the network node apparatus 8-2 candiscard the received IP packet 45-1.

Next, in the case that the IP terminal 11-3 produces an IP packet 45-3which is transmitted to the IP terminal 11-7 and then transmits theproduced IP packet 45-3 via the router 20-3 to the network nodeapparatus 8-2, if this network node apparatus 8-2 transfers the IPpacket 45-3 to the internal unit of the integrated IP transfer network1, then the IP packet 45-3 passes through the communication lines and aplurality of routers(namely, routers 19-1, 19-3, 21-1, 19-5 and 19-6)employed in the IP data network 3 of FIG. 20, and thereafter, is reachedto the network node apparatus 7-2. As a result, the network nodeapparatus 7-2 sends out the received IP packet 45-3 to the communicationline 10-5 shown in FIG. 24 (Step ST12), the router 20-4 receives the IPpacket 45-3, and then, transfers the IP packet via the communicationline 52-2 to the IP terminal 11-7. When the IP terminal 11-7 whichreceives the IP packet 45-3 produces a returning IP packet 45-4, andthen sends out the returning IP packet 45-4 via the communication lineto the router 20-4, the returning IP packet 45-4 is reached to thenetwork node apparatus 8-2 through the communication line 10-5 (StepST13), the network node apparatus 7-2, and the IP data network 3provided within the integrated IP transfer network 2. Then, such an IPpacket 45-4 shown in FIG. 29 is supplied via the communication line 10-1to the IP terminal 11-3. Since the IP packet is transmitted/receivedbetween the IP terminal 11-3 and the IP terminal 11-7 in theabove-explained sequential process operation, the communication can beestablished.

It should be understood that the domain name server 48-1 employed in themedia router may be removed from the media router 14-1 in theabove-explained communication sequential operation from the IP terminal.In this alternative case, the IP terminal 11-3 transmits the IP packet45-5 to the domain name server 30-1. The IP packet 45-5 stores thereintothe transmission source IP address “A113”, the IP address “A301” of thedomain name server 30-1 dedicated to the IP data network, and the hostname “IPT-11-7 name” of the IP terminal 11-7 of the communication party.The domain name server 30-1 returns such an IP packet 45-6 containing anIP address “A117” which corresponds to the host name “IPT-11-7 name” ina 1-to-1 correspondence manner. It should also be noted that thetechnical method capable of directly accessing the domain name server30-1 except for the domain name server 48-1 provided in the media routermay be realized by way of the known technical method related to thedomain name server.

When the above-explained process operation defined at the Step ST11 isaccomplished, both the IP terminals 11-3 and 11-7 are brought into sucha preparation condition that the communication is commenced. Under thispreparation condition, when the network node apparatus 8-2 detects boththe IP packets 45-2 and 45-6, a record of communications establishedbetween the IP terminals may be saved/recorded within the network nodeapparatus 8-2 in combination with this time instant, if necessary. Inother words, a record of communications mode between the IP terminal11-3 and the IP terminal 11-7 may be saved/recorded.

<<Communication Connection Control Between Dependent Type IP TelephoneSets>>

Next, a description will now be made of a sequential operation in whichwhile a telephone number is dialed, a telephone communication is carriedout from the dependent type IP telephone set 13-1 to the dependent typeIP telephone set 13-2. In this example, a “dependent type IP telephoneset” indicates such an IP telephone set which is connected to the mediarouters 14-1, 14-2 and the like so as to establish a telephonecommunication, whereas an “independent type IP telephone set” indicatesthe IP telephone sets 12-1 and 12-2 shown in FIG. 20, which are notconnected to the media router, but are directly connected to the networknode apparatus. This communication sequence will be explained later.

The dependent type IP telephone set 13-1 of FIG. 23 is connected via thecommunication line 53-1 to the H323 termination unit 23-1, and thedependent type IP telephone 13-2 of FIG. 24 is connected via thecommunication line 53-2 to the H323 termination unit 23-2.

When the handset of the dependent type IP telephone 13-1 is took up (offhook), such an IP packet 46-1 shown in FIG. 32, which notifies atelephone call, is sent to the communication line 53-1 indicated in FIG.23 (Step ST20 of FIG. 23). Then, the H323 termination unit 23-1 detectsthat the telephone call is entered from the communication line 53-1, andreturns an IP packet 46-2 in order to confirm the telephone call (StepST21). In this case, symbol “CTL-Info-1” described in a payload(datafield) of the IP packet 46-1 corresponds to call control information,whereas symbol “CTL-Info-2” described in a payload of the IP packet 46-2corresponds to call confirmation information.

Next, when the user of the dependent type IP telephone set 13-1 dials atelephone number of the dependent type IP telephone set 13-2 as thecommunication counter party, such an IP packet 46-3 having, for example,the call control data format defined by H.225 is produced within thedependent type IP telephone set 13-1. The IP packet 46-3 contains atelephone number(“Tel-13-2 name”), of the communication counter party,the telephone number of the dependent type IP telephone set 13-1, andthe IP address. The IP packet 46-3 is transmitted via the communicationline 53-1 to the H323 termination unit 23-1. A condition as to whetheror not both the telephone number of the dependent type IP telephone 13-1and the IP address are contained in the IP packet 46-3 may be optionallyselected. The H323 termination unit 23-1 receives the IP packet 46-3from the communication line 53-1 to retrieve records contained in amedia router state table 100-1 shown in FIG. 47.

Then, the H323 termination unit 23-1 detects a line identifierindicative of the communication line 53-1, namely, a record of a firstrow of the media router state table 100-1 from a top row, i.e., “53-1”.Also, the H323 termination unit 23-1 reads out a telephone number“81-3-1234-5679” and an IP address “32.3.53.1” of the dependent type IPtelephone set 13-1, which are described in the detected record. Also,when both the IP address and the telephone number are not contained inthe IP packet 46-3, the H323 termination unit 23-1 may set the valuesdescribed in the media router state table to the IP packet 46-3.Alternatively, even when the information related to the IP address andthe telephone number is written, if the above values are not madecoincident with the above-described IP packet/telephone number, then theH323 termination unit 23-1 discards the IP packet 46-3 as an errorprocess. In this case, a concrete numeral value of the IP address “A131”of the dependent type IP telephone set 13-1 is selected to be“32.3.53.1” (Step ST22).

Next, the H323 termination unit 23-1 transmits an IP packet 46-4 to adomain name server 48-1 employed inside the media router 14-1 of FIG. 23(Step ST23). The IP packet 46-4 stores thereinto the address of thedependent type IP telephone set 13-1, namely a transmission source IPaddress “A131”; the address of the domain name server 48-1, namely adestination IP address “A481”; and a telephone number “Tel-13-2 name” ofa communication counter party. The domain name server 48-1 checks thecontent of the received IP packet 46-4, and subsequently, transmits anIP packet 46-5 via the communication line 10-1 and the network nodeapparatus 8-2 to the domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IPtelephone network (Step ST24). When the domain name server 31-1dedicated to the IP telephone network returns such an IP packet to thedomain name server 48-1 (Step ST25), the domain name server 48-1 returnsan IP packet 46-6 to the H323 termination unit 23-1. The above-explainedreturned IP packet contains an IP address “A132” which corresponds tothe host name “Tel-13-2 name” in a 1-to-1 correspondence manner.

Next, when the H323 termination unit 23-1 produces an IP packet 46-7which is sent to the H323 termination unit 23-2, and then transmits theproduced IP packet 46-7 via the router 20-3 to the network nodeapparatus 8-2 (Step ST26), the network node apparatus 8-2 transfers thereceived IP packet 46-7 to the internal arrangement of the integrated IPtransfer network 2 shown in FIG. 20. Thus, the IP packet 46-7 passesthrough the routers 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, 19-11 and 19-13 provided insidethe IP telephone network 4, and then is reached to the network nodeapparatus 7-2. As a result, the network node apparatus 7-2 sends out thereceived IP packet 46-7 to the communication line 10-5, and the H323termination unit 23-2 receives the IP packet 46-7 via the router 20-4.The H323 termination unit 23-3 interprets the IP packet 46-7 as atelephone call, and thus executes the below-mentioned two procedureoperations. As a first procedure operation, the H323 termination unit23-2 produces a returning IP packet 46-8 and then returns the IP packet46-8 to the router 20-4. As a second procedure operation, the H323termination unit 23-2 transfers the IP packet 46-7 via the communicationline 53-2 shown in FIG. 24 to the dependent type IP telephone set 13-2.

Referring now to FIG. 24, the following operation is made: The IP packet46-8 produced in the first procedure is transmitted via thecommunication line 10-5 (Step ST27), the network node apparatus 7-2, andthe IP telephone network 4 to the network node apparatus 8-2, and thenis reached via the communication line 10-1 to the router 20-3 and alsovia the H323 termination unit 23-1 to the dependent type IP telephoneset 13-1, respectively. The dependent type IP-telephone 13-1 interpretsthat the communication counter party is being called by receiving the IPpacket 46-8.

Because of the second procedure, the dependent type IP telephone 13-2produces a telephone call sound by receiving the IP packet 46-7. Theuser of the dependent type IP telephone set 13-2 hears the telephonecall sound, and then takes up the handset of the dependent type IPtelephone set 13-2 (off hook). As a result, the dependent type IPtelephone set 13-2 produces an IP packet 46-9 to be sent out to the line53-2 (Step ST28), and the H323 termination unit 23-2 receives the IPpacket 46-9. Then, the IP packet 46-9 is supplied via the network nodeapparatus 7-2 and the IP telephone network 4 to the network nodeapparatus 8-2, and is reached via the communication line 10-1 to therouter 20-3, and also via the H323 termination unit 23-1 to thedependent type IP telephone set 13-1. As a result, the user of thedependent type IP telephone set 13-1 may be informed that the telephonecommunication counter party takes up the handset of the dependent typeIP telephone set 13-2.

The above-described Step ST28 corresponds to such a procedure thatinformation of a response is transferred, namely, the IP packet 46-9 istransferred which notifies such a fact that the telephone communicationis commenced between the dependent type IP telephone set 13-1 and thedependent type IP telephone set 13-2. When the network node apparatus7-2 and 8-2 detect the IP packet 46-9, a record of the commencement ofthe telephone communication may be saved in a charge record file. Inother words, such a fact that the telephone communication is commencedbetween the dependent type IP telephone sets 13-1 and 13-2 is saved inthe charge record file. Namely, this charge record file stores thereintoa portion of the contents of the IP packet 46-9 set into the networknode apparatus, for example, a transmission source IP address, adestination IP address, a transmission source port number, a destinationport number and detection time instants thereof.

When the user of the dependent type IP telephone set 13-1 starts histelephone conversation, the dependent type IP telephone set 13-1produces an IP packet 46-10 containing digitalized voice(speech), andtransmits the IP packet 46-10 to the communication line 53-1 (StepST29). The voice packet 46-10 is supplied to the dependent type IPtelephone set 13-2 via the H323 control unit 23-1; the router 20-3; thenetwork node apparatus 8-2; the routers 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, 19-11 and19-13; the network node apparatus 7-2; the router 20-4; and the H323termination unit 23-2. The voice of the user of the dependent type IPtelephone set 13-2 is stored in an IP packet 46-11 in a digital form.The voice packet is supplied to the dependent type IP telephone set 13-1along a direction opposite to the above-explained packet flow direction(Step ST30), namely, is supplied via the H323 control unit 23-2; therouter 20-4; the network node apparatus 7-2; the routers 19-13, 19-11,21-2, 19-9 and 19-8; the network node apparatus 8-2; the router 20-3;and the H323 termination unit 23-1.

When the user of the dependent type IP telephone set 13-1 puts on(hangsup) the handset thereof in order to finish the telephone communication,the dependent type IP telephone set 13-1 produces an IP packet 46-12which indicates that the telephone communication is ended, and thensends out the IP packet 46-12 to the communication line 53-1 (StepST31). The IP packet 46-12 is supplied to the dependent type IPtelephone set 13-2 via the H323 control unit 23-1; the router 20-3; thenetwork node apparatus 8-2; the routers 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, 19-11, and19-13; the network node apparatus 7-2; the router 20-4; and the H323termination unit 23-2. The user of the dependent type IP telephone set13-2 may know such a fact that the telephone communication is ended, andthen, when the user puts on the handset of the dependent type telephoneset 13-2, an IP packet 46-13 is produced. The produced IP packet 46-13is supplied along a direction opposite to the above-explained packetflow direction, namely, is supplied to the H323 control unit 23-2; therouter 20-4; the network node apparatus 7-2; the routers 19-13, 19-11,21-2, 19-9 and 19-8; the network node apparatus 8-2; the router 20-3;and the H323 termination unit 23-1 (Step ST32).

The above-described Step ST32 corresponds to such a procedure thatconfirmation information of a call interrupt is transferred, namely, theIP packet 46-13 is transferred which notifies such a fact that thetelephone communication is ended between the dependent type IP telephoneset 13-1 and the dependent type IP telephone set 13-2. When both thenetwork node apparatus 7-2 and 8-2 detect the IP packet 46-13, a recordof the completion of the telephone communication may be saved in thecharge record file. In other words, such a fact that the telephonecommunication is ended between the dependent type IP telephone sets 13-1and 13-2 is saved in the charge record file. Namely, this charge recordfile stores thereinto a portion of the contents of the IP packet 46-13set into the network node apparatus, for example, a transmission sourceIP address, a destination IP address, a transmission source port number,a destination port number and detection time instant thereof.

Since both the dependent type IP telephone set 13-1 and the dependenttype IP telephone set 13-2 transmit and also receive the IP packets inaccordance with the above-explained procedures, the telephonecommunications can be established.

In the above-described communication procedures, while the domain nameserver 48-1 contained in the media router may be removed from the mediarouter 14-1, the above-explained Steps ST23 to ST25 may be replaced bythe below-mentioned Steps ST23 x and ST25 x. In other words, the H323termination unit 23-1 transmits an IP packet 46-14 via the communicationline 10-1 and the network node apparatus 8-2 to the domain name server31-1 dedicated to the IP telephone network (Step ST23 x). The IP packet46-14 stores thereinto the address of the dependent type IP telephoneset 13-1, namely the transmission source IP address “A131”; the addressof the domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IP telephone network,namely the destination IP address “A311”; and the telephone number ofthe communication counter party “Tel-13-2 name”. The domain name server31-1 returns another IP packet 46-15 to the H323 termination unit 23-1(Step ST25 x). The IP packet 46-15 contains the IP address “A132” whichcorresponds to the telephone number of the communication counter party“Tel-13-2 name” in a 1-to-1 correspondence manner.

In the above-explained procedures defined from the Steps ST23 to theStep ST25, or by both the Step ST23 x and the Step ST25 x, the networknode apparatus 8-2 may confirm that the dependent type IP telephone set13-1 is allowed to be communicated from the communication line 10-1 viathe network node apparatus 8-2 by checking as to whether or not thecombination between the transmission source address “A481” contained inthe IP packet 46-5 received via the communication line 10-1 and thecommunication line identification symbol “Line-10-1” similarly receivedis registered in the address management table 44-1 (refer to FIG. 25),or by checking as to whether or not the combination between thetransmission source address “A131” contained in the IP packet 46-14received via the communication line 10-1 and the communication lineidentification symbol “Line-10-1” similarly received is registered inthe address management table 44-1 (refer to FIG. 25).

<<Communication Connection Control Between Independent Type IP TelephoneSets>>

Since the dependent type IP telephone set 13-1 of FIG. 23 contains thetermination function of the H323 termination unit 23-1, this dependenttype IP telephone set 13-1 may be formed with the connection controlunit 22-1 in an integral form. Because of this reason, a dependent typeIP telephone set 13-11 provided inside such an independent type IPtelephone set 12-1 shown in FIG. 48 is directly connected via acommunication line to a connection control unit 22-11. A communicationline 10-4 is derived from the connection control unit 22-11, and then isconnected to the network node apparatus 8-4 of FIG. 20. Both theindependent type IP telephone set 12-1 and an independent type IPtelephone set 12-2 can carry out a telephone communication bytransmitting/receiving an IP packet. This communication procedure issimilar to that defined from the Step ST20 to the Step ST32, in whichthe above-described dependent type IP telephone sets 13-1 and 13-2perform the telephone communication by transmitting/receiving the IPpackets. However, there is a first different point. That is, since thedomain name server 48-1 inside the media router 14-1 is not present,both the Step ST23 and the Steps ST24 may be regarded as an integratedsteps without passing through the domain name server 48-1. As a seconddifferent point, since the H323 termination units 23-1 and 23-2 are notpresent, the portions of the H323 termination units 23-1 and 23-2 arerequired to be replaced by such a communication line through which theIP packets may pass.

<<Communication Between Two Dependent Type IP Voice/Image Apparatus>>

Since an IP packet is transmitted, or received from the dependent typeIP voice/image(audio/visual) apparatus 16-1 to the dependent type IPvoice/image(audio/visual) apparatus 16-3, a host name for identifying anapparatus can be realized by a voice/image communication fortransmitting/receiving an IP packet. The communication procedure issimilar to that defined from the Step ST20 to the Step ST32 in whichboth the dependent type IP telephone set 13-1 and the dependent type IPtelephone set 13-2 use the domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IPtelephone network. As a technical different point, while the domain nameserver 32-1 dedicated to the IP voice/image network of FIG. 24 isemployed without using the domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IPtelephone network, a process operation of a Step ST44 is executedinstead of the Step ST24, and also a process operation of a Step ST45 isexecuted instead of the Step ST25.

The dependent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-1 inquires the domainname server 32-1 dedicated to the IP image inside the IP transfernetwork as to the host name of the dependent type IP voice/imageapparatus 16-2 to thereby acquire an IP address of the dependent type IPvoice/image apparatus 16-2. Next, since the voice/image data istransmitted from the dependent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-1 to thedependent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-2, the voice/imagecommunication for transmitting/receiving the voice/image data can becarried out between the dependent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-1 andthe dependent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-2.

<<Communication Between Independent Type IP Voice/Image Apparatus andDependent Type IP Voice/Image Apparatus>>

Since the dependent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-1 shown in FIG. 23contains the termination function of the H323 termination unit 23-1,this dependent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-1 may be formed with theconnection control unit 22-1 in an integral form. Because of thisreason, a dependent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-12 provided insidesuch an independent type IP voice/image apparatus 12-3 shown in FIG. 49is directly connected via a communication line to a connection controlunit 22-12. A communication line 10-9 is derived from the connectioncontrol unit 22-12, and then is connected to the network node apparatus8-4 of FIG. 20.

Both the independent type IP voice/image apparatus 12-3 and thedependent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-3 can execute a voice/imagecommunication for transmitting/receiving an IP packet. The communicationprocedure thereof is similar to the process operations defined from theStep ST20 to the Steps ST32, in which both the dependent type IPvoice/image apparatus 16-1 and the dependent type IP voice/imageapparatus 16-3 use the domain name server 32-1 dedicated to the IPvoice/image network 5-1 so as to transmit/receive the IP packet, so thatthe voice/image communication is carried out. As a technical differentpoint, since the domain name server 48-1 within the media router 14-1 isnot present, both the Step ST23 and the Step ST24 are recorded as anintegrated step, without passing through the domain name server 48-1.

By connecting the independent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-4 withthe network node apparatus 7-4, the voice/image communication totransmit/receive the IP packet is carried out between the independenttype IP voice/image apparatus 12-3 and he independent type IPvoice/image apparatus 16-4 via the network node apparatus 8-4, the IPvoice/image network 5-1 and the network node apparatus 7-4.

Assuming now that the independent type IP voice/image apparatus 12-3 isregarded as a sales means of a voice(sound)/image goods selling firm forselling voice/image goods, and also both the dependent type IPvoice/image apparatus 16-3 and the independent type IP voice/imageapparatus 16-4 are regarded as a purchase means of a voice(sound)/imagegoods purchaser, such a virtual market can be realized through which thevoice/image goods can be distributed with employment of the IP transfernetwork. A purchaser may order voice/image goods to a sales firm byusing a voice/image slip, and thus, the sales firm can send digitalvoice/image goods.

<<Communication Among Analog Telephone Sets>>

Referring now to FIG. 20, FIG. 23, FIG. 24, and FIG. 50 to FIG. 64, adescription will be made of a sequential operation in which while atelephone number is dialed, a telephone communication is establishedfrom one normal telephone set to another normal telephone set, not an IPtelephone set, namely from one analog telephone set 18-1 to anotheranalog telephone set 18-3.

The analog telephone set 18-1 of FIG. 23 is connected via acommunication line 55-1 to the SCN interface 24-1, and the analogtelephone set 18-3 of FIG. 24 is connected via a communication line 55-2to the SCN interface 24-2. When the handset of the analog telephone 18-1is taken up(off hook), a telephone calling analog signal is sent out viathe communication line 55-1 to the SCN interface 24-1, and then this SCNinterface 24-1 converts the received analog calling signal intodigital-format calling data. Next, the SCN interface 24-1 converts thetransmission/reception rule of the digital calling data, and producessuch a digital data 47-1 shown in FIG. 50 which notifies a telephonecall. The digital data 47-1 is inputted to the H323 termination unit23-1 (Step ST60 of FIG. 23). The H323 termination unit 23-1 returnsdigital data 47-2 of FIG. 51 used to confirm the telephone call to theSCN interface 24-1 (Step ST61). In this case, symbol “CTL-Info-1”contained in the digital data 47-1 indicates call control information,and symbol “CTL-Info-2” contained in the digital data 47-2 shows callconfirmation information.

Next, when a user of the analog telephone set 18-1 dials a telephonenumber of the analog telephone set 18-3 as a communication counterparty, the analog telephone set 18-1 sends out a call setting analogsignal to the communication line 55-1, and the SCN interface 23-1produces a data block 47-3 of FIG. 52 for notifying the telephone numberby using the “call setting” analog signal to send out the data block47-3 to the H323 termination unit 23-1. In this case, the H323termination unit 23-1 retrieves records contained in a media routerstate table 100-1 of FIG. 47 so as to detect a line identifierindicative of the communication line 55-1, a record on a third row ofthe media router state table 100-1 from a top row, namely “55-1”. Next,the H323 termination unit 23-1 reads a telephone number “81-47-325-3887”of the analog telephone set 18-1 and an IP address “20.0.55.1”, whichare described in the record. In this case, a concrete numeral value ofthe IP address “A181” of the analog telephone set 18-1 is selected to be“20.0.55.1” (Step ST62).

Next, the H323 termination unit 23-1 produces an IP packet 47-4 of FIG.53, and then transmits the produced IP packet 47-4 to the domain nameserver 48-1 (Step ST63). This IP packet 47-4 stores thereinto an addresswhich is virtually applied to the analog telephone set 18-1, namely atransmission source IP address “A181”; an address of the domain nameserver 48-1 provided inside the media router, namely a destination IPaddress “A481”; and a telephone number “Tel-18-3 name” of acommunication counter party. The domain name server 48-1 checks thecontent of the received IP packet 47-4, and subsequently, transmits anIP packet 47-5 via the communication line 10-1 and the network nodeapparatus 8-2 to the domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IPtelephone network (Step ST64). When the domain name server 31-1dedicated to the IP telephone network returns such an IP packet 47-6 tothe domain name server 48-1 (Step ST65), the domain name server 48-1returns an IP packet 47-6 to the H323 termination unit 23-1. Theabove-explained returned IP packet 47-6 contains an IP address “A183”which corresponds to the host name “Tel-13-3 name” in a 1-to-1correspondence manner.

Next, when the H323 termination unit 23-1 produces an IP packet 47-7which is sent to the H323 termination unit 23-2, and then transmits theproduced IP packet 47-7 via the router 20-3 to the network nodeapparatus 8-2 (Step ST66), the network node apparatus 8-2 transfers thereceived IP packet 47-7 to the internal arrangement of the integrated IPtransfer network 2 shown in FIG. 20. Thus, the IP packet 47-7 passesthrough the routers 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, 19-11 and 19-13 provided insidethe IP telephone network 4, and then is reached to the network nodeapparatus 7-2. As a result, the network node apparatus 7-2 sends out thereceived IP packet 47-7 to the communication line 10-5, and the H323termination unit 23-2 receives the IP packet 47-7 via the router 20-4.The H323 termination unit 23-2 interprets the IP packet 47-7 as atelephone call, and thus executes the below-mentioned two procedureoperations. As a first procedure operation, the H323 termination unit23-2 produces a returning IP packet 47-8 and then returns the IP packet47-8 to the router 20-4. Also, since the analog telephone set 18-3receives the IP packet 47-7, this analog telephone set 18-3 produces acalling bell sound. As a second procedure operation, the H323termination unit 23-2 transfers the IP packet 47-7 via the SCN interface24-2 to the analog telephone 18-3.

Referring now to FIG. 24, the following operation is made: The IP packet47-8 produced in the first procedure is transmitted via thecommunication line 10-5 (Step ST67), the network node apparatus 7-2, andthe IP telephone network 4 to the network node apparatus 8-2, and thenis reached via the communication line 10-1 to the router 20-3 and alsovia the H323 termination unit 23-1 and the SCN interface 24-1 to theanalog telephone set 18-1. The analog telephone set 18-1 interprets thatthe communication counter party is being called by receiving the IPpacket 47-8.

Because of the second procedure, the user of the analog telephone set18-3 hears the telephone call sound, and then takes up the handset ofthe analog telephone set 18-3 (off hook). As a result, the H323termination unit 23-2 produces an IP packet 47-9 (Step ST68). The H323termination unit 23-2 sends out the IP packet 47-9 to the router 20-4.Then, the IP packet 47-9 is supplied via the network node apparatus 7-2and the IP telephone network 4 to the network node apparatus 8-2, and isreached via the communication line 10-1 to the router 20-3, and also viathe H323 termination unit 23-1 and the SCN interface 24-1 to the analogtelephone set 18-1. As a result, the user of the analog telephone set18-1 may be informed as sound for notifying that the telephonecommunication counter party takes up the handset of the analog telephoneset 18-3. This sound is to confirm a call setting operation.

The above-described Step ST68 corresponds to such a procedure thatinformation of a call setting confirmation is transferred, namely, theIP packet 47-9 is transferred which notifies such a fact that thetelephone communication is commenced between the analog telephone set18-1 and the analog telephone set 18-3. When both the network nodeapparatus 7-2 and 8-2 detect the IP packet 47-9, a record of thecommencement of the telephone communication may be saved in a chargerecord file. In other words, such a fact that the telephonecommunication is commenced between the analog telephone sets 18-1 and18-3 is saved in the charge record file. Namely, this charge record filestores thereinto a portion of the contents of the IP packet 47-9 setinto the network node apparatus, for example, a transmission source IPaddress, a destination IP address, a transmission source port number, adestination port number and detection time instants thereof.

When the user of the analog telephone set 18-1 commences a telephoneconversation of a telephone communication, the voice(speech) signal istransferred via the communication line 55-1 to the SCN interface 24-1,and is converted into a digital voice signal. Next, the H323 terminationunit 23-1 produces such an IP packet 47-10 containing the digitalizedvoice, and then sends out the produced IP packet 47-10 to thecommunication line 10-1 (Step ST69). The voice packet 47-10 is suppliedto the analog telephone set 18-3 via the H323 control unit 23-1; therouter 20-3; the network node apparatus 8-2; the routers 19-8, 19-9,21-2, 19-11 and 19-13; the network node apparatus 7-2; the router 20-4;and the H323 termination unit 23-2. The voice of the user of the analogtelephone set 18-3 is supplied to the analog telephone set 18-1 along adirection opposite to the above-explained packet flow direction (StepST70), namely, is supplied via the H323 control unit 23-2; the router20-4; the network node apparatus 7-2; the routers 19-13, 19-11, 21-2,19-9 and 19-8; the network node apparatus 8-2; the router 20-3; and theH323 termination unit 23-1.

When the user of the analog telephone set 18-1 puts on the handset inorder to accomplish the telephone conversation, the analog telephone set18-1 sends out a call interrupt signal to the communication line 55-1.The call interrupt signal indicates the completion of the telephonecommunication. The SCN interface 24-1 converts the call interrupt signalinto a digital data format. Next, the H323 termination unit 23-1produces an IP packet 47-12 for indicating that the telephonecommunication is ended, and then sends to the IP packet 47-12 to thecommunication line 10-1 (Step ST71). The IP packet 47-12 is supplied tothe analog telephone set 18-3 via the H323 control unit 23-1; the router20-3; the network node apparatus 8-2; the routers 19-8, 19-9, 21-2,19-11 and 19-13; the network node apparatus 7-2; the router 20-4; andthe H323 termination unit 23-2. The user of the analog telephone set18-3 may know such a fact that the telephone communication is ended, andthen, when the user puts on the handset of the analog telephone set18-3, an IP packet 47-13 is produced. The produced IP packet 47-13 issupplied along a direction opposite to the above-explained packet flowdirection (Step ST72), namely, is supplied via the H323 control unit23-2; the router 20-4; the network node apparatus 7-2; the routers19-13, 19-11, 21-2, 19-9 and 19-8; the network node apparatus 8-2; therouter 20-3; and the H323 termination unit 23-1.

The above-described Step ST72 corresponds to such a procedure thatformation for confirming a call interrupt is transferred, namely, the IPpacket 47-13 is transferred which notifies such a fact that thetelephone communication is ended between the analog telephone set 18-1and the analog telephone set 18-3. When both the network node apparatus7-2 and 8-2 detect the IP packet 47-13, a record of the completion ofthe telephone communication may be saved in a charge record file. Inother words, such a fact that the telephone communication is completedbetween the analog telephone sets 18-1 and 18-3 is saved in the chargerecord file. Namely, the charge record file stores thereinto a portionof the contents of the IP packet 47-13 set into the network nodeapparatus, for example, a transmission source IP address, a destinationIP address, a transmission source port number, a destination port numberand detection time instants thereof.

Since both the analog telephone set 18-1 and the analog telephone set18-3 transmit and also receive the IP packets in accordance with theabove-explained procedures, the telephone communications can beestablished.

In the above-described communication procedures, while the domain nameserver 48-1 contained in the media router may be removed from the mediarouter 14-1, the above-explained Steps ST63 to ST65 may be replaced bythe below-mentioned Steps ST63 x and ST65 x. In other words, the H323termination unit 23-1 transmits an IP packet 47-14 via the communicationline 10-1 and the network node apparatus 8-2 to the domain name server31-1 dedicated to the IP telephone network (Step ST63 x). The IP packet47-14 stores thereinto the address of the analog telephone set 18-1,namely the transmission source IP address “A181”; the address of thedomain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IP telephone network, namelythe destination IP address “A311”; and the telephone number of thecommunication counter party “Tel-18-3 name”. The domain name server 31-1returns another IP packet 47-15 to the H323 termination unit 23-1 (StepST65 x). The IP packet 47-15 contains the IP address “A183” whichcorresponds to the telephone number of the communication counter party“Tel-18-3 name” in a 1-to-1 correspondence manner.

In the above-explained procedures defined from the Step ST63 to the StepST65, or by both the Step ST63 x and the Step ST65 x, the network nodeapparatus 8-2 may confirm that the analog telephone set 18-1 is allowedto be communicated from the communication line 10-1 via the network nodeapparatus 8-2 by checking as to whether or not the combination betweenthe transmission source address “A481” contained in the IP packet 47-5received via the communication line 10-1 and the communication lineidentification symbol “Line-10-1” similarly received is registered inthe address administration table 44-1 (refer to FIG. 25), or by checkingas to whether or not the combination between the transmission sourceaddress “A181” contained in the IP packet 47-14 received via thecommunication line 10-1 and the communication line identification symbol“Line-10-1” similarly received is registered in the addressadministration table 44-1 (refer to FIG. 25).

<<IP Data Service Operation/Management Server>>

The IP data service operation/management server 35-1 managed by thecommunication company “X” acquires the IP terminal-to-terminalcommunication record which is formed by the network node apparatus atthe Step ST11 in such a manner that the IP data serviceoperation/management server 35-1 periodically, or temporarilytransmits/receives an inquiry IP packet with respect to both the networknode apparatus 8-2 and 8-4. Also, the IP data serviceoperation/management server 35-1 checks as to whether or not theinternal resources of the IP data network managed by the communicationcompany “X” are operated under normal condition by using such a meansfor transmitting/receiving an ICMP packet(namely, failure management).These internal resources are, for instance, the routers 19-1, 19-2,19-3; the domain name servers 30-1 and 30-2 dedicated to the IP datanetwork; and the communication lines among the routers. Also, the IPdata service operation/management server 35-1 monitors as to whether ornot the congestion of the IP packets within the IP data network isexcessively increased(namely, communication quality control) in orderthat the IP data network of the communication company “X” may beoperated/managed in a batch mode.

Similarly, the IP data service operation/management server 35-2 managedby the communication company “Y” acquires the above-explained IPterminal-to-terminal communication record in such a manner that the IPdata service operation/management server 35-2 periodically, ortemporarily transmits/receives an inquiry IP packet with respect to boththe network node apparatus 7-2 and 7-4. Also, the IP data serviceoperation/management server 35-2 operates/manages the failure managementand the communication quality of the IP data network of thecommunication company “Y” in a batch manner. It should be understoodthat both the IP data service operation/management servers 35-1 and 35-2may be subdivided into an IP data service server which exclusivelymanages the IP data services, and also an IP data networkoperation/management server which exclusively manages the resources ofthe IP data network.

<<IP Telephone Service Operation/Management Server>>

The IP telephone service operation/management server 36-1 managed by thecommunication company “X” acquires the above-explained telephonecommunication starting record and also telephone communication endrecord in such a manner that the IP telephone serviceoperation/management server 36-1 periodically, or temporarilytransmits/receives an inquiry IP packet with respect to both the networknode apparatus 8-2 and 8-4. Also, the IP telephone serviceoperation/management server 36-1 checks as to whether or not theinternal resources of the IP telephone network managed by thecommunication company “X” are operated under normal condition by usingsuch a means for transmitting/receiving an ICMP packet(namely, failuremanagement). These internal resources are, for instance, the routers19-8, 19-9, 19-10; the domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IPtelephone network, and the communication lines among the routers. Also,the IP telephone service operation/management server 36-1 monitors as towhether or not the congestion of the IP packets within the IP telephonenetwork is excessively increased(namely, communication quality control)in order that the IP telephone network of the communication company “X”may be operated/managed in a batch mode.

Similarly, the IP telephone service operation/management server 36-2managed by the communication company “Y” acquires the above-explainedtelephone communication starting record and telephone communication endrecord in such a manner that the IP telephone serviceoperation/management server 36-2 periodically, or temporarilytransmits/receives an inquiry IP packet with respect to both the networknode apparatus 7-2 and 7-4. Also, the IP telephone serviceoperation/management server 36-2 operates/manages the failure managementand the communication quality of the IP telephone network of thecommunication company “Y” in a batch manner.

It should also be noted that the record about the telephonecommunication commencement defined at the Steps ST28 and ST68, and therecord about the end of the telephone communication defined at the StepsST32 and ST72 among the above-explained procedure may be omitted. Inthis alternative case, the acquisitions of both the telephonecommunication starting record and the telephone communication end recordby the communication company “X” and the communication company “Y” maybe omitted.

It should also be noted that both the IP telephone serviceoperation/management servers 36-1 and 36-2 may be subdivided into an IPtelephone service server which exclusively manages the IP telephoneservices, and also an IP telephone network operation/management serverwhich exclusively manages the resources of the IP telephone network.

<<IP Voice/Image Service Operation/Management Server>>

The IP voice/image(audio/visual) service operation/management server37-1 managed by the communication company “X” acquires theabove-explained voice/image communication starting record andvoice/image communication end record in such a manner that the IPvoice/image service operation/management server 37-1 periodically, ortemporarily transmits/receives an inquiry IP packet with respect to boththe network node apparatus 8-2 and 8-4. Also, the IP voice/image serviceoperation/management server 37-1 checks as to whether or not theinternal resources of the IP voice/image network managed by thecommunication company “X” are operated under normal condition by usingsuch a means for transmitting/receiving an ICMP packet(namely, failuremanagement). These internal resources are, for instance, the routers19-14, 19-15; the domain name server 32-1 dedicated to the IP telephonenetwork; and the communication lines among the routers. Also, the IPvoice/image service operation/management server 37-1 monitors as towhether or not the congestion of the IP packets within the IPvoice/image network is excessively increased(namely, communicationquality control) in order that the IP voice/image network of thecommunication company “X” may be operated/managed in a batch mode.

Similarly, the IP voice/image service operation/management server 37-2managed by the communication company “Y” acquires the above-explainedvoice/image communication starting record and voice/image communicationend record in such a manner that the IP voice/image serviceoperation/management server 37-2 periodically, or temporarilytransmits/receives an inquiry IP packet with respect to both the networknode apparatus 7-2 and 7-4. Also, the IP voice/image serviceoperation/management server 37-2 operates/manages the failure managementand the communication quality of the IP voice/image network of thecommunication company “Y” in a batch manner. It should be understoodthat both the IP voice/image service operation/management servers 37-1and 37-2 may be subdivided into an IP voice/image service server whichexclusively manages the IP voice/image services, and also an IPvoice/image network operation/management server which exclusivelymanages the resources of the IP voice/image network.

<<Best Effort Service Operation/Management Server>>

A best effort service operation/management server 38-1 managed by thecommunication company “X” operates/manages failure managements andcommunication qualities of a best effort network of the communicationcompany “X” in a batch manner. Similarly, a best effort serviceoperation/management server 38-2 managed by the communication company“Y” operates/manages failure managements and communication qualities ofa best effort network of the communication company “Y” in a batchmanner. It should be noted that both the best effort serviceoperation/management services 38-1 and 38-2 may be subdivided into abest effort service server for exclusively managing best effortservices, and also a best effort network operation/management server forexclusively managing resources of a best effort service network,respectively.

In the above-described description, the names of elements employed inthe embodiment are applied as, for example, “H323 termination unit and“H323 gateway”. This does not imply that these element names are made inaccordance with the ITU-H323 recommendation. Instead, these elementnames own meanings related to the ITU-H323 recommendation.

As indicated in FIG. 65, a media router operator 102 exchangesinformation via an operation input/output unit 51-1 with respect to anRAS administration program 101-1 employed in the RAS mechanism 49-1, orrewrites a RAS table provided in the RAS administration program 101-1 soas to manage registration/certification of terminals, and also manage aninternal state of the media router 14-1.

As represented in FIG. 66, while a terminal operator 103 operates thedependent type IP telephone set 13-1, this operation information issupplied via an H323 terminal program 105-2 and subsequently a 3-layercommunication path 106 which is virtually present within a communicationline 53-1 so as to be exchanged with an interface 105-1 of the RASadministration program employed in the RAS mechanism 49-1 and an APlayer 101-2 of the RAS administration program. Also, the RAS tableprovided in the RAS administration program is rewritten, so that theterminal operator 103 manages registration/certification of terminalsand an internal state of the media router 14-1.

As represented in FIG. 67, while a telephone operator 104 operates theanalog telephone set 18-1, this operation information is supplied so asto be exchanged with a telephone operation program 106-2 employed in theSCN interface 24-1, and subsequently a TCP/IP interface 106-1 of the RASadministration program employed in the RAS mechanism 49-1 and an APlayer 101-3 of the RAS administration program. Also, the RAS tableprovided in the RAS administration program is rewritten, so that thetelephone operator 104 manages registration/certification of terminalsand an internal state of the media router 14-1.

In the embodiment of FIG. 20, all of the elements provided within therange 6-2 of the IP transfer network which is operated/managed by thecommunication company “Y” may be eliminated, and furthermore, therouters 21-1 through 21-5 may be eliminated. In such an alternativecase, the internal elements of the integrated IP transfer network 2 arearranged only by employing the range 6-1 of the IP transfer networkoperated/managed by the communication company “X”, the network nodeapparatus 7-1 to 7-4 and 8-1 to 8-4 and the gateways 9-1 to 9-2. In thecase of the IP data communication, for example, the information istransferred from the network node apparatus 8-2 via the router 19-1 andthe router 19-3 to the network node apparatus 7-2. In the case of the IPtelephone communication, for instance, the information is transferredfrom the network node apparatus 8-2 via the router 19-8 and the router19-9 to the network node apparatus 7-2.

2. Second Embodiment Using Gateway

<<Communications Among Analog Telephone Sets Via Gateway>>

Both the media routers 14-1 and 14-2 shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24 ownthe substantially same internal arrangements and also functions as thoseof a gateway 9-1 shown in FIG. 68 and of a gateway 9-2 indicated in FIG.69. There are the below-mentioned technical different points. That is,the media routers 14-1 and 14-2 are provided outside the integrated IPtransfer network 2, whereas the gateways 9-1 and 9-2 are provided insidethe integrated IP transfer network 2. Also, charging units 72-1 and 72-2are provided inside the gateways 9-1 and 9-2. Each internal structure ofthe media routers 14-11, 14-2 and the gateways 9-1, 9-2 is constitutedby common internal element blocks such as an SCN interface, an H323termination unit, a connection control unit and a router. Also,reference numeral 79-1 shows a RAS mechanism of the gateway 9-1,reference numeral 80-1 denotes an information process mechanism of thegateway 9-1, and reference numeral 81-1 shows an operation input/outputunit of the gateway 9-1. Both the media routers and the gateways arearranged by substantially similar functions to each other, except forprocess operations related to the charging units.

An IP terminal 11-6 and a dependent type IP telephone set 13-3 areconnected via a communication line to the gateway 9-1, whereas an IPterminal 11-10 and a dependent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-4 areconnected via a communication line to the gateway 9-2. In order that aterminal-to-terminal communication can be established via a mediarouter, the below-mentioned terminal-to-terminal communications arerealized via the gateway 9-1, the integrated IP transfer network 2 andthe gateway 9-2. For example, a terminal-to-terminal communication maybe established between the IP terminal 11-6 and the IP terminal 11-10shown in FIG. 20. Also, a terminal-to-terminal communication may beestablished between the dependent type IP telephone set 13-3 and thedependent type IP telephone set 13-4 shown in FIG. 20. Also, aterminal-to-terminal communication may be established between thedependent type IP voice/image apparatus 16-1 and the dependent type IPvoice/image apparatus 16-4 shown in FIG. 20.

Referring now to FIG. 68 to FIG. 85, a description will be made ofcommunication process operations executed between an analog telephoneset 18-5 and an analog telephone set 18-6 via the gateway 9-1, theintegrated IP transfer network 2 and the gateway 9-2.

When the handset of the analog telephone set 18-5 is taken up, atelephone call signal is reached via a telephone line 17-3, a publicswitched telephone network 26-1, and a telephone line 17-1 to an SCNinterface 77-1 provided within the gateway 9-1 (Step S60 of FIG. 68),and then, the SCN interface 77-1 returns a call confirmation signal viathe public switched telephone network 26-1 to the analog telephone set18-5 (Step S61). Next, when the user of the analog telephone set 18-5dials a telephone number “Tel-18-6 name” of the telephone set 18-6 ofthe communication counter party, if the analog telephone set 18-5 sendsout a call setting signal to the communication line 17-3, then the callsetting signal is reached via the public switched telephone network 26-1and the telephone line 17-1 to the SCN interface 77-1 (Step S62). A datablock 48-1 shown in FIG. 70, which is produced by digitalling the callsetting signal, is transferred to the H323 termination unit 76-1 (StepS62 x). The H323 termination unit 76-1 retrieves records contained in agateway state table 100-2 of FIG. 87, and then detects a line identifierindicative of the communication line 17-1, newly a record(i.e., “17-1”)on a first row of this gateway state table 100-2 from the top row.

Next, the H323 termination unit 76-1 reads out a telephone number“81-3-9876-5432” of the analog telephone set 18-5 and an IP address“100.101.102.103” thereof, which are described in the record.Furthermore, the H323 termination unit 76-1 produces an IP packet 48-2and transmits it to a domain name server 78-1 (Step S63). The IP packet48-2 stores thereinto the address of the analog telephone set 18-5,namely a transmission source IP address “A185”; the address of thedomain name server 78-1 within the gateway, namely a destination IPaddress “A781”; and a telephone number “Tel-18-6 name” of acommunication counter party. The domain name server 78-1 checks thecontent of the received IP packet 48-2, and subsequently, transmits anIP packet 48-3 via the network node apparatus 8-4 to the domain nameserver 31-1 dedicated to the IP telephone network (Step S64). When thedomain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IP telephone network returnssuch an IP packet 48-4 to the domain name server 78-1 (Step S65), thedomain name server 78-1 returns the IP packet 48-4 to the H323termination unit 76-1. The above-explained returned IP packet 48-4contains an IP address “A186” which corresponds to the telephone number“Tel-18-6 name” of the communication counter party in a 1-to-1correspondence manner.

Next, in such a case that the H323 termination unit 76-1 produces an IPpacket 48-5 and transmits the IP packet 48-5 to the network nodeapparatus 8-4 (Step S66), when the network node apparatus 8-4 transfersthe received IP packet 48-5 to the internal arrangement of theintegrated IP transfer network 2 shown in FIG. 20, the IP packet 48-5passes through the routers 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, 19-11 and 19-13 providedinside the IP telephone network 4, and then is reached to the networknode apparatus 7-4. As a result, the network node apparatus 7-4 sendsout the received IP packet 48-5 via the router 74-2 and the H323termination unit 76-2 to the SCN interface 77-2. This SCN interface 77-2interprets the IP packet 48-5 as a telephone call to the analogtelephone set 18-6, and sends out a telephone call signal to thetelephone line 17-2 (Step S66 x). Upon receipt of a call confirmationsignal from the public switched telephone network 26-2 (Step S66 y), theSCN termination unit 77-2 executes the below-mentioned two procedureoperations. As a first procedure operation, the SCN interface 77-2produces a returning IP packet 48-6 and then returns the IP packet 48-6to the router 74-2. As a second procedure operation, the SCN interface77-2 sends out a call setting signal via the line 17-2 to the publicswitched telephone network 26-2.

The IP packet 48-6 produced by the first procedure operation is reachedvia the network node apparatus 7-4 (Step S67) and the IP telephonenetwork 4 to the network node apparatus 8-4, and is finally delivered tothe H323 termination unit 76-1 provided within the gateway 9-1. Next,the H323 termination unit 76-1 interprets the received IP packet 48-6 assuch a fact that a telephone set of a communication counter party(analogtelephone set 18-6) is being called, and thus, sends out a data block48-7 for implying a telephone calling sound to the SCN interface 77-1.As a result, the SCN interface 77-1 sends out the telephone callingsound to the communication line 17-1. When the calling sound is reachedvia the public switched telephone network 26-1 and the communicationline 17-3 to the analog telephone set 18-5, the analog telephone set18-5 interprets that the analog telephone set 18-6 is being called asthe communication counter party.

While the above-explained second procedure operation is carried out, theanalog telephone set 18-6 receives the call setting signal (Step S67 x)and produces the telephone call sound. When the user of the analogtelephone set 18-6 hears the telephone call sound and then picks up thehandset of the analog telephone set 18-6, a call setting confirmationsignal is sent out from the analog telephone set 18-6. The call settingconfirmation signal is reached via the line 17-4, the public switchedtelephone network 26-2, and the line 17-2 to the SCN interface 77-2.When a response received from the SCN interface 77-2 is transferred tothe H323 termination unit 76-2 (Step S67 y), the H323 termination unit76-2 produces an IP packet 48-8, and then sends out the IP packet 48-8to the H323 termination unit 76-1 (Step S68). As a result, the IP packet48-8 is reached via the network node apparatus 7-4 and the IP telephonenetwork 4 to the network node apparatus 8-4, and then, is received viathe router 74-1 within the gateway 9-1 to the H323 termination unit76-1.

The H323 termination unit 76-1 understands that the received IP packet48-8 is a response(namely, user of analog telephone set 18-6 takes uphandset), and thus, sends out a data block 48-9 for implying a callsetting confirmation to the SCN interface 77-1. As a result, the SCNinterface 77-1 sends out a call setting confirmation signal to thecommunication line 17-1, and then, is delivered via the public switchedtelephone network 26-1 and the communication line 17-3 to the analogtelephone set 18-5.

The above-described Step S68 corresponds to such a procedure thatinformation of a response is transferred, namely, the IP packet 48-9 istransferred which notifies such a fact that the telephone communicationis commenced between the analog telephone set 18-5 and the analogtelephone set 18-6. When both the network node apparatus 7-4 and 8-4detect the IP packet 48-9, a record of the commencement of the telephonecommunication may be saved in a charge record file. In other words, sucha fact that the telephone communication is commenced between the analogtelephone sets 18-5 and 18-6 and a time instant thereof is saved in thecharge record file.

When the user of the analog telephone set 18-1 starts a telephoneconversation, a voice(speech) signal is transferred via thecommunication line 17-3, the public switched telephone network 26-1, andthe communication line 17-1 to the SCN interface 77-1 so as to beconverted into digital voice data. Next, the H323 termination unit 76produces an IP packet 48-10 containing the digital voice data. The voicepacket 48-10 is delivered to the analog telephone set 18-6 via therouter 74-1; the network node apparatus 8-4; the routers 19-8, 19-9,21-2, 19-11 and 19-13; the network node apparatus 7-4; the H323termination unit 76-3; the SCN interface 77-2; the communication line17-2; the public switched telephone network 26-2; and the communicationline 17-4 (Step S69). The voice of the user of the analog telephone set18-6 is delivered to the analog telephone set 18-5 along a directionopposite to the above-explained packet flow direction (Step S70),namely, is supplied via the SCN interface 77-2; the H323 control unit76-2; the network node apparatus 7-4; the routers 19-13, 19-11, 21-2,19-9 and 19-8; the network node apparatus 8-4; the H323 termination unit76-1 provided inside the gateway 9-1; the SCN interface 77-1; and thecommunication line 17-1.

When the user of the analog telephone set 18-5 puts on the handset inorder to end the telephone communication, the analog telephone set 18-5sends out a call interrupt signal indicative of ending of the telephoneconversation to the communication line 17-3. The SCN interface 77-1converts the call interrupt signal into a digital data format. Next, theH323 termination unit 76-1 produces an IP packet 48-12 which indicatesthat the telephone communication is ended, and then sends out the IPpacket 48-12 to the router 74-1 (Step S71). Then, the IP packet 48-12 isdelivered to the analog telephone set 18-6 via the network nodeapparatus 8-4; the routers 19-8, 19-9, 21-2, 19-11 and 19-13; thenetwork node apparatus (7-4); the H323 termination unit 76-2; and theSCN termination unit 77-2. The user of the analog telephone set 18-6 mayknow such a fact that the telephone communication is ended, and then,when this user puts on the handset of the analog telephone set 18-6, theSCN interface 77-2 interprets a confirmation of a call interrupt(namely,end of telephone communication), and requests the public switchedtelephone network 26-2 to notify “use fee of public switched telephonenetwork” which is required for the telephone communication between theanalog telephone sets 18-5 and 18-6. For example, when the communicationline 17-2 is the ISDN line, charge information is notified when thetelephone communication is ended.

The SCN interface 77-2 notifies the acquired use fee of the publicswitched telephone network as a charge fee to the H323 termination unit76-2. The H323 termination unit 76-2 grasps both a call releaseconfirmation and the charge fee, so that the below-mentioned twoprocedure operations can be carried out. As the first procedureoperation, the H323 termination unit 76-2 produces an IP packet 48-13,and sends out the IP packet 48-13 to the router 74-2. As a result, theIP packet 48-13 is delivered to the H323 termination unit 76-1 (StepS72) along a direction opposite to the above-explained packet flowdirection, namely, is supplied via the network node apparatus 7-4; therouters 19-13, 19-11, 21-2, 19-9 and 19-8; the network node apparatus8-4 to the H323 termination unit 76-1. Furthermore, as the secondprocedure process, the H323 termination unit 76-2 notifies a data block48-14 to a charging unit 72-2 by employing a data transfer functionoperable within the gateway 9-2. The data block 48-14 contains theinformation about the charge fee which has been acquired in accordancewith the above-explained procedure. The charging unit 72-2 may savethereinto the acquired charge information when the public switchedtelephone network 26-2 is used in the telephone communicationestablished between the analog telephone sets 18-5 and 18-6.

In accordance with the above-explained procedure operation, the analogtelephone set 18-5 transmits/receives the IP packet to/from the analogtelephone set 18-6, so that the telephone communication can beestablished.

The above-described Step S72 corresponds to such a procedure thatinformation of a call interrupt confirmation is transferred, namely, theIP packet 48-13 is transferred which notifies such a fact that thetelephone communication is ended between the analog telephone set 18-5and the analog telephone set 18-6. When both the network node apparatus8-4 and 7-4 detect the IP packet 48-13, a record of the completion ofthe telephone communication may be saved in a charge record file. Inother words, such a fact that the telephone communication is endedbetween the analog telephone sets 18-5 and 18-6 and an ending timeinstant are saved in the charge record file.

The IP telephone service operation/management server 36-1 managed by thecommunication company “X” acquires the above-described telephonecommunication starting record and telephone communication end record, insuch a manner that the IP telephone service operation/management server36-1 periodically, or temporarily transmits/receives an inquiry IPpacket with respect to the network node apparatus 8-4. Also, the IPtelephone service operation/management server 36-1 acquires theabove-explained charge information by transmitting/receiving the inquiryIP packet to/from the charging unit 72-1. Similarly, the IP telephoneservice operation/management server 36-2 managed by the communicationcompany “Y” acquires the above-explained telephone communicationstarting record and telephone communication end record in such a mannerthat the IP telephone service operation/management server 36-2periodically, or temporarily transmits/receives an inquiry IP packetwith respect to the network node apparatus 7-4. Furthermore, the IPtelephone service operation/management server 36-2 acquires the chargeinformation by transmitting/receiving the inquiry IP packet to/from thecharging unit 72-2.

In the above-described communication procedures, while the domain nameserver 78-1 may be removed from the gateway 9-1, the above-explainedSteps S63 to S65 may be replaced by the below-mentioned Steps S63 x andS65 x. In other words, the H323 termination unit 76-1 transmits an IPpacket 48-15 via the network node apparatus 8-4 to the domain nameserver 31-1 (Step S63 x). The IP packet 48-15 stores thereinto theaddress of the analog telephone set 18-5, namely the transmission sourceIP address “A185”; the address of the domain name server 31-1 dedicatedto the IP telephone network, namely the destination IP address “A311”;and the telephone number of the communication counter party “Tel-18-6name”. The domain name server 31-1 dedicated to the IP telephone networkreturns another IP packet 48-16 to the H323 termination unit 76-1 (StepS65 x). The IP packet 48-16 contains the IP address “A186” whichcorresponds to the telephone number of the communication counter party“Tel-18-6 name” in a 1-to-1 correspondence manner.

In the above-explained procedures defined from the Step S63 to the StepS65, or by both the Step S63 x and the Step S65 x, the network nodeapparatus 8-4 may confirm that the analog telephone set 18-5 is allowedto be communicated from the communication line 17-1 via the network nodeapparatus 8-4 by checking as to whether or not the combination betweenthe transmission source address “A781” contained in the IP packet 48-3produced in the domain name server 78-1 in the gateway and thecommunication line identification symbol “Line-17-1” similarly producedis registered in the address administration table 44-2 (refer to FIG.86), or by checking as to whether or not the combination between thetransmission source address “A185” contained in the IP packet 48-15produced in the H323 termination unit 76-1 and the communication lineidentification symbol “Line-17-1” similarly produced is registered inthe address administration table 44-2 (refer to FIG. 86).

<<Telephone Service Operation/Management Server>>

The IP telephone service operation/management server 36-1 managed by thecommunication company “X” acquires the above-explained telephonecommunication starting record and also telephone communication endrecord in such a manner that the IP telephone serviceoperation/management server 36-1 periodically, or temporarilytransmits/receives an inquiry IP packet with respect to both the networknode apparatus 8-2 and 8-4. Also, the IP telephone serviceoperation/management server 36-1 checks as to whether or not theinternal resources of the IP telephone network managed by thecommunication company “X” are operated under normal condition by usingsuch a means for transmitting/receiving an ICMP packet(namely, failuremanagement). These internal resources are, for instance, the routers19-8, 19-9, 19-10; the domain name server 31-1, and the communicationlines among the routers. Also, the IP telephone serviceoperation/management server 36-1 monitors as to whether or not thecongestion of the IP packets within the IP telephone network isexcessively increased(namely, communication quality control) in orderthat the IP telephone network of the communication company “X” may beoperated/managed in a batch mode.

Similarly, the IP telephone service operation/management server 36-2managed by the communication company “Y” acquires the above-explainedtelephone communication starting record and telephone communication endrecord in such a manner that the IP telephone serviceoperation/management server 36-2 periodically, or temporarilytransmits/receives an inquiry IP packet with respect to both the networknode apparatus 7-2 and 7-4. Also, the IP telephone serviceoperation/management server 36-2 operates/manages the failure managementand the communication quality of the IP telephone network of thecommunication company “Y” in a batch manner.

It should also be noted that the record about the telephonecommunication commencement defined at the Step S68, and the record aboutthe end of the telephone communication defined at the Step S72 among theabove-explained procedure may be omitted. In this alternative case, theacquisitions of both the telephone communication starting record and thetelephone communication end record by the communication company “X” andthe communication company “Y” may be omitted. It should also be notedthat both the IP telephone service operation/management servers 36-1 and36-2 may be subdivided into an IP telephone service server whichexclusively manages the IP telephone services, and also an IP telephonenetwork operation/management server which exclusively manages theresources of the IP telephone network.

3. Third Embodiment Using Media Router Inside Catv Communication Network

Referring now to FIG. 88, a description will be made of a thirdembodiment featured by that since the media router according to thepresent invention is used inside a CATV communication network, terminalsare communicated/connected to each other with employment of an IPtransfer network.

A media router 115 is located within a CATV gateway 113-2 employedinside a CATV network 113-1, and is connected via a communication 112 toa network node apparatus 111 provided in an integrated IP transfernetwork 110. Also, the media router 115 is connected via any one of aCATV line interface 114, and CATV lines 119-1 through 119-4 to IPterminals 116-1 through 116-3; an analog telephone set 117, a dependenttype IP telephone set 118-1, and a dependent type IP voice/imageapparatus 118-2. The CATV lines 119-1 to 119-4 contain communicationlower layers(namely, communication physical layer and data link layer)specific to the CATV lines, and also have functions for transferring IPpackets in a communication network. An IP packet transmitted from the IPterminal 116-1 is entered via the CATV line 119-1 to the CATV line,interface 114 in which the IP packet is derived. The derived IP packetis sent to the media router 115. The media router 115 is arranged in asimilar manner to that of the media router 14-1 shown in FIG. 23, andcontains the same function as that of the media router 14-1, forexample, a domain name server. Because of this reason, the media router115 can convert an IP packet containing call control data into DNSinquiry response format data, and can send out the converted IP packetto the communication line 112.

Also, such an IP packet is transmitted via the media router 115 to thecommunication line 112. The IP packet is inputted from the analogtelephone set 117, the dependent type IP telephone set 118-1, or thedependent type IP voice/image apparatus 118-2 through the CATV lines119-2 to 119-4 and the CATV line interface 114. Conversely, an IP packetwhich is sent from the network node apparatus 111 via the communicationline 112 may be transmitted via the media router 115, the CATV lineinterface 114, and thereafter any one of the CATV lines 119-1 to 119-4to any one of the IP terminal 116-1, the analog telephone set 117, thedependent type IP telephone set 118-1 and the dependent type IPvoice/image apparatus 118-2.

As previously explained in other embodiments, the IP terminal 116-1, theanalog telephone set 117, the dependent type IP telephone set 118-1 andthe dependent type IP voice/image apparatus 118-2 provided inside theCATV network 113-1 can establish the terminal-to-terminal communicationsvia the integrated IP transfer network 110 with respect to other variousterminals connected to the integrated IP transfer network 110, namely anIP terminal, an analog telephone set, an IP telephone set, and an IPvoice/image apparatus, while using the domain name server within theintegrated IP transfer network.

Since the IP terminal 116-1 indicates a host name of an IP terminalfunctioning as a communication counter party to the domain name serverwithin the integrated IP transfer network 110 via the CATV line 119-2and the CATV gateway 113-2 so as to acquire an IP address of the IPterminal of the counter party and subsequently data istransmitted/received from/to the IP terminal 116-1 to the IP terminal ofthe counter party, a terminal-to-terminal communication fortransmitting/receiving data can be carried out. Similarly, since theanalog telephone set 117 indicates a host name of an analog telephonefunctioning as a communication counter party, i.e., a telephone numberof a telephone set thereof to the domain name server within theintegrated IP transfer network 110 via the CATV line 119-2 and the CATVgateway 113-2 so as to acquire an IP address of the telephone set of thecounter party and subsequently voice data is transmitted/received fromthe analog telephone set 117 to the analog telephone set of the counterparty, a telephone communication can be carried out.

Similarly, since the dependent type IP telephone set 118-1 indicates ahost name of an analog telephone set functioning as a communicationcounter party, i.e., a telephone number of a telephone set of thecounter party to the domain name server within the integrated IPtransfer network 110 via the CATV line 119-2 and the CATV gateway 113-2so as to acquire an IP address of the analog telephone of the counterparty and subsequently voice data is transmitted/received from theanalog telephone set 117 to this analog telephone set of the counterparty, a telephone communication can be carried out.

4. Fourth Embodiment Using Gateway

Referring now to FIG. 89, a fourth embodiment will be explained in whichwhile a terminal storage wireless apparatus is combined with the gatewayaccording to the present invention, terminals are connected/communicatedwith each other by employment of an IP transfer network.

In this drawing, reference numeral 120 shows an integrated IP transfernetwork, reference numeral 121 denotes a network node apparatus,reference numeral 122 represents a gateway apparatus, 123 indicates awireless transmission/reception unit, reference numeral 124-1 shows awireless interface conversion unit, reference numeral 124-2 represents acommunication line, reference numeral 125 indicates a wirelesscommunication path, reference numeral 126 shows a terminal storagewireless apparatus, reference numeral 127 indicates a wirelesstransmission/reception unit, reference numeral 128-1 is an IP terminal,reference numeral 128-2 represents a dependent type IP telephone set,reference numeral 128-3 shows a dependent IP voice/image apparatus, andreference numerals 129-1 to 129-3 indicate wireless interface conversionunit. The gateway 122 owns the same function as that of theabove-described gateway 9-1 shown in FIG. 68. When terminals such as anIP terminal, an H323 terminal and an analog telephone set are connectedvia the communication line 124-2, the gateway 122 may be employed forcarrying out a terminal-to-terminal communication. Because of thisreason, since an IP terminal, an IP telephone set, and an IP voice/imageapparatus are connected to each other by using the communication line124-2, the gateway 122 may perform the terminal-to-terminalcommunication.

Both data having a DNS inquiry/response format sent from the IP terminal128-1 and text data which will be transmitted/received are convertedinto an input data format of a wireless transmission/reception unit bythe wireless interface conversion unit 129-1, and then the converteddata format is entered into the wireless transmission/reception unit127, and further supplied via the wireless communication path 125 to thewireless transmission/reception unit 123. Then, the data format isconverted into such a data format of an IP packet which is applicable toa gateway in the wireless interface conversion unit 124-1, and then theconverted IP packet is sent out via the communication line 124-2 to thegateway 122. Both telephone call controlling data anddigitally-represented voice(speech) data to be transmitted/received,which are transmitted from the dependent type IP telephone set 128-2,are converted into the input data formats of a wirelesstransmission/reception unit by the wireless interface conversion unit129-2, and then the converted data formats are inputted to the wirelesstransmission/reception unit 127. The converted data formats are suppliedvia the wireless communication path 125, the wirelesstransmission/reception unit 123, and the communication line 124-2 to thewireless interface conversion unit 124-1 so as to be converted into dataformats of IP packets which is applicable to a gateway by the wirelessinterface conversion unit 124-1. These data formats are sent to thegateway 122.

Both call control data of an IP voice/image apparatus anddigitally-expressed voice/moving image data to be transmitted/received,which are transmitted from the dependent type IP voice/image apparatus128-3 are converted into the input data formats of a wirelesstransmission/reception unit by the wireless interface conversion unit129-3, and then the converted data formats are inputted to the wirelesstransmission/reception unit 127. The converted data formats are suppliedvia the wireless communication path 125, the wirelesstransmission/reception unit 123, the wireless interface conversion unit124-1 and the communication line 124-2 to the wireless interfaceconversion unit 124-1 so as to be converted into data formats of IPpackets which is applicable to a gateway by the wireless interfaceconversion unit 124-1. These data formats are sent to the gateway 122.Also, as a data flow along a direction opposite to the above-describeddirection, for instance, an IP packet of an IP telephone supplied fromthe network node apparatus 121 is delivered via the gateway 122, thecommunication line 124-2, the wireless interface converting unit 124-1,the wireless transmission/reception unit 123, the wireless communicationpath 125, the wireless transmission/reception unit 127, and the wirelessinterface conversion unit 129-2 to the dependent type IP telephone set128-2.

Furthermore, the IP terminal 128-1, the dependent type IP telephone set128-2 and the dependent type IP voice/image apparatus 128-3, which areconnected to the terminal storage wireless apparatus 126, may establishthe terminal-to-terminal communication with respect to other variousterminals which are connected via the integrated IP transfer network 120to the integrated IP transfer network 120, namely an IP terminal, ananalog telephone set, an IP telephone set, an IP voice/image apparatusand the like.

5. Fifth Embodiment with Gateway Having Different Structure

This fifth embodiment is a gateway having a different structure fromthat of the gateway 9-1 shown in FIG. 68 of the second embodiment, andwill now be explained with reference to FIG. 90.

In this drawing, reference numeral 9-5 shows a gateway, referencenumeral 74-5 shows a router, reference numeral 78-5 denotes a domainname server, and reference numeral 79-5 represents a RAS mechanism. ThisRAS mechanism 79-5 manages registration/certification of terminals tothe gateway 9-5, and also internal states (for example, communicationstate and rest state) of the gateway 9-5. In this case, “registration ofterminal” implies that a terminal is connected to the gateway, whereas“certification of terminal” is to confirm as to whether or not aterminal can be formally utilized in accordance with a connectionpermission condition of the terminal. Reference numeral 80-5 shows aninformation processing mechanism for executing an information processoperation within the gateway 9-5. Reference numeral 81-5 shows anoperation input/output unit of the gateway 9-5, and reference numeral72-5 represents a charging unit. Reference numeral 82-3 represents agateway unit for H323 communication procedure(H323-GW), referencenumeral 75-3 denotes an H323 connection control unit, reference numeral76-3 shows an H323 termination unit, and reference numeral 77-3 denotesan SCN interface. Also, reference numeral 82-4 indicates a gateway unitfor SIP communication procedure(SIP-GW), reference numeral 75-4 shows anSIP connection control unit, reference numeral 76-4 denotes an SIPtermination unit, and reference numeral 77-4 represents an SCNinterface. Reference numeral 52-3 shows an IP communication line towhich an IP terminal is connectable, reference numeral 53-3 indicates acommunication line to which an IP telephone set of H323 communicationprocedure is connectable, and reference numeral 53-4 shows acommunication line to which an IP telephone set of SIP communicationprocedure is connectable. Also, reference numerals 17-3 and 17-4 denotecommunication lines connected to a public switched telephone network,respectively.

The gateway 9-5 of FIG. 90 is replaceable by the gateway 9-1 shown inFIG. 68 of the second embodiment, and the router 74-5 is replaceable bythe router 74-1. Also, the domain name server 78-5 is replaceable by thedomain name server 78-1, the RAS mechanism 79-5 is replaceable by theRAS mechanism 79-1, the information processing mechanism 80-5 isreplaceable by the information processing mechanism 80-1, and theoperation input/output unit 81-5 is replaceable by the operationinput/output unit 81-1. Also, the charging unit 72-5 is replaceable bythe charging unit 72-1, the H323 connection control unit 75-3 isreplaceable by the H323 connection control unit 75-1, the H323termination unit 76-3 is replaceable by the H323 termination unit 76-1,and further, the SCN interface 77-3 is replaceable by the SCN interface77-1. Under such a circumstance, after the gateway 9-5 of FIG. 90 hasbeen replaced by the gateway 9-1 of FIG. 68, a communication may becarried out by the following manner. That is, an IP terminal isconnected to a tip of the IP communication line 52-3, an IP telephoneset of H323 communication procedure is connected to a tip of thecommunication line 53-3, an analog telephone set is connected to a tipof the communication line 17-3, and also is connected via the gateway9-5 to the terminals 11-10 and 18-6 of FIG. 69 in the second embodiment,which are connected to the integrated IP transfer network 2. Further,reference numeral 82-3 of H323-GW indicates gateway communicationinterface function unit for H323 communication procedure.

Similarly, symbol SIP-GW 82-4 is a gateway communication interfacefunction unit for SIP communication procedure, and is connected to thetelephone set 18-6 of FIG. 69 from the IP telephone set for SIPcommunication procedure connected to a tip of a communication line 53-4via the communication line 53-4, the SIP termination unit 76-4 whichoperates the terminal in accordance with the SIP communicationprocedure, and also the SIP connection control unit 75-4 and the router74-5, for connecting the terminals in accordance with the SIPcommunication procedure, so that the communication can be carried out.Moreover, SIP-GW 82-4 is connected from a telephone set connected to atip of the communication line 17-4 via the SCN interface 77-4 to thetelephone set 18-6, so that the communication can be carried out.

Both H323-GW 82-3 and SIP-GW 82-4 may provide communication lineinterfaces corresponding to the two communication procedures. In future,when a communication means is newly developed, a gateway used for thisnew communication means may be additionally provided at the locations ofboth the gateways 82-3 and 82-4. Alternatively, since a plurality ofgateway communication interface function units depending upon a sort ofcommunication procedures are employed, the gateway may be applied tovarious telephone connection controls for various communicationprocedures.

6. Sixth Embodiment Using Telephone Management Server

In FIG. 91, reference numeral 201 is an integrated IP communicationnetwork, reference numeral 202 indicates an IP data network, referencenumeral 203 shows an IP telephone network, and reference numeral 204represents a voice/image network. Also, reference numeral 206-1 shows arange of an integrated IP communication network which isoperated/managed by a communication company “1”, and reference numeral206-2 denotes a range of an integrated IP communication network which isoperated/managed by a communication company “2”. Referring now to FIG.91 and FIG. 92, a preparation of a telephone communication is explainedas follows. That is, a description is made of a terminal-to-terminalcommunication control method by which a telephone communication is madefrom an analog telephone set 213-5 to another analog telephone set 214-4via a media router 212-1, a communication line 210-1, a network nodeapparatus 208-1, an internal structure of an IP telephone network 203, anetwork node apparatus 209-2, a communication line 210-5 and also amedia router 212-2. In this embodiment, reference numerals 219-1 to219-10 and 221-2 represent routers.

Also, various sorts of severs are installed within the integrated IPcommunication network 201, and IP addresses are applied to therespective servers. As indicated in FIG. 91, various sorts of servers,the routers, and the node apparatus are connected to each other via IPcommunication lines, and may exchange data with each other bytransmitting/receiving IP packets by using IP communication means ownedin the respective units. Reference numerals 209-1 to 209-2 showtelephone gateways by which a telephone communication can be carriedout, for example, from the analog telephone set 209-4 via a publicswitched telephone network 209-3 to other telephone sets(which has beenexplained in other embodiments). It should be noted that telephoneadministration servers 313-5 and 314-5 are substantially equal to theconnection servers 1-5 and 1-6 of FIG. 18. Both the gateways 209-1 and209-2 are substantially equal to the relay connection server 1-7 of FIG.18. The functions of these gateways will be described in otherembodiment.

Reference numerals 213-1 and 214-1 show PBX for storing analog telephonesets, and reference numerals 213-2 to 213-6 and 214-2 to 214-6 representanalog telephone sets. The telephone sets 213-2 to 213-3 are connectedto the PBX 213-1, whereas the telephone sets 214-2 and 214-3 areconnected to the PBX 214-1. The telephone sets 213-4 to 213-6 areconnected to the media router 212-1, and the telephone sets 214-4 to214-6 are connected to the media router 212-2.

An IP address “EA01” is applied to the media router 212-1, and an IPaddress “EA02” is applied to the media router 212-2. A representativetelephone number “Tel-No-1” is applied to the telephone sets 213-4 to213-6, a representative telephone number “Tel-No-2” is applied to thetelephone sets 214-4 to 214-6, and extension telephone numbers “2132”,“2133”, “2142” and “2143” are applied to the telephone sets 213-2,213-3, 214-2 and 214-3, respectively. In this example, no telephonecommunication is established by the extension telephone sets 213-2 and213-3 from the media router 212-1 to a telephone set provided on theside of the IP telephone network 203. Similarly no telephonecommunication is established by the extension telephone sets 214-2 and214-3 from the media router 212-2 to a telephone set provided on theside of the IP telephone network 203.

<<Preparation of Telephone Communication>>

A user 227-1 who wishes to use an IP telephone requests an IP telephoneacceptance person 228-1 belonging to the communication company “1” touse an IP telephone service (Step P100 of FIG. 92). The IP telephoneacceptance person 228-1 acquires from the user 227-1, a user name, auser address, a payment way of a communication fee, and a user telephonenumber “Tel-No-1”, which constitute the propose information of the IPtelephone. Also, an external IP address “EA01” applied to the mediarouter 212-1, an identification symbol “L210-1” of the communicationline 210-1 used to be connected to the media router 212-1 by the user,and also a network node apparatus identification number “NN-208-1” ofthe network node apparatus 208-1 to which the communication line 210-1is connected are notified to a user service server 313-6 (Step P101). Inthis case, the user 227-1 indicates the IP address “EA01” to the IPtelephone acceptance person 228-1.

The user sets the IP address “EA01” to the media router 212-1, which isused in correspondence with the user telephone number “Tel-No-1”. Next,the user service server 313-6 applies to the user 227-1, a useridentification symbol “UID-1” used to identify the accepted telephoneuser, and determines an internal IP address “IA01” for the user 227-1while the symbol “UID-1” is made in correspondence with the external IPaddress “EA01”. Then, the user service server 313-6 stores informationinto a database of the user service server (Step P102). This informationis related to the user name, the user address, the payment way of thecommunication fee, the user telephone number “Tel-No-1”, and theexternal IP address “EA01”. Since the telephone set 213-5 uses theexternal IP address “EA01” corresponding to the telephone number“Tel-No-1”, such a representation that the external address of thetelephone set 213-5 is equal to “EA01” in the telephone communication byusing the IP telephone network 203.

Next, the user service server 313-6 notifies at least theabove-described user telephone number “Tel-No-1”, external IP address“EA01”, internal IP address “IA01” of the IP telephone request person tothe telephone administration server 313-5 by employing the IPcommunication means (Step P103).

The telephone administration server 313-5 notifies one set ofcorresponding information, namely, the user telephone number “Tel-No-1”,the external IP address “EA01” and the internal IP address “IA01”, tothe telephone domain name server 313-2 (Step P105). The telephone domainname server 313-2 saves the user telephone number “Tel-No-1”, “theexternal IP address” and “internal IP address” in such a format as theresource records which are determined based on the operation rule of thedomain name server defined as RFC 1996 (Step P106).

Furthermore, the telephone administration server 313-5 notifies fouraddresses “EA01, EA81, IA01, IA81” to a table administration server313-3 (Step P107). It should be understood that the telephoneadministration server 313-5 continuously saves both an external IPaddress “EA81” and an internal IP address “IA81” of a telephone proxyserver 313-1.

When the table administration server 313-3 notifies the above-explainedfour addresses “EA01, EA81, IA01, IA81” with respect to the network nodeapparatus 208-1 (Step P108), the network node apparatus 208-1 holds fouraddresses “EA01, EA81, IA01, IA81” (Step P109). These four addresses areindicated on a first record of the address administration table 360-1provided in the network node apparatus 208-1 as indicated in FIG. 93. Inthis case, the address “IA01” corresponds to an IP address which isapplied to a joint point(logic terminal) between the communication line210-1 and the network node apparatus 208-1. This IP address “IA01” willbe referred to as an “internal IP address” hereinafter, which is appliedto the logic terminal of the communication line 210-1. At this time, arecord indicated in a second row of the address administration table360-1 is empty.

It should be understood that the record indicated in the first row ofthe address administration table 360-1 is called as an “IP communicationrecord” of the address administration table of the network nodeapparatus, and then the IP communication record is defined based uponthe external IP address “EA01” of the transmission source, the externalIP address “EA81” of the destination, the internal IP address “IA01” ofthe transmission source, and also the internal IP address “IA81” of thedestination. In particular, this IP communication record is referred toas the “IP communication record” of an address administration table of anetwork node apparatus which defines an IP communication pathestablished between the representative telephone proxy server 313-1 andthe media router 212-1.

Similarly, a user 227-2 who wishes to use an IP telephone requests an IPtelephone acceptance person 228-2 belonging to the communication company“2” to use an IP telephone service (Step P110 of FIG. 92). The IPtelephone acceptance person 228-2 acquires from the user 227-2, a username, a user address, a payment way of a communication fee and a usertelephone number “Tel-No-2”, which constitute the propose information ofthe IP telephone. Also, the external IP address “EA02” applied to themedia router 212-2, an identification symbol “L210-5” of thecommunication line 210-5 used to be connected to the media router 212-2by the user, and also a network node apparatus identification number“NN-209-2” of the network node apparatus 209-2 to which thecommunication line 210-5 is connected are notified to a user serviceserver 314-6 (Step P111). In this case, the user 227-2 indicates theacquired IP address “EA02” to the IP telephone acceptance person 228-2.

The user sets the IP address “EA02” to the media router 212-2, which isused in correspondence with the user telephone number “Tel-No-2”. Next,the user service server 314-6 applies to the user 227-2, a useridentification symbol “UID-2” used to identify the accepted telephoneuser, and determines an internal IP address “IA02” for the user 227-2 incorrespondence with the external IP address “EA02”. Then, the userservice server 314-6 stores information into a database of the userservice server (Step P112). The information is related to the user name,the user address, the payment way of the communication fee, the usertelephone number “Tel-No-2” and the external IP address “EA02”. Sincethe telephone set 214-4 uses the external IP address “EA02”corresponding to the telephone number “Tel-No-2”, such a representationis used that the external IP address of the telephone set 214-4 is equalto “EA02” in the telephone communication by using the IP telephonenetwork 203.

Next, the user service server 314-6 notifies at least theabove-described user telephone number “Tel-No-2”, external IP address“EA02”, internal IP address “IA02” of the IP telephone request person tothe telephone administration server 314-5 by employing the IPcommunication means (Step P113). The telephone administration server314-5 notifies one set of corresponding information, namely, the usertelephone number “Tel-No-2”, the external IP address “EA02” and theinternal IP address “IA02”, to the telephone domain name server 314-2(Step P115). The telephone domain name server 314-2 saves one set ofsuch information which is made in correspondence with the user telephonenumber “Tel-No-2”, the external IP address “EA02” and internal IPaddress “IA02” in such as format as the resource records (Step P116).Furthermore, the telephone administration server 314-5 notifies fouraddresses “EA02, EA82, IA02, IA82” to a table administration server314-3 (Step P117).

It should also be noted that the telephone administration; server 314-5continuously saves the external IP address “EA82” and the internal IPaddress “IA82” of the a telephone proxy server 314-1. Also, both thetelephone domain name servers 313-2 and 314-2 owns a redialing functionsimilar to that of a domain name server used in the Internet. Thus, thetelephone domain name servers 313-2 and 314-2 may exchange there owninformation to each other, if necessary (Step P120).

When the table administration server 314-3 notifies the above-explainedfour addresses “EA02, EA82, IA02, IA82” with respect to the network nodeapparatus 209-2 (Step P118), the network node apparatus 209-2 holds fouraddresses “EA02, EA82, IA02, IA82” (Step P119). These four addresses areindicated on a first record of the address administration table 360-2provided in the network node apparatus 209-2 as indicated in FIG. 94. Inthis case, the address “IA02” corresponds to an IP address which isapplied to a joint point(logic terminal) between the communication line210-5 and the network node apparatus 209-2. At this time, a recordindicated in a second row of the address administration table 360-2 isempty. In particular, this IP communication record is referred as an “IPcommunication record” of an address administration table of a networknode apparatus which defines an IP communication path establishedbetween the telephone proxy server 314-1 and the media router 212-2.

<<Communication Path Establishing Phase>>

Referring now to FIG. 91, and FIG. 93 to FIG. 95, a description will bemade of a method for controlling a terminal-to-terminal communicationconnection in which a telephone call is made from the telephone set213-5 to the telephone set 214-4.

The media router 212-1 holds both the telephone number of “Tel-No-1” andthe external IP address “EA01”, and the media router 212-2 holds boththe telephone number of “Tel-No-2” and the external IP address “EA02”.When the telephone set 213-5 establishes a telephone communication withanother telephone set, the telephone number of “Tel-No-1” applied to themedia router 212-1 is used, whereas when the telephone set 214-4establishes a telephone communication with another telephone set, thetelephone number of “Tel-No-2” applied to the media router 212-2 isemployed.

<<Connection Phase>>

In the case that the user picks up the handset of the telephone 213-5(off hook), dials the telephone number of “Tel-No-2” of the telephoneset 214-4 functioning as the communication counter party, and thentransmits the inputted telephone number to the media router 212-1 (StepP200), the media router 212-2 responds to this telephone number (StepP201).

Next, the media router 212-1 produces such an IP packet(refer to 379 ofFIG. 96) which contains at least the transmission source telephonenumber “Tel-No-1”, the destination telephone number “Tel-No-2”, and theuser identification information(User-Info.), and then transmits the IPpacket to the network node apparatus 208-1, so that the media router212-1 commences a procedure of telephone call setting operation (StepP204). It should be noted that the user identificationinformation(User-Info.) may be delivered to the media router 212-2 at aStep P219 (will be explained later). This user identificationinformation is constituted by a telephone call identifier “C-id” used tomanage, for example, a telephone call on the user side; anidentification symbol for a voice(speech) compression system of an IPtelephone; and an identification symbol of a voice code conversioncodes. A payload portion of an IP packet 379 shown in FIG. 96 may beused as an UDP segment. For instance, both a transmission source portnumber and a destination port number may be employed as “5060” in orderthat a program for controlling the telephone communication connectionprovided inside the media router 212-1 and 212-2 is discriminated fromother programs.

Upon receipt of the IP packet, the network node apparatus 208-1retrieves the address administration table 360-1 shown in FIG. 93 so asto seek such a record that the transmission source IP address is “EA01”as the external IP address and the destination IP address of “EA81” iscontained. In this example, when the network node apparatus 208-1 findsout the record indicated in the first row of the address administrationtable 360-1 from the top row, namely, the record being equal to “EA01,EA81, IA01, IA81”, the network node apparatus 208-1 applies thecapsulating technique of the IP packet to form an IP packet 380 equal toan internal IP packet shown in FIG. 97 by using the IP addresses “IA01”and “IA81”, which are described in third and fourth addresses inside therecord. Thereafter, the network node apparatus 208-1 transmits such atelephone proxy server 313-1 whose IP address is equal to “IA81” (StepP205). In this case, a payload portion of the IP packet 380 correspondsto “379” of the IP packet.

When the telephone proxy server 313-1 receives the IP packet 380, thetelephone proxy server 313-1 produces an IP packet 381 whose payloadportion is equal to the IP packet 379, and sends the produced IP packet381 to the telephone administration server 313-5 whose IP address isequal to “IA91” (Step P206). The telephone administration server 313-5determines a communication line identifier(CIC-1-2) as, for instance,CIC-1-2=“Tel-1-No-1”+“Tel-No-2”, depending upon a combination betweenthe transmission source telephone number “Tel-No-1” and the destinationtelephone number “Tel-No-2”, and then saves the communication lineidentifier(CIC-1-2) into the telephone administration server 313-5. Inthis case, symbol “+” implies that the telephone number isarranged(namely, coupling of data).

The telephone administration server 313-5 notifies both the transmissionsource telephone number “Tel-No-1” and the destination telephone number“Tel-No-2”, which are received at the previous Step P206, to thetelephone domain name server 313-2 (Step P207). The telephoneadministration server 313-5 receives from the telephone domain nameserver 313-2, the external IP address of “EA01” corresponding to thetelephone number “Tel-No-1” in a 1-to-1 correspondence relationship; theinternal IP address of “IA01”; and both the IP address “EA02” and theinternal IP address “IA02”, which correspond to the telephone number“Tel-No-2” in a 1-to-1 correspondence relationship (Step P208). In thiscase, the telephone domain name server 313-2 inquires IP addressinformation of the telephone number “Tel-No-2” to the telephone domainname server 314-2 by employing the redialing function so as to acquirethe IP address information. The telephone administration server 313-5checks as to whether or not the IP address “EA01” received from thetelephone domain name server 313-2 is made coincident with thetransmission source IP address “EA01” which has been acquired from theinside of the IP packet 381 at the Step P206. When the IP address is notmade coincident with the transmission source IP address, the telephoneadministration server 313-5 stops the telephone connection procedure. Tothe contrary, when the IP address is made coincident with thetransmission source IP address, the telephone administration server313-5 additionally saves the IP address “EA01” of the transmissionsource telephone set, the internal IP address “IA01” thereof, the IPaddress “EA02” of the destination telephone set, and also the internalIP address “IA02” thereof into the information of the held communicationline identifier(CIC-1-2). It should be noted that as to the IP packet ofthe communication among the servers provided inside the integrated IPcommunication network, an IP packet 382 having a format shown in FIG. 99is transmitted/received by employing the internal IP address.

The network node apparatus is not equal to the server. The IP packettransmitted/received between the network node apparatus and thetelephone proxy server corresponds to such an IP packet having acapsulated format shown in FIG. 97 and FIG. 101, whereas the IP packettransmitted/received between the network node apparatus and the mediarouter corresponds to an IP packet before being capsulated, to which theexternal IP address as shown in FIG. 96 has been applied.

Next, the telephone administration server 313-5 transmits such an IPpacket(IAM packet) via a representative server 313-7 of thecommunication company “1” (Step P214) and via a representative server314-7 of the communication company “2” (Step P215) to the telephoneadministration server 314-5 of the communication company “2” (StepP216). The IP packet contains the IP address “EA01” of the transmissionsource telephone set, the internal IP address “IA01” thereof, thetransmission source telephone number “Tel-No-1”, the IP address “EA02”of the destination telephone set, the internal IP address “IA02”thereof, the destination telephone number “Tel-No-2”, the useridentification number(User Info.), and the communication lineidentifier(CIC-1-2). Then, the telephone administration server 314-5receives the four IP addresses “EA01, IA01, EA02, IA02”; the twotelephone numbers “Tel-No-1” and “Tel-No-2”; the communication lineidentifier “CIC-1-2”; and the user identificationinformation(User-Info.), and saves all of the received items other thanthe user identification information (User-Info.) into the internalcircuit thereof.

Furthermore, the telephone administration server 314-5 whose internaladdress is “IA92” notifies the IP packet 383 of FIG. 100 to thetelephone proxy server 314-1 whose internal IP address is equal to“IA82” (Step P217). In this case, the IP packet 383 contains the IPaddress “EA01” of the transmission source telephone set, the IP address“EA02” of the destination telephone set, the transmission sourcetelephone number “Tel-No-1”, the destination telephone number“Tel-No-2”, and the user additional information(User-Info.). Then, thetelephone proxy server 314-1 forms an IP packet 384 shown in FIG. 101and sends the IP packet 384 to the network node apparatus 209-2 (StepP218). The network node apparatus 209-2 performs the inverse-capsulationof such an IP packet by removing the header of the IP packet 384 to forman IP packet 385 shown in FIG. 102, and then transmits the IP packet 385to the media router 212-2 (Step P219). The media router 212-2 acquiresthe IP address “EA01” of the transmission source telephone set, the IPaddress “EA02” of the destination telephone set, the transmission sourcetelephone number “Tel-No-1”, the destination telephone number “Tel-No-2”and the user additional information(User-Info.).

Next, the media router 212-2 returns the reception of theabove-explained information for notifying the telephone reception inconnection with two sets of the telephone numbers “Tel-No-1” and“Tel-No-2” to the telephone administration server 314-5 (Steps P221,P222, P223). This telephone administration server 314-5 restores thecommunication line identifier(CIC-1-2) from the two telephone numbers“Tel-No-1” and “Tel-No-2”, and then transmits a receptionconfirmation(acknowledgment) IP packet(ACM packet) of above-explainedinformation containing the communication line identifier(CIC-1-2) viathe telephone administration server 313-5 to the media router 212-1(Steps P224 to P229).

Next, the media router 212-2 notifies the telephone call(call reception)to the telephone set 214-4 (Step P230), and when the telephone set 214-4accepts the telephone call, the telephone set 214-4 produces telephonecalling sound. The media router 212-2 notifies such a fact that thetelephone set 214-4 having the called telephone number “Tel-No-2” isbeing called via the network node apparatus 209-2 (Step P231) andfurther via the telephone proxy server (Step P232) to the telephoneadministration server 314-5, while attaching a set of the transmissionsource telephone number “Tel-No-1” and the destination telephone number“Tel-No-2” (Step P233). The telephone administration server 314-5 of thecommunication company 2 restores the communication lineidentifier(CIC-1-2) by employing the set of the transmission sourcetelephone number “Tel-No-1” and the destination telephone number“Tel-No-2” sent from the media router 212-2. Next, the telephoneadministration server 314-5 forms a reception confirmation IP packet(CPGpacket) of the above-explained information containing the communicationline identifier(CIC-1-2), and then sends the CPG packet to the telephoneadministration server 313-5 (Steps P234, P235, P236). The telephoneadministration server 313-5 receives the CPG packet and reads thecommunication line identifier(CIC-1-2) from the CPG packet.

Next, while the telephone administration server 313-5 employs thecommunication line identifier(CIC-1-2), in such a case that thetelephone administration server 313-5 reads out both the address and thetelephone number which are recorded/saved at the Step P214, and thentransmits at least the IP address “EA01” of the media router 212-1connected to the transmission source telephone set; the IP address“EA02” of the media router 212-2 connected to the destination telephoneset; the transmission source telephone number “Tel-No-1”; and thedestination telephone number “Tel-No-2” to the telephone proxy server313-1 (Step P237), these items are notified via the network nodeapparatus 208-1 (Step P238) to the media router 212-1 (Step P239). Themedia router 212-1 informs that the destination telephone set 214-4 isbeing called to the transmission source telephone set 213-5 (Step P240),and the transmission source telephone 213-5 produces the telephonecalling sound.

On the other hand, when the user of the telephone set 214-4 hears thetelephone calling sound to take up the handset of this telephone set(offhook), the IP telephone set 214-4 notifies the off hook condition to themedia router 212-2 (Step P241). Then, the media router 212-2 notifiesthe off hook notification via the network node apparatus 209-2 (StepP242), and further, via the telephone proxy server (Step P243) to thetelephone administration server 314-5 (Step P244). The telephoneadministration server 314-5 of the communication company 2 restores thecommunication line identifier(CIC-1-2) from the set of both thetransmission source telephone number “Tel-No-1” and the destinationtelephone number “Tel-No-2”, and forms a reception confirmation IPpacket(ANM packet) of the above-explained information containing thecommunication line identifier(CIC-1-2) to transmit the ANM packet to thetelephone administration server 313-5 (Steps P245, P246, P247). Thetelephone administration server 313-5 receives the ANM packet so as toread out the communication line identifier(CIC-1-2) from the ANM packet.

While the telephone administration server 314-5 employs thecommunication line identifier(CIC-1-2) held at the stage of the StepP245, the telephone administration server 314-5 reads both the IPaddress and the telephone number which are held/stored at the previousStep P217. Next, the telephone administration server 314-5 notifies boththe IP address “EA01” and the internal IP address “IA01” of thetransmission source telephone set and the IP address “EA02” and theinternal IP address “IA02” of the media router 212-2 connected to thedestination telephone set to the table administration server 314-3 (StepP250). The table administration server 314-3 saves thereinto a set ofthe communication line identifier(CIC-1-2); both the IP address “EA01”and the internal IP address “IA01” of the transmission source telephoneset; and both the IP address “EA02” and the internal IP address “IA02”of the destination telephone set, and also stores these IP addressesinto the address administration table 360-2 contained in the networknode apparatus 209-2 (Step P251). This condition is indicated as arecord of a second row of the address administration table 360-2 of FIG.94.

While using the read communication line identifier(CIC-1-2), thetelephone administration server 313-5 reads out both the IP address andthe telephone number saved/stored at the Step P214. Next, the telephoneadministration server 313-5 notifies the communication line identifier(CIC-1-2), both the IP address “EA01” and the internal IP address “IA01”of the transmission-sided media router 212-1; and both the IP address“EA02” and the internal IP address “IA02” of the destination mediarouter 212-2 to the table administration server 313-3 (Step P252). Thetable administration server 313-3 holds thereinto the communication lineidentifier(CIC-1-2); both the IP address “EA01” and the internal IPaddress “IA01” of the transmission source telephone set; and both the IPaddress “EA02” and the internal IP address “IA02” of the destinationtelephone set, and further holds these items into the addressadministration table 360-1 provided in the network node apparatus 208-1(Step P253). This condition is indicated as the record of the second rowof the address administration table 360-1 of FIG. 93.

The record of the second row in the address administration table 360-1of FIG. 93 corresponds to an “IP communication record of addressadministration table” which is set into the network node apparatus. Thecontent of the IP communication record is ruled based upon such adefinition made of the transmission source external IP address “EA01”,the destination external IP address “EA02”, the transmission sourceinternal IP address “IA01”, and the destination internal IP address“IA02”.

The IP communication record of the second row of the addressadministration table 360-1 contains both the external IP address “EA01and the external IP address “EA02”, and determines such an IPcommunication path defined between the media router 212-1 to which theexternal IP address “EA01” is applied, and the media router 212-2 towhich the external IP address “EA02” is applied. Also, the IPcommunication record of the second row of the address administrationtable 360-2 determines an IP communication path established between themedia router 212-1 and the media router 212-2.

It should be noted that the transmission source external IP address“EA01” is determined in a 1-to-1 correspondence relationship withrespect to the telephone number “Tel-No-1”, and similarly, thedestination external IP address “EA02” is determined in a 1-to-1correspondence relationship with respect to the telephone number“Tel-No-2”, and when the transmission source is not discriminated fromthe destination, the IP communication record of the addressadministration table of the network node apparatus is merely equal to arecord of an address administration table for determining an IPcommunication path between the telephone number “Tel-No-1” and thetelephone number “Tel-No-2”.

The above-explained Step P245 corresponds to such a procedure capable ofnotifying response information: for confirming a call setting operation,namely capable of notifying such a possibility that the telephonecommunication between the telephone set 213-5 and the telephone set214-4 is commenced. The telephone administration server 314-5 notifies,for instance, the communication line identifier(CIC-1-2); the IP address“EA01” of the transmission source media router 212-1; the IP address“EA02” of the destination media router 212-2; the transmission sourcetelephone number “Tel-No-1”; the destination telephone number “Tel-No-2”to a charging administration server 314-4 on the basic of such a timeinstant when the telephone communication can be started (Step P254).Then, the charging administration server 314-4 can record/hold thereintothe communication line identifier(CIC-1-2); the transmission sourcetelephone number “Tel-No-1”; the destination telephone number“Tel-No-2”; the IP address “EA01” of the transmission source mediarouter 212-1; and the IP address “EA02” of the destination media router212-2 (Step P254).

Similarly, the charging administration server 313-4 can record/holdthereinto the transmission source telephone number “Tel-No-1”; thedestination telephone number “Tel-No-2”; the IP address “EA01” of thetransmission source telephone set; and the IP address “EA02” of thedestination telephone set (Step P255). Also, the telephoneadministration server 313-5 notifies to the telephone set 213-5, such afact that the user of the destination telephone set 214-4 takes up thehandset so as to respond to the telephone call. In other words, thetelephone administration server 313-5 notifies the response to thetelephone call via the telephone proxy server 313-1 (Step P256), andfurthermore via the network node apparatus 208-1 (Step P257) and themedia router 212-1 (Step P258) to the telephone set 213-5 (Step P259).

A series of the above-explained steps defined from the Step P200 up tothe step P259 will be referred to as a “connection phase of a telephonecommunication”. At the Step P200, the user of the IP telephone set 213-5takes up the handset. At the Step P259, the completion of the callsetting operation is notified to the telephone 213-5. Also, in theabove-explained terminal-to-terminal connection control, such acommunication line connected from the network node apparatus 208-1 viathe communication line 370-1, and also via the router 219-1, therepresentative servers 313-7 and 314-7, the router 219-2, and thecommunication line 370-5 to the network node apparatus 209-2 will bereferred to as a “connection control line” inside the IP telephonenetwork 203. The connection control line is used in order totransmit/receive an IP packet for controlling the terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection.

<<Communication Phase>>

Referring now to FIG. 103 to FIG. 106, a communication phase will bedescribed. Voice entered into the telephone set 213-5 is transferred toa media router (Step P300), and the media router digitalizes the voiceto form an IP packet 387, and transmits the IP packet 387 to the networknode apparatus 208-1 (Step P301). The IP packet 387 is capsulated andthen is converted into an internal IP packet 388. This internal packet388 is reached via a communication line 370-3; routers 219-5, 219-7,221-1, 219-10 and 219-9; a communication line 370-6 to a network nodeapparatus 209-2 (Step P302). Then, the IP packet 387 isinverse-capsulated by removing the IP header to be converted into an IPpacket 389. This IP packet 389 is delivered via a media router 212-2(Step P303) to a telephone set 214-4 (Step P304). Voice of a user of thetelephone set 214-4 is transferred along a direction opposite to theabove-explained direction. In other words, the voice of the user of thetelephone set 214-4 is reached via the media router 212-2 (Step P305),the network node apparatus 209-2 (Step P306), and the routers 219-9,219-10, 221-1, 219-7, 219-5 to the network node apparatus 208-1 (StepP307), and then is delivered via the media router 212-1 (Step P308) to atelephone set 213-5 (Step P309).

In the above-explained communication phase, while payload portions ofthe IP packets 387 and 389 are used as “UDP segments”, both atransmission source UDP port number and a destination UDP port numberare changed into, for example, “5004”, “5006”, “5010”, “5012”, “5016”etc., so that a telephone communication for transferring other voice canbe established. An IP packet 388 containing digitalized voice istransferred through a communication line which connects from the networknode apparatus 208-1 via the communication line 370-3; the routers219-5, 219-7, 221-1, 219-10, 219-9; and the communication line 370-6 tothe network node apparatus 209-2. As a result, the IP communication lineis called as a “voice communication line” employed in the IP telephonenetwork 203. The voice communication line may be discriminated from theabove-described “connection control line” of the IP telephone network203 in the connection phase.

In the communication phase, a record indicated on a second row of anaddress administration table 360-1 shown in FIG. 93 is carried out byemploying a record of an address administration table for determiningthe IP communication path between the telephone number “Tel-No-1” andthe telephone number “Tel-No-2”, namely the IP communication recordequal to the transmission source external IP address “EA01”; thedestination external IP address “EA02”; the transmission source internalIP address “IA01”; and the destination internal IP address “IA02”.

<<Release Phase>>

Referring now to FIG. 107, a release phase is explained. In such a casethat the user of the telephone set 213-5 puts on the handset thereof inorder to accomplish the telephone communication and then notifies theend of the telephone communication to the media router 212-1 (StepP400), the media router 212-1 produces such an IP packet which containsat least an indication of a request for releasing a telephonecommunication, the transmission source telephone number “Tel-No-1”, andthe destination telephone number “Tel-No-2”. When the media router 212-1sends the produced IP packet to a network node apparatus 208-1 (StepP401), this network node apparatus 208-1 produces such an IP packet madeby that the received IP packet is capsulated by employing a record of afirst row of the address administration table 360-1 shown in FIG. 93,and then transmits the produced IP packet to the telephone proxy server313-1 (Step P402). Next, the pilot telephone administration server 313-1produces such an IP packet containing the indication of the telephonerelease request, the transmission source telephone number “Tel-No-1”,and the destination telephone number “Tel-No-2”, which have beenproduced by the media router in the beginning and transmits the producedIP packet to the telephone administration server (Step P403). Theabove-explained formats of the IP packets and the setting method of theIP addresses used in the above-explained Steps P401, P402, P403 areidentical to those of the Steps P204, P205, P206 in the telephonecommunication connection phase.

The telephone administration server 313-5 restores the communicationline identifier(CIC-1-2) from both the telephone numbers “Tel-No-1” and“Tel-No-2” so as to produce an IP packet(REL packet) containing both theindicative of requesting the release of the telephone communication andthe communication line identifier(CIC-1-2), and then sends the IP packetto the representative server 313-7 of the communication company “1”(Step P404). The IP packet is reached via the representative server314-7 of the communication company 2 (Step P405) to the telephoneadministration server 314-5 under management of the communicationcompany “2” (Step P406).

Next, the telephone administration server 313-5 returns such a releasecompletion IP packet via the telephone proxy server 313-1 and thenetwork node apparatus 208-1 to the media router 212-1 (Steps P407,P408, P409). This release completion IP packet reports that the releaserequest defined at the Steps P400 to P403 is carried out. Also, thetelephone administration server 313-5 transmits an IP packet containingthe communication line identifier(CIC-1-2) to the table administrationserver 313-3 (Step P433). Since the table administration server 313-3holds the address corresponding to the communication lineidentifier(CIC-1-2) after the process operation of the Step P252 hasbeen carried out, the table administration server 313-3 confirms toreceive an instruction for deleting the four IP addresses “EA01, EA02,IA01, IA02”, and then deletes the record indicated on the second row ofthe address administration table 360-1 employed in the network nodeapparatus 208-1 shown in FIG. 93. In other words, the tableadministration server 313-3 deletes the transmission source external IPaddress “EA01”; the destination external IP address “EA02”; thetransmission source internal IP address “IA01”; the destination internalIP address “IA02”; and the IP communication record (Step P434). That isto say, the table administration server 313-3 deletes the record of theaddress administration table which determines the IP communication pathbetween the telephone number “Tel-No-1” and the telephone number“Tel-No-2”.

When the telephone administration server 314-5 receives the IP packetcontaining both the communication line identifier(CIC-1-2) and theindication of the release request at the Step P406, the telephoneadministration server 314-5 forms a release requesting IP packet andsends the IP packet to the telephone proxy server 314-1. The IP packetfor implying the instruction of the release request is reached via thenetwork node apparatus 209-2 to the media router 212-2 (Steps P411,P412, P413). Also, since the telephone administration server 314-5reports that the process operation of the Step P411 is accomplished, thetelephone administration server 314-5 produces an IP packet(RLC packet)containing the communication line identifier(CIC-1-2), and then sendsthe RLC packet to the representative server 314-7 of the communicationcompany “2” (Step P414). The RLC packet is reached via therepresentative server 313-7 of the communication company 1 (Step P415)to the telephone administration server 313-5 under administration of thecommunication company “1” (Step P416). The telephone administrationserver 313-5 which receives the release completion IP packet notifiesthe end of the telephone communication to the charging administrationserver 313-4 (Step P442), this charging administration server 313-4knows such a fact that the telephone communication is ended, which isidentified by the communication line number(CIC-1-2), and then recordsthe result inside the server.

Next, the telephone administration server 314-5 transmits the IP packetcontaining the communication line identifier(CIC-1-2) to the tableadministration server 314-3 (Step P431), and this table administrationserver 314-3 deletes a set of 4 addresses defined by “EA02, EA01, IA02,IA01” corresponding to the content of the record on the second row ofthe address administration table 360-2 provided in the network nodeapparatus 209-2 shown in FIG. 94 (Step P432). When the media router212-2 knows the release request of the telephone communication at theStep P413, the media router 212-2 instructs the telephone set 214-5 tocutoff the telephone communication (Step P420), and subsequently returnsthe release completion IP packet to the network node apparatus 209-2,the telephone proxy server 314-1, and the telephone administrationserver 314-5 (Steps P421, P423, P424). The IP packet reports that therelease request is carried out at the Step P413. When the telephoneadministration server 314-5 notifies the end of the telephonecommunication of the call number to the charging administration server314-4 (Step P441), this charging administration server 314-4 knows sucha fact that the telephone communication is ended, which is identified bythe communication line number(CIC-1-2), and then records the resultinside the server.

<<Items Related to Telephone Communication Connection Control>>

The following case is conceivable. That is, a telephone user keeps atelephone communication for a long time, and does not accomplish thistelephone communication. Namely, a telephone ending Step P400 shown inFIG. 107 is not executed. In this case, such a risk may be expected thata telephone communication fee is increased to an infinite amount. Toavoid such a risk, for example, the telephone administration server313-5 may inquire a telephone communication fee to the chargingadministration server 313-4 every time a long time period(e.g., 24hours) has passed. When the telephone administration server 313-5detects the long telephone communication, the telephone administrationserver 313-5 may separately carry out the process operations defined atthe Steps P404, P407, P433, P442 except for the process operationsdefined from: the Steps P400 to P403 of FIG. 107.

<<Collecting Method of Other Communication Fees>>

As to a communication fee, for instance, while a charging informationcollection server for the communication company is installed inside theintegrated IP communication network 201, charging information collectedby the charging administration server 313-4 is acquired to be notifiedto the user service server 313-6, and then the telephone fee may becharged to the telephone user from the charging server. Similarly, acharging information collection server may be installed in thecommunication company “2”. The above-explained collected charginginformation may be exchanged between the communication company “1” andthe communication company “2” by employing the IP communication meansvia the representative servers 313-7 and 314-7 of the communicationcompanies.

<<In Case of Single Communication Company>>

Even in such a case that the operation/management range 206-2 of thecommunication company 2 shown in FIG. 91 is not present, and the IPtelephone network 203 constitutes the operation/management range of thecommunication company “1”, the operation of the above-describedtelephone connection phase is available. As a result, as represented inFIG. 108, the operation/management range 206-2 of the communicationcompany “2” is changed into the operation/management range of thecommunication company “1”, the representative server 314-7 of thecommunication company 2 is avoidable, and the IP communication line isemployed so as to connect the router 219-1 to the router 219-2 with eachother. As a consequence, in the connection phase of the telephonecommunication, the Steps P214 to P216 shown in FIG. 95 become a StepP214X shown in FIG. 109; the Steps P224 to P226 shown in FIG. 95 becomeanother Step P224X indicated in FIG. 109; the Steps P234 to P236 shownin FIG. 95 become another Step P234X indicated in FIG. 109; and theSteps P245 to P247 shown in FIG. 95 become a further Step P245Xindicated in FIG. 109; and also other Steps of FIG. 95 are identical tothose of FIG. 109.

A series of all telephone communication preparations of thecommunication company “2” are changed into those of the communicationcompany “1”. Among a series of the above-explained steps described inboth the telephone communication connection phase and the telephonecommunication release phase, the communication established between thetelephone administration server 313-5 and the telephone administrationserver 314-5 is left, and a series of the processing steps which arecarried out by both the representative server 313-7 of the communicationcompany 1 and the representative server 314-7 of the communicationcompany 2 are omitted. Moreover, such a telephone administration servermay be formed by employing the telephone administration server 313-5 andthe telephone administration server 314-5. As a result, in theabove-described telephone communication connection phase, the StepsP214X, P224X, P234X, P245X, P254X indicated in FIG. 109 are omitted; theSteps P217, P223, P233, P244, P250, P251 become P217 x, P223 x, P233 x,P244 x, P250 x, P251 x shown in FIG. 110, respectively; and other Stepsshown in FIG. 109 are identical to those of FIG. 110.

<<Explanation No. 1 Related to Connection Control of TelephoneAdministration Server>>

In the above-explained Step P214 in which the communication is made fromthe telephone administration server 313-5 to the representative server313-7 of the communication company, before inquiring to the telephonedomain name server 313-2, it can be known as to whether the destinationtelephone number “Tel-No-2” belongs(/is joined) to the IP telephonenetwork managed/operated by the own communication company, or the IPtelephone network managed/operated by another communication company.This process operation is carried out as follows:

The telephone administration server 313-5 may solve the above problem byemploying “communication company section table of telephone number”. Adescription will now be made of an example of the communication companysection table of the telephone number shown in FIG. 111. As a record ofa serial No. 1 of the communication company section table,“81-3-5414-xxxx” is indicated in the column of “telephone number”; “No”is denoted in the column of “own communication company?”; and “Com-130”is indicated in the column of “identification information of anothercommunication company”. Symbol “xxxx” implies decimal notation of “0000”to “9999”. In this case, the telephone numbers “81-3-5414-0000” to“81-3-5414-9999” show such a fact that these telephone numbers belong tothe IP telephone network managed by the communication company identifiedby symbol “Com-130”. Also, a telephone number “1-2245-5678” described ona record of a serial No. 2 of the communication company section tablebelongs to the IP telephone network operated/managed by thecommunication company identified by symbol “Com-025”. Also, a telephonenumber “81-47-327-3887” described on a record of a serial No. 3 of thecommunication company section table belongs to the IP telephone networkoperated/managed by the communication company to which the telephoneadministration server 313-5 belongs.

<<Explanation No. 2 Related to Connection Control of TelephoneAdministration Server>>

In the above-explained Step P214 in which the communication is made fromthe telephone administration server 313-5 to the representative server313-7 of the communication company, even when it can be seen that the IPtelephone set of the destination telephone number “Tel-No-2” isoperated/managed by the own communication company, it is possible toknow as to whether or not such a telephone set whose telephone number is“Tel-No-2” and to which another telephone administration server isconnected is joined to which network node apparatus, which will beexplained as follows: The telephone administration server 313-5 maysolve this problem by way of a telephone administration server sectiontable of telephone number. An explanation will be made of an example ofa telephone administration server section table of telephone numbersshown in FIG. 112.

The telephone number “81-47-325-3887” on the record of the serial No. 1of the telephone administration server section table represents such afact that the telephone set is joined (namely, the communication line isconnected) to the network node apparatus operated/managed by thetelephone administration server 313-5. The telephone number“81-2245-56xx” described on the record of the serial No. 2 of thetelephone administration server section table indicates such a fact thatthe telephone numbers of “81-2245-5600” to “1-2245-5699” arejoined(namely, communication line is connected) to the network nodeapparatus which is operated/managed by such a communication company inwhich the IP address of the telephone administration server is equal to“100.10.11.40”. Next, the telephone number “81-6-1234-xxxx” described onthe record of the serial No. 3 of the telephone administration serversection table indicates such a fact that the telephone numbers of“81-6-1234-0000” to “81-6-1234-9999” are joined(namely, communicationline is connected) to the network node apparatus which isoperated/managed by such a communication company.

<<Operation/Management of Network by Operation/Management Server>>

While the operation/management server 313-9 of the communication company“1” periodically, or temporarily uses internal resources of theoperation/management range 206-1 of the communication company “1”,namely the network node apparatus 208-1, 208-2; the routers 219-1,219-3, 219-5, 219-6, 219-7; the telephone domain name server 313-2; thetelephone administration server 313-5; the pilot telephoneadministration server 313-1; the table administration server 313-3; thecharging management server 313-4; the representative server 313-7; theuser service server 313-6; and the telephone gateway 209-1; and furtherthe IP communication means, or the means for transmitting/receiving theICMP packet, the operation/management server 313-9 checks as to whetheror not these resources are operated under normal conditions.Alternatively, the operation/management server 313-9 checks as towhether or not the communication lines among the resources are operableunder normal states(failure management), or checks as to whether or notcongestion of the IP packet within the network becomes excessivelylarge(communication quality control). As a result, theoperation/management server 313-9 operates/manages the internalresources of the operation/management range 206-1 of the communicationcompany “1” in a batch manner. Both the failure condition and thecommunication quality condition of the network resources containing thecommunication line, which are acquired by the operation/managementresults, may be reported via the user service server 313-6 to thetelephone user 227-1.

Similarly, while the operation/management server 314-9 of thecommunication company “2” periodically, or temporarily communicatesvarious sorts of resources provided inside the operation/managementrange 206-2 of the communication company 2, the server checks as towhether or not these resources are operated under normal condition.Alternatively, the operation/management server 314-9 checks as towhether or not the communication lines among the resources are operableunder normal states(failure management), or checks as to whether or notcongestion of the IP packet within the network becomes excessivelylarge(communication quality control). As a result, theoperation/management server 314-9 operates/manages the internalresources of the operation/management range 206-2 of the communicationcompany “2” in a batch manner. Both the failure condition and thecommunication quality condition of the network resources containing thecommunication line, which are acquired by the operation/managementresults, may be reported via the user service server 314-6 to thetelephone user 227-2.

Since the above-described network operation/management are carried outby the operation/management servers 313-9 and 314-9, it is possible toimprove the reliability in the terminal-to-terminal communicationconnection control of the telephone network 203 provided inside the IPtransfer network 201 established between the IP telephone set 213-5 andthe IP telephone set 214-4. Similarly, since the network operationeconomical base of the communication company can be supported by thecollecting means of the communication fees by the chargingadministration servers 313-4 and 314-4, it is possible to improve thereliability in the terminal-to-terminal communication connection controlof the telephone network 203 within the IP transfer network 201.

The contents of the embodiment 6 will now be summarized withsupplemental information as follows: That is, the IP transfer networkcontains at least the network node apparatus, the telephoneadministration server, the media router, the telephone domain nameserver and the table administration server. A user “i” (i=1, 2, 3, . . .)sets the individual external IP address “EA-i” to the media router ofthe user located outside the IP transfer network, one, or more telephonesets are connected to the media router of the user “i”, and the mediarouter is connected via the communication line to any one of the networknode apparatus. An internal IP address “IA-i” used for the communicationof the user “i” is applied to the termination unit(logic terminal) onthe side of the network node apparatus of the communication line, andalso the telephone number of the individual user is applied to the mediarouter. Also, the telephone domain name server holds the set constitutedby the telephone number of the individual user; the external IP address“EA-i” of the media router; and the internal IP address “IA-i”. When thetelephone domain name server is inquired as to the telephone number ofthe individual user, the telephone domain name server responds both theexternal IP address and the internal IP address, and also sets the IPcommunication record for determining the IP communication pathestablished between the media router and the telephone proxy server intothe network node apparatus.

The IP communication record is used to request the transmission sourcetelephone set, and is transferred via the telephone proxy server to thetelephone administration server. The telephone administration serverrequests the telephone domain name server so as to acquire both theexternal IP address of the transmission source media router and theinternal IP address(“EA-i, IA-i”) thereof from the transmission sourcetelephone number, or both the external IP address and the internal IPaddress(“EA-j, IA-j”) of the destination media router from thedestination telephone number. Then, the table administration server setsthese IP addresses to the network node apparatus on the transmissionside and the network node apparatus on the destination side as the IPcommunication records which are used in the telephone communicationsbetween the transmission source telephone set and the destinationtelephone set. When the telephone set on the transmission source siderequests the call setting operation, the media router on thetransmission source side sends the IP packet containing both thedestination telephone number and the transmission source telephonenumber to the telephone administration server on the transmission sourceside. Then, the telephone administration server on the transmissionsource side exclusively determines the line number(CIC) for identifyingthe communication line for the telephone voice based upon the set of thedestination telephone number and the transmission source telephonenumber.

Next, the telephone administration server on the transmission sourcetransmits “IAM packet for requesting telephone call setting operation”which contains the transmission source telephone number, the destinationtelephone number, and the line number to the telephone administrationserver on the destination side. The telephone administration server onthe destination side notifies the call reception to the media router onthe destination side. When the telephone reception of the telephone setis allowed, the telephone administration server on the destination sidetransmits the above-explained “ACM packet for notifying reception of IAMpacket” via the telephone administration server on the transmissionsource to the media router on the transmission source side. Also, themedia router on the destination side requests the telephone set on thedestination side to execute the telephone call setting operation. Whenthe telephone set produces the telephone calling sound, the media routerinforms to the telephone administration server on the destination side,such a fact that the telephone set is being called. The telephoneadministration server on the destination side transmits “CPG packet fornotifying call reception” to the telephone administration server on thetransmission source, and then, the telephone management server on thetransmission source side notifies the call reception via the mediarouter to the telephone set on the transmission source side.

In response to the call setting request, the telephone set on thedestination side notifies the response via the media router on thedestination side to the telephone administration server on thedestination side. The telephone administration server on the destinationside produces ANM packet for indicating response to call settingrequest, and transmits the ANM packet to the telephone administrationserver on the transmission side. The telephone administration server onthe transmission source side notifies the response to request the callsetting operation to the media router on the transmission source side.The telephone set on the transmission source side stops the callingsound, and is advanced to the communication phase. When the telephonecommunication of the telephone set on the transmission source side, orthe destination side is ended, and also the cut request of the telephonecalling operation is notified, this cut request is notified via themedia router to the telephone administration server.

The telephone administration server which requests telephone callinterruption forms “REL packet for requesting end of telephonecommunication” by employing the line number(CIC), and then, transmitsthe REL packet to the telephone administration server on the callinterrupt side. This telephone administration server on the callinterrupt side returns “RLC packet for reporting reception of RELpacket”. The telephone administration server on the call interrupt sidenotifies the end report of the telephone communication to the mediarouter on the interrupt request side.

After the telephone communication is ended, the telephone administrationserver may collect the telephone communication record containing theline number, the communication time instant, and the telephone number,and then may notify the telephone communication record to both theoperation managing server and the charging server. In theterminal-to-terminal communication connection control establishedbetween the telephone administration server and the relay telephoneadministration server, and also the terminal-to-terminal communicationconnection control established between the two telephone administrationservers, the above-explained IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL and RLC aretransmitted/received. The IP packet is transmitted/received between thetelephone administration server and the media router so as to performthe terminal-to-terminal connection control.

While the payload portion of the IP packet is used as the UDP segment,and also both the telephone call connection phase and the telephonerelease phase are used as a single port number, a single call controlprogram for managing both the connection phase and the telephone releasephase may be utilized in the different telephone communications. Also,in the telephone communication phase, since the UDP port numbersdifferent from each other every telephone set are allocated, even whenthe media router is only one IP address, the different voice everytelephone set may be transferred. In order that one telephoneadministration server may solely play: both the function of thetelephone administration server on the transmission side and thefunction of the telephone administration server on the reception side,the above-explained telephone administration server may perform theprocedures of both the telephone communication connection phase and thetelephone release phase in combination with both the transmission sourcemedia router and the destination media router via the telephone proxyserver.

In order that the telephone administration server may know as to whetherthe destination telephone number belongs to the IP telephone networkoperated/managed by the own communication company, or by anothercommunication company, the telephone administration server may employthe communication company segment table of the telephone number. Also,in order to know such a fact that the telephone set having thedestination telephone number is joined to which network node apparatus,the telephone administration server may employ the telephoneadministration server segment table of the telephone number. Since theoperation/management server of the communication company exchanges theinformation with respect to the network node apparatus of theoperation/management range of the communication company, the varioussorts of servers, and also the telephone gateway so as to operate/managethe internal resources of the network in the batch node, the reliabilityin the terminal-to-terminal communication connection control inside thenetwork can be improved. Otherwise, the operation/management server canimprove the reliability of the terminal-to-terminal communicationconnection control of the IP transfer network in conjunction with thecharging administration server.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned IP encapsulationand reverse-capsulation by the network node apparatus can be replaced tothe simple encapsulation which forms an internal packet by adding asimple header to an external IP packet and the simplereverse-capsulation which removes the simple header from the internalpacket, respectively.

7. Seventh Embodiment in which Structures of Media Routers are Differentfrom Each Other

FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram for explaining a method for applying anIP address and a telephone number with respect to a media router. FIG.114 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a capsulation relation itemof an IP packet of a network node apparatus. Referring to thesedrawings, a seventh embodiment will now be explained.

A media router 530 stores IP telephone sets 515-1 to 515-4, and analogtelephone sets 516-1 to 516-3, and is connected from the line interfaceunit 533 via logic communication lines 539-1 through 539-3 fortransmitting/receiving IP packets to a network node apparatus 540. Inthis, case, a physical communication line 538 contains all of theselogic communication lines 539-1 to 539-3.

The media router 530 executes a telephone call control, and other majorprocess operations of the media router 530. The media router 530contains an analog interface unit 532 having a connection interfacebetween a media router major unit 531 and an analog telephone set, aline interface unit 533, an address telephone number correspondencetable 534, and a telephone set administration table 535. The mediarouter major unit 531 contains thereinto IP addresses “EA01”, “EA12”,“EA13” and “ADR”. The IP address “EA01” is made in 1-to-1 correspondencewith the telephone number “Tel-No-1”; the IP address “EA12” is made in1-to-1 correspondence with the telephone number “Tel-No-12”; and alsothe IP address “EA13” is made in 1-to-1 correspondence with thetelephone number “Tel-No-13”. This condition is indicated in an addresstelephone number correspondence table 534. Telephone numbers applied toboth an IP telephone set and an analog telephone set are managed byemploying an address administration table. As a result, when a telephonenumber is changed, the address administration table is rewritten.

While ports 538-1 to 538-7 are provided inside the media router majorunit 531, such port numbers as “1” to “7” are applied to these ports.Furthermore, these ports are directly connected via communication linesto IP telephone sets, or indirectly connected via an analog interfaceunit 532 to analog telephone sets 516-1 to 516-3. To these IP telephonesets 515-1 to 515-4, such identifier names as “Id-5” to “Id-8” and IPaddresses “AD01” to “AD04” are applied. This condition is represented onsuch records within a telephone set administration table 535 in whichport numbers are selected to be 1 to 4. Symbol “D” within the telephoneset administration table shows an IP telephone set, and symbol “A”denotes an analog telephone set. The IP address “EA01” is applied to theport 532-1, the IP address “EA12” is applied to the port 532-2, and theIP address “EA13” is applied to the port 532-3. Both the ports 538-1 and532-1 are connected to each other by the communication line, and boththe ports 538-7 and 532-3 are connected to each other by thecommunication line. Since the IP telephone set 515-1 is connected viathe communication line 517-1 to the port 538-1, when the IP telephone515-1 is connected via the media router 530 to the network nodeapparatus, the IP address “EA01” may be employed. Similarly, the IPaddress “EA13” is fixedly allocated to the analog telephone set 516-3.When the analog telephone set 516-3 is connected via the media router530 to the network node apparatus, the IP address “EA13” may becontinuously employed. This condition is indicated in such a recordequal to the port 1 of the address administration table 535, and alsosuch a record equal to the port 7 thereof.

Both the port 538-4 and the port 538-5 are connected to each other viathe communication line. The IP telephone set 515-4 is connected via thecommunication line 517-4; the ports 538-4 and 538-5; the analoginterface 532; and the communication line 518-1 to the analog telephoneset 516-1, so that the IP telephone set 515-4 can establish thetelephone communication with the analog telephone set 516-1. Similarly,the IP telephone set 515-2 is connected via the communication line517-2; the ports 538-2 and 538-3; and the communication line 517-3 tothe IP telephone set 515-3, so that the IP telephone set 515-2 canestablish the telephone communication with the IP telephone set 515-3.

The telephone communication between two analog telephone sets may beestablished by a function of an analog interface unit. The IP telephonesets 515-1 to 515-4 digitalize voice, and superimpose the digitalizedvoice on an IP packet to thereby send the IP packet, and also restorethe digitalized voice to obtain analog voice as a reverse function. Theanalog interface unit digitalizes the voice received from the analogtelephone sets 516-1 to 516-3 and then sends the digitalized voice tothe media router major unit 531, and also restores the digitalized voicereceived from the media router major unit 531 to obtain analog voice asa reverse function thereof, and then supplies the analog voice to theanalog telephone set.

<<A Series of Procedures Executed in Media Router and Network NodeApparatus for Telephone Connection>>

When the handset of the IP telephone set 515-1 is taken up, a calling IPpacket 520 is transferred via the communication line 517-1 to the mediarouter major unit 531. In this case, a transmission source IP address is“AD01”, and a destination IP address is “ADR”, which are written in aheader contained in the IP packet 520. The media router major unit 531returns an IP packet of “call acceptance” to the IP telephone set 515-1.Next, when the user of the IP telephone set 515-1 dials the telephonenumber “Tel-No-4” of the communication counter party, such a “callsetting” IP packet is produced inside the IP telephone set 515-1, andthen is transmitted to the media router 530. The IP packet contains thetransmission source telephone number “Tel-No-1” and the telephone number“Tel-No-4” of the communication counter party in the payload of the IPpacket.

The media router 530 receives the above IP packet in the media routermajor unit 531, and produces such an IP packet containing at least boththe transmission source telephone number “Tel-No-1” and the destinationtelephone number “Tel-No-4”, and then transmits the produced IP packetto the network node apparatus 540 so as to commence the call settingprocedure.

When the network node apparatus 540 receives an IP packet 521, anaddress administration table 541 shown in FIG. 114 is retrieved so as toseek such a record which contains the transmission source IP address of“EA01” as the external IP address and the destination IP address of“EA81”. In this case, when the network node apparatus 540 finds out arecord indicated on a first row of the address administration table 541from a top row, namely such a record described as “EA01, EA81, IA01,IA81”, the network node apparatus 540 produces an internal IP packet 542by using the IP address of “IA01” and “IA81” described in a third rowand a fourth row with the record by applying the capsulation method ofthe IP packet, and then transmits the IP packet 542 to such a pilottelephone administration server 545 whose IP address is equal to “IA81”.In this case, the payload portion of the IP packet 542 is the IP packet521. It should be understood that since the physical communication line538 contains all of the logic communication lines 539-1 to 539-3 in theabove-explained case, the logic terminals 543-1 to 543-3 are selected tobe all of the same internal IP address values “IA01”.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned IP encapsulationand reverse-capsulation by the network node apparatus can be replaced tothe simple encapsulation which forms an internal packet by adding asimple header to an external IP packet and the simplereverse-capsulation which removes the simple header from the internalpacket, respectively.

8. 8th Embodiment for Executing Closed-Area Telephone Communication

In FIG. 115, reference numeral 1001 shows an integrated IP communicationnetwork, reference numeral 1002 indicates an IP data network, referencenumeral 1003 represents an IP telephone network, reference numeral 1004denotes an IP voice/image(audio/visual) network, reference numeral 1005indicates a range of an integrated IP communication networkoperated/managed by a communication company “1”, and reference numeral1006 represents a range of an integrated IP communication networkoperated/managed by a communication company “2”. Also, referencenumerals 1002 to 1004 also correspond to IP transfer networks having IPpacket transfer functions. These IP transfer networks may exchangeinformation by employing the IP communication means fortransmitting/receiving IP packets inside the IP transfer networks. An IPaddress used outside the integrated IP communication network 1001 iscalled as an external IP address, whereas an IP address employed insidethe integrated IP communication network 1001 is referred to as aninternal IP address. Also, reference numerals 1011 to 1017 indicatetelephone sets. Reference numerals 1021 to 1025 show media routers, andreference numerals 1080 and 1081 indicate telephone gateways. Referencenumerals 1082 and 1083 show public switched telephone networks(PSTN),and reference numerals 1084 and 1085 represent telephone sets.

Next, a description will now be made of a “method for controllingterminal-to-terminal communication connection” in which a telephonecommunication connection is carried out from the telephone set 1011 viathe media router 1021, the communication line 1040, the network nodeapparatus 1031, the inside of the IP telephone network 1003, the networknode apparatus 1032, the communication line 1041 and the media router1022 to the telephone set 1012.

The users of the telephone sets 1011 to 1013 previously determinetelephone numbers, and values of external IP addresses which are appliedto the media routers connected to these telephone sets. Referring now toFIG. 117 and FIG. 118, the telephone set 1011 uses the telephone number“Tel-No-1”, and the external IP address “EA1” is applied to the mediarouter 1021. Also, telephone set 1012 uses the telephone number“Tel-No-2”, and the external IP address “EA2” is applied to the mediarouter 1022, and further, the telephone set 1013 uses the telephonenumber “Tel-No-3”, and the external IP address “EA3” is applied to themedia router 1023. Also, such a setting operation is made as follows.That is, when the telephone number “Tel-No-1” is indicated, any of thetelephone number servers 1026 to 1028 answer the external IP address“EA1”. When the telephone number “Tel-No-2” is indicated, any of thetelephone number servers 1026 to 1028 answer the external IP address“EA2”. Also, when the telephone number “Tel-No-3” is indicated, any ofthe telephone number servers 1026 to 1028 answer the external IP address“EA3”. This method may be realized by applying the known technique ofthe domain name server(DNS) in which, for example, a telephone numbergroup such as extension telephone numbers “100” to “199” is made incorrespondence with a domain name “1” by way of a predetermined rule,for instance, 100-digit numbers are set to “1”.

<<Preparation of Telephone Communication>>

A preparation of a telephone communication will now be explained withreference to FIG. 115 and FIG. 116, a user 1060 proposes a telephoneacceptance person 1061 to use a telephone (Step A100 of FIG. 116). Thetelephone acceptance person 1061 acquires from the user 1060, a username, a user address, a payment way of a communication fee, and theexternal IP addresses “EA1” and “EA2” which constitute the proposeinformation of the telephone, an identification symbol “L-1040” of thecommunication line 1040 and also a network node apparatus identificationnumber “NN-1031” of the network node apparatus 1031, an identificationsymbol “L-1041” of a communication line 1041, and an identificationsymbol “NN-1032” of a network node apparatus 1032, and then notifiesthese acquired items to a user service server 1041 (Step A101). The userservice server 1041 determines a user identification symbol “UTD-1” usedto identify the user 1060, and saves the user propose information suchas the external IP addresses “EA1” and “EA2” and the user name acquiredfrom the above acceptance into a database owned in the user server 1041(Step A102).

Next, when the user service server 1041 notifies to a telephoneadministration server 1042, the external IP addresses “EA1” and “EA2”;the identification symbols “L-1040” and “L-1041” of the communicationline; and the identification symbols “NN-1031” and “NN-1032” of thenetwork node apparatus, which are obtained by the above procedure (StepA103), the telephone administration server 1042 determines internal IPaddresses “IA1” and “IA2”, and notifies the four addresses “EA1, EA2,IA1, IA2” to the table administration server 1043 (Step A107). In thiscase, the internal IP address of “IA1” is such an internal IP addressapplied to a joint point between the communication line 1040 and thenetwork node apparatus 1031, and the internal IP address of “IA2” issuch an internal IP address applied to a joint point between thecommunication line 1041 and the network node apparatus 1032, which arevalues internally determined by the integrated IP transfer network 1001by employing the identification symbols “NN-1031” and “NN-1032” of thenetwork node apparatus, and the identification symbols “L-1040” and“L-1041” of the communication line. Both the telephone administrationservers 1042 and 1065 exchange information with the IP communicationmeans so as to confirm that these values are identical to each other inadvance.

When the table administration server 1043 notifies the above-explainedfour addresses to the network node apparatus 1031 (Step A108), thenetwork node apparatus 1031 holds the four addresses “EA1, EA2, IA1,IA2” as a first record of the address administration table 1034 providedin the network node apparatus as shown in FIG. 117 (Step A109). A recordof a first row in the address administration table 1034 is defined as anIP communication record between the media router 1021 having theexternal IP address “EA1” and the media router 1022 having the externalIP address “EA2”. The IP communication record may provide addressinformation contained in an IP header, while the IP packet is capsulatedto produce the internal IP packet. Similarly, as a record of a secondrow of the address administration table 1034, the four addresses “EA1,EA3, IA1, IA3” are set as the IP communication record.

Another user 1062 proposes the telephone acceptance person 1063 toreceive a telephone service in a similar manner. As indicated in FIG.118, an IP communication record is set between the media router 1022having the external IP address “EA2” and the media router 1021 havingthe external IP address “EA1” within the network node apparatus 1032 ina similar procedure(namely, Steps A110 to A119 of FIG. 116). Inaccordance with the same principle idea, an IP communication record isset, or another IP communication record is set between the media router1022 having the external IP address “EA2” and the media router 1023having the external IP address “EA3” in the first record to the fourthrecord of the address administration table 1035. Instead of theabove-described procedure in which the user 1062 proposes to telephoneacceptance person 1063 so as to set the IP communication record betweenthe media router 1022 and the media router 1021, another user 1060 maypropose another telephone acceptance person 1061 so as to set an IPcommunication record between the media router 1022 and the media router1021. As a result, when the telephone administration server 1042executes the above Step “A107”, this server simultaneously executes thestep “A117-2” (refer to FIG. 116) in order to request the tableadministration server 1066 to set the IP communication record.

<<Connection Phase>>

The user takes up the handset of the telephone set 1011 to dial thetelephone number “Tel-No-2” of the telephone set 1012 of thecommunication counter party, and sends a telephone call to the mediarouter administration unit 1056 provided inside the media router 1021(Step A200 of FIG. 119). The media router administration unit 1056confirms the telephone call (Step S201).

The media router administration unit 1056 indicates the telephone number“Tel-No-2” to the telephone number server 1026 (Step A202), acquires thecorresponding IP address “EA2” of the media router 1022 (Step A203), andproduces an external IP packet 1070 (refer to FIG. 120) used to set atelephone calling operation, and then sends the external IP packet 1070to the network node apparatus 1031 (Step A204). The external IP packet1070 contains the transmission source telephone number “Tel-No-1”, thedestination telephone number “Tel-No-2”, the telephone call identifier“C-ID”, and the connection control relative information “Info-1”. Inthis case, such an example is made that an IP address area of an IPheader of the external IP packet 1070 corresponds to both thetransmission source IP address “EA1 and the destination IP address“EA2”; a payload portion of the external IP packet 1070 corresponds to aUDP segment; the transmission source port number is “5060”; and thedestination port number is “5060”. A telephone call identifier “C-ID” isemployed in order that a telephone call defined from the connectionphase up to the voice communication phase, and the release phase afterthe telephone call has been issued in the telephones communication maybe discriminated from other telephone calls. The connection controlrelative information “Info-1” contains at least the UDP port number, forexample, “5004” in the voice communication phase, and also may includean identification symbol of a voice compression system, a voice codeconversion code identification symbol, and the IP address “EA1” of themedia router 1021 as other contents. In this case, both the media routeradministration units 1056 and 1057 set both the telephone callidentifier “C-ID” and the connection control relative information“Info-1” based upon a previously determined rule, and may refer to them.

Upon receipt of the IP packet 1070, the network node apparatus 1031confirms that the internal IP address is equal to “IA1”, the internal IPaddress is applied to the termination unit(logic terminal) of thecommunication line 1040 into which the IP packet 1070 is inputted, andalso the destination external IP address of the IP packet 1070 is equalto “EA2”, and thereafter retrieves the address administration table 1034shown in FIG. 117. In the beginning, the network node apparatus 1031retrieves such an IP communication record whose transmission sourceinternal IP address is equal to “IA1”, and subsequently, retrieves as towhether or not the destination external IP address “EA2” is contained inthe IP communication record within the detected IP communication record.

Next, the network node apparatus 1031 checks as to whether or not thetransmission source external IP address “EA1” within the IP packet 1070is contained in the detected IP communication record. In such a casethat the network node apparatus 1031 finds out such an IP communicationrecord “EA1, EA2, IA1, IA2”, namely a first row of the addressadministration table 1034 from the top row, the network node apparatus1031 applies the capsulation technical method of the IP packet byemploying the address “IA1” and “IA2” described in the third row and thefourth row inside the IP communication record so as to produce aninternal IP packet 1071 shown in FIG. 121. The capsulation technicalmethod is to apply a new IP header to the external IP packet 1070.

In the above-explained retrieving operation of the IP communicationrecord within the address administration table in the beginning, thenetwork node apparatus 1031 retrieves such an IP communication recordwhose transmission source internal IP address is equal to “IA1” (pluralsubjects and present), and subsequently, retrieves as to whether or notthe destination external IP address “EA2” is contained in the IPcommunication record within the detected IP communication record.Alternatively, such a retrieve operation of the transmission sourceexternal IP address “EA1” may be omitted. When the IP packet iscapsulated, both the transmission source IP address “IA1” of theinternal IP address and the destination IP address “IA2” are set to theIP address area of the header portion of the internal IP packet. Theformed internal IP packet 1071 is transmitted to the network nodeapparatus 1032 (Step A205), and is reached via the routers 1035-1 to1035-6 to the network node apparatus 1032. The network node apparatus1032 executes the inverse-capsulation of the IP packet except for theheader of the IP packet 1071 so as to restore an IP packet 1072 (referto FIG. 122). Then, this IP packet 1072 is sent to the media router 1022(Step A206).

While the above-described IP packet is inverse-capsulated, the networknode apparatus 1032 may use such an IP communication record whoseaddresses are equal to “EA2, EA1, IA2, IA1” as follows: In other words,the network node apparatus 1032 confirms that the IP packet may beinverse-capsulated, since the IP communication record containing thefour IP address is present in the address administration table 1035inside the network node apparatus 1032, the addresses or “IA2” and IA1″are present in the IP address area of the header of the receivedinternal IP packet 1071, and also the addresses “EA2” and “EA1” arepresent in the IP address area contained in the external IP packet 1072.When there is no such an IP communication record, the fouraddresses(“EA2, EA1, IA2, IA1”) are made coincident with each other, thereceived IP packet may be discarded. Alternatively, when there is nosuch IP communication record, the three addresses (“EA1, IA2, IA1”) aremade coincident with each other within the address administration table1035, since the destination IP address “EA2” contained in the IP packet1071 is not checked, the network node apparatus 1032 does not executethe inverse-capsulation, but may discard the received IP packet.

The media router administration unit 1057 acquires the transmissionsource telephone number “Tel-No-1”, the destination telephone number“Tel-No-2”, the telephone call identifier “C-ID”, and the connectioncontrol relative information “Info-1” from the external IP packet 1072.The media router administration unit 1057 acquires, for example, “5004”from the inside of the connection control relative information “Info-1”as a port number which is employed by a transmission source telephoneset in the voice communication phase. Also, while using the telephonecall identifier “C-ID”, the media router administration unit 1057 maydiscriminate the received telephone call from other telephone calls.

A series of the above-explained Steps A204, A205, A206 are called as a“call setting operation”, and the series of Steps may be abbreviated as“IAM”.

The media router administration unit 1057 returns such an IP packetcontaining the telephone call identifier “C-ID”, the transmission sourcetelephone number “Tel-No-1”, and the destination telephone number“Tel-No-2” to the media router administration unit 1056 in order tonotify a call setting acceptance with respect to the above-explainedcall setting operation (Steps A207, A208, A209). A series of these StepsA207, A208 and A209 will be referred to as a “call setting acceptance”which is expressed by “ACM” as an abbreviation symbol. The media routeradministration unit 1057 may return to use only the telephone callidentifier “C-ID” in the above-explained call setting acceptance, andmay not return both the transmission source telephone number “Tel-No-1”and the destination telephone number “Tel-No-2”.

Next, when the media router administration unit 1-057 transfers atelephone call(call reception) to the telephone set 1012 (Step A210),the telephone set 1012 returns a response in order to confirm thetelephone reception (Step A211), and produces the telephone call sound.In order to notify that the telephone set 1012 is being called, themedia router administration unit 1057 produces such an IP packetcontaining the telephone call identifier “C-ID” the transmission sourcetelephone number “Tel-No-1”, and the destination telephone number“Tel-No-2”, and then transmits the IP packet to the media routeradministration unit 1056 (Steps A212, A213, A214). A series of theseSteps A212, A213, A214 is called as either a call passing or a callissuing, and are expressed by “CPG” as an abbreviation symbol. In thecall passing steps, both the transmission source telephone number“Tel-No-1” and the destination telephone number “Tel-No-2” may not bereturned. The media router administration unit 1056 notifies such a factthat the destination telephone set 1012 is being called to thetransmission source telephone set 1011 (Step A215).

On the other hand, when the user of the telephone set 1012 hears thecalling sound of the telephone set, and notifies the call reception tothe media router administration unit 1057 by taking up the handsetthereof (Step A220), the media router administration unit 1057 producessuch an IP packet containing the telephone call identifier “C-ID”, thetransmission source telephone number “Tel-No-1”, the destinationtelephone number “Tel-No-2” and the connection control relativeinformation “Info-2” and then notifies the IP packet to the media routeradministration unit 1056 provided within the media router 1021 (StepsA222, A223, A224). A series of these Steps A222, A223 and A224 isreferred to as a “response”, and is expressed as “ANM” as anabbreviation symbol. At least, the UDP port number employed in the voicecommunication phase, for example, “5006” is contained in the connectioncontrol relative information “Info-2”. The format of the above IP packetowns the same format of the internal IP packet 1071 shown in FIG. 121.Alternatively, it is possible to omit such that both the transmissionsource telephone number “Tel-No-1” and the destination telephone number“Tel-No-2” are written into the IP packet. The media routeradministration unit 1056 confirms the response (Step A220) of thetelephone set 1012 (Step A221).

The media router administration unit 1056 may know the destination portnumber, for example, “5006” which is employed in the communication phasefrom the connection control relative information “Info-2”, and notifiesthe response(off hook) issued from the telephone set 1012 (Step A225) tothe telephone set 1011. Then, the telephone set 1011 confirms theresponse (Step A226). It should also be noted that the above-explainedSteps A221 and A226 may be omitted. With execution of theabove-explained process operations, the connection phase of thetelephone calling operation is accomplished.

It should also be noted that the Steps A200 and A210 are called as “callsetting operation”; the Steps A201 and A211 are called as “call settingacceptance”; the Step A215 is referred to as “calling”; the Steps S220and S225 are called as “response”; and the Steps A221 and A226 arecalled as “response confirmation” among the above-explained steps.

<<Communication Phase>>

When the user of the telephone set 1011 starts a telephone conversationby voice(speech), a voice signal is sent to the media routeradministration unit 1056 (Step A250 of FIG. 123). Then, the media routeradministration unit 1056 digitalizes the voice signal, and furthermore,segments the digital data to form a proper length, and then forms anexternal IP packet 1073 of FIG. 124. Then, the digitalized voice data isstored into a payload portion of an internal UDP segment of thisexternal IP packet 1073, and the resulting IP packet 1073 is transmittedto the network node apparatus 1031 (Step A251). In the connection phase,as an internal transmission source port number of the UDP segment, boththe transmission source port number “5004” and the destination portnumber “5006” are utilized which are acquired by being mutuallyexchanged by the media router administration units 1056 and 1057.

Upon receipt of the external IP packet 1073, the network node apparatus1031 may find out the IP communication record equal to “EA1, EA2, IA1,IA2” inside the address administration table, while using the IPcommunication record, the external IP packet 1073 is capsulated toconstitute an internal IP packet 1074. The internal IP packet 1074 isreached via the routers 1035-1 to 1035-6 to the network node apparatus1032 (Step A252). Then, the external IP packet 1075 is restored, and theexternal IP packet 1075 is delivered via the media router administrationunit 1057 (Step A253) to the telephone set 1012 (Step A254). An IPpacket containing the voice of the user of the telephone set 1012 istransmitted along a direction opposite to the above-explained direction,namely is reached via the media router administration unit 1057 (StepA260), the network node apparatus 1032 (Step A261), and the routers1035-6 to 1035-1 to the network node apparatus 1031 (Step A262), andalso is delivered via the media router administration unit 1056 (StepA263) to the telephone set 1011 (Step A264).

<<Release Phase>>

In the case that the user of the telephone set 1011 puts on the handsetthereof so as to end the telephone communication, and notifies the endof the telephone communication to the media router administration unit1056 (Step A280 of FIG. 127), the media router administration unit 1056produces such an IP packet containing at least information and thetelephone call identifier “C-ID”. The information implies that thetelephone communication is ended. The IP packet is transmitted to thenetwork node apparatus 1031 (Step A281), and is capsulated in thenetwork node apparatus 1031. The capsulated IP packet is reached via theIP transfer network 1003 to the network node apparatus 103 (Step A282).The IP packet is inverse-capsulated in the network node apparatus 1032,and then, the resulting IP packet is reached via the media routeradministration unit 1057 (Step A283) to the telephone set 1012 (StepA284). A series of these Steps A281, A282, A283, A284 is called as a“release”, and is expressed by “REL” as an abbreviation symbol.

Next, such an IP packet for reporting a completion of the release isnotified along a direction opposite to the above direction (Steps A286,A287, A288). A series of these Steps A286, A287, A288 is called as a“completion of release”, and is expressed by “RLC” as an abbreviationsymbol. Both the format of the IP packet and the setting method of theIP address used in the steps A281, A282, A283 are identical to those ofthe Steps A204, A205, A206 in the connection phase of the telephonecommunication.

<<Communication Among Other Telephone Sets>>

In a similar manner, a telephone communication may be made from thetelephone set 1011 to such a telephone set 1013 having a telephonenumber “Tel-No-3”. When an inquiry is sent to the telephone numberserver 1026, an external IP address “EA3” corresponding to the telephonenumber “Tel-No-3” is answered. Both the IP communication records “EA1,EA3, IA1, IA3” provided inside the address administration table 1034 andthe IP communication records “EA3, EA1, IA3, IA1” provided inside theaddress administration table 1035 are used so as to capsulate and alsoinverse-capsulate the IP packet. Also, a telephone communication may bemade from a telephone set 1012 to another telephone set 1013 by way of amethod for controlling a terminal-to-terminal communication connectionsimilar to the above embodiment. When the telephone communication isended, both the port number “5004” and the port number “5006” may beemployed as empty numbers in the next telephone communication.

<<Case of Single Communication Company>>

Even in such a case that there is no such an operation/management range1006 of the communication company 2 of FIG. 115, but the IP telephonenetwork 1003 constitutes the operation/management range of thecommunication company 1, the above-described telephone call connectionphase, communication phase thereof, and also release phase thereof maybe realized. In this case, the operation/management range 1006 of thecommunication company 2 is changed into the operation/management rangeof the communication company 1; the representative server 1 of thecommunication company “1” and the representative servers 1036-1 to1036-2 of the communication company 2 are discontinued; and also, therouter 1035-7 is connected to the router 1035-1 by employing the IPcommunication line.

Other Embodiments of Media Router

Referring now to FIG. 128, other embodiment as to the media router willbe explained. A media router 1021-1 contains the function of the mediarouter 1021 shown in FIG. 115, a media router administration unit 1056-1contains the function of the media router administration unit 1056, anda telephone number server 1026-1 owns the function of the telephonenumber server 1026. Reference numeral 1040-1 shows a communication lineto the network node apparatus. Reference numeral 1080-1 represents aconnection control unit, reference numeral 1081-1 shows a telephonecontrol unit, reference numeral 1082 shows a media routeroperation/management unit, and also, reference numeral 1083 indicates acorrespondence table for telephone number/pin number/UDP port number.The media router operation/management unit 1028 contains a functioncapable of recording a telephone communication, and also a reliabilityadministration function by detecting a failure occurred inside a mediarouter. A telephone control unit 1081-1 is connected via a communicationline to telephone sets 1011-1 through 1011-4. The telephone control unit1081-1 has such a function that a protocol conversion is performed, avoice code conversion is effected, a fluctuation control is carried out,analog voice is converted into digital voice, or inverse-converted in atelephone communication. Reference numeral 1084 shows a line interfaceunit which contains a function capable of transmitting/receiving the IPpacket, and owns a communication line 1040-1. The media routeroperation/managements unit 1056-1 may perform both a telephoneconnection control and a release control, which are similar to those ofthe media router operation/management unit 1056. In other words, themedia router operation/management unit 1056-1 can execute the telephoneconnection control as explained with reference to FIG. 119, and also thetelephone release control as explained with reference to FIG. 127.

The telephone number/pin number/UDP port number correspondence table1083 indicates that the telephone number “Tel-No-1” corresponds to a pinnumber “T1” in the telephone control unit 1081-1 in a 1-to-1correspondence relationship, and furthermore, a UDP port number “5004”corresponds to the pin number “T1” in a 1-to-1 correspondencerelationship. Similarly, the correspondence table 1083 shows that thetelephone number “Tel-No-12” corresponds to a pin number “T2” in thetelephone control unit 1081-1 in a 1-to-1 correspondence relationship,and furthermore, a UDP port number “5006” corresponds to the pin number“T2” in a 1-to-1 correspondence relationship. Similarly, thecorrespondence table 1083 shows that the telephone number “Tel-No-13”corresponds to a pin number “T3” in the telephone control unit 1081-1 ina 1-to-1 correspondence relationship, and furthermore, a UDP port number“5008” corresponds to the pin number “T3” in a 1-to-1 correspondencerelationship. Similarly, the correspondence table 1083 shows that thetelephone number “Tel-No-14” corresponds to a pin number “T4” in thetelephone control unit 1081-1 in a 1-to-1 correspondence relationship,and furthermore, a UDP port number “5010” corresponds to the pin number“T4” in a 1-to-1 correspondence relationship. Since the above-describedcorrespondence relationship is established, for instance, in the casethat the telephone number “Tel-No-1” is employed, the UDP port number isselected to be “5004” with reference to the telephone number/pinnumber/UDP port number correspondence table 1083. The UDP port number isused as a port number for identifying the known RTP used in the voicecommunication(namely, voice communication RTP port number).

Reference numeral 1083-1 of FIG. 129 shows another embodiment of atelephone number/pin number/UDP port number correspondence table, and isreplaceable with the telephone number/pin number/UDP port numbercorrespondence table 1083. In this case, the telephone number “Tel-No-1”indicates a pilot telephone number, the telephone sets 1011-1 to 1011-4own the same telephone number “Tel-No-1”, and the UDP port numbers are“5004” to “5010” different from each other. As a result, the telephonesets 1011-1 to 1011-4 may perform the telephone voice communications atthe same time instant without interference, or jamming by using thedifferent port numbers.

Reference numeral 1083-2 of FIG. 130 shows another embodiment of atelephone number/pin number/UDP port number correspondence table, and isreplaceable with the telephone number/pin number/UDP port numbercorrespondence table 1083. In this case, the telephone set 1011-2 havingthe telephone number “Tel-No-12” makes a telephone at a preceding timeinstant, and the UDP port number “5004” is applied. At the connectionphase stage where the telephone communication is commenced, otherunallocated UDP port numbers “5006” and “5008” are applied to othertelephone sets 1011-1, 1011-3 and 1011-4. In the release phase of thetelephone call, the application of the applied UDP port number isstopped(returned). The connection control unit 1080-1 may realize theabove-explained pilot telephone number by properly changing thecorrespondence combination between the pin number and the UDP portnumber.

<<Another Embodiment of Media Router>>

Referring now to FIG. 131, another embodiment as to the media routerwill be explained. A media router 1021-2 contains the function of themedia router 1021 shown in FIG. 115, a connection control unit 1080-2contains the function of the connection control unit 1080-1 shown inFIG. 128, and a telephone control unit 1081-2 contains the function ofthe telephone control unit 1081-1. Reference numeral 1040-2 shows acommunication line to the network node apparatus. A media routeradministration unit 1056-2 contains the function of the media routeradministration unit 1056, and a telephone number server 1026-2 owns thefunction of the telephone number server 1026. Reference numeral 1085-1shows a PBX control unit. Reference numeral 1085-2 represents a PBXcontrol unit, reference numerals 1086 and 1087 show routers, referencenumeral 1088 shows a media router operation/management unit, referencenumeral 1089 indicates a communication line using the Ethernet, andreference numerals 1090 and 1091 show IP terminals having functionscapable of transmitting/receiving IP packets. Also, reference numeral1092 is a moving image transmitter/receiver having a function capable oftransmitting/receiving an audio/visual(voice/image) signal. Both the IPterminals 1090 and 1091, and the moving image transmitter/receiver 1092are connected to the router 1087 via the IP communication line. Also,the router 1087 is connected via an IP communication line to a LAN 1093.The connection control unit 1080-2, the telephone number server 1026-2,and the routers 1086/1087 are connected to each other via thecommunication line 1089.

The PBX 1085-2 implies a private branch exchange for storing a pluralityof telephones. The PBX control unit 1085-1 is located between theconnection control unit 1080-2 and the PBX 1085-2, and performsinterface operations between both units, for example, performs a voicecode(speech code) converting operation and a speech compressingoperation. Since the above-explained arrangement is made, the mediarouter 1021-2 directly stores a large number of telephone sets via thetelephone control unit 1081-2, or via the PBX 1085-2. These telephonesets may establish the telephone communication via the IP transfernetwork to other telephone sets.

Since the media router 1021-2 is arranged in the above-explained manner,an IP packet entered from the communication line 1040-2 may be reachedvia the router 1086 and the communication line 1089 to the connectioncontrol unit 1080-2. Also, the IP packet may be transferred along adirection opposite to the above-described direction, namely transferredfrom the connection control unit 1080-2 toward the communication line1089, the router 1086, and the communication line 1040-2. Similarly, anIP packet entered from the communication line 1040-2 may be reached viathe router 1086, the communication line 1089, the router 1087, and thecommunication line to the IP terminal 1090, the IP terminal 1091, andthe moving image transmitter/receiver 1092 employed in the LAN 1093.Also, the IP packet may be transferred along a direction opposite to theabove-described direction, namely from the IP terminal 1090, the IPterminal 1091, and the moving image transmitter/receiver 1092 to thecommunication line, the router 1087, the communication line 1089, therouter 1086, and the communication line 1040-2.

<<Calling Priority Order Control>>

Next, a description will now be made of a function of a calling priorityorder control executed by the media router 1021-2. FIG. 132 is aschematic diagram for representing a partial inner arrangement of themedia router 1021-2, and a connection condition between an IP terminaland a LAN, connected to the media router 1021-2. If should be noted thatcommunication lines provided in a half way are omitted. Referencenumeral 1085-21 shows an IP packet sent from the telephone number server1026-2, reference numeral 1085-22 represents an IP packet sent from theconnection control unit 1080-2, reference numeral 1085-23 shows an IPpacket sent from the LAN 1093, reference numeral 1085-24 indicates an IPpacket sent from the IP terminal 1091, and also reference numeral1085-25 denotes an IP packet sent from the moving imagetransmitter/receiver 1092. The IP packets 1085-21 to 1085-25 aretransmitted via the Ethernet communication line 1089 and the router 1086to the communication line 1040-2. In such a case that payloads of the IPpackets 1085-21 to 1085-25 are equal to TCP, or UDP segments, bothtransmission source port numbers and destination port numbers arecontained inside these segments.

Reference numeral 1085-3 of FIG. 133 shows a calling priority ordercontrol administration table used to determine a sequential order bywhich the above-explained IP packet is transmitted from the Ethernetcommunication line 1089 to the communication line 1040-2. In such a casethat an IP packet is entered from the Ethernet communication line 1089,passes through the router 1086, and then is outputted to thecommunication line 1040-2, a check is made as to whether a payloadcontained inside the passing IP packet is equal to a TCP segment, or aUDP segment. When the payload corresponds to either the TCP segment orthe UDP segment, a transmission source port number contained in the IPpacket is checked. In such a case that the IP packets are reached to therouter 1086 at time instants which are temporally closed to each other,such an IP packet containing either a TCP segment or a UDP segment, thetransmission source port number of which is equal to “108”, istransmitted with a top priority in view of temporal aspects. Next, IPpackets are transmitted which contain TCP segments or UDP segments, thetransmission source port numbers of which are equal to “5060”, or “5004”to “5020”.

Alternatively, the values of the port numbers described in the callingpriority order control administration table 1085-3 may be replaced byother values to be used. Also, the calling priority order administrationtable 1085-3 may be substituted by the calling priority order controlmanagement table 1085-4 of FIG. 134 to be used. In such a case that thecalling priority order control management table 1085-4 is used, such anIP packet whose transmission source IP address is “150.1.2.3” and alsowhose transmission source port number is “108” is employed as a toppriority order, and then, such an IP packet whose transmission source IPaddress is “192.1.2.3” and whose transmission source port number is“5060”, “5004” to “5020” is employed as a second top priority order.

The above-explained embodiment is featured by that while the port numberdesignated by the calling priority order control administration table1085-3 is used as a reference, or a set of both the IP address and theport number designated by the calling priority order controladministration table 1085-4 is employed as a reference, the media router1021-2 owns the function capable of determining the transmissionsequence of the IP packets sent to the communication line 1040-2.

Next, a description is made of the embodiment with reference to FIG.135. The media router 1021-3 is connected via the IP transfer network1001-1 to the media router 1021-4; the IP terminal 1091-1, the movingimage transmitter/receiver 1092-1, and the LAN 1093-1 are connected tothe media router 1021-3; and the IP terminal 1090-1 is contained in theLAN 1093-1. Similarly, the IP terminal 1091-2, the moving imagetransmitter/receiver 1092-2 and the LAN 1093-2 are connected to themedia router 1021-4; and the IP terminal 1090-2 is contained in the LAN1093-2. Both the media routers 1021-3 and 1021-4 contain the function ofthe media router 1021-2 shown in FIG. 131. Since the above-explainedcircuit arrangement is made, the IP packet can be transmitted/receivedvia the media router 1021-3, the IP transfer network 1001-1, and themedia router 1021-4, for example, between the IP terminal 1090-1 and theIP terminal 1090-2; between the IP terminal 1091-1 and the IP terminal1090-2; and between the moving image transmitter/receiver 1092-1 and themoving image transmitter/receiver 1092-2.

The operations of this embodiment will now be summarized. That is, theIP transfer network contains two, or more network node apparatus; themedia router is connected via the IP communication line to any one ofthese network node apparatus; the internal IP address is applied to thetermination units on the side of the network node apparatus of the IPcommunication line; the external IP addresses are applied to therespective media routers; and while telephone number server is containedin the media router, the media router is connected via the communicationline to one, or more telephone sets. Also, as the record of the addressadministration table contained in the network node apparatus, both theexternal IP address and the internal IP address are contained; at leastthe IP communication record for determining the IP capsulating method ispreviously set; at least the transmission source telephone number, andthe destination telephone number are employed inside the call setting IPpacket, and furthermore, the common port number is used for a pluralityof telephone sets in the connection control. Also, since the individualvoice communication with respect to each of the telephone sets isperformed by allocating the different port numbers to the pluraltelephone sets, the media router contains either one or two sets of thePBX control unit; and the telephone control unit; and the media routeris connectable to the IP terminal having the function oftransmitting/receiving the IP packet, or the LAN, or to the voice/imagetransmitter/receiver having the function capable oftransmitting/receiving the voice/image by being stored into the IPpacket through the IP communication line. The media router contains thecalling priority order control administration table. While the mediarouter employs the transmission source port number of either the TCPsegment or the UDP segment contained in the IP packet which istransferred from the telephone set, the IP terminal and the moving imagetransmitter/receiver, which are connected to the media router, andfurther employs the transmission source IP address, this media routermay send out the IP packets to the communication line provided on theside of the network node apparatus in the order of the top priorityorder in accordance with the instruction of the calling priority ordercontrol administration table.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned IP encapsulationand reverse-capsulation by the network node apparatus can be replaced tothe simple encapsulation which forms an internal packet by adding asimple header to an external IP packet and the simplereverse-capsulation which removes the simple header from the internalpacket, respectively.

9. 9th Embodiment in which Closed-Area Telephone Communication isCarried Out

In FIG. 136, reference numeral 1100 shows an IP transfer network. An IPaddress used outside the IP transfer network 1100 is called as anexternal IP address, and an IP address used inside the IP transfernetwork 1100 is called as an internal IP address. The external IPaddresses “EA1” to “EA3” are applied to media routers 1115 to 1117,respectively. The telephone numbers “101”, “102”, “103” and “104” areapplied to telephone sets 1121 to 1124, respectively. Similarly, thetelephone numbers “211”, “212”, “213” and “214” are applied to telephonesets 1125 to 1128, respectively. Similarly, the telephone numbers “301”,“302”, “303” and “304” are applied to telephone sets 1129 to 1132,respectively.

Telephone number servers 1135 to 1137 own such a function similar tothat of a domain name server(DNS) which is widely used in the Internet.In this embodiment, when a telephone number is indicated, the telephonenumber server answers an external IP address of a media router whichstores thereinto a telephone set having the indicated telephone number.For instance, when the telephone number “212” is inquired to thetelephone number server 1135, this telephone number server 1135 answersthe external IP address “EA2” of the media router 1116 which stores thetelephone set 1126 having the telephone number “212”.

<<Preparation of Telephone Communication>>

In the network node apparatus 1101 to 1103, IP communication records areset as records of address administration tables 1110 to 1112 providedthereinto. For example, as an IP communication record indicated on asecond row of the address administration table 1110, “EA1, EA3, IA1,IA3” are set. The IP communication record is employed in the telephonecommunication established between the media router 1115 having theexternal IP address “EA1” and the media router 1117 having the externalIP address “EA3”. Also, the internal IP address “IA1” is applied to thetermination unit(logic terminal) provided on the side of the networknode apparatus 1101 of a logic IP communication line 1144, and theinternal IP address “IA3” is applied to the termination unit(logicterminal) provided on the side of the network node apparatus 1103 of alogic IP communication line 1146. Next, a description will now be madeof a “terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method” usedto execute a telephone communication from the telephone set 1121 via themedia router 1115, the IP transfer network 1100, and the media router1117 to the telephone set 1131.

<<Connection Phase>>

The user takes up the handset of the telephone set 1121 to dial thetelephone number “303” of the telephone set 1131 of the communicationcounter party, and sends a telephone call to the media routeradministration unit 1138 provided inside the media router 1115 via thetelephone control unit 1133 (Step A300 of FIG. 137). The media routeradministration unit 1138 confirms the telephone call (Step A301). Themedia router administration unit 1138 indicates the telephone number“303” to the telephone number server 1135 (Step A302), acquires thecorresponding IP address “EA3” of the media router 1117 (Step A303), andproduces an external IP packet 1134 (refer to FIG. 136), and then sendsthe external IP packet 1134 to the network node apparatus 1101 (StepA304). The external IP packet 1134 contains the transmission sourcetelephone number “101”, the destination telephone number “303”, thetelephone call identifier “C-ID”, and the UDP port number “5004” as theconnection control relative information.

In this case, such an example is made that an IP address area of an IPheader of the external IP packet 1134 corresponds to both thetransmission source IP address “EA1” and the destination IP address“EA3”; a payload portion of the external IP packet 1134 corresponds to aUDP segment; the transmission source port number is “5060;” and thedestination port number is “5060”.

Upon receipt of the IP packet 1134, the network node apparatus 1101produces an internal IP packet 1140 by applying the capsulation methodof the IP packet, while using the IP communication record indicated onthe second row of the address administration table 1110 from the toprow, namely “EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3”, and then transmits the IP packet 1140to the network node apparatus 1103 (Step A305). The internal IP packet1140 is reached via the routers 1105, 1106, 1107 to the network nodeapparatus 1103. Then, the network node apparatus 1103 restores an IPpacket 1134 by executing the inverse-capsulation method of such an IPpacket except for a header thereof, and then sends the restored IPpacket 1134 to the media router administration unit 1117 (Step A306). Aseries of these Steps A304, A305, A306 is called as a “call settingoperation”, and is expressed by “IAM” as an abbreviation symbol.

After the media router administration unit 1139 has acquired thetransmission source telephone number “101”, the destination telephonenumber “303”, the IP address “EA1” of the media router 1115, thetelephone call identifier “C-ID” from the above received IP packet, andthe UDP port number “5004” which is used as the connection controlrelative information by the transmission source telephone set in thevoice communication phase, the media router administration unit 1139returns a confirmation of a telephone call (Steps A307, A308, A309). Aseries of these Steps A307, A308, A309 is called as a “call settingacceptance”, and is expressed by “ACM” as an abbreviation-symbol. Next,the media router administration unit 1139 sends such an IP packet forinforming the telephone call(call reception) to the telephone set 1131(Step A310), and then, the telephone set 1131 returns a response (StepA311). When the telephone set 1131 knows the telephone calling, thetelephone calling sound (ringing) is produced. When the media routeradministration unit 1139 returns the telephone calling operation of thetelephone set 1131 to the media router administration unit 1138 (StepsA312, A313, A314), this media router administration unit 1138 notifiesto the transmission source telephone set 1121, such a fact that thedestination telephone set 1131 is being called (Step A315). A series ofthese Steps A312, A313, A314 is called as either “call pass” or“calling”, and is expressed by “CPG” as an abbreviation symbol.

When the user of the telephone set 1131 takes up the handset thereof(offhook), this off hook signal is notified to the media routeradministration unit 1139 (Step A320), and the media routeradministration unit 1139 returns a response (Step A321: responseconfirmation). Furthermore, the media router administration unit 1139produces such an IP packet and then returns the IP packet to the mediarouter administration unit 1138 (Steps A322, A323, A324). The IP packetcontains the transmission source telephone number “101”, the destinationtelephone number “303”, the telephone call identifier “C-ID”, and alsothe UDP port number “5008” which is used by the telephone set 1131 asthe connection control relative information in the voice communicationphase. The media router administration unit 1138 knows the UDP portnumber “5008” used by the destination telephone set from the receivedinformation. The media router administration unit 1138 reports the offhook notification sent from the telephone set 1131 to the telephone set1121 (Step A325), and then the telephone set 1121 returns a response(Step A326: response confirmation). A series of these Steps A322, A323,A324 is called as a “response”, is expressed by “ANM” as an abbreviationsymbol. The Steps A321 and A326 of the response confirmation correspondto optional process steps. Thus, the connection phase of the telephoneis accomplished by executing the above-explained process operation.

<<Communication Phase>>

When the user of the telephone set 1121 starts a telephone conversationby voice(speech), a voice signal is sent to the media router managementunit 1138 (Step A350 of FIG. 137). Then, this media routeradministration unit 1138 stores the voice signal digitalized by thetelephone control unit 1133 into a payload portion of an internal UDPsegment of the IP packet, and thereafter the resulting IP packet istransmitted to the network node apparatus 1101 (Step A351). In theconnection phase, as an internal transmission source port number of theUDP segment, both the transmission source port number “5004” and thedestination port number “5006” are utilized.

Upon receipt of the IP packet containing the digitalized voice, thenetwork node apparatus 1101 may capsulate the IP packet to constitute aninternal IP packet 1141. The internal IP packet 1141 is reached via therouters 1105, 1106, 1107 to the network node apparatus 1103 (Step A352).The network node apparatus 1103 executes an IP inverse-capsulation ofthe internal IP packet 1141 except for the internal IP header, and then,transmits the resulting external IP packet to the media routeradministration unit 1139 (Step A353) so as to deliver the external IPpacket to the telephone set 1131 (Step A354). An IP packet containingthe digitalized voice of the user of the telephone set 1131 istransmitted along a direction opposite to the above-explained directionto the telephone set 1121 (Steps A360 to A364).

<<Release Phase>>

In the case that the user of the telephone set 1121 notifies the end ofthe telephone communication to the media router administration unit(Step A380 of FIG. 137), the resulting IP packet is reached to thetelephone set 1131 via a series of process steps (Steps A381 to A383) ina similar manner to those as explained in other embodiments (Step A384).The end report of the telephone communication is returned via Steps A386through A388 to the media router unit 1138. A series of these StepsA380, A381, A382, A383, A384 is called as a “release”, and is expressedby “REL” as an abbreviation symbol. Furthermore, a series of these StepsA386, A387, A388 is called as a “completion of release”, and isexpressed by “RLC” as a abbreviation symbol.

The telephone communications may be established among other telephonesets. For example, a telephone communication may be established from thetelephone set 1121 to another telephone set 1126 having a telephonenumber “212”, and a telephone communication may be established from thetelephone set 1132 to another telephone set 1127 having a telephonenumber “213” by way of a terminal-to-terminal communication connectioncontrol method similar to the previous control method.

<<Detailed Description of Telephone Number Server>>

The function of the telephone number server will now be explained morein detail. The telephone sets having the telephone numbers of 100 digitsare connected to the media router 1115, the telephone sets having thetelephone numbers of 200 digits are connected to the media router 1116,and the telephone sets having the telephone numbers of 300 digits areconnected to the media router 1117. Considering the connectionrelationship, a tree structure of the telephone numbers may bedetermined as represented in FIG. 138. Domains 1151 to 1153 may bedefined in the form of the tree structure at the same level under lowgrade of the route 1150. Thus, the domain 1151 may provide informationrelated to the telephone numbers of 100 digits, the domain 1152 mayprovide information related to the telephone numbers of 200 digits, andthe domain 1153 may provide information related to the telephone numbersof 300 digits. The following rules are made: The telephone numbers of100 digits are expressed as a domain name of “1”, the telephone numbersof 200 digits are expressed as a domain name of “2.”, and the telephonenumbers of 300 digits are expressed as a domain name of “3”, and alsothese domain names/telephone numbers are rearranged as shown in FIG.139. In FIG. 139, symbol “1XX” shows the telephone numbers of 100digits, symbol “2XX” indicates the telephone numbers of 200 digits, andsymbol “3XX” represents the telephone numbers of 300 digits.

It should be understood that while the known technical idea as to thedomain name server DNS is applied, such a function capable of handling afunction of a telephone number server for managing the route 1150 may beapplied to the telephone number server 1135. As the function of thetelephone number server for managing the route 1150, when “1.” isinquired, the telephone number server answers the IP address “EA1” ofthe telephone number server 1135 for directly managing the domain 1151.When “2.” and “3.” are inquired, the server answers the addresses “EA2”and “EA3”, respectively. In the case that the telephone number server isinquired as to the domain names which are directly managed by theserver, this server may answer an IP address of another telephone numberserver in a half way. However, the telephone number server finallyanswers the IP address corresponding to the inquired domain name(referto FIG. 140). As a consequence, when “3.” is inquired to the telephonenumber server 1136, the IP address “EA3” corresponding to “3.” may beacquired. Such a concrete realizing method of “redialing function oftelephone number server” in which inquires are repeatedly made betweentelephone number servers can be realized by employing the redialingfunction of the domain name server known in the technical field.

<<Another Embodiment of Telephone Number Server>>

As indicated in FIG. 141, while the media routers 1191 to 1197 areconnected via the communication line to any one of the network nodeapparatus 1180 to 1184 of the IP transfer network 1190, a telephonenumber of a telephone set which is connected to the media router 1191belonging to a company “A” is equal to the opened telephone number“1-1XX” which is notified to other companies “B” and “C”. In this case,symbol “−” is neglected and is equal to an empty space as a telephonenumber, and symbol “XX” implies numbers of “00” to “99” in the decimalnotation. Also, a telephone number of a telephone set which is connectedto the media router 1193 belonging to the company “A” is equal to theopened telephone number “1-2XX”. A telephone number of a telephone setwhich is connected to the media router 1195 belonging to the company “A”corresponds to the telephone number “1-3XX” opened to other companies,and also an extension telephone number “8XX” which is not opened toother companies than the company “A”. A telephone number of a telephoneset which is connected to the media router 1192 belonging to the company“B” corresponds to the opened telephone number “2-1XX”, and a telephonenumber of a telephone set which is connected to the media router 1194belonging to the company “B” corresponds to the opened telephone number“2-2XX”. A telephone number of a telephone set which is connected to themedia router 1196 belonging to the company “C” corresponds to the openedtelephone number “3-XXX”. Symbol “XXX” implies numbers “000” to “999” ofthe decimal notation. A telephone number of a telephone set which isconnected to the media router 1197 belonging to the company “A”corresponds to an extension telephone number “7XX” which is not openedto other companies than the company “A”.

FIG. 142 represents the system of the above-explained telephone numbersas a tree structure of telephone numbers. Reference numeral 1185 shows aroute domain, reference numeral 1186 indicates a domain directed to thenon-opened extension telephone number of the company “A”, and referencenumeral 1187 shows a domain directed to the opened telephone number ofthe company “A”, and reference numeral 1188 indicates a domain made ofthe opened telephone number of the company “B”, and also referencenumeral 1189 is a domain directed to the opened telephone number of thecompany “C”. In this case, a domain name “##” of the reference numeral1186 corresponds to a secret domain name which is used only in the mediarouters 1195 and 1197 belonging to the company “A”. The secret domainname contains no numeral, and the length of the secret domain name isdetermined as such a long name of 20 characters. As explained above, anyone can hardly know and/or acquire the value of the secret domain name“##”, or the secret domain name “##” itself which is exclusively used bythe company “A” from the media routers 1192, 1194, 1196 of the company“B” and the company “C”. For example, no IP address is answered withrespect to the inquiry “##”. As a result, safety characteristics may beimproved in view of the following implication. That is, a telephone userof either the company “B” or the company “C” can hardly access thetelephone set having the extension telephone number of the company “A”,namely can hardly use the extension telephone number.

When the user of the telephone set 1198 dials the destination telephonenumber “2-145”, the media router administration unit 1195-1 provided inthe media router 1195 converts the telephone number “2-145” into “1.2.”corresponding to the domain name of the telephone number, as indicatedin a conversion table 1185-1 of FIG. 143. Next, when the user of thetelephone set inquiries by indicating the domain name format “1.2.” tothe telephone number server 1195-2 of the media router 1195, thetelephone number server 1195-2 answers an IP address “MR2” of the mediarouter 1192 corresponding to “1.2.”, as indicated in a table 1185-2 ofFIG. 144.

A condition as to whether or not a telephone call can be made from atelephone set having an extension telephone number “700” of the company“A” to a telephone set having a telephone number of “2-100” of thecompany “B” may be determined based upon setting conditions of thedomain name server. Both conditions may be realized.

The above-explained operations of the ninth embodiment will now besummarized. That is, the IP transfer network contains two, or morenetwork node apparatus; the media router is connected via the logic IPcommunication line to any one of these network node apparatus; theinternal IP address is applied to the termination units on the side ofthe network node apparatus of the logic IP communication line; theexternal, IP addresses are applied to the respective media routers; andwhile telephone number server is contained in the media router, themedia router is connected via the communication line to one, or moretelephone sets. Also, as the record of the address administration tablecontained in the network node apparatus, both the external IP addressand the internal IP address are contained and at least the IPcommunication record for determining the IP capsulating method ispreviously set. While preselected IP communication records are setwithin the network node apparatus among the company “A”, the company “B”and the company “C”, such a closed-area telephone communication networkcan be set. In this communication network, the telephonenumbers(“1-XXX”, “2-XXX”, “3-XXX”) which are effective only among thecompanies “A”, “B”, “C” are used.

The telephone communications can be established as follows: A telephonecall may be issued from a telephone set having a telephone number“1-100” of the company “A” to a telephone set having a telephone number“1-200” of the company “A”. Also, a telephone call may be issued fromthe telephone set having telephone number “1-100” of the company “A” toa telephone set having a telephone number “2-100” of the company “B”.Also, a telephone call can be issued from the telephone set having thetelephone number “1-100” of the company “A” to a telephone set having atelephone number “3-100” of the company “C”, and also to telephone setshaving extension telephone numbers “700” and “800” of this company “A”.Also, a telephone call can be issued from a telephone set having anextension telephone number “700” of the company “A” to a telephone sethaving an extension telephone number “800” of the company “A”, and alsoto a telephone set having telephone number “1-200” of the company “A”.As previously explained by using symbol “##”, no telephone call can bemade from a telephone set having a telephone number “2-100” of thecompany “B” to the telephone set having the extension telephone number“800” of the company “A”.

Assuming now that a total number of the companies is selected to be “N”,the following telephone communications can be established. While an IPcommunication code is set in order that the telephone communications canbe made only among preselected companies “A-1”, “A-2”, . . . , “A-N”(symbol N>2), the closed area telephone communication can be carriedout. A telephone set of the company “A-1” which is connected to theclosed area telephone communication network which is effective among thecompanies “A-1”, “A-2”, . . . , “A-N” (symbol N>2) may establish atelephone communication with an extension telephone set of the company“A-1”, but telephone sets of companies other than the company “A-1”cannot establish a telephone communication with the extension telephoneset of the company “A-1”.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned IP encapsulationand reverse-capsulation by the network node apparatus can be replaced tothe simple encapsulation which forms an internal packet by adding asimple header to an external IP packet and the simplereverse-capsulation which removes the simple header from the internalpacket, respectively.

10. 10th Embodiment Combined with Closed-Area Telephone Communicationand Open-Area Telephone Communication

In FIG. 145, reference numeral 1200 shows an IP transfer network, andexternal IP addresses “EA1” to “EA6” are applied to media routers 1201to 1206, respectively. A telephone number “1001” is applied to atelephone set 1208, and a telephone number “1002” is applied to atelephone set 1209. A telephone number “101” is applied to a telephoneset 1210, and a telephone number “102” is applied to a telephone set1211. Also, telephone numbers “3001” to “3004” are applied to telephonesets 1212 to 1215, respectively. Telephone sets 1216 to 1219 connectedto the media router 1202 own telephone numbers “234-2001” to “234-2004”,respectively.

Also, telephone numbers “2001” to “2004” are applied to telephone sets1220 to 1223, respectively, and telephone numbers “301” to “304” areapplied to telephone sets 1224 to 1227, respectively. Further, telephonenumbers “201” to “204” are applied to telephone sets 1228 to 1231,respectively. In this case, telephone numbers “1XX”, “2XX” and “3XX” areequal to extension telephone numbers which are exclusively used to thecompany “A”, and symbol “X” shows numeral values defined from “0” to “9”in the decimal notation. A telephone number “1XXX” is a telephone numberof the company “A”, and a telephone number “2XXX” is a telephone numberof the company “B”, and a telephone number “3XXX” shows a telephonenumber of the company “C”. These three telephone numbers “1XXX”, “2XXX”and “3XXX” correspond to telephone numbers which constitute a logicalclosed-area telephone network used to establish a telephonecommunication only among the company A, the company B and the company C,and are referred to as closed-area telephone numbers. It should be notedthat telephone numbers “234-2001” to “234-2004” are equal to suchtelephone numbers which are employed so as to establish a telephonecommunication with respect to an undefinite communication counter party,and will be referred to as open-area telephone numbers.

The telephone number servers 1134, 1272, and 1137 to 1142 own such afunction similar to that of a domain name server(DNS) used in theInternet. When a telephone number is indicated, a telephone numberserver answers an external IP address of a media router which stores atelephone set having a telephone number thereof. For example, when atelephone number “3001” is inquired to the telephone number server 1137,the external IP address “EA6” of the media router 1206 which stores thetelephone set 1212 having the telephone number “3001” is answered.

<<Preparation of Terminal-to-Terminal Connection Control for TelephoneCommunication>>

As indicated in FIG. 145, network node apparatus 1244 to 1248 containaddress administration tables 1250 to 1255, respectively, in which IPcommunication records, as explained in other embodiments, are set. Forinstance, as an IP communication record indicated in a first row of theaddress administration table 1250, “EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3” are set. The IPcommunication record is used in a telephone communication establishedbetween the media router 1201 having the external IP address “EA1” andthe media router 1203 having the external IP address “EA3”. The internalIP address “IA1” is applied to a termination unit(logic terminal)provided on the side of the network node apparatus 1244 of a logic IPcommunication line 1257, whereas the internal IP address “IA3” isapplied to a termination unit provided on the side of the network nodeapparatus 1248 of a logic IP communication line 1258.

Referring now to FIG. 145 to FIG. 146, a “terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control method” will be described which isemployed so as to establish a telephone communication from the telephoneset 1208 having the telephone number “1001” via the IP transfer network1200 to the telephone set 1224 having the telephone number “301”.

<<Connection Phase>>

When the handset of the telephone set 1208 is taken up to dial thetelephone number “301” of the telephone set 1224 having thecommunication counter party, a telephone call signal is transferred tothe media router administration unit 1260 (Step H300), and then themedia router administration unit 1260 confirms a telephone call (StepH301). The media router administration unit 1260 checks a table 1255-1of FIG. 192 which is held in the media router administration unit 1260so as to know such a fact that a domain name of a telephone numbercorresponding to the telephone number “301” is equal to “3.#. a”, andthen, inquires the telephone number domain name “3.#.a” to the telephonenumber server 1137 (Step H302). The telephone number server 1137 answersthe IP address “EA4” of the media router 1204 in accordance with a ruleshown in a table 1255-2 of FIG. 193 (Step H303).

Next, the telephone number server 1137 produces an external IP packet1310 (FIG. 147), and then transmits the produced external IP packet 1310to the network node apparatus 1244 (Step H304). The external IP packet1310 contains at least the transmission source telephone number “1001”,the destination telephone number “301”, and also the UDP port number“5004” which is used in the telephone communication transmission of thetelephone set 1208. Alternatively, it should be understood that relativeinformation “Info-1” may be contained in the external IP packet 1310,and the relative information “Info-1” is constituted by anidentification number of a telephone call, a speech compression system,and an identification title such as a speech(voice) code conversion,which are related to the media router 1260.

Upon receipt of the IP packet 1310, the network node apparatus 1244produces an internal IP packet 1311 (refer to FIG. 148) to transmit theinternal IP packet 1311 by employing both the IP packet 1310 and the IPcommunication record(namely, EA1, EA4, IA1, IA4) indicated on the secondrow of the address administration table 1250 from the top row, whileapplying the capsulating technical method of the IP packet. The internalIP packet 1311 is reached via the routers 1263 and 1264 shown in FIG.145 to the network node apparatus 1246 (Step H305). Then, the networknode apparatus 1246 performs the inverse-capsulation of the IP packet soas to restore a IP packet, and then, sends the restored IP packet to themedia router 1204 (Step H306).

The media router management unit 1265 acquires at least the transmissionsource telephone number “1001”, the destination telephone number “301”,and the communication-purpose UDP port number “5004” from the receivedIP packet, and thereafter, returns a confirmation of a telephone callingoperation (Steps H307, H308, H309).

Next, the media router administration unit 1265 transfers the telephonecall(call reception) to the telephone set 1224 (Step H310). Thetelephone set 1224 returns to the media router administration unit 1265(Step H311), and furthermore, produces a telephone callingsound(ringing). The media router administration unit 1265 notifies thetelephone call of the telephone set 1224 via the media routeradministration unit 1260 to the destination telephone set 1208 (StepsH312, H313, H314, H315). At the Step H314, the media routeradministration unit 1265 notifies the transmission source telephonenumber “1001”, the destination telephone number “301”, and the UDP portnumber “5008” used in the telephone communication transmission of thetelephone set 1224 to the telephone set 1208.

When the user of the telephone set 1224 takes up the handset thereof,the telephone set 1224 notifies the fact to the media routeradministration unit 1265 (Step H320). The media router administrationunit 1265 responds a response made at the step H320 via the media router1260 to the telephone set 1208 of the transmission source (Steps H322,H323, H324, H325). The telephone set 1208 confirms the response withrespect to the media router 1260 (Step H321), and then, the media router1265 confirms the response with respect to the telephone set 1224 (StepH326). It should also be noted that the Steps H321 and H326 correspondto an optical process step. With execution of the above-describedprocess operations, the connection phase of the telephone set iscompleted.

In the above-described connection phase, an internal portion of anexternal IP packet is a UDP segment, and as both a transmission UDP portnumber and a reception UDP port number, for example, “5060” is employed.

<<Communication Phase>>

A telephone communication established between the user of the telephoneset 1208 and the telephone set 1224 corresponds to steps similar tothose explained in other embodiments. In this telephone communication,both an IP communication record indicated in the second row of theaddress administration table 1250 (namely, records of “EA1, EA4, IA1,IA4”), and an IP communication record indicated in a first row of anaddress administration table 1253 (namely, records of “EA4, EA1, IA4,IA1”) are employed. The voice(speech) is sent from the telephone set1208 to the media router management unit 1260 (step H350). In the mediarouter administration unit 1260, the above-described voice signal isdigitalized, and the digital voice data is transferred to a payloadportion of an external IP packet 1312 (refer to FIG. 149), and then theresulting IP packet 1312 is reached to the network node apparatus 1244.Then, after the external IP packet is IP-capsulated to be converted intoan internal IP packet 1313 (refer to FIG. 150), the internal IP packet1313 is transferred into the inside of the IP transfer network 1200, andthen, is reached to the network node apparatus 1246. The network nodeapparatus 1246 inverse-capsulates the internal IP packet 1313 andsupplies the inverse-capsulated IP packet to the media routeradministration unit 1265 (Steps H351 to H353). In this media routermanagement unit 1265, the digitalized voice data is converted into ananalog voice signal, and then, the analog voice signal is reached to thetelephone set 1224 (Step H354).

The telephone voice signal produced from the telephone set 1224 may besimilarly transferred to the telephone set 1208 along a directionopposite to the above-explained direction (Steps H360 to H364). In thecommunication phase, such an example is shown that an internal portionof the external IP packet 1312 is a UDP segment, a UDP port number sentfrom the telephone set 1208 is “5004”, and a UDP port number received bythe telephone set 1208 is “5008”.

<<Release Phase>>

When the user of the telephone set 1208 notifies the end of thetelephone communication (Step H380 of FIG. 146), a series of processsteps(namely, Steps H381 to H383) are performed in a similar manner tothose as explained in other embodiment. The notification is reached tothe telephone set 1224 (Step H384). Then, media router administrationunit 1265 notifies a release completion to the media routeradministration unit 1260 (Steps H386 to H388). In the above-explainedrelease phase, a format of an external IP packet is similar to that ofthe IP packet 1310 used in the above-described connection phase. Thatis, a payload portion of this external IP packet is the UDP segment, andas to both the transmission UDP port number and the reception UDP portnumber, for instance, “5060” is employed.

<<Another Example Using Telephone Number Server Contained in MediaRouter>>

When the user takes up the handset of the telephone set 1208 so as todial a telephone number “2001” of a telephone set 1220 belonging toanother company of a communication counter party, the media routeradministration unit 1260 checks a table 1255-1 held therein, and knowsthat a domain name of a telephone number corresponding to the telephonenumber “2001” is equal to “b.”. Next, the media router administrationunit 1260 inquires the telephone number domain name “b.” to thetelephone number server 1137. Then, the telephone number server 1137answers the IP address “EA5” of the media router 1205 which is connectedto the telephone set 1220. As a result, the telephone communication canbe established between the telephone set 1208 and the telephone set1220, which belong to different companies in accordance with such asimilar terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method.

In the above-explained terminal-to-terminal communication connectioncontrol method, while both the telephone number servers 1134 and 1272employed inside the IP transfer network 1200 are not used, the telephonenumber server 1137 provided in the media router 1201 is used. There issuch a feature that the IP communication records are used which havealready been set in the address administration tables 1250, 1253 and1252.

<<Method for Producing IP Communication Record to Establish TelephoneCommunication by Employing Telephone Number Server within IP transfernetwork>>

Referring now to FIG. 151, a description will be made of aterminal-to-terminal communication connection control method forestablishing a telephone communication from the telephone set 1208having the telephone number “1001” to a telephone set 1216 having atelephone number “234-2001”.

<<Connection Phase>>

When the handset of the telephone set 1208 is taken up, a calling signalis transferred to the media router administration unit 1260 (Step V0).Then, this media router administration unit 1260 confirms the telephonecalling operation (Step V1), and checks the table 1255-1 (refer to FIG.192) held therein so as to grasp that a domain name of a telephonenumber corresponding to the telephone number “234-2001” is equal to“0.”. Next, the media router administration unit 1260 inquiries thetelephone number domain name “0.” to the telephone number server 1137(Step V2), and the telephone number server 1137 answers the external IPaddress “EA81” of the telephone proxy server 1270 to the media routeradministration unit 1260 (Step V3). The external IP address is employedso as to access the telephone number server 1272 for managing theabove-explained domain name “0.”.

Next, while the transmission source IP address is selected to be the IPaddress “EA1” of the media router 1201 and also the destination IPaddress is selected to be the previously acquired IP address “EA81”, themedia router administration unit 1260 produces such an IP packet 1320(refer to FIG. 152), and thereafter transmits the IP packet 1320 to thenetwork node apparatus 1244 (Step V4). The IP packet 1320 contains thetransmission source telephone number “1001”, the destination telephonenumber “234-2001”, the UDP port number “5006” used in the telephonevoice communication, and also the additional information “Info-2”. Apayload portion of the IP packet 1320 corresponds to a UDP packet, andboth the transmission source port number and the destination port numberare selected to be “5060”. The additional information corresponds tosuch information which is internally used in the media router 1260. Theadditional information corresponds to, for example, the speechcompression system(G. 711 and G729A) employed so as to use the telephoneset 1208, the speech code conversion system, and also the number fordiscriminating the telephone call. It should be noted that both thetelephone administration server 1271 and the telephone proxy server 1270are not related to the above-explained additional information.

The network node apparatus 1244 retrieves the IP communication recordcontained in the address administration table 1250 of FIG. 145 byemploying both the internal IP address “IA1” and the destination IPaddress “EA81” contained in the IP packet 1320. The internal IP address“IA1” is applied to the termination unit of the logic communication line1257 into which the external IP packet 1320 is entered. Furthermore, thenetwork node apparatus 1244 confirms such a fact that the transmissionsource IP address “EA1” contained in the IP packet 1320 is involved inthe IP communication record. In this case, the network node apparatus1244 produces an IP packet 1321 (refer to FIG. 153) by employing arecord indicated in a fourth row of the address administration table1250 from the top row, namely “EA1, EA81, IA1, IA81” equal to IP address(i.e., “IA1” and “IA81”) which are described on a third address and afourth address within the record, while applying the IP packetcapsulating technical idea. Then, the network node apparatus 1244transmits the produced IP packet 1321 to the telephone proxy server 1270whose internal IP address is equal to “IA81” (Step V5).

When the telephone proxy server 1270 receives the IP packet 1321, thepilot telephone administration server 1270 produces a payload portion ofthe IP packet 1321, and such an IP packet 1322 (refer to FIG. 154) inwhich the above-explained addresses “EA1, IA1, EA81, IA81” are containedin the payload portion thereof, and then, transmits the IP packet 1322to the telephone administration server 1271 (Step V6). In this case, thetelephone proxy server 1270 uses an IP address “IA91” of the telephoneadministration server 1271, which is previously saved.

<<Control of Telephone Calling Line Number>>

The telephone administration server 1271 derives the address “EA1” ofthe media router 1201 on the transmission side from the received IPpacket 1322, and compares the derived address with a telephone call lineadministration table 1326-5 of FIG. 177. As to such a record whose IPaddress is equal to “EA1”, the telephone administration server 1271increases the under use line number by “1” to compare the increased linenumber with the upper-limit line number. In this 10-th embodiment, sincethe under use line number is equal to “2” and the upper-limit linenumber is equal to “5”, the subsequent procedure is carried out. Thenthe under use line number is larger than the upper-limit line number,the telephone administration server 1271 interrupts the present processoperation, which the process operation is not advanced to the subsequentconnection phase. Alternatively, the telephone administration server1271 forms such an IP packet for explaining the interrupt reason, andthen notifies the IP packet via the telephone proxy server 1270 to thetransmission source media router administration unit 1260. The telephoneadministration server 1271 may selectively determine as to whether ornot the telephone call line number control is carried out.

<<Management of Line Number>>

The telephone administration server 1271 reads out the IP packet 1322(FIG. 154) so as to acquire both the transmission source telephonenumber “1001” and the destination telephone number “234-2001”, and then,calculates a line number “CIC-2” (Circuit Identification Code) formanaging a voice communication line from a set of these two telephonenumbers. Next, the telephone administration server 1271 writes in arecord of a CIC administration table 1323 (refer to FIG. 155), the linenumber “CIC-2”; the transmission source telephone number “1001”; thedestination telephone number “234-2001”; both the external IP address“EA1” and the internal IP address “IA1” of the media router 1201 towhich the telephone set 1208 is connected; both the external IP address“EA81” and the internal IP address “IA81” of the telephone proxy server1270; an IP address “IA91” of the telephone administration server 1271;the procedure segment “IAM”; and a writing time instant(year, month,day, time, minute, second) “St-2”.

Next, the telephone administration server 1271 indicates an IP packet1324 (refer to FIG. 156) to the telephone number server 1272 (Step V7).The IP packet 1324 inquires the IP address related to the destinationtelephone number “234-2001”. The telephone number server 1272 answers anIP packet 1325 (refer to FIG. 157) to the telephone administrationserver 1271 (Step V8). The IP packet 1325 contains both the external IPaddress “EA2” and the internal IP address “IA2” of the media router 1202connected to the telephone set 1216; both the external IP address “EA82”and the internal IP address “IA82” of the telephone proxy server 1275;and the IP address “IA92” of the telephone administration server 1274.Then, the telephone administration server 1271 adds five sets of IPaddresses(“EA2, IA2, EA82, IA82, IA92”) acquired from the telephonenumber server 1272 to the CIC administration table 1323 (refer to FIG.155). This result is indicated in a column of an IP address item of thesecond row record of the CIC administration table 1326-1 (refer to FIG.158).

Next, the telephone administration server 1271 produces an IP packet1327 (refer to FIG. 159, will be referred to as an “IAM packet”) fromthe packet 1322 (FIG. 154) with reference to the IP address informationof the CIC administration table 1326-1 (FIG. 158), and then transmitsthe formed IP packet 1327 to the telephone administration server 1274(Step V9). In this case, the transmission source IP address of the IPpacket 1327 corresponds to “IA91” of the telephone administrationserver, and the destination IP address thereof corresponds to “IA92” ofthe telephone administration server 1274. The operation of the telephoneadministration server 1271 is advanced to a waiting state of a Step V16(will be discussed later), and also initiates the Step V16 waiting timercorresponding to the line number “CIC-2”. When the counting operation ofthis timer is completed, a release procedure of a communication line iscommenced similar to a process operation defined at a Step V60 (will beexplained later).

<<Control of Call Receiving Line Number>>

The telephone administration server 1274 derives the address “EA2” ofthe media router 1202 on the destination side from the received IPpacket 1327 (FIG. 159), and compares the derived address with atelephone call line administration table 1326-6 of FIG. 178. Thetelephone administration server 1274 increases the under use line numberby “1” to compare the increased line number with the upper-limit linenumber. In this 10-th embodiment, since the under use line number isequal to “2” and the upper-limit line number is equal to “7”, thesubsequent procedure is carried out, as to the record of the address“EA2”. While the telephone call reception line administration table1326-6 is employed, the telephone administration server 1271 mayselectively determine as to whether or not the telephone call linenumber control is carried out.

<<Management of Line Number>>

Upon receipt of the IP packet 1327, the telephone administration server1274 derives the line number “CIC-2”, the procedure segment “IAM”, thetransmission source telephone number “1001”, the destination telephonenumber “234-2001”, and the IP addresses(“EA1”, “IA1”, “EA81”, “IA81”,“IA91”, “EA2”, “IA2”, “EA82”, “IA82”, “IA92”), which are contained inthe payload portion of the received IP packet 1327, and thereafterwrites these derived items as a record of a CIC administration table1326-2 (refer to FIG. 160) managed by the telephone administrationserver 1274. This writing time instant “St-3” is also written into therecord of the CIC administration table 1326-2 by the telephoneadministration server 1274.

Subsequently, the telephone administration server 1274 forms an IPpacket 1328 (refer to FIG. 161) by employing the information acquiredfrom the IP packet 1327, and transmits the formed IP packet 1328 to thetelephone proxy server 1275 (Step V10). The payload of the IP packet1328 contains both a UDP segment and an address area, the IP address“EA1” of the transmission source media router 1206 is additionallywritten into the UDP segment. The address area contains the IP addresses“EA2, IA2, EA82, IA82”.

The telephone proxy server 1275 produces an IP packet 1329 (refer toFIG. 162) by using the information acquired from the IP packet 1328, andthen sends the produced IP packet 1329 to the network node apparatus1247. The IP packet 1329 having the transmission source address of“IA82” and the destination address of “IA2” is reached to the networknode apparatus 1247 (Step V11). Then, the network node apparatus 1247executes the inverse-capsulating operation as to the received IP packet1329 to produce an IP packet 1330 (refer to FIG. 163), and thereaftertransmits the produced IP packet 1330 to the media router administrationunit 1267 (Step V12).

The media router administration unit 1267 receives the IP packet 1330 soas to confirm as to whether or not the destination telephone number“234-2001” contained in the IP packet 1330 can be received. When thedestination telephone number can be received, the media routeradministration unit 1267 notifies the telephone call(call reception) tothe telephone set 1216 (Step V20). Furthermore, the media routeradministration unit 1267 reads out the contents of the IP packet 1330 tosave the read contents, namely the transmission source telephone number“1001”, the destination telephone number “234-2001”, the IP address“EA1” of the transmission source, the UDP port number “5006” of thetransmission source, and the additional information Info-2. In orderthat a call reception possibility(namely, discrimination between callreceivable and call not receivable) of the telephone set 1216 isnotified, the media router administration unit 1267 produces such an IPpacket containing the transmission source telephone number “1001”, thedestination telephone number “234-2001”, and the call receptionpossibility. Then, the media router administration unit 1267 notifiesthis produced IP packet to the telephone administration server 1274(Steps V13, V14, V15). It should be noted that the format of the IPpacket used at the Steps V13, V14, V15 is similar to a format of an IPpacket employed in Steps V22, V23, V24 (will be discussed later).

The telephone administration server 1274 receives the above-explained IPpacket which has been formed and transmitted by the media routeradministration unit 1267, and then, derives the transmission sourcetelephone number “1001”, the destination telephone number “234-2001”,and the information of the call reception possibility from the receivedIP packet. Then, the telephone administration server 1274 calculates theline number “CIC-2” from the two telephone numbers, and produces such anIP packet 1331 (refer to FIG. 164, will be referred to as an “ACMpacket”) which contains the line number “CIC-2” and the information asto the call reception possibility of the telephone set 1216, and thentransmits the IP packet to the telephone administration server 1271(Step V16). The telephone administration server 1271 derives both theline number “CIC-2” and the procedure segment “ACM” from the received IPpacket 1331, and stops the ACM waiting timer corresponding to the linenumber “CIC-2” which has been set at the time instant of the above StepV9. The telephone administration server 1271 checks the CICadministration table 1326-1 (refer to FIG. 158) held by the telephoneadministration server 1271 so as to find out such a record whose linenumber is equal to “CIC-2”, and rewrites a procedure segment column ofthe above-explained record into the above-mentioned procedure segment“ACM”.

Next, the telephone administration server 1271 produces such an IPpacket for indicating that the ACM packet is received (the IP packetincludes information of call reception possibility of telephone set1216), and then notifies the IP packet to the media routeradministration unit 1260 (Steps V17, V18, V19). It should be noted thatthe format of the IP packet used at the Steps V17, V18, V19 is identicalto a format of an IP packet employed in Steps V26, V27, V28 (will bediscussed later). The process operations defined at the Steps V17, V18,V19 may be selectively carried out.

When the telephone set 1216 reports the telephone calling operation tothe media router administration unit 1267 (Step V21), the media routeradministration unit 1267 produces such an IP packet 1332 (refer to FIG.165) and transmits the IP packet 1332 to the network node apparatus 1247in order to notify such a fact that the telephone set 1216 is beingcalled (Step V22). The produced IP packet 1332 contains the transmissionsource telephone number “1001”, the destination telephone number“234-2001”, the UDP port number “5008” used in the voice communicationby the telephone set, and the additional information Info-3. The networknode apparatus 1247 capsulates the IP packet 1332 by using such a recordthat the address values of the address administration table 1254 are“EA2, EA82, IA2, IA82”, and thus produces an IP packet 1332-2 (refer toFIG. 166). The IP packet 1332-1 is transmitted to the pilot telephoneadministration server 1275 (Step V23). The pilot telephoneadministration server 1275 forms an IP packet 1332-2 (refer to FIG.167), and then transmits the IP packet 1332-2 to the telephoneadministration server 1274 (Step V24).

The telephone administration server 1274 derives both the transmissionsource telephone number “1001” and the destination telephone number“234-2001” from the received IP packet 1332-2, and then calculates theline number “CIC-2” from the two telephone numbers so as to produce anIP packet 1333 (refer to FIG. 168, called as a “CPG” packet). Thetelephone administration server 1274 transmits the IP packet 1333 to thetelephone administration server 1271 (Step V25). The IP packet 1333contains both the UDP port number “5008” and the additional information“Info-3” acquired from the IP packet 1332-2.

The telephone administration server 1271 derives the line number“CIC-2”, the procedure segment “CPG”, the UDP port number “5008”, andthe additional information Info-3 from the received IP packet 1333, andrewrites the procedure segment of the line number “CIC-2” of the CICmanagement table 1326-1 (FIG. 158) as “CPG”. Then, the telephoneadministration server 1271 reads out the IP addresses “EA1, IA1, EA81,IA81”, the transmission source telephone number “1001”, and thedestination telephone number “234-2001”, and then produces an IP packet1333-1 (refer to FIG. 169) by employing all of the acquired information,and transmits the produced IP packet 1333-1 to the telephone proxyserver (Step V26).

The telephone proxy server 1270 produces an IP packet 1333-2 (refer toFIG. 170) by using the information contained in the received IP packet1333-1, and then sends the produced IP packet 1333-2 to the network nodeapparatus 1244 (Step V27). The network node apparatus 1244 executes theinverse-capsulating operation as to the received IP packet 1333-2 toproduce an IP packet 1333-3 (refer to FIG. 171), and thereaftertransmits the produced IP packet 1333-3 to the media routeradministration unit 1260 (Step V28). The media router administrationunit 1260 reads out from the received IP packet 1333-3, the transmissionsource telephone number “1001”, the destination telephone number“234-2001”, the destination IP address “EA2”, the destination UPD portnumber “5008”, and the additional information Info-3 so as to save theread information. The media router administration unit 1260 notifiessuch a fact that the destination telephone set is being called to thetelephone set 1208 (Step V29).

Next, when the user of the telephone set 1216 responds to the telephonecall (Step V31), the telephone set 1216 transmits the IP packetcontaining both the transmission source telephone number “1001” and thedestination telephone number “234-2001” to the telephone administrationserver 1274 in order to notify the response of the telephone set 1216(Steps V32, V33, V34). The telephone administration server 1274 derivesboth the transmission source telephone number “1001” and the destinationtelephone number “234-2001” from the received IP packet so as tocalculate the line number “CIC-2” from the two telephone numbers, andproduces such an IP packet 1334 (refer to FIG. 172, is called as an“ANM” packet) containing at least the calculated line number “CIC-2”,and then transmits the IP packet 1334 to the telephone administrationserver 1271 (Step V35). The telephone administration server 1271 derivesboth the line number “CIC-2” and the procedure segment “ANM” from thereceived IP packet 1334, and checks the CIC administration table 1326-1(refer to FIG. 158) held by the telephone administration server 1271 soas to find out such a record in which the line number is equal to“CIC-2”, and then rewrites the procedure segment column of the recordinto the above-explained procedure segment “ANM”.

Next, the telephone administration server 1271 notifies the reception ofthe ANM packet to the media router administration unit 1260, namely thetelephone administration server 1271 notifies that the telephone set1216 responds to the telephone calling (Steps V36, V37, V38), and then,the media router administration unit 1260 sends a telephone call signalto the telephone set 1208 (Step V39).

<<Setting of IP Communication Record>>

At the Step V34, the telephone administration server 1274 acquires theline number “CIC-2” from the IP packet which passes through thetelephone administration server 1274, and finds out such a record thatthe line number is “CIC-2” from the CIC administration table 1326-2owned by the telephone administration server 1274 so as to derive the IPaddresses “EA2”, “EA1”, “IA2”, “IA1” from the record content. Then, thetelephone administration server 1274 transmits the derived IP addressesto the table administration server 1276 (Step V42). The tableadministration server 1276 sets these transmitted IP addresses as arecord “EA2, EA1, IA2, IA1” indicated on a second row of the addressadministration table 1254 provided in the network node apparatus 1247(Step V43).

Similarly, at the above-described Step V35, the telephone administrationserver 1271 acquires the line number “CIC-2” from the IP packet whichpasses through the telephone administration server 1271, and finds outsuch a record that the line number is “CIC-2” from the CICadministration table 1323 owned by the telephone administration server1271 so as to derive the IP addresses “EA1”, “EA2”, “IA1”, “IA2” fromthe record content. Then, the telephone administration server 1271transmits the derived IP addresses to the table administration server1273 (Step V44). The table administration server 1273 sets thesetransmitted IP addresses as a record “EA1. EA2, IA2, IA2” indicated on afifth row of the address administration table 1250 provided in thenetwork node apparatus 1244 (Step V45).

<<Variation in Connection Phase>>

It should be noted that the media router administration unit 1267 cantransmit a response confirmation with respect to the Step V31 to thetelephone set 1216 (Step V41). Similarly, the telephone set 1208 cansend a response confirmation with respect to the Step V39 to the mediarouter administration unit 1260 (Step V40). The process operationsdefined at the Steps V41 and V40 correspond to optional processoperation which may be selectively performed. Also, in theabove-explained connection phase, the communication purpose UDP port andthe addition information of the telephone set 1216 are transmitted atthe Steps V22 to V29, but may be alternatively sent at the Steps V32 toV39.

<<Communication Phase>>

A telephone communication established between the user of the telephoneset 1208 and the telephone set 1216 corresponds to steps similar tothose explained in other embodiments. In this telephone communication,both an IP communication record indicated in the fifth row of theaddress administration table 1250 (namely, records of “EA1, EA2, IA1,IA2”), and an IP communication record indicated in a second row of anaddress administration table 1254 (namely, records of “EA2, EA1, IA2,IA1”) are employed. The voice(speech) signal of the telephone set 1208is digitalized, and the digitalized voice data is described on thepayload of the IP packet 1335 (refer to FIG. 173). In this case, boththe destination address and the UDP port number, which are acquired inthe above-explained connection phase are employed. In other words, thetransmission source address corresponds to the IP address “EA1” of themedia router 1201, the destination address corresponds to the IP address“EA2” of the media router 1202 connected to the destination telephoneset 1216, “5006” is employed as the transmission source UDP port number,and “5008” is used as the destination UDP port number. The analog voiceis sent from the telephone set 1208 (Step V50), and the analog voice isdigitalized to become a voice IP packet 1335 in the media routeradministration unit 1260, and then the voice IP packet 1335 is sent tothe network node apparatus 1244 (Step V51). In this network nodeapparatus 1244, the digital voice data is capsulated to become an IPpacket 1336 (refer to FIG. 174), and then, the IP packet 1336 is reachedvia the IP communication line, the router 1263, and the router 1264 ofFIG. 145 to the network node apparatus 1247 (Step V52). The network nodeapparatus 1247 inverse-capsulates the internal IP packet 1336 andsupplies the inverse-capsulated IP packet to the media routeradministration unit 1267 (Step V53). In this media router administrationunit 1267, the digitalized voice data is converted into an analog voicesignal, and then, the analog voice signal is reached to the telephoneset 1216 (Step V54). The analog voice signal produced from the telephoneset 1216 may be similarly transferred along a direction opposite to theabove-explained direction (Steps V55 to V59).

<<Release Phase>>

When the user of the telephone set 1208 notifies the release of thetelephone communication (Step V60 of FIG. 134), the notification isnotified via the media router administration unit 1260, the network nodeapparatus 1244, and the pilot telephone administration server 1270 tothe telephone administration server 1271 (Steps V60 to V63). Thetelephone administration server 1271 writes an end time instant “Ed-1”into a column of an end time instant of such a record in which the linenumber contained in the CIC administration table 1326-1 is “CIC-2”.Next, the telephone administration server 1271 produces a release IPpacket 1337 (refer to FIG. 175, and is called as a “REL” packet), andthen notifies the REL packet to the telephone administration server 1274(Step-V64). The telephone administration server 1274 notifies therelease of the telephone communication via the telephone proxy server1275 to the telephone set 1216 (Steps V71 to V74). Furthermore, thetelephone administration server 1274 writes an end time instant “Ed-2”into a column of an end time instant of such a record in which the linenumber contained in the CIC administration table 1326-2 is “CIC-2”.Next, the telephone administration server 1274 produces a releasecompletion IP packet 1338 (refer to FIG. 176, and is called as a “RLC”packet), and then returns the RLC packet to the telephone administrationserver 1271 (Step V70) in order that the telephone administration server1274 notifies the reception of the release IP packet 1337.

After the Step V64, the telephone administration server 1271 informs arelease instruction via the telephone proxy server 1270 and the networknode apparatus 1244 to the media router administration unit 1260 (StepsV65, V66, V67). The media router administration unit 1260 notifies therelease instruction to the telephone set 1216 (Step V74), and alsoinforms a release report via the telephone proxy server to the telephoneadministration server 1274 (Steps V75, V76, V77).

<<Deletion of IP Communication Record>>

After the Step V64, the telephone administration server 1271 transmitsthe line number “CIC-2” written in the release IP packet 1337 to thetable administration server 1273 (Step V78), and deletes a record of theaddress administration table 1250 corresponding to the line number“CIC-2” provided in the network node apparatus 1244. In this case, thetelephone administration server 1271 deletes the IP communicationrecords whose contents are “EA1, EA2, IA1, IA2” (Step-V79). After theStep V70, the telephone administration server 1274 transmits the linenumber “CIC-2” written in the release completion IP packet 1338 to thetable administration server 1276 (Step V80), and deletes a record of theaddress administration table 1254 corresponding to the line number“CIC-2” provided in the network node apparatus 1247. In this case, thetelephone administration server 1274 deletes the IP communicationrecords whose contents are “EA2, EA1, IA2, IA1” (Step V81).<<Acquisition of Telephone Communication Information>>

When the operation administration server 1277 employed in the IPtransfer network 1200 inquires to the telephone administration server1271 every a properly determined time instant, or a properly selectedtime interval (Step V260 of FIG. 179), the operation administrationserver 1277, detects such a record that a telephone communication isended by considering as to whether or not an end time instant is writteninto the CIC administration table 1236-1. Then, the operationadministration server 1277 notifies a telephone communication recordsuch as a transmission source telephone number, a destination telephonenumber, a starting time instant, and an end time instant to thetelephone administration server 1271 (Step V201). The operationadministration server 1277 deletes a record of the CIC administrationtable 1326 in which a telephone communication is ended. Similarly, whenthe operation administration server 1277 employed in the IP transfernetwork 1200 inquires to the telephone management server 1274 (Step V202of FIG. 179), the operation administration server 1277 detects such arecord that a telephone communication is ended by considering as towhether or not an end time instant is written into the CICadministration table 1326-2. Then, the operation administration server1277 notifies a telephone communication record such as a transmissionsource telephone number, a destination telephone number, a starting timeinstant, and an end time instant to the telephone administration server1274 (Step V203). The operation administration server 1277 deletes arecord of the CIC administration table 1326-2 in which the telephonecommunication is ended. As previously explained, the operationadministration server can acquire the record of the telephonecommunication via the telephone administration server, namely, thetransmission source telephone number, the destination telephone number,the starting time instant, the end time instant, which may be used inthe charging operation of the telephone communication. The acquisitionof the telephone communication instants may be selectively carried out.

<<Telephone Calling Line Administration and Call Receiving LineAdministration>>

In the connection phase, when the telephone administration server 1271forms the IAM packet 1327 shown in FIG. 159 (Step V9), the telephoneadministration server 1271 increases the under-use line number by “1”,which corresponds to the address “EA1” of the media router provided onthe transmission side of the calling line administration table 1326-5shown in FIG. 177. Similarly, the telephone administration server 1274increases the under-use line number by “1”, which corresponds to theaddress “EA2” of the media router provided on the destination of thecall receiving line administration table 1326-6 of FIG. 178.

In the release phase, when the telephone administration server 1271forms the REL packet 1337 shown in FIG. 175 (Step V64), the telephoneadministration server 1271 decreases the under-use line number by “1”,which corresponds to the address “EA1” of the media router provided onthe transmission side of the calling line administration table 1326-5shown in FIG. 177. Similarly, the telephone administration server 1274decreases the under-use line number by “1”, which corresponds to theaddress “EA2” of the media router provided on the destination of thecall receiving line administration table 1326-6 of FIG. 178, while theRLC packet 1388 of FIG. 176 is produced (Step V70). It should be notedthat both the telephone calling line administration and the callreception line administration may be selectively executed.

Another Example of Connection Phase

In the above-explained connection phase (Steps V0 to V45), a step forconfirming a response may be additionally introduced, namely Steps V90to V96, which will now be explained with reference to FIG. 180. When themedia router administration unit 1260 receives a notification of aresponse (Step V38), the media router administration unit 1260 mayproduce such an IP packet which implies a notification of the responseconfirmation and may return the IP packet. The IP packet for confirmingthe response is transmitted via the network node apparatus 1244, thetelephone proxy server 1270, the telephone administration server 1271,the telephone proxy server 1274, the telephone representative server1275, and the network node apparatus 1247 to the media routeradministration unit 1267 (Steps V90 to V96). As previously explained,reliability of the communication may be improved.

Another Example of Release Phase

The above-explained release phase (Steps V60 to V77) may be replaced bythe below-mentioned steps, which will be explained with reference toFIG. 180.

When the user of the telephone set 1208 notifies releasing of thetelephone communication (Step V100 of FIG. 185), the notification issupplied via the media router administration unit 1260 the network nodeapparatus 1244, the pilot telephone administration server 1270, thetelephone administration server 1271, the telephone administrationserver 1274, the telephone proxy server 1275, the network node apparatus1247, and the media router administration unit 1267 to the telephone set1216 (Steps V100 to V108). When the media router administration unit1267 receives the notification of the communication release (Step V107),the media router administration unit 1267 notifies the release receptionto the media router administration unit 1260 along a direction oppositeto the above-explained direction, namely via the network node apparatus1247, the telephone proxy server 1275, the telephone administrationserver 1274, the telephone administration server 1271, the pilottelephone proxy server 1270, and the network node apparatus 1244 (StepsV111 to V118). Subsequently, the release reception is notified via thesame route as that of the notification for the release completion,namely, via the network node apparatus 1247, the telephone proxy server1275, the telephone administration server 1274, the telephoneadministration server 1271, the telephone proxy server 1270, and thenetwork node apparatus 1244 to the media router administration unit 1260(Steps V121 to V127). Also, the deletion of the records employed in theaddress administration table 1250 employed in the network node apparatus1244, and used in the voice communication within the addressadministration table 1254 provided in the network node apparatus 1247 iscarried out in a similar manner to the above-explained Steps V80 andV81, or Steps V78 and V79. The reliability can be improved by executingthe procedure of the release acceptance, and the procedure of therelease completion two times.

<<Employment of TCP Technique>>

In the above-explained connection phase and release phase, thecommunication established between the telephone administration server1271 and the telephone administration server 1274 (namely, UDPcommunication defined by the Steps V9, V16, V25, V35, V64 and V70 shownin FIG. 151) may be substituted by a TCP communication. Referring now toFIG. 181 to FIG. 186, the TCP communication will be explained.

FIG. 181 indicates an embodiment in which the Step V9 is carried out byway of the TCP communication. That is, while the telephoneadministration server 1271 transmits a TCP packet 1390-1 containing anSYN designation used to establish a TCP connection to the telephoneadministration server 1274, the telephone administration server 1274responds a TCP packet 1391-1 containing an ACK indication of acommunication start acknowledgment, and then the telephoneadministration server 1271 transmits a TCP packet 1392-1 to thetelephone administration server 1274 (Step V9 t). The TCP packet 1392-1contains the same content(notification of call setting IAM) as that ofthe IP packet 1327. Next, the telephone administration server 1271transmits a TCP packet 1393-1 containing an FIN designation used to endthe TCP connection to the telephone administration server 1274, and thetelephone administration server 1274 returns a TCP packet 1394-1 for anend confirmation to the telephone administration server 1271.

FIG. 182 indicates an embodiment in which the Step V16 is carried out byway of the TCP communication. That is, while the telephoneadministration server 1274 transmits a TCP packet 1390-2 containing anSYN designation used to establish a TCP connection to the telephoneadministration server 1271, the telephone administration server 1271responds a TCP packet 1391-2 containing an ACK indication of acommunication start acknowledgment, and then the telephoneadministration server 1274 transmits a TCP packet 1392-2 to thetelephone administration server 1271 (Step V16 t). The TCP packet 1392-2contains the same content(notification of call setting acceptance ACM)as that of the IP packet 1331. Next, the telephone administration server1274 transmits a TCP packet 1393-2 containing an FIN designation used toend the TCP connection to the telephone administration server 1271, andthe telephone administration server 1271 returns a TCP packet 1394-2 foran end confirmation to the telephone administration server 1274.

FIG. 183 indicates an embodiment in which the Step V25 is carried out byway of the TCP communication. That is, while the telephoneadministration server 1271 transmits a TCP packet 1390-3 containing anSYN designation used to establish a TCP connection to the telephoneadministration server 1274, the telephone administration server 1274responds a TCP packet 1391-3 containing an ACK indication of acommunication start acknowledgment, and then the telephoneadministration server 1271 transmits a TCP packet 1392-3 to thetelephone administration server 1274 (Step V25 t). The TCP packet 1392-3contains the same content(notification of call passing CPG) as that ofthe IP packet 1333. Next, the telephone administration server 1271transmits a TCP packet 1393-3 containing an FIN designation used to endthe TCP connection to the telephone administration server 1274, and thetelephone administration server 1274 returns a TCP packet 1394-3 for anend confirmation to the telephone administration server 1271.

FIG. 184 indicates an embodiment in which the Step. V35 is carried outby way of the TCP communication. That is, the telephone administrationserver 1271 transmits a TCP packet 1392-4 to the telephoneadministration server 1274 (Step V35 t). The TCP packet 1392-4 containsthe same content(notification of call passing ANM) as that of the IPpacket 1334. The TCP communication can be carried out in a similarmanner to that of other communication methods. FIG. 185 shows anembodiment, in which the step V64 is carried out by way of a TCPcommunication. That is, the telephone administration server 1271transmits a TCP packet 1392-5 to the telephone administration server1274. The TCP packet 1392-5 contains the same content(notification ofrelease REL) as that of the IP packet 1337 (Step V64 t). The TCPcommunication can be done in a similar manner to that of othercommunication methods.

FIG. 186 shows an embodiment in which the Step V70 is carried out by wayof a TCP communication. That is, the telephone administration server1274 transmits a TCP packet 1392-6 to the telephone administrationserver 1271. The TCP packet 1392-6 contains the same content(notification of release completion RLC) as that of the IP packet 1338(Step V70 t). The TCP communication can be done in a similar manner tothat of other communication methods.

<<Separation Between Control Line and Telephone Communication Line>>

Next, a description will now be made of such a fact that in an open-areatelephone communication, an IP communication line employed in aterminal-to-terminal connection control can be separated from acommunication line used in a voice communication.

The IP packets 1322, 1327, 1328, 1331, 1332-2, 1333, 1333-1, 1334, 1337and 1338 used in the terminal-to-terminal connection control aretransferred to a range 1289 (refer to FIG. 187) of any of IPcommunication lines which connect the telephone proxy 1270, thetelephone administration server 1271, the telephone administrationserver 1274, and the telephone proxy server 1275. On the other hand, theIP packets 1335 and 1336 used in the voice communication are transferredto a range 1293 (refer to FIG. 187) of IP communication lines whichconnect the network node apparatus 1244, the router 1291, the router1292, and the network node apparatus 1247. The IP communication linesemployed in the terminal-to-terminal connection control correspond to aline of a common line signal network of a switched communicationnetwork, whereas the communication lines used in the voice communicationcorrespond to a voice communication line of a switched communicationnetwork.

As previously explained, the network node apparatus 1244 owns such afunction that the IP packet for the terminal-to-terminal communicationconnection sent from the media router 1201 can be transmitted to therouter 1263, and the IP packet for the voice communication can beseparately transmitted to the router 1291. Considering the flow of theIP packet along the reverse direction, while the IP packet for theterminal-to-terminal communication connection is combined with the IPpacket for the voice communication, the combined IP packet istransmitted to the media router 1201.

<<Tree Structure of Telephone Numbers and Telephone DNS Server>>

A tree structure shown in FIG. 188 corresponds to such a tree structureof telephone numbers managed by a telephone number server 1140 of acompany “B”. While domains 1251 to 1254 are related to each other at thesame level in a tree structural form at a lower grade of a route 1250,the domain 1251 manages a telephone number “1XXX” (namely, telephonenumbers of 1000 digits); the domain 1252 manages a telephone number“2XXX”; the domain 1253 manages the telephone number “3XXX”; and thedomain 1254 manages IP addresses related to other telephone numbers.Also, a tree structure shown in FIG. 189 corresponds to such a treestructure of telephone numbers managed by a telephone number server 1142of a company “A”, respectively. While domains 1251-2, 1251-3 and 1254are related to each other at the same level in a tree structural form ata low grade of a route 1251, the domain 1251-2 manages a telephonenumber “1XXX” of the company “A”; the domain 1251-3 manages a domain “#”of the company “A”; the domain 1251-4 manages an extension telephonenumber “1XX” of the company “A”; the domain 1251-5 manages an extensiontelephone number “2XX” of the company “A”; and also the domain 1251-6manages IP addresses related to extension telephone number “3XX” of thecompany “A”, respectively.

In this case, symbol “#” of the domain corresponds to a secret valuewhich is exclusively used in the company “A”, and is not opened to othercompanies. In other words, with respect to an inquiry issued from atelephone number server belonging to the company “B” and the company “C”other than the company “A”, the telephone number server 1142 does notrespond the information related to the domains 1151-4 through 1151-6managed by the domain “#”. The domain 1254 manages the IP addressesrelated to other telephone numbers.

A tree structure shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to such a tree structureof telephone numbers managed by a telephone number server 1137 of acompany “A”. While domains 1251 to 1254 are related to each other at thesame level in a tree structural form at a lower grade of a route 1250-1,the domain 1251 manages a telephone number belonging to the company “A”;the domain 1252 manages a telephone number “2XXX” of the company “B”;the domain 1253 manages the telephone number “3XXX” of the company “C”;and the domain 1254 manages IP addresses related to other telephonenumbers. The domain 1251-2 manages a telephone number “1XXX” of thecompany “A”; the domain 1251-3 manages a domain “#” of the company “A”;the domain 1251-4 manages an extension telephone number “1XX” of thecompany “A”; the domain 1251-5 manages an extension telephone number.“2XX” of the company “A”; and also the domain 1251-6 manages IPaddresses related to extension telephone number “3XX” of the company“A”, respectively.

In this case, symbol “#” of the domain corresponds to a secret valuewhich is exclusively used in the company “A”. A tree structure shown inFIG. 191 corresponds to such a tree structure of telephone numbersmanaged by a telephone number server 1139 of a company “X”. Whiledomains 1254-2 to 1254 are related to each other at the same level in atree structural form at a lower grade of a route 1250-2, the domain1254-2 manages a telephone number belonging to the company “X”; and thedomain 1254 manages IP addresses related to other telephone numbers,respectively.

A table 1255-1 of FIG. 192 represents such a method that a media routeradministration unit 1260 converts telephone numbers into domain names,and these telephone numbers are telephone communication counter party ofthe telephone sets 1208 to 1211 connected to the media router 1201. Forinstance, a telephone number “1XXX” of a first row of the table 1255-1,e.g., a telephone number “1001” is represented by a telephone numberdomain name “1. a.”; a telephone number “2XXX” of a second row of thetable 1255-1 is expressed by a telephone number domain name “b.”; andanother telephone number of a seventh row of the table 1255-1 isrepresented by a telephone number domain name “0.”, respectively. Otherrows of this table are expressed in a similar manner. In accordance withthe table 1255-2 of FIG. 193, for example, the telephone number server1137 responds the IP address “EA1” when the telephone number domain name“1.a.” is inquired; the telephone number server 1137 responds the IPaddress “EA5” when the telephone number domain name “b.” is inquired;and the telephone number server 1137 answers the IP address “EA81” whenthe telephone number domain name “0.” is inquired.

A table 1256-1 of FIG. 194 represents such a method that a media routeradministration unit 1264 converts telephone numbers into domain names,and these telephone numbers are telephone communication counter party ofthe telephone sets 1228 to 1231 connected to the media router 1203. Forinstance, a telephone number “1XXX” of a first row of the table 1256-1is represented by a telephone number domain name “1.a.”; a telephonenumber “1XX” of a second row of the table 1256-1 is expressed by atelephone number domain name “1.#.a.”; and another telephone number of afifth row of the table 1256-1 is represented by a telephone numberdomain name “0.”, respectively. Other rows of the table are expressed ina similar manner. In accordance with the table 1256-2 of FIG. 195, forexample, the telephone number server 1142 responds the IP address “EA1”when the telephone number domain name “1.#.a.” is inquired; thetelephone number server 1142 responds the IP address “EA5” when thetelephone number domain name “1.#.a.” is inquired; and the telephonenumber server 1142 answers the IP address “EA81” when the telephonenumber domain name “0.” is inquired.

A table 1257-1 of FIG. 196 represents such a method that a media routeradministration unit 1266 converts telephone numbers into domain names,and these telephone numbers are telephone communication counter party ofthe telephone sets 1220 to 1223 connected to the media router 1205. Forinstance, a telephone number “1XXX” of a first row of the table 1257-1,is represented by a telephone number domain name “a.”; a telephonenumber “2XXX” of a second row of the table 1257-1 is expressed by atelephone number domain name “b.”; and another telephone number of afourth row of the table 1256-1 is represented by a telephone numberdomain name “0.”, respectively. Other rows of the table are expressed ina similar manner. In accordance with the table 1257-2 of FIG. 197, forexample, the telephone number server 1140 responds the IP address “EA1”when the telephone number domain name “a.” is inquired: the telephonenumber server 1140 responds the IP address “EA5” when the telephonenumber domain name “b.” is inquired; and the telephone number server1140 answers the IP address “EA81” when the telephone number domain name“0.” is inquired.

The telephone number servers 1137 to 1142 call other telephone numberservers by employing the known redialing function of the domain nameserver(DNS), and then acquire the IP addresses which are directlymanaged by other telephones number servers.

The operations of the above-explained tenth embodiment will now besummarized. That is, the media router 1 is connected via the IP transfernetwork to the media router 2; the telephone set 1 is connected to themedia router 1; and the telephone set 2 is connected to the media router2. While both the telephone set 1 and the telephone set 2 use thetelephone number server employed in the media router 1, the telephonecommunication can be established without using the telephone numberserver employed in the IP transfer network. It should be noted that aplurality of telephone sets may be connected to either the media router1 or the media router 2. Also, while the IP transfer network containsthe specific telephone number server, both the telephone set 1 and thetelephone set 2 access the telephone number server provided in the IPtransfer network by employing the telephone number server inside themedia router 1, and can telephone-communicate with the telephone set 2.

The IP transfer network contains two, or more network node apparatus;the media router is connected via the logic IP communication line to anyone of these network node apparatus; the internal IP addresses areapplied to the termination units provided on the side of the networknode apparatus of the logic IP communication line; and the external IPaddresses are applied to the media routers. The media router containsthe telephone number server, and is connected via the communication lineto one, or more telephone sets. As the records of the addressadministration table within the network node apparatus, both theexternal IP address and the communication record are previously set, theconnection phase of the telephone communication is arranged by a seriesof processing steps made of the call setting operation(IAM), the callsetting acceptance(ACM), the call passing(CPG) and the response(ANM).Also, the release phase of the telephone communication is arranged by aseries of process steps made of the release(REL) and the releasecompletion(RLC). Alternatively, while the response confirmation(ACK) iscarried out after the response(ANM), the release acceptance may beexecuted between the release(REL) and the release completion(RLC).

The operations of the tenth embodiment will now be further summarized.That is, the IAM packet, the ACM packet, the CPG packet, the ANM packet,the REL packet and the RLC packet are transmitted/received between thetelephone administration server provided on the telephone calling sideand the telephone administration server provided on the call receivingside. In the closed-area telephone communication for limiting thetelephone communication parties, the telephone number server providedinside the media router is employed. Also, in the open-area telephonecommunication not for restricting the telephone communication parties,since the telephone number server employed in the media router is used,the telephone number server employed in the IP transfer network isemployed. In the open-area telephone communication, the IP communicationline employed in the terminal-to-terminal connection control can beseparated from the communication line used in the voice communication.While the telephone administration server contains the CICadministration table, the telephone administration server can record thetransmission source telephone number, the destination telephone number,the starting time instant of the telephone communication, and the endtime instant thereof. The operation administration server inquiries thetelephone administration server so as to acquire the transmission sourcetelephone number, the destination telephone number, the starting timeinstant of the telephone communication and the end time instant thereof,which may be used in the charging operation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned IP encapsulationand reverse-capsulation by the network node apparatus can be replaced tothe simple encapsulation which forms an internal packet by adding asimple header to an external IP packet and the simplereverse-capsulation which removes the simple header from the internalpacket, respectively.

11. 11th Embodiment in which Telephone Transfer is Carried Out fromPublic Telephone Network

<<Preparation>>

Referring now to FIG. 198, an 11-th embodiment of the present inventionwill be described. A telephone set 520 owns a telephone number“03-5414-8510”, and is connected via a telephone line 517 to anexchanger 513. A communication line 524-1 is used to connect anexchanger 514-1 to a gateway 521-1. An interface is an “NNI” containinga common signal line and a telephone communication line. A signallingunit defined by the common line signal system is transmitted on thecommon signal line. A signal station code “#1234” which isdiscriminatable on the side of the public switched telephone network anda gateway logic name “GW5211” to be public are applied to the gateway521-1. The subscriber exchangers 513 and 511 in advance store pairs ofthe gateway logic name “GW5211” and the signal station code “#1234”. Acommunication line 524-2 is used to connect an exchanger 514-2 to agateway 521-2, and an interface is a UNI. A telephone number“03-1111-2222” is applied to a terminal on the side of the gateway 521-2of the communication line.

<<Preparation of NNI Line Call Reception Transfer>>

An owner of the telephone set 520 separates the telephone set 520 fromthe telephone line 517, and connects the telephone set to acommunication line 528 connected to a media router 527 as a telephoneset 530. A telephone number of the telephone set 530 is “03-5414-8510”.A user 532 of the telephone set 520 notifies to an acceptance 533 of thepublic switched telephone network, such a fact that the telephone set520 is positionally switched to the position of the telephone set 530(Step H01 of FIG. 199). The acceptance 533 notifies a changed contentvia the communication line 534 to the exchanger 513 (Step H02). Theexchanger 513 converts the gateway logic name #GW5211# into the signalstation code ‘#1234’ by using the stored information and causes atransfer processing unit 516 thereof to store thereinto a set of thetelephone number “03-5414-8510” and the signal station code “#1234” ofthe transfer destination gateway 521-1 (Step H03).

<<NNI Line Call Reception Transfer>>

When a telephone call is issued from the telephone set 510 having thetelephone number “047-325-3897” to the destination telephone number“03-5414-8510” (Step H05), the exchanger 511 accepts this telephone call(Step H06). Next, the exchanger 511 executes such a procedure that atelephone call is issued from the exchanger 511 via the communicationline 512 to another exchanger 513 so as to call the telephone set 520(Step H08). The exchanger 513 finds out both the telephone number“03-5414-8510” and the signal station code “#1234” of the transferdestination gateway 521-1, which are previously stored in the transferprocessing unit 516 (Step H09), and then notifies the acquired signalstation code “#1234” to the exchanger 511 (Step H10). The exchanger 511produces a signalling unit containing the destination telephone number“03-5414-8510” of the transfer destinational a message portion thereof,and transmits the signalling unit to a destination of the signal stationcode “#1234” as the address of the received gateway. Then, thesignalling unit is reached via the exchanger 514-1 (Step H11) and thecommunication line 524-1 to the gateway 521-1 (Step H12). Thereafter,this signalling unit is transmitted via a router 525-1, a telephoneadministration server 525 (Step H15), a connection control line 524-5, arouter 525-2, a connection control line 524-4, and a network nodeapparatus 523-2 (Step H16), and furthermore, a communication line 526,and then is reached to a media router 527 (Step H17). In the case thatthe media router 527 transmits a notification of a telephone callacceptance with respect to the telephone connection request along adirection opposite to the above-explained direction, the notification ofthe telephone call acceptance is reached via a network node apparatus523-2 (Step H21) and further a telephone administration server 525 (StepH22) to the gateway 521-1 (Step H23). The telephone call acceptance isnotified via the exchanger 514-1 (Step H25) to the exchanger 511 (StepH26).

Next, when the media router 527 calls the telephone set 530 having thetelephone number “03-5414-8510” via the communication line 528 (StepH28), the notification of the calling operation is sent to the telephoneset 510 along a direction opposite to the above-explained direction,namely via the media router 527, the network node apparatus 523-2, theconnection control line 524-4, the telephone administration server 525,the gateway 521-1, the exchanger 514-1, and the exchanger 511 to thecall-issuing telephone set 510 (Steps H30 to H37). When the user of thetelephone set 530 takes up the handset(off hook), the telephone set 530notifies a response notification to the media router 527 (Step H40).Subsequently, similar to the above-explained operation, the responsenotification is notified via the media router 527, the network nodeapparatus 523-2, the connection control line 524-4, the telephoneadministration server 525, the gateway 521-1, the exchanger 514-1, theexchanger 511 to the telephone set 510 (Steps H41 to H47).

The above-explained connection control data which istransmitted/received as the above Steps H11, H12, H15 so as to connectthe telephone call will be referred to as an “IAM message”; and theconnection control data used among the Steps H23, H25, H26 will becalled as an ACM message; and the connection control data used among theSteps H33, H35, H36 will be called as a CPG message; and furthermore,the connection control data used among the Steps H43, H45, H46 will becalled as an ANM message. In the telephone call connection phase, theabove-explained message (IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM) do not pass through thenetwork node apparatus 523-1. In other words, it. is so featured thatthe above-explained messages are directly transmitted/received betweenthe gateway 521-1 and the telephone administration server 525.

As previously explained, the communication connection procedure betweenthe telephone set 510 and the telephone set 530 can be completed, sothat the voice(speech) communication can be established between thetelephone set 510 and the telephone set 530. It should be noted that thevoice transmitted from the telephone set 510 is reached via theexchanger 511, the exchanger 514-1, and the communication line 524-1 tothe gateway 521-1. In this gateway 521-1, the analog voice is convertedinto digitalized voice. The digitalized voice is reached to the networknode apparatus 523-1, the communication line 524-3, the router 525-2,the communication line 524-6 for the voice communication, the networknode apparatus 523-1 and the media router 527. The media router 527converts the reached digital voice into an analog voice signal which isdelivered to the telephone set 530. Also, the speech transmitted fromthe telephone set 530 is transferred via a communication path along areverse direction with respect to the above-explained communication pathto the telephone set 510.

When a telephone communication is ended, a telephone call release issent from the telephone set 510 to the exchanger 511 (Step H50), and isthen notified via the exchanger 514-1 (Step H51) to the gateway 521-1(Step H53). The notification of the call release completion is sent outfrom the gateway 521-1 to the exchanger 511 (Steps H54 and H55).

Next, the gateway 521-1 sends out the telephone call release which isacquired in the above-explained procedure via the IP transfer network522 to the telephone set 530 (Steps H61 to H64). The notification of thecall release completion is returned from the media router 527 to thegateway 521-1 (Step H65 to H67). The reason why the call release can bedone along the reverse direction, namely from the telephone set 530 tothe public switched telephone network 515 is already explained in otherembodiments. The connection control data for the telephone call releasedefined at the Steps H51, H53, H61 will be referred to as an “RELmessage”, whereas the connection control data defined at the Steps H67,H57, H55 will be referred to as an “RLC” message.

While the process operations defined from the Steps H01 to H03 are notcarried out, the owner 532 of the telephone set 520 notifies such anotice via the communication line 517 to the exchanger 513, andthereafter may switch the telephone set 520 to the position(the IPtransfer network of which entrance is the gateway “GW5211”) of thetelephone set 530 (Step H01X of FIG. 199). The notice implies that thetelephone set 520 having the telephone number of “03-5414-8510” isswitched to the position of the telephone set 530. Next, the exchanger513 converts the gateway logic name “GW5211” into the signal stationcode “#1234” by using the stored information and may employ such amethod that the set of the telephone number “03-5414-8510” and thesignal station code “#1234” of the transfer destination gateway 521-1 issaved in the transfer processing unit 516 (Step H03X).

With execution of the above-explained process operation, the descriptionof the telephone call reception transfer operation via the NNI line isaccomplished. Next, a description will be made of a telephone callreception transfer operation based upon UNI.

<<Preparation of UNI Line Telephone Call Reception Transfer>>

Referring now to FIG. 198 and FIG. 200, the UNI line telephone callreception transfer is described. An owner of the telephone set 520separates the telephone set 520 from the telephone line 517, andconnects the telephone set to a communication line 528 as a telephoneset 530. A telephone number of the telephone set 530 is “03-5414-8510”.The user 532 of the telephone set 520 notifies to the acceptance 533 ofthe public switched telephone network, such a fact that the telephoneset 520 is positionally switched to the position of the telephone set530 (Step H01). The acceptance 533 notifies a changed content via thecommunication line 534 to the exchanger 513 (Step H02). The exchanger513 causes a transfer processing unit 516 thereof to store thereinto aset of the telephone number “03-5414-8510” and a telephone number“03-1111-2222” which is applied to the termination unit on the side ofthe transfer destination gateway 521-2 of the communication 524-2 (StepH03-2).

<<UNI Line Telephone Call Reception Transfer>>

In this case, there is such a different point that while a exchanger514-2 is employed instead of the exchanger 514-1, a gateway 521-2 may beemployed instead of the gateway 521-1. Due to this reason, the controlprocedure of the terminal-to-terminal communication control between theexchanger 514-2 and the gateway 521-2 is realized by executing newprocess operations defined from a Step H12-2 and a Step H13-2, as willbe explained.

When a telephone call is issued from the telephone set 510 having thetelephone number “047-325-3897” to the destination telephone number“03-5414-8510” (Step H05-2), the exchanger 511 receives the telephonecall (Step H06-2). Next, the exchanger 511 issues a telephone call tothe telephone set 520 via the communication line 512 to the exchanger513 (Step H08-2). The exchanger 513 finds out both the telephone number“03-5414-8510” previously stored in the transfer processing unit 516 andthe telephone number “03-1111-2222” applied to the termination unit ofthe input line 524-2 of the transfer destination gateway 521-2 (StepH03-2), and then notifies the acquired telephone number “03-1111-2222”to the exchanger 511 (Step H10-2). The exchanger 511 produces a finalunit containing the above-explained transfer destination telephonenumber “03-5414-8510”, and then, transmits the signalling unit, whilethe received telephone number “03-1111-2222” of the input line of thegateway 521-2. Then, the signalling unit is reached to the exchanger514-2 (Step H11-2). When a telephone connection request(SETUP) containedin the signalling unit is transmitted via the communication line 524-2to the gateway 521-2 (Step H12-2), the gateway 521-2 notifies to theexchanger 514-2, such a fact that the telephone call connection requestof the Step H12-2 is accepted (Step H12-3). Furthermore, thenotification is reached via the telephone administration saver 525 (StepH15-2), the router 525-2, the connection control line 524-4, the networknode apparatus 523-2 (Step H16-2), and the communication line 526 to themedia router 527 (Step H17-2).

When the media router 527 transmits a notification of a telephone callacceptance with respect to the telephone connection request along adirection opposite to the above-described direction, the notification ofthe telephone call reception is reached via the network node apparatus523-2 (Step H21-2), the network node apparatus 523-1 (Step H23-2) to thegateway 521-2 (Step H24-2). The gateway 521-2 sends the telephone callacceptance via the exchanger 514-2 (Step H25-2) to the exchanger 511(Step H26-2).

Next, when the media router 527 calls the telephone set 530 having thetelephone number “03-5414-8510” via the communication line 528 (StepH28-2), the notification of the calling operation is sent to thetelephone set 510 along a direction opposite to the above-explaineddirection, namely via the media router 527 (Step H30-2), the networknode apparatus 523-2 (Step H31-2), the telephone administration server525 (Step H32-2), the network node apparatus (Step H33-2), the gateway521-2 (Step H34-2), the exchanger 514-2 (Step H35-2), and the exchanger511 (Step H36-2) to the call-issuing telephone set 510 (Step H37-2).

When the user of the telephone set 530 takes up the handset(off hook),the telephone set 530 notifies a response notification to the mediarouter 527 (Step H40-2). Subsequently, similar to the above-explainedoperation, the response notification is notified via the media router527, the network node apparatus 523-2, the telephone administrationserver 525, the network node apparatus 523-1, the gateway 521-2, theexchangers and 514-2 and 511 to the telephone set 510 (Steps H41-1 toH47-2). In the telephone call connection phase, the message istransmitted/received via the network node apparatus 523-1 for theconnection phase established between the gateway 521-2 and the telephoneadministration server 525.

As previously explained, the communication connection procedure can becompleted between the telephone set 510 and the telephone set 530, sothat the voice communication can be established between the telephoneset 510 and the telephone set 530.

<<Communication Phase and Release Phase>>

Both a telephone communication phase and a release phase are similar tothose of the above-explained case as to the NNI line call receptiontransfer operation, but own the following different point that while theexchanger 514-2 is employed instead of the exchanger 514-1, the gateway521-2 is used instead of the gateway 521-1 (Steps H50-2 to H53-2, H54-2to H55-2, H60-2 to H63-2, H65-2 to H68-2).

<<Another Embodiment of Call Reception Transfer Via UNI>>

A description is made with reference to FIG. 198 and FIG. 201. The ownerof the telephone set 520 disconnects the telephone set 520 from thetelephone line 517, and connects the telephone set to the communicationline connected to the media router 527 as the telephone set 530. Thepreparation is similar to the above-explained preparation for the UNIline call reception transfer of the above embodiment.

<<UNI Line Call Reception Transfer>>

In this embodiment, the UNI line call reception transfer operation isfeatured by that both the exchanger 511 and the exchanger 514-2transmit/receive a connection controlling message via a exchanger 513,which is explained as follows:

When a telephone call is issued form the telephone set 510 having thetelephone number “047-325-3897” to the destination telephone number“03-5414-8510” (Step H05-3), the exchanger 511 accepts the telephonecall (Step H06-3). Next, the exchanger 511 executes such a procedurethat a telephone call is issued from the exchanger 511 via thecommunication line 512 to another exchanger 513 so as to call thetelephone set 520 (Step H08-3). The exchanger 513 finds out both thetelephone number “03-5414-8510” which is previously stored in thetransfer processing unit 516, and also the telephone number“03-1111-2222” which is applied to the termination unit of the inputline 524-2 of the transfer destination gateway 521-2 (Step H09-3).Subsequently, the exchanger 511 produces a signalling unit containingthe destination telephone number “03-5414-8510” of the transferdestination, and transmits the signalling unit, while the telephonenumber “03-1111-2222” of the input line of the gateway 521-2 is used asthe destination. The signalling unit is reached to the exchanger 514-2(Step H11-3). When the telephone connection request(SETUP) contained inthe signalling unit is sent via the communication line 524-2 to thegateway 521-2 (Step H12-3), the gateway 521-2 notifies the acceptance ofthe telephone call connection request of the previous Steps H12-3 to theexchanger 514-2 (Step H13-3). Furthermore, the signalling unit istransmitted via the network node apparatus 523-1 (Step H14-3), a router525-2, a telephone administration server 525 (Step H15-3), a connectioncontrol line 524-4, the router 525-2, and a network node apparatus 523-2(Step H16-3), and furthermore, a communication line 526, and then isreached to a media router 527 (Step H17-3).

In the case that the media router 527 transmits a notification of atelephone call acceptance with respect to the telephone connectionrequest along a direction opposite to the above-explained direction, thenotification of the telephone call acceptance is reached via the networknode apparatus 523-2 (Step H21-3) and a telephone administration server525 (Step H22-3), and the network node apparatus 523-1 (Step H23-3) tothe gateway 521-2 (Step H24-3). The gateway 521-2 notifies the telephonecall acceptance via the exchanger 514-2 (Step H25-3) and the exchanger513 (Step H26-3) to the exchanger 511 (Step H27-3).

Next, when the media router 527 calls the telephone set 530 having thetelephone number “03-5414-8510” via the communication line 528 (StepH28-3), the notification of the calling operation is sent to thetelephone set 510 along a direction opposite to the above-explaineddirection, namely via the media router 527 (Step H30-3), the networknode apparatus 523-2 (Step H31-3), the telephone administration server525 (Step H32-3), the network node apparatus 523-1 (Step H33-3), thegateway 521-2 (Step H34-3), the exchanger 514-2 (Step H35-3) and theexchanger 513 (Step H36-3), and also the exchanger 511 to thecall-issuing telephone set 510 (Step H38-3). When the user of thetelephone set 530 takes up the handset(off hook), the telephone set 530notifies a response notification to the media router 527 (Step H40-3).Subsequently, similar to the above-explained operation, this responsenotification is notified via the media router 527, the network nodeapparatus 523-2 the telephone administration server 525, the networknode apparatus 523-1, the gateway 521-1, the exchanger 514-2, theexchanger 513, the exchanger 511 to the telephone set 510 (Steps H41-3to H48-3).

While the above-explained process operations are carried out, thecommunication connection procedure between the telephone set 510 and thetelephone set 530 is completed.

<<Communication Phase and Release Phase>>

Both a communication phase and a release phase are similar to those ofthe above-explained UNI line call reception transfer operation, but ownsa different point that the exchanger 511 and the exchanger 514-2transmit/receive the connection calling message via the exchanger 513.

Based upon the above-explained principle idea, the analog telephone set510 connected to the public switched telephone network 515 can establishthe terminal-to-terminal communication with respect to the analogtelephone set 530 which is connected to the media router 527 having thetelephone number “03-5414-8510” used in the public switched telephonenetwork via the IP transfer network 522. As previously explained inanother embodiment, the media router may be installed inside the LAN.Due to this reason, while the telephone set having the telephone number“03-5414-8510” employed in the public switched telephone network isconnected to the media router inside the LAN, the terminal-to-terminalcommunication can be established from the analog telephone set 510connected to the public switched telephone network 515 via the IPtransfer network 522 to the analog telephone set having the telephonenumber “03-5414-8510” provided inside the LAN.

12. 12th Embodiment in which Telephone Transfer Operation is Performedfrom Public Telephone Network

<<Preparation>>

In FIG. 202, reference numeral 540 shows an IP transfer network,reference numerals 541 to 545 show network node apparatus, referencenumerals 546-1 to 546-5 represent relay apparatus(router), referencenumerals 550 and 554 indicate “gateway containing line information”, andreference numerals 515, 552, 553 show gateways. These network nodeapparatus, relay apparatus, and gateways are directly connected viacommunication lines having each IP packet transfer functions to eachother, or are indirectly connected via the relay apparatus to eachother. Reference numerals 555 to 556 indicate public switched telephonenetworks(PSTN), reference numerals 557 to 566 are exchangers, referencenumerals 570 to 573 are telephone sets, reference numerals 597 and 598show telephone sets, reference numerals 576 to 578 show communicationlines having network/network interface(NNI), reference numerals 580 to581 indicate communication lines having user network interfaces (UNI),and reference numeral 583 represents a communication line having an IPpacket transfer function. Reference numerals 584 and 585 indicate IPtransfer network input line tables, and reference numerals 586 to 590show IP transfer network output line tables. Reference numeral 591 showsa media router. Reference numerals 593 to 594 indicate telephone numberservers which are connected via a communication line to either therouter 546-1 or the router 546-3.

The signal station code to discriminate from public switched telephonenetwork side and the IP address to discriminate from IP transfer networkside are respectively applied to the gateways 550 and 554 to beconnected with the NNI communication line

This embodiment is such an example that a communication enterpriseidentification code “00XY” is applied to the gateway 550 containing theline information, and a communication enterprise identification code“00UV” is applied to the gateway 554 containing the line information. Asignal station code “#2222” is applied to the gateway 551, and atelephone number “03-4444-4000” is applied to an inlet of thecommunication line 508 of the gateway 552. The telephone number servers593 to 594 owns such a function that when a telephone number isindicated, an IP address of a gateway having the telephone number, or anIP address of a media router(MR) having the telephone number isresponded. The IP transfer network output line tables 586 to 590 containIP address information corresponding to all of the telephone numbersowned by the gateways and the media routers. A telephone number of thetelephone set 570 is “03-1111-2222”, a telephone number of the telephoneset 571 is “06-3333-4444”, and a telephone number of the telephone set572 is “092-555-6666”. A telephone number of the telephone set 597 is“07-3333-4444”, and a telephone number of the telephone set 598 is“093-555-6666”. These telephone sets are connected via the communicationlines to the exchanger of either the public switched telephone network555 or 556. The telephone set 573 owns a telephone number of“045-777-8888”, and is connected to the media router 591 via thecommunication line.

FIG. 203 represents a content(example) of the IP transfer network inputline table 584, and also shows the following fact. That is, in the caseof a record on a first row, a segment of a gateway is “NNI”, and also asignal station code of the gateway is “#2222”. The gateway is used toconnect a communication line to such a telephone set that a range of adestination telephone number is defined from “06-0000-0000” to“06-9999-9999”. In this case, the gateway becomes 551. In the case of afifth row, a similar condition is set. Also, in the case of a record ona second row, a segment of a gateway is “UNI”. The gateway is used toconnect a communication line to such a telephone set that a range of adestination telephone number is defined from “092-0000-0000” to“092-9999-9999”. The telephone numbers connected to the gateway arepresent within a range defined from “03-4444-4000” to “03-4444-4099”. Inthis case, the gateway becomes 552. Both a record on a third row and arecord on a fourth row are similar conditions. A content of the IPtransfer network input line table 585 contains a similar content to thatof the IP transfer network input line table 584.

FIG. 204 shows a content(example) of the IP transfer network output linetable 586. In the case of a record on a first row, the table 586 showssuch a fact that either a gateway(GW) or a media router(MR) is connectedto an IP transfer network, and an IP address of the gateway, or themedia router is “10.240.240.1” to “10.240.240.255”. The gateway, or themedia router is employed so as to connect a communication line to atelephone set whose destination telephone number range is defined from“06-0000-0000” to “06-9999-9999”. A record on a second row is a similarcontent. Contents of the IP transfer network output line tables 587 to590 contain same sorts of information owned by the IP transfer networkoutput line table 586.

<<No. 1-Communication Connection Control Between Telephone Sets>>

FIG. 202 shows an example in which a telephone connection is made fromthe telephone set 570 having a telephone number of “03-1111-2222” as atransmission source to the telephone set 571 having a telephone numberof “06-3333-4444” as a destination. In FIG. 205, reference numeral 590-1shows a telephone connection made inside the public switched telephonenetwork 555, reference numeral 590-2 indicates a telephone connectionmade inside the IP transfer network 540, and reference numeral 590-3represents a telephone connection made inside the public switchedtelephone network 556. Referring now to FIG. 205 and FIG. 206, thetelephone connections will be described.

When the telephone set 570 dials “00XY-06-3333-4444” to make a telephonecall (Step J01 of FIG. 205), the exchanger 557 confirms the telephonecall (Step J02). While the exchanger 557 employs the communicationenterprise identification code “00XY” contained in the dialedinformation, the exchanger 557 finds out such a exchanger 558 which isconnected to the gateway 550 containing the line information to which“00XY” is applied. Then, the exchanger 557 transmits to the exchanger558, both the transmission source telephone numbers “03-1111-2222” and“00XY-06-3333-4444”, which are acquired during the dialing operation(Step J03). Then, the exchanger 558 transmits both the transmissionsource telephone number “03-1111-2222” and the destination telephonenumber “06-3333-4444” to the gateway 550 containing the line information(Step J04). Referring to the IP transfer network input line table 584within the gateway 550 containing the line information, the gateway 550containing the line information owns the NNI interface, while thetelephone number of the destination telephone set is used as aparameter, namely access information to such a gateway for connecting acommunication line to the telephone set whose destination telephone setis “06-3333-4444”. Also, the gateway 550 knows such a fact that a signalstation code of a gateway functioning as a signal station is “#2222”,and returns to the exchanger 558 (Step J05). Next, the exchanger 558seeks a exchanger which is connected to such a gateway whose signalstation code is “#2222”, namely finds out the exchanger 559 in thiscase, and transfers to the exchanger 559, such information containingthe signal station code “#2222” functioning as the access information tothe gateway and acquired in the above procedure, the transmission sourcetelephone number “03-1111-2222”, and the destination telephone number“06-3333-4444” (Step J06).

The exchanger 559 transfers the transmission source telephone number“03-1111-2222”, the destination telephone number “06-3333-4444” to thegateway 551 whose signal station code is “#2222” via the NNIcommunication line 557 (Step J07). The gateway 551 produces an IP packetcontaining both the transmission source telephone number “03-1111-2222”and the destination telephone number “06-3333-4444”, which are acquiredin the above-described procedure. A transmission source IP address ofthe IP packet is equal to an IP address applied to the gateway 551(namely, gateway 551 knows own IP address), and a destination IP addressof the IP packet is equal to an IP address of a communication counterparty to which a communication line is connected, namely, the IP address“10.240.240.1” of the gateway 554 in this case. While the telephonenumber of the destination telephone set is employed as a parameter fromthe IP transfer network output line table 586 (FIG. 204) provided insidethe gateway 551, one of the IP addresses “10.240.240.1” corresponding tothe destination telephone number “06-3333-4444”. Instead of theabove-explained finding procedure that the gateway 551 finds out the IPaddress of the gateway 554, the gateway 551 may transmit an “inquiry IPpacket” to the telephone number server 593, and thereafter may receive aresponse from the telephone number server 593 to employ theresponse(optional procedure). The inquiry IP packet is to inquire an IPaddress of a gateway used to be connected to the telephone set havingthe destination telephone number “06-3333-4444”.

Among the above-explained functions of the exchangers, at the Step “J04”and the Step “J05”, a message of a common circuit signalsystem/transaction function unit of a telephone switching network may beemployed.

The IP packet produced in the above-described manner is sent out fromthe gateway 551 via the router 546-1 and the telephone administrationserver 549-1 (Step J08), via the router 546-1, the router 546-5, and thetelephone administration server 549-5 (Step J09), via the router 546-5,and the gateway 554 (Step J10), and also via the NNI communication line578 to the exchanger 562 (Step J11). The above-described IP packetcontains the transmission source telephone number “03-1111-2222” and thedestination telephone number “06-3333-4444”.

Subsequently, a call setting request which contains the transmissionsource telephone number “03-1111-2222” and the destination telephonenumber “06-3333-4444” is transferred to the exchanger 561 (Step J12).The exchanger 561 which receives the call setting request returns aconfirmation notification of the call setting request to the exchanger557 (Step J14 to Step J20). Next, when the exchanger 561 calls thetelephone set 571 (Step J13) and the telephone set 571 returns a callingoperation to the exchanger 561 (Step J22), the exchanger 561 notifiesthe calling operation of the destination telephone set 571 to thetransmission source telephone set 570 (Step J23 to Step J30). When thetelephone set 571 is taken up(off hook), such an IP packet indicative ofa telephone communication commencement is notified to the transmissionsource telephone set 570 (Step J32 to Step J40), so that the telephonecommunication is commenced.

As previously described, the procedure of the terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control established between the telephone set570 and the telephone set 571 is accomplished, so that the telephonecommunication can be carried out between the telephone set 570 and thetelephone set 571.

When the telephone communication is ended, a telephone call releasenotification is transmitted to the exchanger 557 (Step J42 of FIG. 206),and then, a call release completion notification is returned from theexchanger 557 to the telephone set 570 (Step J43). Subsequently,releasing of the communication connection is performed in such a mannerthat the call release notification and the call release completionnotification are sequentially transmitted/received among the exchanger557, the exchanger 559, the gateway 551, the telephone administrationserver 549-1, the telephone administration server 549-5, the gateway554, the exchanger 562, the exchanger 561 and the telephone set 571(Steps J44 to J59).

The control data which are transmitted/received by the exchangers andthe telephone administration server at the steps correspond to theconnection control messages of the common line signals. For instance,the Steps J09, J17, J26, J36, J50 and J51 correspond to the IAM message,the ACM message, the CPG message, the ANM message, the REL message andthe RLC message.

The above-explained “No 1-Communication Connection Control betweenTelephone Sets” will now be summarized as follows: That is, this controlmethod corresponds to such a communication control method between twotelephone sets, in which while the IP transfer network is used as therelay network, the IP transfer network is connected to the publicswitched telephone network. The transmission source telephone set issuesthe telephone call by employing the transmission source telephonenumber, the communication enterprise identification code, and thedestination telephone number. In the IP transfer network-sided gatewayspecified by the communication enterprise code, the transmission sourcetelephone set acquires the signal station code of the input gateway usedto be connected to the IP transfer network with reference to “input linetable provided inside IP transfer network”. In the input gateway, whileusing the destination telephone number as the parameter, thetransmission source telephone set acquires the IP address of the outputgateway used to connect the communication line from the IP transfernetwork to the public switched telephone network with reference to“output line table provided outside IP transfer network” within thisinput gateway. Then, the transmission source telephone set transfers theIP packet containing the transmission source telephone number and thedestination telephone number to the output gateway toward the acquiredIP address. IN the output gateway, the telephone call is issued to thepublic switched telephone network based upon both the transmissionsource telephone number and the destination telephone number containedin the received IP packet, and is transferred via the exchanger to thedestination telephone set.

As the another control method, “output line information provided insideIP transfer network” is inquired to the telephone number server, andthen, the telephone number server responds. The “input line informationprovided inside IP transfer network” corresponds to the signal stationcode of the gateway having the NNI communication line outside the IPtransfer network. The “output line information provided outside IPtransfer network” corresponds to the IP address to the gateway havingthe NNI communication line outside the IP transfer network.

<<No. 2-Communication Connection Control Between Telephone Sets>>

Referring now to FIG. 207 and FIG. 208, a communication connectioncontrol No. 2 will be described.

This is such an example that a telephone connection is made from thetransmission source telephone set 570 having the telephone number of“03-1111-2222” to the destination telephone set 572 having the telephonenumber of “092-555-6666”. When the telephone set 570 dials“00XY-092-555-6666” to request a telephone connection (Step K01 of FIG.207), the exchanger 557 sends a response (Step K02). While the exchanger557 employs the communication enterprise identification code “00XY”contained in the dialed information, the exchanger 557 finds out such aexchanger 558 which is connected to the gateway 550 containing the lineinformation to which “00XY” is applied. Then, the exchanger 557transmits to the exchanger 558, both the transmission source telephonenumbers “03-1111-2222” and “00XY-092-555-6666”, which are acquiredduring the dialing operation (Step K03).

Then, the exchanger 558 transmits both the transmission source telephonenumber 03-1111-2222” and the destination telephone number “092-555-6666”to the gateway 550 containing the line information (Step K04). Referringto the IP transfer network input line table 584 within the gateway 550containing the line information, the gateway 550 containing the lineinformation finds out one telephone number “03-4444-4000” as accessinformation, and then notifies the found telephone number to theexchanger 558 (Step K05). This access information is used for thegateway for connecting the communication line to such a telephone setwhose destination telephone number is “092-555-6666”. Next, theexchanger 558 seeks such an exchanger connected to the gateway telephonenumber “03-4444-4000”, namely, finds out the exchanger 560 in this case.Then, the exchanger 558 transfers to the exchanger 560, such informationcontaining the telephone number “03-4444-4000” functioning as the accessinformation to the gateway and acquired in the above procedure, thetransmission source telephone number “03-1111-2222”, and the destinationtelephone number “092-555-6660”. The exchanger 560 transfers both thetransmission source telephone number “03-1111-2222” and the destinationtelephone number “092-555-6666” via the UNI communication line 580 tothe gateway 552 to which the telephone number “03-4444-4000” is applied(Step K07). The gateway 552 reports to the exchanger 560, such a factthat these two telephone numbers are received (Step K08).

Upon receipt of the above-explained information, the gateway 552retrieves the IP transfer network output line table 587 of FIG. 204, andalso acquires an IP address of a gateway functioning as a communicationcounter party used to connect a communication line, namely the IPaddress “10.240.241.1” of the gateway 553 in this case, while thedestination telephone number “092-555-6666” is used as a parameter. Thegateway 552 produces an IP packet containing both the transmissionsource telephone number “03-1111-2222” and the destination telephonenumber “092-555-6666”, which are acquired in the above-describedprocedure. A transmission source IP address of the produced IP packet isequal to an IP address applied to the gateway 552 (namely, gateway 552knows own IP address), and a destination IP address of the IP packet isequal to the acquired IP address “10.240.240.1” of the gateway 553 inthis case.

It should be noted that in the above-explained procedure in which thegateway 552 finds out the IP address of the gateway 553, the gateway 552may send an “inquiry IP packet” to the telephone number server 594 (StepKK1 of FIG. 207), and the inquiry IP packet inquires the value of the IPaddress of the gateway 553 by indicating the destination telephonenumber “092-555-6666”. Then, the gateway 552 may receive a response fromthe telephone number server 594 (Step KK2 of FIG. 207). Alternatively,while the content of the telephone number server 594 is previouslytransferred to the internal unit of the gateway 552, the gateway 552 mayuse the transferred content as the IP transfer network output linetable(note that the Steps KK1 and KK2 are optional steps).

Next, the IP packet which is formed and then is sent out from thegateway 552 is reached via the network node apparatus 543, the router546-2 and the telephone management server 549-2 (Step K09), via therouter 546-3, the router 546-4 and the telephone administration server549-4 (Step K10), and via the network node apparatus 545 to the gateway553 (Step K11). Next, the gateway 553 notifies such information via theUNI communication line 581 to the exchanger 563 (Step K12). Theinformation contains the transmission source telephone number“03-1111-2222” and the destination telephone number “092-555-6666”. Theexchanger 563 returns such a fact that these two telephone numbers arereceived to the gateway 553 (Step K13).

The exchanger 563 transfers a call setting request which contains thetransmission source telephone number “03-1111-2222” and the destinationtelephone number “092-555-6666” to the exchanger 564 (Step K14). Theexchanger 564 returns such a fact that the above-explained call settingrequest is received to the exchanger 557 (Step K16 to Step K22). Next,the exchanger 564 calls the telephone set 572 (Step K15), and thetelephone set 572 notifies the calling operation to the exchanger 564(Step K24). The exchanger 564 notifies the calling operation of thedestination telephone set 572 to the transmission source telephone set570 (Step K25 to Step K32). When the telephone set 572 is taken up(offhook) (Step K33), such a notification indicative of a telephonecommunication commencement is notified to the transmission sourcetelephone set 570 (Step K35 to Step K42), so that the telephonecommunication is commenced.

As previously described, the procedure of the terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control established between the telephone set570 and the telephone set 572 is accomplished, so that the telephonecommunication can be carried out between the telephone set 570 and thetelephone set 572.

When the telephone communication is ended, a telephone call releasenotification is transmitted from the telephone set 570 to the exchanger557 (Step K44 of FIG. 208), and then, a call release completionnotification is returned from the exchanger 557 to the telephone set 570(Step K45). Since the call release is notified and the call releasecompletion is notified, the connection between the telephone set 570 andthe exchanger 557 is released. Subsequently, releasing of thecommunication connection is performed in such a manner that the callrelease notification and the call release completion notification aresequentially transmitted/received among the exchanger 557, the exchanger560, the gateway 552, the telephone administration server 549-2, thetelephone administration server 549-4, the gateway 553, the exchanger563, the exchanger 564 and the telephone set 572 (Steps K46 to K61).

The above-explained “No 2-Communication Connection Control betweenTelephone Sets” will now be summarized. That is, this control method issuch a terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method inwhich the telephone communication is made from one telephone setconnected to the public switched telephone network via the IP transfernetwork to another telephone set connected to the public switchedtelephone network. The second connection control method is similar tothe above-explained fist connection control method. A major differentpoint is given as follows. The “input line information provided insideIP transfer network” corresponds to the telephone number of the gatewayhaving the UNI communication line outside the IP transfer network. The“output line information provided outside IP transfer network”corresponds to the IP address to the gateway having the UNIcommunication line outside the IP transfer network.

<<No. 3-Communication Connection Control Between Telephone Sets>>

This is such an example that a telephone connection is made from thetransmission source telephone set 570 having the telephone number of“03-1111-2222” to the destination telephone set 598 having the telephonenumber of “093-555-6666”.

In this example, when the telephone set 570 dials “00XY-093-555-6666” soas to request a telephone connection and also the exchanger 558 issues arequest to the gateway 550 containing the line information, the IPtransfer network input line table 584 is employed in the gateway 550.The exchanger 558 acquires a signal station code “#2222” as the accessinformation to the gateway used to connect the communication line to thetelephone set whose destination telephone number is “093-555-6666”. Inthis case, the exchanger 559 is connected to the gateway 551 via the NNIcommunication line 577.

Next, the gateway 551 inquires either the IP transfer network outputline table 586 or the telephone number server 593, which is providedinside the gateway 551 so as to acquire the IP address of the gateway553 used to connect the communication line to such a telephone set whosedestination telephone number is “093-555-6666”, and then forms an IPpacket containing both the transmission source telephone number“03-1111-2222” and the destination telephone number “093-555-6666”. Thisformed IP packet is sent out from the gateway 551, and then is reachedvia the router 546-1, the telephone management server 549-1, the router546-1, the router 546-5, the telephone management server 549-5, therouter 546-5, and the network node apparatus 545 to the gateway 553.

Subsequently, terminal-to-terminal connection information is reached viathe exchanger 563 and the exchanger 566 to the telephone set 598, sothat the terminal-to-terminal communication connection control betweenthe telephone set 570 and the telephone set 598 is completed. Theterminal-to-terminal connection information contains both thetransmission source telephone number “03-1111-2222” and the destinationtelephone number “093-555-6666”, which are acquired from the IP packet.

As previously described, this third connection control method is similarto the above-explained first connection control method. A majordifferent point is given as follows. The “input line informationprovided inside IP transfer network” corresponds to the signal stationcode of the gateway having the NNI communication line outside the IPtransfer network. The “output line Information provided outside IPtransfer network” corresponds to the IP address to the gateway havingthe UNI communication line outside the IP transfer network.

<No. 4-Communication Connection Control Between Telephone Sets>>

This is such an example that a telephone connection is made from thetransmission source telephone set 570 having the telephone number of“03-1111-2222” to the destination telephone set 597 having the telephonenumber of “07-3333-4444”.

In this example, when the telephone set 570 dials “00XY-07-3333-4444” soas to request a telephone connection and also the exchanger 558 issues arequest to the gateway 550 containing the line information, the IPtransfer network input line table 584 is employed in the gateway 550.The exchanger 558 acquires the telephone number “03-4444-4000” as theaccess information to the gateway used to connect the communication lineto the telephone set whose destination telephone number is“07-3333-4444”. Next, the gateway 552 inquires either the IP transfernetwork output line table 587 or the telephone number server 594, whichis provided inside the gateway 552 so as to acquire the IP address ofthe gateway 554 used to connect the communication line to such atelephone set whose destination telephone number is “07-3333-4444”, andthen forms an IP packet containing both the transmission sourcetelephone number “03-1111-2222” and the destination telephone number“07-3333-4444”. This formed IP packet is sent out from the gateway 552,and then is reached via the network node apparatus 543, the router546-2, the telephone administration server 549-2, the router 546-2, therouter 546-1, the router 546-5, the telephone administration server549-5 and the router 546-5 to the gateway 554.

Subsequently, terminal-to-terminal connection information is reached viathe exchanger 562 and the exchanger 565 to the telephone set 597, sothat the terminal-to-terminal communication connection control betweenthe telephone set 570 and the telephone set 597 is completed. Theterminal-to-terminal connection information contains both thetransmission source telephone number “03-1111-2222” and the destinationtelephone number “07-3333-4444”, which are acquired from the IP packet.

As previously described, this fourth connection control method issimilar to the above explained first connection control method. A majordifferent point is given as follows. The “input line informationprovided inside IP transfer network” corresponds to the telephone numberof the gateway having the UNI communication line outside the IP transfernetwork. The “output line information provided outside IP transfernetwork” corresponds to the IP address to the gateway having the NNIcommunication line outside the IP transfer network.

<<No. 5-Communication Connection Control Between Telephone Sets>>

This is such an example that a telephone connection is made from atransmission source telephone set 570 having a telephone number of“03-1111-2222” to a telephone set 573 (note that telephone number of thetelephone is “045-777-8888”) connected to the media router 591.

When the telephone set 570 dials “00XY-045-777-8888” to request atelephone connection (Step L01 of FIG. 209), the exchanger 557 respondsthe telephone call (Step L02). While the exchanger 557 employs thecommunication enterprise identification code “00XY” contained in thedialed information, the exchanger 557 finds out such a exchanger 558which is connected to the gateway 550 containing the line information towhich “00XY” is applied. Then, the exchanger 557 transmits to theexchanger 558, both the transmission source telephone numbers“03-1111-2222” and “00XY-045-777-8888”, which are acquired during thedialing operation (Step L03).

The exchanger 558 transmits both the transmission source telephonenumber “03-1111-2222” and the destination telephone number“045-777-8888” to the gateway 550 containing the line information (StepL04). Referring to the IP transfer network input line table 584, thegateway 550 finds out one telephone number “03-4444-4000” as accessinformation, and then notifies the found telephone number to theexchanger 558 (Step L05). The access information is used for the gatewayfor connecting the communication line to such a telephone set whosedestination telephone number is “045-777-8888”. Next, the exchanger 558seeks such an exchanger connected to the gateway telephone number“03-4444-4000”. Then, the exchanger 558 transfers to the exchanger 560,such information containing the telephone number “03-4444-4000” acquiredin the above procedure, the transmission source telephone number“03-1111-2222”, and the destination telephone number “045-777-8888”(Step L06). The exchanger 560 transfers both the transmission sourcetelephone number “03-1111-2222” and the destination telephone number“045-777-8888” via the communication line 580 to the gateway 552 towhich the telephone number “03-4444-4000” is applied (Step L07). Thegateway 552 returns such a fact that this gateway receives at least twotelephone numbers to the exchanger 560 (Step L08).

Next, the gateway 552 produces an IP packet containing both thetransmission source telephone number “03-1111-2222” and the destinationtelephone number “045-777-8888”, which are acquired by theabove-explained communication control. A transmission source IP addressof the IP packet is equal to an IP address applied to the gateway 552(namely, gateway 552 knows own IP address), and a destination IP addressof the IP packet is equal to an IP address of a communication counterparty to which a communication line is connected, namely, the IP address“10.241.1.1” of the media router 591 in this case. The destinationtelephone number “045-777-8888” is found out as a parameter from the IPtransfer network output line table 587.

The IP packet of telephone call connection request produced in theabove-described manner is sent out from the gateway 552 via the networknode apparatus 543, the router 546-2 and the telephone administrationserver 549-2, via the router 546-2, the router 546-3 and the telephoneadministration server 549-3 via the router 546-3, and the network nodeapparatus 544 to the media router (Steps L10 to L16). The media router591 returns the reception of the telephone call connection request tothe exchanger 557 (Step L20 to Step L25). Furthermore, the media router591 calls the telephone sets 573 (Step L18). When the telephone setsends a response (Step L27), the media router 591 notifies thetransmission source telephone set 570 that it is, calling telephone set(Step L29 to Step L35). When the telephone set 573 is taken up(off hook)(Step L36), a response indicative of a telephone communicationcommencement is notified to the transmission source telephone set 570(Step L38 to Step L44), so that the telephone communication iscommenced.

As previously described, the procedure of the terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control established between the telephone set570 and the telephone set 573 is accomplished, so that the telephonecommunication can be carried out between the telephone set 570 and thetelephone set 573.

When the telephone communication is ended, a telephone call releasenotification is transmitted from the telephone set 570 to the exchanger557 (Step L45), and then, a call release completion notification isreturned from the exchanger 557 to the telephone set 570 (Step L46).Both the notification of the call release and the notification of thecall release completion are issued, so that the connection between thetelephone set 570 and the exchanger 557 is released. Subsequently,releasing of the communication connection is performed in such a mannerthat the call release notification and the call release completionnotification are sequentially transmitted/received among the exchanger557, the exchanger 560, the gateway 552, the telephone administrationserver 549-3, the telephone administration server 549-3, the mediarouter 591 and the telephone set 573 (Steps L47 to L60).

The above-described “No 5-Communication Connection Control betweenTelephone Sets” is similar to the previously explained “No1-Communication Connection Control between Telephone Sets”, and then,own the following major comparison point: That is, a telephoneconnection destination corresponds to such a telephone set connected toa media router.

<<No. 6-Communication Connection Control Between Telephone Sets>.

Referring now to FIG. 210, this sixth communication connection controlbetween telephone sets will be explained. Reference numeral 550-1 and554-1 show gateways, reference numeral 540-1 indicates an IP transfernetwork, and reference numeral 1000 indicates an “input line informationserver”. The same reference numerals shown in FIG. 202 will be employedas those for denoting the same, or similar apparatus, telephone sets,public switched telephone networks and other apparatus of this controlmethod. This embodiment is featured by that instead of the gateway 550containing the line information(shown in FIG. 202), the input lineinformation server 1000 containing the IP transfer network input linetable 584 is employed. Also, instead of the Steps J04 and J05 shown inFIG. 205, both a Step J04 x and a J05 x of FIG. 211 are employed.

A communication enterprise identification code “00XY” dicriminatablefrom the public switched telephone network 555 and the signal stationcode to discriminate from the public switched telephone network 555 areapplied to the input line information server 1000. FIG. 211 shows anexample in which a telephone connection is made from the telephone set570 having a telephone number of “03-1111-2222” as a transmission sourceto the telephone set 571 having a telephone number of “06-3333-4444” asa destination, which will be explained as follows with reference to FIG.211.

When the telephone set 570 dials “00XY-06-3333-4444” to make a telephonecall (Step J01 of FIG. 211), the exchanger 557 confirms the telephonecall (Step J02). While the exchanger 557 employs the communicationenterprise identification code “00XY” contained in the dialedinformation, the exchanger 557 finds out such a exchanger 558 which isconnected to the input line information server 1000 to which “00XY” isapplied. Then, the exchanger 557 transmits to the exchanger 558, boththe transmission source telephone numbers “03-1111-2222” and“00XY-06-3333-4444”, which acquired during the dialing operation (StepJ03). Then, the exchanger 558 transmits both the transmission sourcetelephone number “03-1111-2222” and the destination telephone number“06-3333-4444” to the input line information server 1000 (Step J04 x).Referring to the IP transfer network input line table 584 within theinput line information server 1000, the gateway owns the NNI interface,while the telephone number of the destination telephone set is used as aparameter, namely access information to such a gateway for connecting acommunication line to the telephone set whose destination telephone setis “06-3333-4444”. Also the input line information server 1000 knowssuch a fact that a signal station code of a gateway functioning as asignal station is “#2222”, and returns to the exchanger 558 (Step J05x).

Subsequently, since the process operations defined by the Steps J06 toJ40 are carried out, the terminal-to-terminal communication connectioncontrol procedure between the telephone set 570 and the telephone set571 is carried out, so that the telephone communication can be madebetween the telephone set 570 and the telephone set 571. Similarly, thetelephone set 570 can execute the terminal-to-terminal communicationconnection control procedure with respect to the telephone sets 572,597, 598 and 573.

One Embodiment of Network Node Apparatus

Referring now to FIG. 212, a description will be made of a network nodeapparatus employed in the above-described terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control method.

Reference numeral 540-1 is an IP transfer network, reference numerals543-1 to 545-1 represents network node apparatus, reference numerals552-1 and 554-1 show gateways, and also reference numerals 547-1 and548-1 indicate relay apparatus, which are connected is communicationlines to each other. An IP address “a” is applied to the gateway 552-1,and an IP address “b” is applied to the gateway 554-1. Furthermore, anIP address “x” is applied to a joint point between the network nodeapparatus 543-1 and a communication line provided on the side of thegateway 552-1, and an IP address y” is applied to a joint point betweenthe network node apparatus 545-1 and a communication line provided onthe side of the gateway 554-1. Referring numeral 543-1T shows an addressadministration table for holding the four sets of IP addresses “a”, “b”,“x” and “y”. Reference numeral 543-1T shows an address administrationtable for holding the four sets of IP addresses “a”, “b”, “y” and “x”.

As to an IP packet PCK-1 which is transmitted from the gateway 552-1 tothe gateway 554-1, a transmission source IP address thereof is “a”, anda destination IP address thereof is “b”. When the IP packet PCK-1 isreached to the network node apparatus 543-1, the address managementtables 543-IT is considered. In this embodiment, since the three sets offront IP addresses “a”, “b”, “x” among the internal information “a”,“b”, “x”, “y” are made coincident with the three IP addresses containedin the IP packet PCK-1, another IP packet “y” contained inside theaddress administration table 543-1 and an IP capsulation operation forapplying an IP header is carried out, so that a new IP packet PCK-2 isformed. The IP packet PCK-2 is transmitted from the network nodeapparatus 543-1 to a communication line, and then, is reached via therouters 547-1 and 548-1 to the network node apparatus 545-1. In thisnetwork node apparatus 545-1, an inverse-capsulation operation iscarried out so as to remove the IP header which has been applied by theabove-explained IP capsulation operation. As a result, an IP packetPCK-3 is restored, and then is sent via the communication line to thegateway 554-1. The address administration table 545-1T is used so as totransmit the IP packet along a direction opposite to the above-explaineddirection.

Both the network node apparatus 543-1 and 545-1 own such a functioncapable of executing both as IP capsulation operation and aninverse-capsulation operation, and hold therein address administrationtables for this purpose. The IP addresses of the gateways are featuredto be registered/held in the address administration tables of thenetwork node apparatus 543-1 and 545-1.

Another Embodiment of Network Node Apparatus

Referring now to FIG. 213, a description will be made of network nodeapparatus 543-2 and 545-2 employed in the above-describedterminal-to-terminal communication connection control method, accordingto another embodiment.

Reference numeral 540-2 is an IP transfer network, reference numerals543-2 and 545-2 represent network node apparatus, reference numerals552-2 and 554-2 show gateways, and also reference numerals 547-2 and548-2 indicate relay apparatus, which are connected via communicationlines to each other. An IP address man is applied to the gateway 552-2,and an IP address “b” is applied to the gateway 554-2. Reference numeral543-2T shows an address administration table for holding theabove-described IP addresses “a”, and reference numeral 545-2T shows anaddress administration table for holding the above-described IPaddresses “b”.

As to an IP packet PCK-11 which is transmitted from the gateway 552-2 tothe gateway 554-2, a transmission source IP address thereof is “a”, anda destination IP address thereof is “b”. When the IP packet PCK-11 isreached to the network node apparatus 543-2, the address administrationtable 543-2T is considered. In this embodiment, since “a” of theinternal information is made coincident with the transmission source IPaddress contained in the IP packet PCK-11, it can be understood that theIP packet PCK-11 is transferred into the IP transfer network 540. Next,the IP packet PCK-11 may be directly changed into an IP packet PCK-12.The IP packet PCK-12 is sent from the network node apparatus 543-2 tothe communication line, and then is reached via the routers 547-2 and548-2 to the network node apparatus 545-2. In this case, since thedestination IP address “b” of the IP packet PCK-12 is recorded, in theaddress administration table 545-2T, the IP packet PCK-12 is directlysent as an IP packet PCK-13 via the communication line to the gateway554-2. Both the network node apparatus 543-2 and 545-2 may confirm sucha permission that the IP packet is accepted within the IP transfernetwork 540-2. Otherwise, both the network node apparatus 543-2 and545-2 may confirm that the IP address “b” is present outside the IPtransfer network 540-2. The IP addresses of the gateways are featured tobe registered/held into the address administration tables employed inthe network node apparatus 543-2 and 545-2.

The above-explained functions of the network node apparatus aresummarized as follows: That is, in this embodiment, there are twodifferent types of the network node apparatus. When the IP packet isaccepted from the external unit of the IP transfer network into theinternal unit of the IP transfer network, one network node apparatusexecutes the IP capsulation operation to newly apply the IP header tothe received IP packet, and another network node apparatus does notexecute the IP capsulation operation. The IP addresses of the gatewaysare registered/held in the address administration tables of the networknode apparatus.

13. 13th Embodiment in which Control Line and Voice Line are Separatedfrom Each Other to be Connected to Public Switched Telephone Network

A description is made of a method for controlling atelephone-to-telephone communication connection, in which acommunication signal is transmitted via an IP transfer network and apublic switched telephone network(PSTN), while a control communicationline is separated from a voice(speech) communication line.

In FIG. 214, reference numeral 1500 shows an IP transfer network,reference numeral 1501 represents a public switched telephone network,reference numeral 1502 shows a gateway equipped with a capsulationfunction, reference numeral 1503 represents a relay gateway, referencenumerals 1508 and 1520 indicate telephone sets, reference numeral 1518denotes a relay exchanger, reference numeral 1519 shows a subscriberexchanger, reference numeral 1505 represents a control communicationline by the common line signal system, and reference numeral 1506indicates a voice(speech) communication line. Also, reference numeral1507 indicates a control IP communication line, and reference numeral1509 shows a voice IP communication line. Also, reference numerals 1544and 1547 show network node apparatus, reference numerals 1570 indicatesa pilot telephone server, reference numeral 1571 shows a telephoneadministration server, reference numeral 1572 represents a telephonenumber server, reference numeral 1573 shows a table administrationserver, and reference numerals 1521, 1522, 1523, 1524 indicate routers.Further, reference numeral 1513 shows a relay control unit(STP), andreference numeral 1516 indicates a voice control unit.

A portion of internal resources(namely, apparatus and servers) of the IPtransfer network shown in FIG. 214 may be made in correspondence with aportion of the internal resources of the IP transfer network shown inFIG. 145 or FIG. 187. That is, a telephone set 1508, a media router1560, a network node apparatus 1544, a pilot telephone server 1570, atelephone administration server 1571, a telephone number server 1572, atable administration server 1573, a network node apparatus 1547correspond to the telephone set 1208, the media router 1201, the networknode apparatus 1244, the pilot telephone server 1270, the telephoneadministration server 1271, the telephone number server 1272, the tableadministration server 1273 and the network node apparatus 1247,respectively.

<<Function of Relay Control Unit>>

In the present invention, a point provided in the common line signalsystem is expressed by a signal station, and a point code is representedby a “signal station address”. The relay control unit 1513 in the relaygateway 1503 is equal to a relay signal station(STP) of a common linesignal system, as viewed form the public switched telephone network1501, and a signal station address “PC-3” is applied to the relay signalstation. The relay control unit 1513 manages a signal station addressadministration table 1527 (refer to FIG. 225). The relay control unit1513 retrieves the signal station address administration table, and thencan acquire a signal station address of a exchanger employed in thepublic telephone network 1501. The relay control unit 1513 determines aproducing rule as same as the rule of the public switched telephonenetwork 1501. The producing rule is to produce a line number “CIC-n”written in a signalling unit which is transmitted to an NNIcommunication line 1505, and is to produce a signal link selection“SLS-n”.

The relay control unit 1513 is assigned an IP address “GW03” andconverts various sorts of messages(namely, IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL, RLCetc.) of telephone call controls stored in an IP packet transmitted fromthe control IP communication line 1507 into various sorts ofmessages(namely, IAM, ACM, CPG, ANM, REL, RLC etc.) stored in asignalling unit by the common signal line system, and then, transmitsthese converted messages to the control communication line 1505. Also,the relay control unit 1513 owns such a function having an oppositesense. That is, various sorts of telephone call control, which arestored in the signalling unit sent from the control communication line1505 are converted into messages stored in the IP packet, and then, theconverted message is transmitted to the control IP communication line1507.

The IP address “GW03” and the signal station code “PC-3” assigned to therelay control unit 1513 are also IP address and signal station codeassigned to the relay control unit 1503.

<<Function of Voice Control Unit>>

The voice control unit converts voice stored in an IP packet transmittedfrom the voice IP communication line 1509 into a voice packet, and thentransmits the voice frame to the voice communication line 1506. Thevoice frame is adapted to such a format of a frame which can betransferred within the public switched telephone network 1501, forinstance, primary group interface(PRI, 23B+D) of the ISDN. Also, thevoice control unit 1516 owns a function opposite to the above-explainedfunction. That is, the voice control unit 1516 converts a voice framesent from the voice communication line 1506 of the public switchedtelephone network 1501 into an IP frame format, and then transmits theconverted IP frame to the voice IP communication line 1509. The voicecontrol unit has an IP address used to transmit/receive a voice IPframe. The IP address is employed so as to set a media path connectiontable.

<<Telephone Number Server>>

When a telephone number is inquired to the telephone number server 1572,this telephone number server 1572 responds an IP address which is usedto communicate a telephone set having the inquired telephone number. Insuch a case that a telephone communication destination correspond to arelay gateway, the telephone number server 1572 responds a value of anIP address applied to the relay gateway. In such a case that a telephonecommunication destination corresponds to a gateway equipped with acapsulation function, the telephone number server 1572 responds to an IPaddress of a media router connected to a destination of the gateway.

<<Connection Phase>>

This is such an example that a telephone communication is made from thetelephone set 1508 to the telephone set-1520. In this embodiment, an IPaddress “EA81” of the pilot telephone server 1570 is opened to the userof the IP transfer network 1500, and the media router 1560 holds the IPaddress “EA81”. When the handset of the telephone set 1508 is taken up,a telephone call signal is transferred to the media router 1560 (StepN01 of FIG. 215), and the media router 1560 confirms telephone callingoperation (Step N02). Next, the media router 1560 produces such an IPpacket 1530 (refer to FIG. 216), and then, transmits the IP packet 1530to the network node apparatus 1544 (Step N03), where a transmissionsource IP address is an IP address “EA1” of the media router 1560, and adestination IP address is an external IP address “EA81” of the pilottelephone server 1570. The IP packet 1530 contains a telephone number“TN-1” of the telephone set 1508 functioning as a transmission source, atelephone number “TN-2” of the telephone set 1520 functioning as adestination, a UDP port number “5006”, and additional information“Info-2”, which are employed in order to allow the telephone set 1508functioning as the transmission source to transmit the telephone voice.A payload portion of the IP packet 1530 is a UDP packet, both thetransmission source and the destination port number of which are equalto “5060”.

The network node apparatus 1544 inputs the external IP packet 1530, andapplies the IP capsulation operation(as previously explained in otherembodiments) so as to form an internal IP packet 1531 (refer to FIG.217), and then transmits the IP packet 1531 to the pilot telephoneserver 1570 whose internal IP address is equal to “IA81” (Step N04).Upon receipt of the IP packet 1531, the pilot telephone server 1570produces such an IP packet 1532-1 (refer to FIG. 218) in which the IPaddresses “EA1, IA1, EA81, IA81” contained in the IP packet 1531 areincluded in a payload portion thereof. Then, the pilot telephone server1570 sends the IP packet 1532-1 to the telephone administration server1571 (Step N05). In this case, the pilot telephone server 1570 uses thepreviously held IP address “IA91” of the telephone administration server1571.

<<Forming of CIC Administration Table>>

The telephone administration server 1571 receives the IP packet 1532-1and writes the below-mentioned items into a record of a CICadministration table managed by the telephone administration server1571, namely, the IP address “IA91” of the telephone administrationserver 1571, the procedure segment “IAM”, the transmission sourcetelephone number “TN-1”, the destination telephone number “TN-2”, boththe external IP address “EA1” and the internal IP address “IA1” of themedia router 1560, the voice communication port number “5006” providedin the IP packet 1532-1, both the external IP address “EA81” and theinternal IP address “IA81” of the pilot telephone server 1570, the writetime instant(year, months, day, hour, minute, second) “St-2” (see CICadministration table 1571-1 of FIG. 219).

Next, the telephone administration server 1571 indicates an IP packet1532-2 (refer to FIG. 220) for inquiring the destination telephonenumber “TN-2” to the telephone number 1572 (Step N06). The telephonenumber server 1572 stores an IP address “GW03” into an IP packet 1532-3(refer to FIG. 221) and responds this IP packet (Step N07). The IPaddress “GW03” is related to apparatus and the like which are connectedto the telephone set 1520. It should be noted that the apparatus and thelike which are connected to the telephone set 1520 constitute the relaycontrol unit 1513 in the relay gateway 1503 in this example.

<<Administration of Line Number>>

The telephone administration server 1571 adds the IP address “GW03” ofthe relay control unit 1513 acquired from the telephone number server1572 into the CIC administration table 1571-1 (refer to FIG. 219).Further, the telephone administration server 1571 determines a CICnumber “CIC-2”, based upon the rule determined by the telephoneadministration server 1571 with respect to a set of the IP address“IA91” of the telephone administration server 1571 and the IP address“GW03” of the relay control unit 1513, and then writes the CIC number“CIC-2” into the CIC administration table. The condition is indicated ina record of a CIC administration table 1571-2 (refer to FIG. 222).

Next, the telephone administration server 1571 produces an IP packet1534 (refer to FIG. 223)(IAM packet) from the IP packet 1532-1 (refer toFIG. 218) with reference to the CIC administration table 1571-2 (referto FIG. 222), and then transmits the IP packet 1534 to the relay controlunit 1513 (Step N09). In this case, a destination IP address of the IPpacket 1534 corresponds to the IP address “GW03” of the relay controlunit 1513.

<<Operation of Relay Control Unit>>

Upon receipt of the IP packet 1534 (refer to FIG. 223) (Step N09), therelay control unit 1513 derives from the IP packet 1534, thetransmission source IP address “IA91”, the destination IP address“GW03”, the line number “CIC-2”, the procedure segment “IAM”, thetransmission source telephone number “TN-1”, the destination telephonenumber “TN-2”, both the external IP address “EA1” and the internal IPaddress “IA1” of the media router 1560, the voice communication portnumber “5006”, both the external IP address “EA81” and the internal IPaddress “IA81” of the pilot telephone server 1570. The relay controlunit 1513 writes/records the derived items as a record of a CICadministration table 1513-1 (refer to FIG. 224) managed by the relaycontrol unit 1513 in combination with a time instant “St-3”.

Further, the relay control unit 1513 retrieves a signal station addressadministration table 1527 (refer to FIG. 225), indicates the telephonenumber “TN-2” of the destination telephone 1520, and acquires a signalstation address “PC-19” of the exchanger 1519 for managing the telephoneset 1520. Furthermore, the relay control unit 1513 determines both a CICnumber “CIC-3” and a signal link selection “SLS-3” based upon such arule which is previously defined with respect to the public switchedtelephone network 1501. The relay control unit 1513 writes the signalstation address “PC-3” of the relay control unit 1513, the acquired“PC-19”, the signal link selection “SLS-3”, and the line number “CIC-3”as a new record of the address connection table 1525 in combination witha media path identifier “MP-7”. As a result, this address connectiontable becomes a table 1525-1 (refer to FIG. 226).

Subsequently, the relay control unit 1513 produces a signalling unit1535 which contains the signal station address “PC-3”, the acquired“PC-19”, the line number “CIC-3”, the signal link selection “SLS-3”, themessage “IAM” required from the IP packet 1534, and the parameter“Para-2” (refer to FIG. 227), and then transmits this signalling unit1535 to the control communication line 1505 (Step N10).

<<Cooperation Between Relay Control Unit and Voice Control Unit>>

The relay control unit 1513 notifies the media path identifier “MP-7”,internal IP address “IA1” for encapsulation (Step 1513-1 in FIG. 228),the external IP address “EA1” of the media router 1560, and the voicecommunication port number “5006” via the information line 1515 to thevoice control unit 1516. The voice control unit 1516 writes the notifiedinformation as a record of the media path connection table 1528, andthen reports the completion of the notified information writingoperation (Step 1516-1). The media path identifier is used todiscriminate voice communication path for telephone call. A record of amedia path connection table 1528-1 (refer to FIG. 231) indicates suchinformation before the writing operation, and a media path connectiontable 1528-2 (refer to FIG. 232) indicates a written result. It shouldbe noted that the voice control unit 1516 determines a logiccommunication line used to transmit voice data from the voice controlunit 1516 to the voice communication line 1506, and writes a logiccommunication line identifier “CH1” (namely, transmission channelindicated by Channel-S) thereof as a record of the media path connectiontable 1528-2.

<<Operation of Switching Network and ACM Message>>

The exchanger 1518 receives the signalling unit 1535 via the controlcommunication line 1505 (Step N10), and thereafter transfers thesignalling unit 1535 to the exchanger 1519 (Step N11). The exchanger1519 receives the signalling unit 1535, and confirms as to whether ornot the destination telephone “TN-2” contained in the signalling unit1535 can be received. If the telephone call can be received, then theexchanger 1519 notifies a telephone reception notification to thetelephone set 1520 (Step N12). Furthermore, the telephone set 1520produces such a signalling unit 1538-1 (refer to FIG. 235) for notifyingthe reception of the signalling unit 1535 and returns the signallingunit 1538-1. The signalling unit is reached via the exchanger 1518 (StepN13) to the relay control unit 1513 (Step N14). The relay control unit1513 acquires address information used to produce an IP packet basedupon label information of the received signalling unit 1538-1, and thenproduces an IP packet 1551 (ACM message, refer to FIG. 236) and furthersends the IP packet 1551 to the telephone administration server 1571(Step N15).

The telephone administration server 1571 derives both the line number“CIC-2” and the procedure segment “ACM” from the received IP packet1551, and investigates the CIC administration table 1571-2 (refer toFIG. 222) held by the telephone administration server 1571 so as to findout such a record indicative of the own IP address “IA91”, the IPaddress “GW03” of the communication counter party, and the line number“CIC-2”. Then, the telephone administration server 1571 rewrites aprocedure segment column of the relevant record of the CICadministration table 1571-2 into the above-explained procedure segment“ACM”. Next, the telephone administration server 1571 produces an IPpacket which indicates that the ACM message is received, and notifiesthe IP packet to the media router 1560 (Steps N17, N18, N19).

<<Media Path Connection Table>>

After the process operation of the Step N10 has been completed, therelay control unit 1513 adds the media path identifier “MP-7” to thevoice control unit 1516. Then, when the relay control unit 1513 requestsboth an IP address and a port number (Step 1513-2 in FIG. 228), thevoice control unit 1516 answers the internal IP address “IA1” forcapsulation, the transmission source IP address “EA3” of the IP packetand the port number “5008” of the UDP packet to the relay control unit1513 (Step 1516-2), which are formed and sent to the voice communicationline 1509 employed in the IP transfer network 1500 by the voice controlunit. It should also be noted that the voice control unit 1516 secures alogic voice communication line for receiving voice data from theexchanger 1518, and determines an identifier “CH-2” (reception channelindicated by Channel-R) to record this identifier in the record of themedia path connection table 1528-3 (refer to FIG. 233).

The relay-control unit 1513 receives the internal IP address of thevoice control unit 1516, the transmission source IP address “EA3” andthe port number “5008” of the UDP packet provided in the speech controlunit from the voice control unit 1516, and writes this internal IPaddress into the CIC management table 1513-1 (refer to FIG. 224). Theresultant content is indicated in the CIC administration table 1513-2(refer to FIG. 234). In this table, the address of the telephone proxyserver is not contained. The voice control unit 1516 previously holdsone, or more internal IP-address of the vice control unit 1516, whileone of these internal IP addresses is used as the above-explainedinternal IP address “IA3”.

<<Transmission of CPG Message>>

When the telephone set 1520 reports the telephone calling operation tothe exchanger 1519 (Step N20), the exchanger 1519 forms a signallingunit(CPG message) for notifying the telephone calling operation andtransmits the signalling unit via the exchanger 1518 (Step N21) to therelay control unit 1513 (Step N22). The relay control unit 1513 acquiresaddress information used to an IP packet based upon the labelinformation of the received signalling unit with reference to theaddress connection table 1525-1 (refer to FIG. 226), and produces a CPGmessage (FIG. 237) having an IP packet format. The IP packet is sent tothe telephone administration server 1571 (Step N23). The telephoneadministration server 1571 notifies the notification of the telephonecalling operation via the media router 1560 to the telephone set 1508(Steps N25 to N28). While the CPG message is formed, the relay controlunit 1513 acquires the transmission source external IP address “EA3”,the internal IP address n IA3 and the port number “5008” of the UDPpacket within the voice control unit 1516 from the CIC administrationtable 1513-2 (refer to FIG. 234), and then writes these acquired datainto a CPG message 1552. The telephone administration server 1571derives the external IP address “EA3”, the internal IP address “IA3”,and the port number “5008” from the received CPG packet 1552, and maywrite the derived data into the administration table 1571-2 (refer toFIG. 222).

<<Transmission of ANM Message>>

Next, when the user of the telephone set 1520 responds to the telephonecalling operation (Step N30), the exchanger 1519 forms a signallingunit(ANM message) for notifying the telephone responding operation andtransmits the signalling unit via the exchanger 1518 (Step N31) to therelay control unit 1513 (Step N32). The relay control unit 1513 producesan ANM message 1553 having an IP packet format (refer to FIG. 238) basedupon the label information of the received signalling unit withreference to the address connection table 1525-1 (refer to FIG. 226).The IP packet 1553 is sent to the telephone administration server 1571(Step N33). Then, the telephone administration server 1571 notifies thenotification of the telephone response via the media router 1560 to thetelephone set 1508 (Steps N35 to N38). In other words, an IP packet 1554(FIG. 240) is sent from the telephone administration server 1571 to thepilot telephone server 1570 (Step N35), and IP packet 1555 (FIG. 241) issent from the pilot telephone server 1570 to the network node apparatus1544 (Step N36), and an IP packet 1556 (FIG. 242) is sent from thenetwork node apparatus 1544 to the media router 1560 (Step N37).

When the relay control unit 1513 produces the ANM message, the relaycontrol unit 1513 acquires the transmission source external IP address“EA3”, the internal IP address “IA3” of the voice control unit 1516, andthe port number “5008” of the UDP packet from the CIC administrationtable 1513-2 (refer to FIG. 234), and then writes these acquired datainto an ANM message 1553. The telephone administration server 1571derives the external IP address “EA3”, the internal IP address “IA3”,and the port number “5008” from the received response packet 1553, andmay write the derived data into the administration table 1571-2 (referto FIG. 222).

<<Write Timing into CIC Management Table 1571>>

The timing at which the telephone administration server 1571 derives theexternal IP address “EA3”, the internal IP address “IA3”, and the portnumber “5008” and then writes the derived addresses into the CICadministration table 1571-2 is carried out only at one of the processoperations defined at the step N23 where the CPG message is received andthe step N33 where the ANM message is received.

<<Setting of IP Communication Record by Relay Control Unit>>

The relay control unit derives the IP addresses “EA3”, “EA1”, “IA3”,“IA1” from the internal record of the CIC administration table 1513-3(refer to FIG. 239) at the Step N33, and then transmits the derived IPaddresses to the table administration server 1576 (Step N41). The tableadministration server 1576 sets the received IP addresses as IPcommunication records “EA3, EA1, IA3, IA1” of the address administrationtable provided in the network node apparatus 1547 (Step N42). It shouldbe understood that both the record format of the address administrationtable and the address setting method to the record have already beenexplained in other embodiments.

<<Setting of IP Communication Record by Telephone AdministrationServer>>

Similarly, the telephone administration server 1571 derives the IPaddresses “EA1”, “EA3”, “IA1”, “IA3” from the internal record of the CICadministration table 1513-3, and then transmits the derived IP addressesto the table administration server 1573 (Step N43). The tableadministration server 1573 sets the received IP addresses as IPcommunication records “EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3” of the address administrationtable provided in the network node apparatus 1544 (Step N44).

<<Communication Phase>>

A telephone communication established between the user of the telephoneset 1508 and the telephone set. 1520 corresponds to steps similar tothose explained in other embodiments. In this telephone communication,both an IP communication record indicated in the address administrationtable (namely, records of “EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3”) of the network nodeapparatus 1544, and an IP communication record indicated in an addressadministration table(namely, records of “EA3, EA1, IA3, IA1”) of thenetwork node apparatus 1547 are employed.

The voice(speech) signal of the telephone set 1508 is digitalized, andthe digitalized voice data is described on the payload of the IP packet1561 (refer to FIG. 243). In this case, both the destination address andthe UDP port number, which are acquired in the above-explainedconnection phase are employed. In other words, the transmission sourceaddress corresponds to the IP address “EA1” of the media router 1560,the destination address corresponds to the IP address “EA3” of the voicecontrol unit 1516 connected to the destination telephone set 1520,“5006” is employed as the UDP port number used in the voice transmissionby the media router, and also “5008” is employed as the UDP port numberused in the voice transmission by the voice control unit 1516. Theanalog voice is sent from the telephone set 1508, and the analog voiceis digitalized to become a voice IP packet 1561 (refer to FIG. 243) inthe media router 1560, and then the voice IP packet 1561 is sent to thenetwork node apparatus 1544. In this network node apparatus 1544, thedigital voice data is capsulated to become an IP packet 1562 (refer toFIG. 244) by using the IP communication records “EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3”,and then, the IP packet 1562 is reached via the voice IP communicationline, and the router 1524 to the network node apparatus 1547. Thenetwork node apparatus 1547 inverse-capsulates the internal IP packet1562 by using the above-described IP communication records “EA3, EA1,IA3, IA1” to produce an IP packet 1563 (refer to FIG. 245). The IPpacket 1563 into which the digitalized voice is stored is reached to thevoice control unit 1516. The voice control unit derives the transmissionsource IP address “EA1”, the transmission source port number “5006”, thedestination IP address “EA3”, and the destination port number “5008”,which are contained in the IP packet 1563, and also refers to the mediapath connection table 1528-3 (FIG. 233). While using a media path recordequal to the transmission source IP address “EA1”, the transmissionsource port number “5006”, the destination IP address “EA3”, and thedestination port number “5008”, the digitalized Voice contained in theIP packet 1563 is converted into a speech(voice) frame 1564 (FIG. 246)having a format transferred to the voice communication line 1506. Thespeech frame 1564 is reached via the exchanger 1518 to the exchanger1519, so that voice is outputted from the telephone set 1520. The voicestored in the speech frame sent from the telephone set 1520 istransferred along a direction opposite to the above-explained directionto be reached to the telephone set 1508.

<<Release Phase>>

When the user of the telephone set 1508 notifies the end of thetelephone communication (Step N50 of FIG. 215), the notification isnotified from the media router 1560 to the telephone administrationserver 1571 (Steps N51 to N53). The telephone administration server 1571returns the release completion to the media router 1560 (Steps N64 toN66). Also, the telephone administration server 1571 sends an IP packet1565 (FIG. 247) for notifying the telephone call release to the relaycontrol unit 1513 (Step N55). The relay control unit 1513 returns an IPpacket 1566 (FIG. 248) for notifying the release completion to thetelephone administration server 1571 (Step N62). The relay control unit1513 sends a telephone call release notification to the relay exchanger1518 (Step N56), and then, the relay exchanger 1518 returns the releasecompletion to the relay control unit 1513 (Step N61). The relay controlunit 1518 sends the telephone call release notification to the relayexchanger 1519 (Step N57), and then, the relay exchanger 1519 returnsthe release completion to the relay exchanger 1518 (Step N60). Theexchanger 1519 sends a telephone call cut-off signal to the telephoneset 1520 (Step N58).

<<Deletion of Media Path Record>>

At the Step N55, the relay control unit 1513 instructs the voice controlunit 1516 to delete the record of the media path of the media pathconnection table 1528-3 (Step 1513-3 of FIG. 230). The voice controlunit 1516 reports the record deletion of this media path (Step 1516-3).The record may be used in operation/record(optional process).

<<Deletion of IP Communication Record and CIC Management Table Record>>

After the Step N55, the telephone administration server 1571 transmitsthe line number “CIC-2” written in the release IP packet 1565 to thetable administration server 1573 (Step N73) so as to delete the IPcommunication records “EA1, EA3, IA1, IA3” corresponding to the linenumber “CIC-2” provided in the network node apparatus 1544 (Step N74).Furthermore, the telephone administration server 1571 deletes the recordof the telephone set of the CIC administration table 1571-2 (refer toFIG. 222) managed by the telephone administration server 1571. It shouldbe noted that the telephone administration server 1571 may employ therecord in the operation/record of the telephone call(optional process).

The relay control unit 1513 transmits the line number “CIC-2” written inthe release IP packet 1566 to the table administration server 1576 (StepN71) so as to delete the IP communication records “EA3, EA1, IA3, IA1”provided in the network node apparatus 1547 (Step N72). Furthermore, therelay control unit 1513 deletes the record of the telephone set of theCIC administration table 1513-3 (refer to FIG. 239) managed by the relaycontrol unit 1513. It should be noted that the relay control unit 1513may employ this record in the operation/record (optical process).

Next, the operations of the 13-th embodiment will now be summarized.

While the control IP communication line and the voice IP communicationline of the telephone are separated from each other between thetermination gateway equipped with the capsulation function and the relaygateway, the telephone communication can be established between thetelephone set 1 and the telephone set 2 via the termination gatewayequipped with the capsulation function, the relay gateway, the NNIinterface communication line, and the public switched telephone network.Both the telephone administration server in the termination gatewayequipped with the capsulation function and the relay control unit in therelay gateway own the individual CIC administration tables, and managethe line numbers by using these individual CIC administration tables.The relay control unit provided in the relay gateway converts the IPpacket and the signalling unit by using the address connection tablewhich contains the address information of the IP packet and the labelinformation of the signalling unit.

The relay control unit retrieves the signal station addressadministration table, indicates the telephone number of the destinationtelephone set, and acquires the signal station address of the exchangerfor managing this telephone set. Also, the relay control unit determinesthe line number and the signal link selection based upon the rulepreviously determined by the public switched telephone network.

While using the media path connection table contained in the voicecontrol unit within the relay gateway, the voice control unit convertsthe IP packet which stores the digital voice, and the voice signal whichis transferred into the voice communication line of the NNIcommunication line. While using the address connection table containingboth the address information of the IP packet and the label informationof the signalling unit, the voice control unit executes the conversionbetween the IP packet and the signalling unit. The voice control unitowns the IP address used to transmit/receive the voice IP packet, andthen provides the IP address so as to set the media path connectiontable.

While using the media path connection table, the voice control unitconverts the IP packet which stores the digital voice, and the voicesignal which is transferred into the voice communication line of the NNIcommunication line. The voice control unit secures the logic voicecommunication line which is used in the reception, or the transmissionfrom the public switched telephone network, and determines theidentifier thereof.

The termination gateway equipped with the capsulation function containsthe relay control unit and the network node apparatus. The network nodeapparatus owns the IP capsulation function and the inverse-capsulationfunction. The relay control unit contains the telephone administrationserver, the telephone number server, the pilot telephone server and thetable administration server. The relay control unit transfers thetelephone call control packet to the relay control unit among the IPpackets which are entered from the media router into the network nodeapparatus, and branches the voice IP packet to the voice IPcommunication line. As a consequence, the telephone sets 1508 and 1520can establish the telephone communication with each other via the IPtransfer network 1500 and the public switched telephone network 1501.

14. 14th Embodiment in which Ip Transfer is Employed as Relay Network

In FIG. 249, reference numeral 1400 shows an IP transfer network,reference numerals 1401 and 1402 represent relay gateways, referencenumeral 1403 shows a gateway equipped with a capsulation function,reference numerals 1405 to 1407 represent public switched telephonenetworks(PSTN), reference numerals 1408 to 1411 show subscriberexchangers, reference numerals 1412 and 1413 denote relay exchangers,reference numerals 1415 and 1416 represent control communication linesby the common line signal system, and reference numerals 1417 and 1418indicate voice(speech) communication lines. Also, a set of the controlcommunication line 1415 and the voice communication line 1417 are an NNIcommunication line between the exchanger 1412 and the relay gateway1401, whereas a set of the control communication line 1416 and the voicecommunication line 1418 is an NNI communication line between theexchanger 1413 and the relay gateway 1402. Reference numerals 1438 and1439 show address connection tables. Reference numerals 1441 and 1442indicate gateway address administration server(“DNS-1” in FIG. 273) andreference numerals 1443 and 1444 indicate signal station addressadministration server(“DNS-2” in FIG. 274). Also reference numerals 1429and 1430 show media path connection tables. In the present invention, apoint provided in the common line signal system is expressed by a signalstation, and a point code is represented by a “signal station address”.

The IP address of the relay gateway 1401 is “GW05”. The relay controlunit 1423 holds the IP address “GW05”. Similarly, the IP address of therelay gateway 1402 is “GW06”, and the relay control unit 1424 holds theIP address “GW06”.

<<Communication Between Telephone Sets 1420 and 1421>>

In the beginning, a description is made of a terminal to-terminalcommunication connection control method by which the telephone set 1420is communicated with the telephone set 1421 via the public switchedtelephone network 1405, the IP transfer network 1400, and the publicswitched telephone network 1406.

<<Connection Phase>>

When the handset of the telephone set 1420 is taken up, a telephone callsignal is transferred to the exchanger 1408 (Step HA01 of FIG. 250), andthe exchanger 1408 confirms telephone calling operation (Step HA02). Theexchanger 1408 notifies a telephone call setting request to the relayexchanger 1412 (Step H03). Then, the relay exchanger 1412 accepts thetelephone call setting request to produce a signalling unit 1451 of thecommon line signal system, and then transfers the signalling unit 1451via the control communication line 1415 to the relay control unit 1423employed in the relay gateway 1401 (Step HA04). A destination signalstation code of the signalling unit 1451 is “DPC-1”, a transmissionsource signal station code thereof is “OPC-1”, a signal link selectionthereof is “SLS-1”, a line number thereof is “CIC-1”, a message thereofis “IAM”, and a parameter is “Para-1”. The content of the parameter“Para-1” contains both a telephone number “TN-1” of the telephone set1420 and a telephone number “TN-2” of the telephone set 1421. A message“MSG-1” contained in the signalling unit 1451 shown in FIG. 249 implies“IAM”.

<<Operation of Relay Control Unit 1423>>

The relay control unit 1423 receives the signalling unit 1451 (StepHA04). FIG. 273 represents such a procedure that the relay control unit1423 converts the signalling unit 1451 into an IP packet 1542. The relaycontrol unit 1423 receives the signalling unit 1451 (Step S1461-2 ofFIG. 273) so as to derive signal station labels “DPC-1, OPC-1, SLS-1,CIC-1” (Step S1461-3) contained in the signalling unit 1451. The relaycontrol unit 1423 checks as to whether or not a signal station label ispresent in the address connection table 1438 (Step S1461-4), namely sucha record containing a set of the destination signal station code(DPC),the transmission source signal station code(OPC), the signal linkselection(SLS) and the line number(CIC). In this case, since there is norecord coincident with each other in the address connection table 1438-1(refer to FIG. 261), the signal station label is additionally written atthe record of the address connection table 1438 (Step S1461-5) and therelay control unit 1423 derives the telephone number “TN-2” of thetelephone number 1421 within the parameter “Para-1”, and inquiries thegateway address administration server 1441 to obtain an answer of an IPaddress of a gateway which manages the above-explained telephone number“TN-2” (Step S1461-6). In this case, the relay control unit 1423 mayacquire an IP address “D-ad-x” (namely, “GW06”) of the relay gateway1402. In this case, both the gateway address administration server 1441and 1442 receive input information of all of 10-digits of a telephonenumber, or upper-graded 6 digits thereof(namely, both local area numberand telephone office number), and provide output information of an IPaddress of a gateway which manages the telephone number.

It should also be noted that the gateway address administration servers1441 and 1442 may provide the above information by the known way ofdomain name server(DNS) replacing the telephone number by a domain name.Furthermore, in the case that a total number of telephone numbers to beinquired is small, the gateway address administration server may bereplaced by the IP address administration table 1441-1 (refer to FIG.251). In this case, the IP address administration table 1441-1corresponds to such a table list representative of a correspondencerelationship between telephone numbers and IP addresses of the relevantrelay gateways. When a telephone number is designated, an IP address ofthe corresponding relay gateway may be obtained. It should also be notedthat the IP address administration table has the same purpose as that ofthe IP transfer network output line table as explained in otherembodiments, namely, the IP address administration table may be used soas to retrieve the correspondence relationship between the telephonenumber and the IP address.

The relay control unit 1423 holds the IP address “S-ad-x” (namely,“GW05”) of the relay gateway 1401, and produces an IP packet 1452. Thedestination IP address of the IP packet 1452 is “D-ad-x”, thetransmission source IP address thereof is “S-ad-x”, the line numberthereof is “CIC-x”, and the message thereof is “IAM”. The parameter“Para-x-2 contains the telephone number “TN-1” of the telephone set 1420and the telephone number “TN-2” of the telephone set 1421. Theabove-explained message and parameter are acquired from the signallingunit 1451 (refer to FIG. 253). The relay control unit 1423 determinesthe line number “CIC-x” for every set of “S-ad-x” and “D-ad-x” basedupon a predetermined rule, and employs the determined line number (StepS1461-7 of FIG. 273). For instance, while a value of a line number whichis produced just before is saved in an internal memory, the relaycontrol unit 1423 adds the values of the line numbers one by one, andthen produces a desirable value of the line number by employing thebelow-mentioned formula:CIC-x=CIC-x+1 mod 65536  (8)

At a time instant before the relay control unit 1423 receives thesignalling unit 1451, the address connection table 1438 of the relaycontrol unit 1423 becomes empty, and the empty condition is indicated asan address connection table 1438-1 (refer to FIG. 261). When the relaycontrol unit 1423 produces an IP packet 1452, while the labelinformation “DPC-1, OPC-1, SLS-1, CIC-1” contained in the signallingunit 1451 is combined with the label information “S-ad-x, D-ad-x, CIC-x”contained in the IP packet 1452, the relay control unit 1423 furtherdetermines a media path identifier “MP-8”, and then writes the mediapath identifier “MP-8” in the address connection table (Step S1461-8 ofFIG. 273). The media path identifier is used to request a voicecommunication path with respect to the voice control unit 1427. Thecondition is indicated in an address connection table 1438-2 (refer toFIG. 262).

Among the signal station address items(“DPC-1, OPC-1”) contained in therecord of the address connection table 1438-2, the address item “DPC-1”located on the left side corresponds to the signal station address ofthe relay connection gateway 1401 which holds the address connectiontable 1438-2. Similarly, among the IP address items(“S-ad-x, D-ad-x”)contained in the address connection table 1438-2, the address item“S-ad-x” located on the left side corresponds to the IP address of therelay connection gateway 1401 which holds the address connection table1438-2. A right end of the record is the media path identifier “MP-8”.

<<Cooperation Between Relay Control Unit and Voice Control Unit>>

Referring now to FIG. 249, a cooperation between the relay control unitand the voice control unit will be described. The relay control unit1423 indicates the media path identifier “MP-8” via the information line1429-1 to the voice control unit 1427 (Step 1423-1 of FIG. 268). Thevoice control unit 1427 secures an internal IP address “IA5”, anexternal IP address “EA5” and a voice communication port number “5010”of an internal module of the voice control unit 1429 used for the voicecommunication, and notifies to the relay control unit 1423 via theinformation line 1429-1 (Step 1427-1). Furthermore, the voice controlunit 1427 determines a logic communication line identifier “CH-1” usedto identify a logic communication line for transmitting a voice frame tothe voice communication line 1417, a logic communication line identifier“CH-2” for identifying a logic communication line used to receive avoice frame from the voice communication line 1417, and writes the logiccommunication line identifiers “CH-1” and “CH-2” into the media pathconnection table 1429. The written result is indicated in a media pathconnection table 1429-1 (refer to FIG. 265).

In the case that the logic communication line 1417 corresponds to aprimary group interface line of an ISDN communication line, the logiccommunication line identifier is constituted by a number of an ISDNcommunication apparatus and also a number for indicating a specificB-channel(namely, logic transfer line of user information).

The relay control unit 1423 writes into the CIC administration table,the IP address “GW05” of the relay gateway 1401; the CIC number “CIC-2”which has been acquired in the above-explained manner, or has beenproduced; the telephone number “TN-1” and “TN-2”, the IP addresses “EA5”and “IA5”, and the port number “5010” contained in the signalling unit1451. The written result is shown as in the CIC administration table1423-1 (refer to FIG. 257). It should also be noted that since theprocedure step is located after the Step H04, the procedure step isselected to be “IAM”.

<<Transfer within IP Transfer Network>>

The relay control unit 1423 transmits the produced (Step S1461-9) IPpacket 1452 to the internal unit of the IP transfer network 1400 (StepS1461-10), and the IP packet 1452 is reached via the controlcommunication line 1431-1, the router 1431, and the controlcommunication line 1431-2 to the relay control unit 1424 contained inthe relay gateway 1402 (Step HA05).

<<Setting of CIC Management Table and Address Connection Table by RelayControl Unit 1424>>

The relay control unit 1424 receives the IP packet 1452 (Step S1462-2 ofFIG. 274). The relay control unit 1424 derives an IP address, a message,a line number, and a parameter from the IP packet 1452 (Step S1462-3).In this case, the destination IP address of the IP packet 1452 is“D-ad-x”, the transmission source IP address thereof is “S-ad-x”, theline number thereof is “CIC-x”, and the message thereof is “IAM” andalso the parameter is “Para-x”. The parameter “Para-x” contains both thetelephone number “TN-1” of the telephone set 1420 and the telephonenumber “TN-2” of the telephone set 1421. The relay control unit 1424checks as to whether or not a set of the corresponding IP addresses“S-ad-x” and “D-ad-x” and the line number is present in the addressconnection table 1439-1 (refer to FIG. 263) (Step S1462-4). In thiscase, since there is no such a set, the relay control unit 1424 derivesthe IP addresses “S-ad-x” and “D-ad-x”, and also the line number address“CIC-x” so as to write these derived addresses into the addressconnection table 1439-1 (Step S1462-5). The relay control unit 1424indicates the telephone number “TN-2” of the destination telephone setto the signal station address administration server 1444, and acquiresthe signal station address “DPC-2” of the exchanger 1409 which managesthe telephone set 1421 having the telephone number “TN-2” (StepS1462-6), and then write the acquired signal station address “DPC-2”into the address connection table 1439-1 of FIG. 263 (Step S1462-7). Asa result, this address connection table becomes 1439-2 (refer to FIG.264). A right end of the record corresponds to a media path identifier“MP-9”.

The relay control unit 1424 determines a line number “CIC-2” and asignal link selection “SLS-2” based upon a predetermined rule withrespect to the public switched telephone network 1406, and produces sucha signalling unit 1453 containing the message “IAM” and a parameter“Para-2” (Step S1462-8), and then sends the signalling unit 1453 to thecontrol communication line 1416 (Step S1462-9).

<<Cooperation Between Relay Control Unit and Voice Control Unit>>

Referring now to FIG. 249, a cooperation between the relay control unitand the voice control unit will be described. The relay control unit1424 indicates the following items via the information line 1430-1 tothe voice control unit 1428, namely, the media path identifier “MP-9”,the internal IP address “IA5” and the external IP address “EA5” of themodule provided in the voice control unit 1427, which have beenacquired, and the port number “5010” which is employed by the voicecontrol unit 14328 to transmit the voice. Then, the voice control unit1428 responds to the voice control unit 1428, the internal IP address“IA5” and the external IP address “EA6” of the module inside the voicecontrol unit 1428 and the port number “5012” which is used by the voicecontrol unit 1428 to send the voice. In this procedure, the voicecontrol unit 1428 writes two pairs of the IP addresses and the portnumbers (namely, internal IP address “IA5”, external IP address “EA5”and port number “5010”; internal IP address “IA6”, external IP address“EA6” and port number “5012”) into the media path connection table 1430.Furthermore, the voice control unit 1428 determines a logiccommunication line identifier “CH-3” used to identify a logiccommunication line for transmitting a voice frame to the voicecommunication line 1418, a logic communication line identifier “CH-4”for identifying a logic communication line used to receive a voice framefrom the voice communication line 1418, and writes the logiccommunication line identifiers “CH-3” and “CH-4” into the media pathconnection table 1430. The written result is indicated in a media pathconnection table 1430-1 (refer to FIG. 266).

The media path connection table 1430-1 owns the following implication:When such an IP packet(payload is UDP) which contains the transmissionIP address “EA5”, the transmission source port number “5010”, thedestination IP address “EA6”, and the destination port number “5012” andalso the IP capsulated packet of which the transmission source IPaddress is “IA5” and the destination IP address is “IA6”, are receivedthe digitalized voice contained in this UDP payload is transmitted tothe logic communication line identifier “CH-3” of the logiccommunication line 1418. Also, when the digitalized voice is receivedfrom the logic communication line identifier “CH-4”, the digitalizedvoice is stored into such an IP packet(payload is UDP) is received whichcontains the transmission IP address “EA6”, the transmission source portnumber “5012”, the destination IP address “EA5”, and the destinationport number “5010”, and then, the IP packet is converted into the IPcapsulated packet of which the transmission source IP address is “IA5”and the destination IP address is “IA6”, transmitted to the IP transfernetwork 1400.

<<Operation of Public Switched Telephone Network 1406>>

The signalling unit 1453 is reached to the relay exchanger 1413 (StepHA06), the signalling unit 1453 is transferred into the public switchedtelephone network 1406, and then is reached to the exchanger 1409 (StepHA07). The exchanger 1409 checks as to whether or not the telephone set1421 having the telephone number “TN-2” is allowed to receive atelephone call. When the call reception is allowed, the exchanger 1409notifies a telephone call setting request(call reception notification)to the telephone set 1421 (Step HA08).

Next, the exchanger 1409 produces the signalling unit 1454 shown in FIG.254. In the signalling unit 1454, the destination signal station addressis “DPC-3”; the transmission source signal station address is “OPC-3”;the signal link selection is “SLS-3”; and the line number is “CIC-3.” Inthis case, the value of “OPC-3” is the value of “DPC-2”; the value of“DPC-3” is the value of “PC-2”; the value of “SLS-3” is the value of“SLS-2”; and the value of “CIC-3” is the value of “CIC-2”. In otherwords, the signal station address corresponds to such a value that theaddress of the transmission source signal station is replaced by theaddress of the destination signal station at the previous step, andthere are no changes in the values of the signal link selection and theline number. The exchanger 1409 transfers the signalling unit 1454 intothe public switched telephone network 1406, and this signalling unit1454 passes through the exchanger 1413 (Step HA11), and then is reachedvia the control communication line 1416 to the relay control unit 1424of the relay gateway 1402 (Step HA12).

The relay control unit 1424 receives the signalling unit 1454 (StepS1461-2 of FIG. 273) so as to derive a signal station label contained inthe signalling unit 1454 (Step S1461-3), and checks as to whether or notthe address connection table 1439 contains the same record content asthe derived signal station labels “DPC-3, OPC-3, SLS-3, CIC-3”. In thiscase, since there is the coincident record in the address connectiontable 1439-2, the relay control unit 1424 produces an IP packet 1455shown in FIG. 255 (Step S1461-9 of FIG. 273), and transmits the IPpacket 1455 to the IP transfer network 1400 (Step S1461-10).

In the IP packet 1455, the transmission IP address is “S-ad-u”; thedestination IP address is “D-ad-u”; and the line number is “CIC-u”. Inthis case, the value of the IP address “S-ad-u” is the value of the IPaddress “D-ad-u”; the value of the IP address “D-ad-u” is the value ofthe IP address “S-ad-x”; and the value of the IP address “CIC-u” is thevalue of the IP address “CIC-x”. In other words, the address of therelay station gateway corresponds to such a value that the transmissionsource of the IP address of the IP packet 1452 is replaced by thedestination thereof, and there is no change in the line numbers. The IPpacket 1455 is reached via the control communication line 1431-2, therouter 1431, and the control communication line 1431-1 to the relaycontrol unit 1423 (Step HA13 of FIG. 250). The relay control unit 1423receives the IP packet 1455 (Step S1462-2 of FIG. 274) so as to derivethe IP addresses “S-ad-u” and “D-ad-u”, and the line number “CIC-u” fromthe IP packet 1455. Then, in the address connection table 1438, thelabel information “S-ad-u” is made coincident with “D-ad-x”; the labelinformation “D-ad-u” is made coincident with “S-ad-x”; and the linenumber “CIC-u” is made coincident with “CIC-x”. As a result, the relaycontrol unit 1423 produces a signalling unit 1456 shown in FIG. 256(StepS1462-8 of FIG. 274). Next, the signalling unit 1456 is sent to thecontrol communication line 1415 (Step S1462-9), and is reached to therelay exchanger 1412 (Step HA14). The signalling unit 1456 istransferred into the public switched telephone network 1405 and then isreached to the exchanger 1408 (Step HA15).

On the other hand, the telephone set 1421 returns a signalling unitindicative of the telephone calling operation to the exchanger 1409 inresponse to the call reception notification of the Step HA08 (StepHA20). The exchanger 1409 notifies a signalling unit(CPG message)indicative of the telephone calling operation to the exchanger 1413(Step HA21). The exchanger 1413 transmits the signalling unit via thecontrol communication line 1416 to the relay control unit 1424 of therelay gateway 1402 (Step HA22), and produces such an IP packet fornotifying the telephone calling operation in accordance with such aprocedure similar to that shown in FIG. 273 with reference to theaddress connection table 1439-2 thereof. The produced IP packet isreached via the control communication line 1431-2, the router 1431, andthe control communication line 1431-1 to the relay control unit 1423(Step HA23).

The relay control unit 1423 receives the IP packet to produce such asignalling unit for notifying the telephone calling operation, and thensends the signalling unit to the control communication line 1415 (StepS1462-9). The signalling unit is reached via the relay exchanger 1412(Step HA24) to the exchanger 1408 (Step HA25). The exchanger 1408notifies such a fact that the telephone unit 1421 is being called to thetelephone set 1420 (Step HA26).

Next, when the user of the telephone set 1421 responds to the telephonecall (Step HA30), a signalling unit for notifying a response issubsequently transmitted from the exchanger 1409, and then is reachedvia the exchanger 1413 (Step HA31) to the relay control unit 1424 (StepHA32). The relay control unit 1424 produces an IP packet(ANM) fornotifying a response with reference to the connection address table1439, and this IP packet is reached via the control communication line1431-2, the router 1431, the control communication line 1431-1 to therelay control unit 1423 (Step HA33). The relay control unit 1423produces a signalling unit for notifying a response with reference tothe connection address table 1438, and the signalling unit is reachedvia the control communication line 1415 and the exchanger 1412 (StepHA34) to the exchanger 1408 (Step HA35). The exchanger 1408 sends aresponse signal to the telephone set 1420 (Step HA36).

<<Completion of Address Connection Table>>

Referring now to FIG. 249, a description will be made of a completion ofan address connection table. In the case that the relay control unit1423 indicates the media path identifier “MP-8”, the acquired externalIP address “EA6” of the module in the voice control unit 1428, and theport number “5012” which is used to send the voice by the voice controlunit 1428 to the voice control unit 1427, the voice control unit 1427writes both the IP address “EA6” and the port number “5012” into themedia path connection table 1429-1 (FIG. 265) so as to accomplish amedia path connection table 1429-2 (refer to FIG. 267), and notifies tothe relay control unit 1423 (Step 1427-2).

In the connection phase, the line number “CIC-1” set by the publicswitched telephone network 1405 for setting the telephone lines of thetelephone sets 1420/1421 may be made in correspondence with the linenumber “CIC-x” set by the IP transfer network 1400 in the addressconnection table 1438, whereas the line number “CIC-x” set by the IPtransfer network 1400 may be made in correspondence with the line number“CIC-2” set by the public switched telephone network 1406 in the addressconnection table 1439. These two correspondence relationships are madeconstant from the beginning of the telephone communications of thetelephone sets 1420 and 1421 until the end of the telephonecommunications.

<<Communication Phase>>

While the above-described procedure is carried out, the telephonecommunication can be established between the telephone set 1420 and thetelephone set 1421, so that the voice communication is performed (StepHA38). The voice sent from the telephone set 1420 is separated into thecall connection control signal and the voice signal in the exchanger1408, and thereafter are supplied to the exchanger 1412. These signalsare transmitted via the voice communication line 1417, the voice controlunit 1427 employed in the relay gateway 1401, via the voicecommunication line 1433-1, the router 1433, the voice communication line1433-2, and the voice control unit 1428 provided in the relay gateway1402, and further via the voice communication line 1418, the exchanger1423, and the exchanger 1409 to the telephone set 1421. The voicesignals are transferred from the telephone set 1421 to the telephone set1420 along a direction opposite to the above-explained direction. Thisembodiment is featured by that the communication lines used to the voicesignal and the telephone connection control can be separated from eachother between the exchanger 1408 and the exchanger 1409.

<<Release Phase>>

When the user puts on the handset, the communication release conditionis notified from the telephone set 1420 to the exchanger 1408 (Step HA40of FIG. 250), and the exchanger 1408 notifies the release message(REL)to the exchanger 1412 (Step HA41). When the exchanger 1412 receives therelease message, the exchanger 1412 immediately returns the releasecompletion message(RLC) to the exchanger 1408 (Step HA55), and notifiesthe release message(REL) to the relay control unit 1423 (Step HA42). Therelay control unit 1423 returns the release completion message(RLC) tothe exchanger 1412 (Step HA54). The relay control unit 1423 notifies therelease message(REL) to the relay control unit 1424 (Step HA43), and therelay control unit 1424 returns the release completion message(RLC) tothe relay control unit 1423 (Step HA53). The relay control unit 1424notifies the release message(REL) to the exchanger 1473 (Step HA44). Theexchanger 1413 returns the release completion message(RLC) to the relaycontrol unit 1424 (Step HA52). The exchanger 1413 notifies the releasemessage(REL) to the exchanger 1409 (Step HA45). The exchanger 1409returns the release completion message(RLC) to the exchanger 1413 (StepHA51). The exchanger 1409 notifies the release notification to thetelephone set 1421 (Step HA46).

When the relay control unit 1423 judges at the Step HA42 (Step S1463-2of FIG. 275) that the signalling unit corresponds to the releasemessage(REL) (Steps S1463-3, S1463-4, S1463-5), the relay control unit1423 deletes the relevant record of the address connection table (StepS1463-6). As a result, the record of the address connection table 1438-2(refer to FIG. 262) becomes empty as indicated in the address connectiontable 1438-1 (refer to FIG. 261). Similarly, when the relay control unit1424 judges at the Step HA43 (Step S1464-2 of FIG. 276) that the messagecontained in the signalling unit corresponds to the release message(REL)(Steps S1464-3, S1464-4, S1464-5), the relay control unit 1424 deletesthe relevant record of the address connection table (Step S1464-6). As aresult, the record of the address connection table 1439-2 (refer to FIG.264) becomes empty as indicated in the address connection table 1439-1(refer to FIG. 263).

<<Deletion of Media Path Record>>

At the Step HA43, the relay control unit 1423 instructs the voicecontrol unit 1429 to delete the record of the relevant media path “MP-8”of the media path connection table 1429-2 (refer to FIG. 267), and thevoice control unit 1427 reports the deletion of the record of the mediapath connection table(refer to FIG. 271) (Step 1427-3). Also, at theStep N53, the relay control unit 1424 instructs the voice control unit1428 to delete the record of the relevant media path “MP-9” of the mediapath connection table 1430-1 (refer to FIG. 266), and the voice controlunit 1428 reports the deletion of the record of the media pathconnection table (Step 1428-2). It should be understood that the recordmay be employed in the operation/recording operation.

<<Communication Between Telephone Set 1420 and Telephone Set 1422>>

The terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method hasbeen described in other embodiments, in which the telephone call is madefrom the telephone set 1422 via the media router 1404, the terminationgateway equipped with the capsulation function 1403, the relay gateway1402, and the public switched telephone network 1406 to the telephoneset 1421. In other words, such a terminal-to-terminal communicationcontrol method in which the telephone communication is established amongthe telephone set 1-media router-IP transfer network side-publicswitched telephone network-telephone set 2 has already been explained inother embodiments. Another terminal-to-terminal communication connectionmethod in which a telephone communication is established among thetelephone set 2-public switched telephone network-IP transfernetwork-media router-telephone set 1 operable in an opposite sense maybe readily accomplished by way of a similar procedure to the aboveexplained procedure. As apparent from the foregoing description, such aterminal-to-terminal communication connection control method may beeasily realized in which a telephone call is made from the telephone set1420 via the public switched telephone network 1405, the relay gateway1401, the termination gateway 1403 equipped with the capsulationfunction, and the media router 1404 to the telephone set 1422.Furthermore, such a terminal-to-terminal communication connectioncontrol method may be easily realized in which a telephone call is madefrom the telephone set 1420 via the public switched telephone network1405, the relay gateway 1401, the termination gateway 1403 equipped withthe capsulation function, and the media router 1404, the UNIcommunication line 1419, and the public switched telephone network 1407to the telephone set 1423.

The operations of the 14th embodiment will now be summarized. In theterminal-to-terminal communication control between two telephone sets,the information goes through the telephone set 1, the public switchedtelephone network 1, NNI interface communication line 1, the relaygateways 1 and 2 belonging the IP transfer network, the NNI interfacecommunication line 2, the public switched telephone network 1 and thetelephone set 2 consecutively.

15. 15th Embodiment in which Voice Line is not Ip-Capsulated

This 15-th embodiment is featured by that a network node apparatusemployed in other embodiments is replaced by a so-called“non-IP-capsulation type termination apparatus”, a termination gatewayof other embodiments is substituted by a so-termed “non-capsulation typetermination apparatus”, and further, a relay gateway of otherembodiments is replaced by a so-called “non-capsulation type relaygateway”. Also, in this 15-th embodiment, while a voice(speech) IPpacket is not IP-capsulated, both a table administration server and atelephone proxy server are omitted.

In FIG. 277, reference numeral 1600 shows an IP transfer network,reference numeral 1601 indicates a public switched telephone network,reference numeral 1602 represents a non-capsulation type terminationgateway, reference numeral 1603 denotes a termination apparatus,reference numeral 1604 is a termination gateway control unit(SEP), andreference numeral 1605 shows a non-capsulation type relay gateway.Reference numeral 1606 represents a relay control unit(STP), referencenumeral 1607 shows a voice control unit, reference numeral 1608indicates a relay exchanger, reference numeral 1609 represents asubscriber exchanger, reference numeral 1610 denotes a telephone sethaving a telephone number “TN-1”, and reference numeral 1611 indicates atelephone set having a telephone number “TN-2”. Also, reference numerals1612 and 1613 show control IP communication lines, reference numerals1614 and 1615 represent voice IP communication lines, reference numeral1616 shows a control communication line of a common line signal system,reference numeral 1617 denotes a voice communication line, referencenumeral 1620 shows an address administration table, reference numeral1671 denotes a telephone administration server, and also referencenumeral 1672 represents a telephone number server. The non-capsulationtype relay gateway 1605 corresponds to such a relay gateway capable ofmutually communicating with the non-capsulation type termination gateway1602. An IP address by which the apparatus and the like such as themedia router 1660 and telephone sets, provided outside the IP transfernetwork 1600 can be used is referred to as an “external IP address”,whereas an IP address exclusively used in the IP network, by which theapparatus provided outside the IP transfer network 1600 cannot be usedis called as an “internal IP address”. The telephone administrationserver 1671 owns both an external IP address “EA91” and an internal IPaddress “IA91”, and may improve information security performance whilethe external IP address “EA91” and the internal IP address “IA91” areseparately used.

<<Connection Phase>>

This is such an example that a telephone communication is made from thetelephone set 1610 to the telephone set 1611. When the handset of thetelephone set 1610 is taken up, a telephone call signal is transferredto the media router 1660 (Step B01 of FIG. 278), and the media router1660 confirms telephone calling operation (Step B02). Next, the mediarouter 1660 produces such an IP packet 1630 (refer to FIG. 279), andthen, transmits the IP packet 1630 to the termination apparatus 1603(Step B03), which contains a transmission source IP address “EA1”, adestination IP address “EA91”, a telephone number “TN-1” of thetelephone set 1610, a telephone number “TN-2” of the telephone set 1611,a voice transmission port number “5006” and additional information“Info-2”. In this case, the IP address “EA1” corresponds to an IPaddress of the media router 1660, the IP address “EA91” corresponds toan external IP address of the telephone administration server 1671, apayload portion of the IP packet 1630 is a UDP packet, and both atransmission source port number and a destination port number are equalto “5060”.

<<Packet Filter by Termination Apparatus>>

Upon receipt of the IP packet 1630, the termination apparatus 1603checks as to whether or not all of the transmission source IP address“EA1”, the transmission source port number “5060”, the destination IPaddress “EA91”, and the destination port number “5060”, which arecontained in the IP packet 1630, are registered as a record contained inthe address administration table 1620. In this case, since all of theseitems are registered as a record indicated on a first row of an addressadministration table 1620-1 (refer to FIG. 280), the terminationapparatus 1603 converts the destination IP address “EA91” contained inthe IP packet 1630 into the internal IP address “IA91” of the telephoneadministration server 1671 (namely, NAT function). Next, in response toan instruction of an output interface “IF1612” located at a right end ofthe relevant record provided in the address administration table 1620,the termination apparatus 1603 sends out an IP packet 1631 to thecontrol IP communication line 1612 (Step B04). It should be noted thatwhen both the IP address and the port number contained in the receivedIP packet 1630 are not registered into the address administration table1620, the IP packet 1630 is discarded. As explained above, the filteringprocess operation of the IP packet is carried out by this terminationapparatus 1603.

<<Forming of CIC Administration Table>>

The telephone administration server 1671 receives the IP packet 1631 andwrites the below-mentioned items into a record of a CIC administrationtable held by the telephone administration server 1631, namely, theinternal IP address “IA91” of the telephone administration server 1671,the procedure segment “IAM”, the transmission source telephone number“TN-1”, the destination telephone number “TN-2”, the external IP address“EA1”, the voice transmission port number “5006” and a write timeinstant(year, month, day, hour, minute, second) “ST6” as a CICadministration table 1671-1 (refer to FIG. 281).

Next, the telephone administration server 1671 indicates an IP packet1632-1 (refer to FIG. 282) for inquiring the destination telephonenumber “TN-2” to the telephone number server 1672 (Step B06). Thetelephone number server 1672 stores an IP address “GW03” into an IPpacket 1632-2 (refer to FIG. 283) and responds this IP packet 1632-2(Step B07). In this case, the above-described IP address “GW03”constitutes an IP address of the relay gateway 1605.

<<Administration of Line Number>>

The telephone administration server 1671 determines a CIC number “CIC-2”based upon the CIC number forming rule determined with respect to a setof the IP address “IA91” of the telephone administration server 1671 andthe IP address “GW03” of the relay gateway 1605, and then writes the CICnumber “CIC-2” into the CIC administration table together with the IPaddress “GW03”. The condition is indicated in a record of a CICadministration table 1671-2 (refer to FIG. 284). Next, the telephoneadministration server 1671 produces an IP packet 1634 (refer to FIG.285)(IAM packet) with reference to the CIC administration table 1671-2and the IP packet 1631, and then transmits the IP packet 1634 to therelay gateway 1605 (Step B09).

<<Operation of Relay Control Unit>>

Upon receipt of the IP packet 1634 (refer to FIG. 285) (Step B09), therelay control unit 1606 derives from the IP packet 1634, thetransmission source IP address “IA91”, the destination IP address“GW03”, the line number “CIC-2”, the procedure segment “IAM”, thetransmission source telephone number “TN-1”, the destination telephonenumber “TN-2”, the external IP address “EA1”, and the voice transmissionport number “5006”. The relay control unit 1606 writes/records thederived items as a record of a CIC administration table 1605-1 (refer toFIG. 286) held by the relay gateway 1605 in combination with a timeinstant “St-7”.

Further, the relay control unit 1606 retrieves a signal station addressadministration table 1627 (refer to FIG. 287), indicates the telephonenumber “TN-2”, and acquires a signal station address “PC-09” of theexchanger 1609 for managing the telephone set 1611. Furthermore, therelay control unit 1606 determines both a CIC number “CIC-3” and asignal link selection “SLS-3” based upon such a rule which is previouslydefined with respect to the public switched telephone network 1601. Therelay control unit 1606 writes the signal station address “PC-3” of therelay gateway 1605, the acquired “PC-09”, the signal link selection“SLS-3”, and the line number “CIC-3”, the IP address “GW03”, the IPaddress “IA91”, and the line number “CIC-2” as a new record of theaddress connection table 1625 in combination with a media pathidentifier “MP-7”. As a result, this address connection table becomes atable 1625-1 (refer to FIG. 288).

Subsequently, the relay control unit 1606 produces a signalling unit1635 (refer to FIG. 289) which contains the signal station addresses“PC-09” and “PC-3”, the line number “CIC-3”, the signal link selection“SLS-3”, the message “IAM”, the telephone numbers “TN-1” and “TN-2” andthen transmits the signalling unit 1635 to the control communicationline 1616 (Step B10).

<<Cooperation Between Relay Control Unit and Control Unit>>

The relay control unit 1606 notifies the media path identifier “MP-7”,the external IP address “EA1”, and the voice transmission port number“5006” via the information line 1629 to the voice control unit 1607. Thevoice control unit 1607 writes the notified information as a record ofthe media path connection table 1628. Furthermore, the voice controlunit 1607 determines a logic communication line used to transmit voicedata from the voice control unit 1607 to the voice communication line1617, and writes a logic communication line identifier “CH-1” thereof asa record of the media path connection table 1628. The above-explainedresult is indicated in the media path connection table 1628-1 (refer toFIG. 290).

<<Operation of Switching Network and ACM Message>>

The exchanger 1608 receives the signalling unit 1635 via the controlcommunication line 1616 (Step B10), and thereafter transfers thesignalling unit 1635 to the exchanger 1609 (Step B11). The exchanger1609 receives the signalling unit 1635, and confirms as to whether ornot the destination telephone number “TN-2” contained in the signallingunit 1635 can be received. If the telephone call can be received, thenthe exchanger 1609 notifies a telephone reception notification to thetelephone set 1611 (Step B12). Furthermore, the telephone set 1635produces such a signalling unit 1635-1 (refer to FIG. 292) for notifyingthe reception of the signalling unit 1635 and returns the signallingunit 1635-1. The signalling unit is reached via the exchanger 1608 (StepB13) to the relay gateway 1605 (Step B14). The relay control unit 1606acquires address information used to produce an IP packet based uponlabel information of the received signalling unit 1635-1, and thenproduces an IP packet 1651 (ACM message, refer to FIG. 293) and furthersends this IP packet 1651 to the telephone administration server 1671(Step B15). The telephone administration server 1671 derives both theline number “CIC-2” and the procedure step “ACM” from the received IPpacket 1651, and investigates the CIC administration table 1671-2 (referto FIG. 284) held by the telephone administration server 1671 so as tofind out such a record indicative of the own IP address “IA91”, the IPaddress “GW03” of the communication counter party and the line number“CIC-2”. Then, the telephone administration server 1671 rewrites aprocedure step column of the relevant record of the CIC administrationtable 1671-2 into the above-explained procedure step “ACM”.

Next, the telephone administration server 1671 produces an IP packetwhich indicates that the ACM message is received, and notifies this IPpacket to the media router 1660 (Steps B18, B19)

<<Media Path Connection Table>>

While a process operation is carried out in parallel to theabove-explained Step B10, or after the process operation of the Step B10has been completed, the relay control unit 1606 indicates the media pathidentifier “MP-7” to the voice control unit 1607. At the same time, whenthe relay control unit 1606 requests both an IP address and a portnumber. As a result, the voice control unit 1607 answers both thetransmission source IP address “EA7” of the IP packet and the portnumber “5008” of the UDP packet to the relay control unit 1606, whichare sent to the voice IP communication line 1615. It should also benoted that the voice control unit 1607 secures a logic voicecommunication line for receiving voice data from the exchanger 1608, anddetermines an identifier “CH-2” to record the identifier in the recordof the media path connection table 1628-2 (refer to FIG. 291). The mediapath connection table 1628-2 is arranged in such a manner that a leftside of a record of the media path connection table constitutes both theIP address “EA7” and the port number “5008” of the voice control unit1607, and a right side thereof constitutes the IP address “EA1” and theport number “5006” of the communication counter party. The relay controlunit 1606 receives both the IP address “EA7” and the port number “5008”,and then writes the received items into the CIC administration table1605-1 (refer to FIG. 286). The resultant data is indicated in a CICadministration table 1605-2 (refer to FIG. 296).

<<Transmission of CPG Message>>

When the telephone set 1611 reports the telephone calling operation tothe exchanger 1609 (Step B20), the exchanger 1609 forms a signallingunit(CPG message) for notifying the telephone calling operation andtransmits the signalling unit via the exchanger 1608 (Step B21) to therelay control unit 1606 (Step B22). The relay control unit 1606 acquiresaddress information used to produce an IP packet based upon the labelinformation of the received signalling unit with reference to theaddress connection table 1625-1 (refer to FIG. 288), and produces a CPGmessage 1652 (FIG. 294) having an IP packet format. The IP packet issent to the telephone administration server 1671 (Step B23). Thetelephone administration server 1671 notifies the notification of thetelephone calling operation via the media router 1660 to the telephoneset 1610 (Steps B26 to B28). While the CPG message is formed, the relaycontrol unit 1606 acquires the external IP address “EA7”, and the portnumber “5008” from the CIC administration table 1605-2 (refer to FIG.296), and then writes these acquired data into a CPG message 1652. Thetelephone administration server 1671 derives the external IP address“EA7”, and the port number “5008” from the received CPG packet 1652, andmay write the derived data into the administration table 1671-2 (referto FIG. 284).

<<Transmission of ANM Message>>

Next, when the user of the telephone set 1611 responds to the telephonecalling operation (Step B30), the exchanger 1609 forms a signallingunit(ANM message) for notifying the telephone responding operation andtransmits this signalling unit via the exchanger 1608 (Step B31) to therelay control unit 1605 (Step B32). The relay control unit 1606 producesan ANM message 1653 having an IP packet format(refer to FIG. 295) basedupon the label information of the received signalling unit withreference to the address connection table 1625-1 (refer to FIG. 288).The IP packet 1653 is sent to the telephone administration server 1671(Step B33). Then, the telephone administration server 1671 notifies thenotification of the telephone response via the media router 1660 to thetelephone set 1610 (Steps B36 to B38). In other words, an IP packet 1656(refer to FIG. 299) is sent from the telephone administration server1671 via the termination apparatus 1603 (Step B36) to the media router1660 (Step B37).

When the relay control unit 1606 produces the ANM message, the relaycontrol unit 1606 acquires the external IP address “EA7”, and the portnumber “5008” from the CIC administration table 1605-2 (refer to FIG.296), and then writes these acquired data into an ANM message 1653. Thetelephone administration server 1671 derives the external IP address“EA7”, and the port number “5008” from the received response packet1653, and may write the derived data into the administration table1671-2 (refer to FIG. 284).

<<Write Timing into CIC Administration Table>>

The timing at which the telephone administration server 1671 derives theexternal IP address “EA7”, and the port number “5008” and then writesthe derived addresses into the CIC administration table 1671-2, andproduces a CIC administration table 1671-3 (refer to FIG. 297) iscarried out only at one of the process operations defined at the StepB23 where the CPG message is received and the Step B33 where the ANMmessage is received.

<<Written into Address Management Table>>

The telephone administration server 1671 derives from the CICadministration table 1671-3 (FIG. 297), the following items, i.e., theexternal IP address “EA1” of the media router 1660 connected to thetransmission source telephone set 1610, the port number “5006” which isused by the media router 1660 so as to transmit the voice, the externalIP address “EA7” contained in the voice control unit 1607, and the portnumber “5008” which is employed by the voice control unit 1607 so as totransmit the voice data. Then, this telephone administration server 1671writes the derived items into an address administration table 1620 ofthe termination apparatus 1603 in combination with a voice sendinginterface “IF1614” (Step B39). The resultant data is indicated onrecords “EA1, 5006, EA7, 5008, IF1614” of a third row of an addressadministration table 1620-2 (refer to FIG. 298).

<<Communication Phase>>

A telephone communication established between the user of the telephoneset 1610 and the telephone set 1611 corresponds to steps similar tothose explained in other embodiments. The analog voice(speech) signal ofthe telephone set 1610 is digitalized, and the digitalized voice data isdescribed on the payload of the IP packet 1661 (refer to FIG. 300). Inthis case, the transmission source address of the IP packet 1661corresponds to the IP address “EA1” of the media router 1660, thedestination address corresponds to the acquired IP address “EA7” of thevoice control unit 1607, the voice transmission port number of the mediarouter corresponds to “5006”, and the UDP port number employed by thevoice control unit 1607 so as to transmit the voice data corresponds to“5008”.

Since both the IP address and the port number contained in the IP packet1661 are involved in the record “EA1, 5006, EA7, 5008, IF1614” of thethird row of the address administration table 1620-2, the IP packet 1661is sent out as an IP packet 1662 (FIG. 277) to the voice IPcommunication line 1614 by way of the designation of the output lineinterface “IF1614”, and thereafter is reached via the router 1624 andthe voice IP communication line 1615 to the voice control unit 1607 ofthe relay gateway 1606.

The voice control unit 1607 derives both the IP address and the portnumbers “EA1, 5006, EA7, 5008” from the received IP packet 1662, andthen retrieves such a record that both an IP address and a port numberthereof are made coincident with the derived IP address/port numberwithin the media path connection table 1628-2 (FIG. 291). In this case,since a set of an IP address and a port number contained in a record ofa first row of the media pass connection table 1628-2 is made coincidentwith the derived IP address/port number, the IP packet 1662 is regardedas the formal IP packet and therefore is received. When there is nocoincident set, the above-explained IP packet is discarded. Next, thedigitalized voice contained in the IP packet 1662 is converted into aspeech(voice) frame 1664 (refer to FIG. 301) having a format transferredto the voice communication line 1617. The speech frame 1664 is reachedvia the exchanger 1608 to the exchanger 1609, so that voice is outputtedfrom the telephone set 1611. The voice stored in the speech frame sentfrom the telephone set 1611 is transferred along a direction opposite tothe above-explained direction to be reached to the telephone set 1610.

<<Release Phase>>

When the user of the telephone set 1610 notifies the release of thetelephone communication (Step B50 of FIG. 278), this notification isnotified from the media router 1660 to the telephone administrationserver 1671 (Steps B51 to B53). The telephone administration server 1671returns the call release completion to the media router 1660 (steps B64to B66). Also, the telephone administration server 1671 sends an IPpacket 1665 (refer to FIG. 302) for notifying the telephone call releaseto the relay control unit 1606 (Step B55). The relay control unit 1606returns an IP packet 1666 (FIG. 303) for notifying the releasecompletion to the telephone administration server 1671 (Step B62). Therelay control unit 1606 sends a telephone call release notification tothe relay exchanger 1608 (Step B56), and then, the relay exchanger 1608returns the release completion to the relay control unit 1606 (StepB61). The relay control unit 1608 sends the telephone call releasenotification to the relay exchanger 1609 (Step B57), and then, the relayexchanger 1609 returns the release completion to the relay exchanger1608 (Step B60). The exchanger 1609 sends a telephone call cut-offsignal to the telephone set 1611 (Step B58).

<<Deletion of Media Path Record>>

At the Step B55, the relay control unit 1606 instructs the voice controlunit 1607 to delete the record of the media path of the media pathconnection table 1628-2 (refer to FIG. 291) in accordance with thismedia path connection table 1628-2, and also instructs to delete therelevant record of the CIC administration table 1605-2 (refer to FIG.296). Furthermore, the relay control unit 1606 deletes the relevantrecord of the address connection table 1625-1 (FIG. 288) which is set inthe above-explained telephone communication connection control.

<<Deletion of Address Administration Table and CIC AdministrationRecord>>

The telephone administration server 1671 instructs the terminationapparatus 1603 to delete the relevant record of the CIC administrationtable 1671-3 (refer to FIG. 297), which is set in the telephonecommunication connection control, and also to delete the relevant recordof the address administration table 1620-2 (FIG. 298) managed by thetermination apparatus 1603 (Step B69).

<<One Variation in Termination Apparatus>>

The termination apparatus 1603 may not execute the function(NATfunction) capable of changing an address of a received IP packet. Inthis alternative case, the external IP address “EA91” of the telephoneadministration server is made coincident with the internal IP address“IA91”.

<<Another Variation in Termination Apparatus>>

Alternatively, an IP address may not be contained in the addressadministration table 1620 provided in the termination apparatus 1603,and the changed address administration table 1620 is indicated as anaddress administration table 1620-3 (FIG. 304). In this alternativecase, while no IP address is registered, the port number “5060” isemployed in the terminal-to-terminal connection control of the telephonesets, and the port numbers from “5004” to “5048” are employed in thetelephone voice communication, and IP packets of other port numbers arediscarded. As previously explained, it is prohibited to transmit/receiveIP packets other than the telephone.

Since the 15th embodiment is operated in the above-explained manner,both the telephone sets 1610 and 1611 can establish the telephonecommunications via both the IP transfer network 1600 and the publicswitched telephone network 1601. The relay gateway contains both therelay control unit and the voice control unit, whereas the relay controlunit contains both the address connection table and the signal stationaddress. The voice control unit contains the media path connectiontable. The voice control unit determines the logic communication channelprovided in the voice communication line, and writes the channelidentifier “CH-j” into the media path connection table. While thenon-capsulation type termination gateway and the non-capsulation typerelay gateway are employed, the IP packet filtering operation is carriedout by which only such an IP packet may pass that the set of the IPaddress and the port number is registered based upon the addressadministration table of the termination apparatus employed in thenon-capsulation termination gateway. Alternatively, the IP packetfiltering operation may be carried out by which only such an IP packetmay pass that the port number is registered based on the address packet.Also, the telephone communication may be carried out between thetelephone set connected to the public switched network and the telephoneset connected to the IP transfer network.

16. 16th Embodiment in which Control Line and Voice Line are Separatedfrom Each Other, and are Connected to Public Switched Telephone Network

In FIG. 305, reference numerals 1700 and 1701 show IP transfer networks,reference numeral 1702 represents a public switched telephonenetwork(PSTN), reference numerals 1703 and 1704 show gateways equippedwith a capsulation function, reference numeral 1705 represents a relaygateway connected to a control line 1738 of a common line signal system,reference numerals 1706 and 1707 show relay gateways connected to an IPcommunication line, reference numerals 1710, 1713 and 1718 are relaycontrol units, reference numerals 1714 and 1715 show network nodeapparatus, and reference numerals 1716 and 1717 indicate voice(speech)control unit. Also, reference numerals 1720 and 1721 indicate telephonesets, reference numeral 1725 to reference numeral 1729 represent controlcommunication lines, and reference numerals 1731 to 1736 indicatevoice(speech) communication lines. Also, reference numerals 1725 to 1736indicate IP communication lines, and reference numeral 1738 denotes acontrol communication line of a common line signal system, and referencenumeral 1739 shows a voice communication line. The network nodeapparatuses 1714 and 1715 own IP capsulation functions which have beendescribed in other embodiments. The IP transfer networks 1700 and 1701are individual IP transfer networks operated by different communicationcompanies. However, an IP packet may be transferred from one IP transfernetwork to the other IP transfer network via any one of thecommunication lines 1727 and 1734.

As previously explained in other embodiments, the relay control unit1710 employed in the termination gateway 1703 equipped with thecapsulation function contains a telephone administration server, atelephone proxy server, a telephone number server, and a tableadministration server. Similarly, the relay control unit 1713 includes atelephone administration server, a pilot telephone server, a telephoneadministration server and a table administration server.

<<Connection Phase>>

This is such a case that a telephone communication is made from atelephone set 1720 to another telephone set 1721. In FIG. 306, referencenumeral 1700-1 shows a range of the IP transfer network 1700, andreference numeral 1701-1 represents a range of the IP transfer network1701. When the handset of the telephone set 1720 is taken up, atelephone call signal is transferred to the media router 1722 (StepE01). The media router 1722 confirms the telephone call operation (StepE02). Next, the media router 1722 produces an IP packet for requesting atelephone call connection containing the telephone number “TN-1” of thetelephone set 1720 which constitutes the transmission source, and thetelephone number “TN-2” of the telephone set 1721 which constitutes thedestination, and then transmits the IP packet to the network nodeapparatus 1714. While the network node apparatus 1714 enters the IPpacket, the network node apparatus 1714 produces an internal IP packetby applying the IP capsulation operation as previously explained inother embodiment, and transmits the IP packet to the termination gatewayequipped with the capsulation functions 1710 (Step E03).

The relay control unit 1710 produces an IP packet 1750 for requesting atelephone call connection, and then sends the IP packet to theconnection IP communication line 1725. As a result, the IP packet 1750is reached via the control IP communication line 1726 to the relaycontrol unit 1711 (Step E05). The IP packet 1750 contains a transmissionsource IP address “S-ad-4”, a destination IP address “D-ad-4”, a linenumber “CIC-4”, a message “IAM”, and a parameter “Para-4”. Theabove-described parameter contains both the telephone numbers “TN-1” and“TN-2”. The destination IP address “D-ad-4” corresponds to an IP addressof the relay control unit 1713. The IP packet 1750 is directly reachedvia the control communication line 1728 to there lay control unit 1713employed in the relay gateway 1704 (Step E07).

It should be noted that both the relay control units 1711 and 1712 mayrecords the IP address “S-ad-4” and “D-ad-4”, the line number “CIC-4”,the message “IAM”, the telephone numbers “TN-1” and “TN-2” from the IPpacket 1750 as a CIC administration table 1711-1 (FIG. 307) as explainedin other embodiments. Also, the relay control unit 1712 holds such atelephone number server as explained in other embodiments. The relaycontrol unit 1712 may retrieve a new destination IP address within theIP transfer network 1701 of the IP packet 1750 based on the destinationtelephone number “TN-2” and may use this new IP address as a destinationIP address of the IP packet 1750. The IP packet 1751 sent out from therelay control unit 1712 is identical to the IP packet 1750, or theabove-explained packet to which the new IP address is set.

The IP packet 1751 is reached via the control communication lines 1728and 1729 to the relay control unit 1713 of the termination gatewayequipped with the packet function 1704 (Step E07). As previouslyexplained in other embodiments, the relay control unit 1713 is arrangedby a telephone administration server, a telephone proxy server, atelephone number server, and a table administration server. Thetelephone administration server employed in the relay control unit 1713sends such an IP packet for notifying a telephone calling request to amedia router based upon the IP packet 1751, and the media router 1723receives the IP packet(Step E08).

The media router 1723 notifies a telephone call setting request to thetelephone set 1721 (Step E09), and returns such an IP packet fornotifying that the step E08 is received (Step E11). The relay controlunit 1713 produces an ACM packet and returns this ACM packet (Step E12),and the ACM packet is reached via the relay control units 1712, 1711 and1710 to the media router 1722 (Steps E13, E14 and E15). When thetelephone set 1721 notifies a telephone calling notification to themedia router (Step E20), the telephone calling notification is notifiedvia the media router 1723, the relay control units 1713, 1712, 1711,1710, and the media router 1722 to the telephone set 1720 (Steps E21 toE26). When the telephone set 1721 responds, a telephone callingoperation of the telephone set 1721 to the telephone set 1720 isnotified via the media router 1723, the relay control units 1713, 1712,1711, 1710, and the media router 1722, so that the telephonecommunication can be established.

The voice communication is carried out between the telephone set 1720and the telephone set 1721 (Step E38). The voice sent from the telephoneset 1720 is digitalized in the media router 1722 to be stored into theIP packet, and the IP packet is reached via the network node apparatus1714, the communication lines 1731, 1732, 1733, the voice control unit1716, the communication line 1734, the voice control unit 1717, thecommunication lines 1735, 1736, and the network node apparatus 1715 tothe media router 1723. In this media router 1723, the digitalized voiceis converted into the analog voice which is reached to the telephone1721. The IP-capsulation operation and the inverse-capsulation operationof the IP packet in the network node apparatus 1714 and 1715 areexplained in other embodiments. When the telephone set 1720 issues therelease request (Step E40), as previously explained, a series oftelephone call release operations and telephone call release completionare performed, so that the telephone communication is completed (StepsE41 to E45, Steps E51 to E55).

<<Connection of Various Sort of Networks>>

FIG. 291 is a diagram for representing a connection between publicswitched networks and IP transfer networks by including otherembodiments.

In FIG. 308, reference numerals 1760 and 1761 represent public switchedtelephone networks(PSTN), reference numerals 1762 and 1763 represent IPtransfer networks, reference numerals 1764 and 1765 show subscriberexchangers(LS), reference numerals 1766 and 1767 show relay exchanger,reference numerals 1768 and 1771 show termination gateways equipped witha capsulation function, reference numerals 1772 and 1773 represent relaygateways, reference numerals 1776 to 1779 denote media routers andreference numerals 1780 to 1785 indicate telephone sets. Each of theexchangers contains a relay control unit and a voice control unit. Eachof the termination gateways equipped with the capsulation function andeach of the relay gateways contain a relay control unit and a voicecontrol unit. The exchanger is connected to the gateway by a controlcommunication line and a voice control line. The network node apparatusare installed among the control lines between the relay gateway 1772 andthe termination gateways equipped with the capsulation functions 1768and 1769. The network node apparatus are installed among the controllines between the relay gateways 1773 and the termination gatewaysequipped with the capsulation functions 1770 and 1771. Since theconstruction has been explained in other embodiments, this constructionis omitted in FIG. 308.

As previously explained, for instance, the telephone sets 1782 and 1785can establish the telephone communications through the media router1776, the termination gateway equipped with the capsulation function1768, the relay gateways 1772 and 1773, the termination gateway equippedthe capsulation function 1771, and the media router 1779 under controlof the terminal-to-terminal communication control.

Also, the telephone set 1780 and the telephone set 1785 can establishthe telephone communication via the exchangers 1764 and 1766, the relaygateways 1772 and 1773, the termination gateway equipped with thecapsulation function 1771, and the media router 1779 under control ofthe terminal-to-terminal communication control. Furthermore, thetelephone set 1780 and the telephone set 1781 can establish thetelephone communication via the exchangers 1764 and 1766, the relaygateways 1772 and 1773, and the exchangers 1767 and 1765 under controlof the terminal-to-terminal communication control. It should beunderstood that the case is advantageous for such a condition that theswitching set 1766 is geographically separated far from the switchingset 1767.

<<Example with Employment of Non-Capsulation Type Termination Gateway>>

This example is similar to the above-explained connections of thevarious sorts of networks. As shown in FIG. 309, termination gatewaysequipped non-capsulation function 1768 x to 1771 x are newly employedwithout using the termination gateways equipped with the capsulationfunction 1768 to 1771. Also, while the relay gateways 1772 and 1773 arenot used, non-capsulation type relay gateways 1772 x and 1773 x arenewly used which can be mutually communicated with the terminationgateways equipped with the non-capsulation function.

As previously described, the telephone communications can be establishedbetween the telephone sets 1782 and 1785, between the telephone sets1780 and 1785, and between the telephone sets 1780 and 1781 undercontrol of terminal-to-terminal communication connection controls. Asexplained in the above operation, the telephone communication can becarried out between the two telephone sets from the telephone set 1 viathe media router 1, both the termination gateway equipped with thecapsulation function and the relay gateway belonging to the IP transfernetwork 1, via another relay gateway and another termination gatewayequipped with the capsulation function belonging to the IP transfernetwork 2, and the media router 2 to the telephone set 2. Furthermore,the telephone communication can be carried out between the two telephonesets from the telephone set 1 via the media router 1, both thetermination gateway equipped with the non-capsulation function and therelay gateway equipped with the non-capsulation function belonging tothe IP transfer network 1, via another relay gateway and anothertermination gateway equipped with the capsulation function belonging tothe IP transfer network 2, and the media router 2 to the telephone set2.

17. 17th Embodiment Conducting Multicast Communication

The following description is made with reference to the FIGS. 310 to312. Network node apparatuses 1801 to 1805 and routers 1807 to 1809 areprovided within an IP transfer network 1800. The network nodeapparatuses and the routers are interconnected by IP communication linesdirectly or indirectly via a network node apparatus or a router.Terminals 1810-1 to 1810-19 having an IP packet transmission/receptionfunction are connected via an IP communication line to a network nodeapparatus. Reference numerals 1811-1 to 1815-1 indicate addressadministration tables of the network node apparatuses, and referencenumerals 1817-1 to 1819-1 indicate route tables of the routers.

Reference numeral 1868 (in FIG. 311) shows major locations of serversfor implementing the terminal-to-terminal communication connectioncontrol function in multicast communication. Reference numeral 1857indicates a multicast administration server. Reference numerals 1855 and1856 are user service servers. Reference numerals 1853 and 1854 arereceptionists. Reference numeral 1851 is a multicast service provider.Reference numeral 1852 is a multicast service purchaser. Referencenumeral 1850 is a router. Reference numeral 1859 is a tree constructionserver. Reference numeral 1858 is a network resource administrationserver for the IP transfer network 1800. Reference numerals 1861 to 1863are table administration servers. Reference numerals 1841 to 1845 areoverflow communication lines to which IP packets out of schedule areoutputted. Each of the servers and routers within the IP transfernetwork 1800 has IP communication means which is provided with an IPaddress and thereby can exchange information with each other bytransmitting and receiving an IP packet. Here, in the presentembodiment, each server and router can be provided with a plurality ofmulticast IP addresses in addition to the proper IP address.

The terminal 1810-2 serves also as a transmission terminal fortransmitting the multicast data in a multicast service. The multicastservice includes what is called multimedia data such as digitized voice,fax data, still images and moving images.

<<Communication Record>>

Each line of the address administration table is called a communicationrecord or an IP communication record. The second line “I01, E01, E26,I26, G03, F02” in the address administration table 1811-1 is called acommunication record between an external address “E01” and an externaladdress “E26” or a communication record defining an IP communicationroute between the terminal 1810-2 having an external address “E01” andthe terminal 1810-16 having an external address “E26”. When the contentof a communication record is “a, b, c, d, e, f,” the first item is “a,”and the second item is “b,” and so on. When an item is an address, it isexpressed as, for example, the third address item is “c”.

The first item of a communication record is called a transmission sourceinternal IP address provided to a transmission source logical terminal(alogical connection point between an external IP communication line and anetwork node apparatus). The second item is called a transmission sourceexternal IP address. The third item is called a destination external IPaddress. The fourth item is called a destination internal IP addressprovided to a transmission source logical terminal. The fifth item iscalled an output destination specification of the internal IP packet.The sixth item is called an output destination specification of theexternal IP packet.

<<IP Transfer Between Two Terminals>>

The terminal 1810-2 (in FIG. 310) is provided with an external IPaddress “E01”. The terminal end of the communication line 1822 on thenetwork node apparatus 1801 side is provided with an internal IP address“I01”. The terminal 1810-16 (in FIG. 312) is provided with an externalIP address “E26”. The terminal end of the communication line 1826-6 onthe network node apparatus 1804 side is provided with an internal IPaddress “I26”. The values in the address administration tables 1811-1 to1815-1 of the network node apparatuses are shown in a state that theinitial values have been set by a method similar to that described inthe other embodiments. The following description is made for the case ofIP packet transfer.

The terminal 1810-2 sends out an external IP packet 1829-1 having atransmission source external IP address “E01” and a destination externalIP address “E26” onto the communication line 1822. The network nodeapparatus 1801 then receives the external IP packet 1829-1. Next, thenetwork node apparatus 1801 confirms that the record “I01, E01, E26,I26, G03, F02” in the second line of the address management table 1811-1contains above-mentioned three acquired IP addresses, that is, aninternal IP address “I01” provided to the terminal end of thecommunication line 1810-2, a transmission source external IP address“E01” within the received external IP packet 1829-1, and a destinationexternal IP address “E26”, then forms an internal IP packet using “I01,I26” included in the record, and then sends it out as an internal IPpacket 1829-2 onto the communication line 1823-2 specified by “G03”included in the record. In the above-mentioned procedure of capsulation,since the internal packet output specification “G03” (the fifth item) ofthe communication record “I01, E01, E26, I26, G03, F02” in question isother than “0”, an internal IP packet is formed by IP encapsulationthereby to be output. However, in case that the internal packet outputspecification is “0”, the IP packet in question is not encapsulated andis transferred to the overflow communication line 1841 of the networknode apparatus.

The router 1809 receives the internal IP packet 1829-2, and then sendsout an internal IP packet 1829-3 obtained by copying the internal IPpacket 1829-2, onto the communication line 1824-2 specified by theoutput interface “G21” specified by the route table 1819-1. The networknode apparatus 1804 receives the internal IP packet 1829-3, thenconfirms that the record “I26, E26, E01, I01, G36, F16” in the thirdline of the address administration table 1814-1 contains three IPaddresses “I26, E01, I01” within the internal IP packet 1829-3, thenrestores an external IP packet by decapsulation in which the IP headerof the internal IP packet 1829-3 is eliminated, and then sends it out asan external IP packet 1829-4 onto the communication line 1826-6specified by the output interface “F16” included in the record inquestion. The terminal 1810-16 receives the external IP packet 1829-4.

<<Kinds of Terminal>>

The terminals 1810-1 to 1810-19 are data terminals having a datatransmission/reception function, telephones having a digitized voicetransmission/reception function, voice transmission terminals capable oftransmitting digitized voice(that is, transmitters for cable voicebroadcast), voice reception terminals capable of receiving digitizedvoice(that is, receivers for cable voice broadcast), voice/imagetransmission/reception terminals or TV conferencing terminals having adigitized voice/image transmission/reception function, voice/imagetransmission terminals capable of transmitting digitized voice andmotion pictures(that is, transmitters for cable voice/image broadcast),and voice/image reception terminals capable of receiving digitized voiceand motion pictures(that is, cable TV receivers). Further, the terminalsmay be a combination of a media router and one of a data terminal, atelephone and a Voice/image apparatus connected to the media router. Thedata transmitted from or received by each above-mentioned terminal isstored in the payload section of an IP packet, the multicast technologydescribed below is applicable to each above-mentioned terminal.

<<Preparation for Implementation of Multicast Communication>>

The method of terminal-to-terminal communication connection controlbetween a transmission terminal and a reception terminal is describedbelow for the case that the terminal 1810-2 serves as a multicasttransmission terminal and that each of the terminals 1810-11, 1810-13,1810-14, 1810-17, 1810-18 serves as a multicast reception terminal.

FIG. 313 shows the cost of a communication line interconnecting anetwork node apparatus and a router within the IP transfer network 1800in a whole number for each communication line. In the figure, thecommunication cost between the network node apparatus 1801 and therouter 1807 is “1”. The communication cost between the network nodeapparatus 1801 and the router 1809 is “2”. The communication costbetween the network node apparatus 1802 and the router 1807 is “2”. Thecommunication cost between the network node apparatus 1802 and therouter 1809 is “1”. The communication cost between the router 1807 andthe router 1808 is “1”. The communication cost between the router 1807and the router 1809 is “3”. The communication cost between the router1808 and the router 1809 is “3”. The communication cost between therouter 1808 and the network node apparatus 1803 is “1”. Thecommunication cost between the router 1808 and the network nodeapparatus 1804 is “4”. The communication cost between the router 1809and the network node apparatus 1804 is “1”. The communication costbetween the router 1809 and the network node apparatus 1805 is “1”.

Routers and communication lines other than those shown in FIG. 313 arefurther included within the IP transfer network 1800. However, onlyrouters and communication lines relevant to the communication costcalculation are shown in the figure. Further, the cost of acommunication line may be assigned separately for the transmissiondirection and the reception direction such that, for example, thecommunication cost of a transmission line is “2” and that thecommunication cost of a reception line is “3.” However, in the presentembodiment, the same communication cost is assigned to both of thetransmission line and the reception line.

The network resource server 1858 (in FIG. 311) retains an internal database of the function and the like of various resources such as routers,servers, communication lines within the IP transfer network 1800. FIG.314 is a cost table 1869 retained by the network resource server 1858for showing the communication cost of the communication lines betweenthe network node apparatuses and routers. The symbol “N1801” in the costtable 1869 indicates the network node apparatus 1801, and the “R1807”indicates the router 1807.

The cost table 1869 is a list displaying the communication cost shown inFIG. 313. For example, the “1” in the seventh column of the second lineof the cost table 1869 indicates that the communication cost from thenetwork node apparatus 1801 to the router 1807 is “1”. The “2” in theninth column of the second line of the cost table 1869 indicates thatthe communication cost from the network node apparatus 1801 to therouter 1809 is “2”. The “2” in the seventh column of the third line ofthe cost table 1869 indicates that the communication cost from thenetwork node apparatus 1802 to the router 1807 is “2”. The “1” in theninth column of the third line of the cost table 1869 indicates that thecommunication cost from the network node apparatus 1802 to the router1809 is “1” and so on.

The procedure of multicast communication is described below withreference to FIGS. 315 to 317. The transmitter 1851 (in FIG. 311) ofmulticast data and the like applies to the receptionist 1853 forconnecting to the network node apparatus 1801 using the terminal 1810-2as a transmission terminal of the multicast data and the like (Step MS1in FIG. 300). The receptionist 1853 inputs the transmission terminalinformation 1870 (FIG. 315) together with the transmissionidentification information and the charge payment method, to the userservice server 1855 (Step MS2). Here, the transmission terminalinformation 1870 includes the information that the terminal 1810-2 formulticast transmission is connected to the network node apparatus 1801.Further, the symbol “N1801” in the transmission terminal information1870 indicates the network node apparatus 1801, and the “T1810-2”indicates the terminal 1810-2. The user service server 1855 transmitsthe transmission terminal information 1870 together with the acquiredtransmission identification information and transmission charge paymentmethod, to the multicast administration server 1857 (Step MS3). Themulticast administration server 1857 retains the received informationdescribed above in the data base thereof (Step MS4).

Described below is the case that the users of the terminals 1810-11,1810-13, 1810-14, 1810-17, 1810-18 receive the multicast data and thelike. The user 1852 applies to the receptionist 1854 for the receptionof the multicast data and the like (Step MS11). The receptionist 1854inputs the reception terminal information 1871 together with the useridentification information and the reception charge payment method, tothe user service server 1856 (Step MS12). Here, the reception terminalinformation 1871 (FIG. 316) includes the information that the terminals1810-11, 1810-13 for multicast data reception are connected to thenetwork node apparatus 1803, that the terminal 1810-14 is connected tothe network node apparatus 1804, and that the terminals 1810-17, 1810-18are connected to the network node apparatus 1805. Further, the symbol“N1803” in the reception terminal information 1871 indicates the networknode apparatus 1803, and the “T1810-11” indicates the terminal 1810-11and so on.

The user service server 1856 transmits the reception terminalinformation 1871 together with the acquired reception identificationinformation and charge payment method, to the multicast administrationserver 1857 (Step MS13). The multicast administration server 1857retains the received information described above in the data basethereof (Step MS14).

On receiving both the Step MS4 and the Step MS14, the multicastadministration server 1857 provides a multicast identificationinformation ID-k to the set of the transmission terminal information1870 and the reception terminal information 1871, and then sends theinformation to the tree construction server 1859 (FIG. 311) (Step MS18).The tree construction server 1859 requests the resource managementserver 1858 for the cost table 1869 (Step MS19) thereby to obtain thecost table 1869 (Step MS20). The tree construction server 1859determines the multicast tree structure(FIG. 318) defined by themulticast identification information ID-k using the multicast treestructure calculation module 1859-1 (FIG. 311), that is, determines thecommunication route of IP packet-transfer by the multicast technique,and forms the address administration table additional information(FIGS.319 to 322) for the network node apparatuses and the route tableadditional information(FIGS. 323 to 325) for the routers, therebyretaining them within the tree construction server 1859 (Step MS21).

<<Construction of Multicast Tree Structure by Tree Construction Server>>

The tree construction server 1859 then requests the table administrationserver 1861 to add the address administration table additionalinformation 1811-2 and the route table additional information 1817-2 tothe address administration table 1811-1 and the route table 1817-1,respectively (Step MS22). The table administration server 1861 reportsthe setting for the above-mentioned request (Step MS25). The treeconstruction server 1859 requests the table administration server 1862to add the address administration table additional information 1813-2,the address administration table additional information 1814-2, and theroute table additional information 1818-2 to the address administrationtable 1813-1, the address administration table 1814-1, and the routetable 1818-1, respectively (Step MS23). The table administration server1862 reports the setting for the above-mentioned request (Step MS26).The tree construction server 1859 requests the table administrationserver 1863 to add the address administration table additionalinformation 1815-2 and the route table additional information 1819-2 tothe address administration table 1815-1 and the route table 1819-1,respectively (Step MS24).

The table administration server 1863 reports the setting for theabove-mentioned request (Step MS27). Here, each table administrationserver is connected to a router near a network node apparatus. Themeaning of the address administration table additional information androute table additional information is described later in the descriptionof the flow of IP packet transfer. On confirmation of the completion ofthe Steps MS25 to MS27, the tree construction server 1859 reports thecompletion of the tree construction requested in the Step MS18 to themulticast administration server 1857 (Step MS28). By the above-mentionedprocedure, the former half of the terminal-to-terminal communicationconnection control for multicast communication, that is, theconstruction of multicast tree structure, has completed.

<<Multicast Tree Structure>>

The meaning of the multicast tree structure shown in FIG. 318 is asfollows. An external IP packet sent out by the terminal 1810-2 reachesthe network node apparatus 1801, and then becomes an internal IP packet.The internal IP packet is bifurcated into two directions toward therouter 1807 and the router 1809. The internal IP packet having reachedthe router 1807 goes through the router 1807 and the router 1808, andthen reaches the network node apparatus 1803. The other internal IPpacket reaches the router 1809. The router 1809 sends out the internalIP packet into two directions toward the network node apparatus 1804 andthe network node apparatus 1805. The network node apparatus 1803decapsulates the received internal IP packet thereby to restore anexternal IP packet, and then sends out the restored external IP packetto the terminal 1810-11 and the terminal 1810-13. The network nodeapparatus 1804 decapsulates the received internal IP packet thereby torestore an external IP packet, and then sends out the restored externalIP packet to the terminal 1810-14. The network node apparatus 1805decapsulates the received internal IP packet thereby to restore anexternal IP packet, and then sends out the restored external IP packetto the terminal 1810-117 and the terminal 1810-18. As such, in multicastcommunication, an IP packet is transferred through a communication routelooking like a tree. Thus, the shape of the communication route iscalled a multicast tree structure.

<<Construction of Tree Structure by Multicast Technique>>

In the Steps MS22 to MS24, the communication from the tree constructionserver 1859 to the table administration servers 1861 to 1863 is carriedout by TCP communication(connection communication) having a highcommunication reliability. However, the plurality of tableadministration servers are connected to a large number of routers withinthe IP transfer network for the above-TCP connection, and hence sharethe work of the initial setting and the record rewriting of the addressadministration tables of the network node apparatuses and the routetables of the routers. The present embodiment involves merely threerouters 1807 to 1809. However, another embodiment can involve a largenumber of routers, for example, a hundred thousand routers, and a largenumber of table administration servers within an IP transfer network.

In such a case, it is not advantageous that the address administrationtable additional information and the route table additional informationare transferred from the tree construction server to the large number oftable administration servers, because of a large communication traffic.Accordingly, the record of route table for the transfer of addressadministration table additional information and route table additionalinformation from the tree construction server to the hundred thousandrouters can be set also into each router at the time of construction ofthe IP transfer network. Here, it is configured so that the IP packet istransferred in a multicast tree structure for the overall communicationrecord of each router. By virtue of this, it is avoided that thecommunication traffic becomes too large in the transfer of addressadministration table additional information and route table additionalinformation from the tree construction server to the large number ofrouters.

Furthermore, in order to transfer the address administration and therouter table additional information from the tree construction server tothe large number of table administration servers, a well-known addresscan also be used.

<<Address Management Table>>

The following description is made with reference to FIGS. 326 to 328.The first line of the address administration table 1811 includes theaddress administration table additional information 1811-2. The firstline of the address administration table 1813 includes the addressadministration table additional information 1813-2. The first line ofthe address administration table 1814 includes the addressadministration table additional information 1815-2. The first line ofthe address administration table 1815 includes the addressadministration table additional information 1815-2.

The terminal end of the communication line 1822 (in FIG. 326) on thenetwork node apparatus 1801 side is provided with an internal IP address“I01.”. The terminal end of the communication line 1826-1 (in FIG. 328)on the network node apparatus 1803 side is provided with internal IPaddresses “I20” and “IM2”. The terminal end of the communication line1826-2 on the network node apparatus 1803 side is provided with internalIP addresses “I22” and “IM2”. The terminal end of the communication line1826-3 on the network node apparatus 1804 side is provided with internalIP addresses “I24” and “IM2”. The terminal end of the communication line1826-4 on the network node apparatus 1805 side is provided with internalIP addresses “I27” and “IM2”. The terminal end of the communication line1826-5 on the network node apparatus 1805 side is provided with internalIP addresses “I28” and “IM2”. Here, the internal IP address “IM2” is anexample of an address used for multicast.

<<Method of Representation of Address Administration Table>>

A comment is made below on the order of description of the items withina record of the address administration tables 1811 to 1815 in thepresent embodiment. In the description of the prior art in the presentspecification, the items within a record is expressed in the order of“E1, E2, I1, I2”. However, in the present embodiment, the order of itemsis changed into “I1, E1, I2, E2”. The difference is merely inrepresentation and not essential.

An IP packet 1830 sent out from the terminal 1810-2 having an IP address“E01” reaches the network node apparatus 1801 via the communication line1822. The destination address “M2” of the IP packet 1830 is a multicastexternal IP address, for example, “224.1.2.3” in a specific number.Here, the “224” indicates a multicast address according to IETFdefinition. An example of a specific number of the multicast internal IPaddress “IM2” is “225.1.2.3”.

<<Route-Table of Router>>

The following description is made with reference to FIG. 327. The figureshows route tables 1817 to 1819 indicating the communication lines towhich the received IP packets are to be transferred. The second line ofthe route table 1817 includes the route table additional information1817-2, the second line of the route table 1818 includes the route tableadditional information 1818-2, and the second line of the route table1819 includes the route table additional information 1819-2.

For example, in case of the record in the second line of the route table1817, an IP packet having a destination IP address “IM2” is transferredto the communication line 1824-1 specified by the logical communicationline name G12. In case of the record in the second line of the routetable 1818, an IP packet having a destination IP address “IM2” istransferred to the communication line 1825 specified by the logicalcommunication line name G27. Further, since the record in the secondline of the route table 1819 has the items “IM2” and “G21, G22”, an IPpacket having a destination IP address “IM2” is transferred to thecommunication line 1824-2 specified by the logical communication linename G21 as well as to the communication line 1824-3 specified by thelogical communication line name G22.

<<Transfer of IP Packet>>

Next, described below is the series of steps of IP packet transferstarting from the transmission of the external IP packet 1830. Referencenumeral 1800-1 (in FIG. 329) indicates the transmission and reception ofan IP packet within the IP transfer network 1800. The terminal 1810-2transmits an external IP packet 1830 to the communication line 1822(Step D1 in FIG. 329). On receiving the external IP packet 1830, thenetwork node apparatus 1801 confirms the internal IP address “I01”provided to the terminal end(logical terminal) of the communication line1822 to which the external IP packet 1830 is inputted and thedestination external IP address “M2” of the IP packet 1830, thensearches the content of the address administration table 1811 thereby tofind a record having the transmission source internal IP address “I01”and the destination external IP address “M2” (first IP packet acceptancetest), and then checks whether the searched record includes thetransmission source external IP address “E01” of the IP packet 1830 ornot(second IP packet acceptance test).

In this example, a record including “I01, E01, M2, IM2, G02, G03, 0” isfound in the first line of the address administration table 1811. Byusing the IP addresses “I01” and “IM2” in the record, an internal packetof the transmission source IP address “I01” and the destination internalIP address “IM2” are formed(encapsulation of IP packet). It is then sentout as an internal IP packet 1831-1 to the communication line 1823-1corresponding to the logical communication line name G02 (Step D2), andsent out as an internal IP packet 1831-2 to the communication line1823-2 corresponding to theological communication line name G03 (StepD3). In the procedure, when the destination external IP address “M2” ofthe external IP packet 1830 is not included in the addressadministration table 1811, the external IP packet 1830 isabandoned(first IP packet acceptance test). The above-mentioned checkwhether the detected record includes the transmission source IP address“E01” of the IP packet 1830 or not may be omitted. In this case, theabove-mentioned second IP packet acceptance test is not carried out.

The internal IP packet 1831-1 transferred via the communication line1823-1 reaches the router 1807. Since the destination IP address of theinternal IP packet 1831-1 is “IM2”, according to the “IM2, G12” of thesecond line of the route table 1817, it is sent out as an internal IPpacket 1831-3 to the communication line 1824-1 for the logicalcommunication line name G12 (Step D4). Here, the IP packet 1831-1 iscopied to be the IP packet 1831-3. The internal IP packet 1831-3 reachesthe router 1808. Since the destination IP address of the internal IPpacket 1831-3 is “IM2”, according to the “IM2, G27” of the second lineof the route table 1818, it is sent out as an internal IP packet 1831-4to the communication line 1825 for the logical communication line nameG27 (Step D5). Here, the IP packet 1831-3 is copied to be the IP packet1831-4. On the other hand, the internal IP packet 1831-2 transferred viathe communication line 1823-2 reaches router 1809. Since the destinationIP address of the internal IP packet 1831-2 is “IM2”, according to the“IM2, G21, G22” of the second line of the route table 1819, it is sentout as an internal IP packet 1831-5 to the communication line 1824-2 forthe logical communication line name G21 (Step D7), and further sent outas an internal IP packet 1831-6 to the communication line 1824-3 for thelogical communication line name G22 (Step D8). Here, the IP packet1831-2 is copied to be the IP packet 1831-5 and the IP packet 1831-6.Further, the route tables 1817 to 1819 of the routers and the routetables of the network node apparatuses may have address masks which areknown to the public. However, they are omitted in this example.

The internal IP packet 1831-4 reaches the network node apparatus 1803via the communication line 1825. The left four items “IM2, M2, E01, I01”of the record “IM2, M2, E01, I01, 0, F10, F12” in the first line of theaddress administration table 1813 coincide with the four addresses “I01,IM2, E01, M2” in the internal IP packet 1831-4. Accordingly, theinternal IP packet 1831-4 undergoes encapsulation in which the IP headeris eliminated as described in the other embodiments, whereby theexternal IP packet 1830 is restored. The restored IP packet is sent outto the communication lines specified by the output interfaces F10 andF12. That is, it is sent out as an external IP packet 1832-1 to thecommunication line 1826-1 specified by the output interface F10 (StepD11), and further sent out as an external IP packet 1832-2 to thecommunication line 1826-2 specified by the output interface F12 (StepD13). The IP packet 1832-1 reaches the terminal 1810-11, and the IPpacket 1832-2 reaches the terminal 1810-13.

Similarly, the internal IP packet 1831-5 reaches the network nodeapparatus 1804 via the communication line 1824-2. The left four items“IM2, M2, E01, I01” of the record “IM2, M2, E01, I01, 0, F14” in thefirst line of the address administration table 1814 coincide with thefour addresses “I01, IM2, E01, M2” in the internal IP packet 1831-5.Accordingly, the internal IP packet 1831-5 undergoes encapsulation inwhich the IP header is eliminated as described in the other embodiments,whereby the external IP packet 1830 is restored. The restored IP packetis sent out to the communication lines specified by the output interfaceF14. That is, it is sent out as an external IP packet 1832-3 to thecommunication line 1826-3 specified by the output interface F14 (StepD14). The IP packet 1832-3 reaches the terminal 1810-14.

The internal IP packet 1831-6 reaches the network node apparatus 1805via the communication line 1824-3. The left four items “IM2, M2, E01,I01” of the record “IM2, M2, E01, I01, 0, F17, F18” in the first line ofthe address administration table 1815 coincide with the four addresses“I01, IM2, E01, M2” in the internal IP packet 1831-6. Accordingly, theinternal IP packet 1831-6 undergoes encapsulation in which the IP headeris eliminated as described in the other embodiments, whereby theexternal IP packet 1830 is restored. The restored IP packet is sent outto the communication lines specified by the output interfaces F17 andF18. That is, it is sent out as an external IP packet 1832-4 to thecommunication line 1826-4 specified by the output interface F17 (StepD17), and further sent out as an external IP packet 1832-5 to thecommunication line 1826-5 specified by the output interface F18 (StepD18). The IP packet 1832-4 reaches the terminal 1810-17, and the IPpacket 1832-5 reaches the terminal 1810-18.

<<Prevention of Implosion of ACK Packets and NACK Packets>>

Considered below is the case that in order to report the reception of anexternal IP packet 1832-1 to the transmitter terminal 1810-2, theterminal 1810-11 forms an external IP packet 1833 having thetransmission source external IP address “M2” and the destinationexternal IP address “E01” thereby to send it out to the communicationline 1826-1 (Step D21 in FIG. 29). On receiving the external IP packet1833, the network node apparatus 1803 confirms that the transmissionsource external IP address “M2” in the received external IP packet is amulticast address, and then transfers the received external IP packetintact to the packet overflow communication line 1843. The external IPpacket transferred to the packet overflow communication line 1843 isabandoned. Similarly, when the network node apparatus 1804 receives anexternal IP packet from the terminal 1810-14 (Step D22) or when thenetwork node apparatus 1805 receives an external IP packet from theterminal 1810-17 (Step D23), the received external IP packet istransferred intact to the communication line 1844 or 1845. The externalIP packet transferred to the packet overflow communication line 1844 or1845 is abandoned.

As such, the sending-out of IP packets of individual terminal reportfrom all the terminals receiving the multicast data to the multicastdata transmitter terminal is suppressed. Accordingly, the implosion ofACK packets within the IP transfer network is prevented.

Next, described below is the specific method that the network nodeapparatus 1803 transfers the received external IP packet 1833 to theoverflow communication line 1843. The network node apparatus 1803confirms the internal IP address “IM2” provided to the terminalend(logical terminal) of the communication line 1826-1 to which the IPpacket 1833 is inputted and the destination external IP address “E01” ofthe IP packet 1833, then searches the communication records within theaddress administration table 1813 thereby to find a communication recordhaving the transmission source internal IP address “IM2” followed by thedestination external IP address “E01”, and then checks whether thesearched record includes the transmission source external IP address“M2” of the IP packet 1833 or not. In this case, all of the first to thethird address items of the communication record “IM2, M2, E01, I01, 0,F10, F12” in the first line of the address administration table 1813agree. Accordingly, the record is selected. Further, since the fifthitem(internal packet output specification) of the communication recordis “0”, the IP packet 1833 is not encapsulated, and is then transferredto the overflow communication line 1843.

In the case that the terminals 1810-13, 1810-14, 1810-17, 1810-18transmit an external IP packet having an transmission source IP address“M2” and a destination IP address “E01” to the network node apparatuses,the IP packet is transferred to the overflow communication line of eachnetwork node apparatus by a procedure similar to the above-mentionedcase. As described above, even when the reception terminal 1810-11 sendsout an ACK packet for confirmation of the reception of the multicast IPpacket to the transmitter terminal 1810-2, the ACK packet can not passthrough the network node apparatus 1803. Accordingly, the occurrence ofcongestion in the IP transfer network due to ACK packet implosion isprevented. The use of IP packets on the packet overflow communicationlines is described later.

Even in case that the network node apparatus 1803 receives an NACKpacket instead of the ACK packet from the terminal 1810-11, the NACKpacket is abandoned by a similar principle. Accordingly, the NACK packetimplosion is prevented. With regard to the timing of transmission of anNACK packet by the terminals 1810-11 to 1810-19, for example, the timeof the IP packet transfer by multicast technique is previouslydetermined, and then, when no IP packet is distributed at the scheduledtime, an NACK packet is transmitted.

<<Implementation of Cable Broadcast>>

In case that the terminal 1810-2 is a voice transmission terminalcapable of transmitting a digitized voice and that the terminals1810-11, 1810-13, 1810-14, 1810-17, 1810-18 are digitized voicereception terminals, the transmission of the IP packet 1830 is a cablevoice broadcast. Further, in case that the terminal 1810-2 is avoice/moving image transmission terminal capable of transmitting adigitized voice/moving image and that the terminals 1810-11, 1.810-13,1810-14, 1810-17, 1810-18 are digitized voice/moving image receptionterminals, the transmission of the IP packet 1830 is a cable TVbroadcast.

<<Correction of Multicast Tree Structure>>

The multicast tree structure can be corrected in case of an increase ordecrease of the multicast data reception terminals. The receptionist1854 (FIG. 313) previously obtains and retains the correspondencebetween the contents of multicast service and the multicastidentification information ID-k(k=1, 2, from the multicastadministration server 1857.

A use 1852 applies to the receptionist 1854 for the reception ofmulticast service data using the terminal 1810-15 connected to thenetwork node apparatus 1804 (Step MS31 in FIG. 330). The receptionist1854 acquires the receiver identification information, the chargepayment method, and the terminal relevant information(that is, the factthat the network node apparatus 1804 and the terminal 1810-15 are used)from the user 1852, and then identifies the multicast identificationinformation ID-k from the content of multicast service obtained from theuser 1852. The receptionist 1854 then inputs these information to theuser service server 1856 (Step MS32).

The user service server 1856 transmits the acquired receiveridentification information, charge payment method, terminal relevantinformation, and multicast identification information ID-k to themulticast administration server 1857 (Step MS33). The multicastadministration server 1857 retains the reception terminal information inthe data base thereof (Step MS34).

The multicast administration server 1857 sends the multicastidentification information ID-k and terminal relevant information(theuse of the network node apparatus 1804 and the terminal 1810-15) to thetree construction server 1859 (Step MS35). The tree construction server1859 request the network resource administration server 1858 for thecost table (Step MS36) thereby to obtain the cost table (Step MS37).

Using the multicast tree structure calculation module 1859-1, the treeconstruction server 1859 calculates the multicast tree structureinvolving the above-mentioned multicast identification information ID-kand terminal relevant information, and generates the addressadministration table additional information for the network nodeapparatuses and the route table change information for the routers (StepMS38), thereby retaining them within the tree construction server 1859.The tree construction server 1859 then requests the table administrationserver 1862 to add the address administration table change informationinto the address administration table 1814 of the network node apparatus1804 (Step MS40). The table administration server 1862 then reports thesetting for the above-mentioned request (Step MS41). The treeconstruction server 1859 reports the completion of change of themulticast tree structure to the multicast administration server 1857(Step MS42). The multicast administration server 1857 reports thecompletion of processing of the application by the user 1852 in the StepMS31, through the user service server 1856 (Step MS43), through thereceptionist 1854 (Step MS44), to the user 1852 (Step-MS45).

The address administration table 1814 is assumed to be set by the tableadministration server 1862. The above-mentioned address administrationtable change information specifies so that the sixth item “F14” in thefirst line of the address management table 1814 is changed into “(F14,F15)” and that the terminal 1810-15 connected to the logicalcommunication line “F15” is to be added as an reception terminal. As aresult the first record of the address administration table 1814 ischanged into “IM2, M2, E01, I01, 0, (F14, F15)”.

In case that the multicast data reception by the terminal 1810-11 is tobe canceled, the user 1852 applies to the receptionist for thecancellation of the multicast data reception by the terminal 1810-11. Asa result, it is specified that the logical communication line “F10”connected to the terminal 1810-11 is to be deleted from the sixth item“(F10, F12)” of the first line “IM2, M2, E01, I01, 0, (F10, F12)” of theaddress administration table 1813 (in FIG. 311). As a result, the firstline of the address administration table 1813 is changed into “IM2, M2,E01, I01, 0, F12”.

The above-mentioned embodiment is for a case that the route table of therouter 1807 and the like is not changed. However, depending on thecontent of the other correction request of the multicast tree structure,the route table change information can be generated for the route tablesof the routers 1807 to 1809, or alternatively the communication recordchange information can be generated for the address administrationtables of the other network node apparatuses 1801 and 1802. In thiscase, similarly to the initial setting of the tree structure, the routetables of the routers and the address administration tables of thenetwork node apparatuses are changed by requesting to the other tableadministration servers 1861 and 1863.

<<Release of Multicast Tree Structure>>

Described below is the procedure of releasing the multicast treestructure for terminating the multicast service. The receptionist 1853(FIG. 311) previously obtains and retains the correspondence between thecontents of multicast service and the multicast identificationinformation ID-k(k=1, 2, from the multicast administration server 1857.

The transmitter 1851 of multicast data and the like applies to thereceptionist 1853 for releasing the multicast tree structure havingformed by the above-mentioned procedure(Step MS60 in FIG. 330). Thereceptionist 1853 inputs the release of the multicast tree structure tothe user service server 1855 depending on the transmissionidentification information and the multicast identification informationID-k (Step MS61). The user service server 1855 transmits the release ofthe multicast tree structure together with the transmissionidentification information to the multicast administration server 1857(Step MS62). The multicast administration server 1857 records thetermination of the multicast service into the data base thereofdepending on the received transmission identification information andmulticast tree structure release information(including the multicastidentification information ID-k) (Step MS63). The multicastadministration server 1857 then instructs the tree construction server1859 to release the multicast tree structure identified by the multicastidentification information ID-k (Step MS64).

Depending on the multicast identification information ID-k, the treeconstruction server 1859 instructs the table administration servers 1861to 1863 to delete the address administration table additionalinformation 1811-2, 1813-2, 1814-2, 1815-2 (FIGS. 319 to 322) from theaddress administration tables 1811, 1813, 1814, 1815 of the network nodeapparatuses and to delete the route table additional information 1817-2,1818-2, 1819-2 (FIGS. 323 to 325) from the route tables 1817, 1818, 1819of the routers (Steps MS66 to MS68), and then receives the report (StepsMS70 to MS72). The tree construction server 1859 reports completionusing cost table 1869 to the network resource administration server 1858(Step MS73), and then receives the check report (Step MS74). The treeconstruction server 1859 reports the completion of the release procedureof the multicast tree structure to the multicast administration server1857 (Step MS77). Further, the multicast administration server 1857reports the completion of the release procedure of the multicast treestructure, through the user service server 1855 (Step MS78), through thedata transmission receptionist 1853 (Step MS79), to the data transmitter1851 (Step MS80). Here, the Steps MS78 to MS80 are optional and may beomitted. By the above-mentioned procedure, the latter half of theterminal-to-terminal communication connection control by multicasttechnique, that is, the release of multicast tree structure, hascompleted.

<<Use of Overflow Communication Line>>

The usage of the overflow communication lines 1843 to 1845 is describedbelow. Reference numerals 1801 to 1805 (in FIG. 331) indicate networknode apparatuses. Reference numeral 1810-2 indicates a terminal fortransmitting the multicast data. Reference numerals 1810-11 to 1810-13indicate terminals for receiving the multicast data. Reference numerals1880 to 1882 indicate overflow communication line servers connected tooutput lines 1843 to 1845. The IP packet 1833 (in FIG. 328) sent outfrom the terminal 1810-11, that is, the IP packet 1833 having antransmission source IP address “M2” and a destination IP address “E01,”is transferred to the overflow communication line 1843 according to thevalue “0” of the fifth item of the record “IM2, M2, E01, I01, 0,(F10,F12)” in the first line of the address administration table 1813.When the internal packet output specification(the fifth item) in therecord is “0”, the IP packet is transferred to the overflowcommunication line. On the contrary, when the internal packet outputspecification is not “0”, the IP packet is not transferred to theoverflow communication line.

The following description is made with reference to FIG. 332. An IPpacket 1833 sent out from the terminal 1810-11 and having a transmissionsource external IP address “M2” reaches the network node apparatus 1803(Step MC1). The IP packet 1833 then reaches the overflow communicationline server 1880 via the overflow communication line 1843 (Step MC2).When an IP packet having a transmission source external IP address “M2”is sent out from the terminal 1810-12, the IP packet in question reachesthe network node apparatus 1803 (Step MC3). The IP packet then reachesthe overflow communication line server 1880 via the overflowcommunication line 1843 (Step MC4). When an IP packet having atransmission source external IP address “M2” is sent out from theterminal 1810-13, the IP packet in question reaches the network nodeapparatus 1803 (Step MC5). The IP packet then reaches the overflowcommunication line server 1880 via the overflow communication line 1843(Step MC6).

In these cases, the overflow communication line server 1880 receives aplurality of IP packets the transmission source external IP address ofwhich is “M2”, that is, a multicast IP address. When the terminals1810-11 to 1810-13 transmit an IP packet, the transmitter terminaladdress is described in the payload portion of the IP packet. That is,according to the rule, the terminal 1810-11 sets the transmitterterminal address “E20”, the terminal 1810-12 sets the transmitterterminal address “E21”, and the terminal 1810-13 sets the transmitterterminal address “E22”. Thus, the overflow communication line servers1880 to 1882 can identify the external IP address of each transmitterterminal using the IP address of each transmitter terminal. As such,when the terminals 1810-11 to 1810-13 transmit an ACK packet or NACKpacket, the transmitter terminal is identifiable.

The overflow communication line server 1880 can collect the informationof the tree terminals obtained by the above-mentioned method, and cannotify it, through the network node apparatus 1803 (Step MD1), throughthe IP transfer network 1800, through the network node apparatus 1801(Step MD2), to the transmission terminal 1810-2 of the multicast data(Step MD3). Here, in order to permit the IP packet transfer between theoverflow communication line server 1880 and the terminal 1810-2 for thepurpose of the Steps MD1 to MD3, the records for IP encapsulation anddecapsulation are set both in the address administration table 1811 inthe network node apparatus 1801 and in the address administration table1813 in the network node apparatus 1803.

As a result, the multicast data transmission terminal 1810-2 canrecognize whether the terminals 1810-11 to 1810-13 have received themulticast data or not(distribution confirmation function). At that time,the increase is suppressed in the amount of communication in the IPtransfer network due to the increase of ACK packets and NACK packets.

The overflow communication line server 1880 can transmit an IP packet tothe terminals 1810-11 to 1810-13 using an multicast address “M2” (StepsME1 to ME4). Alternatively, the overflow communication line server 1880can set a record including an encapsulation address into the addressadministration table 1813, and then transmit an IP packet to theterminal 1810-12 using an IP address “E21” (Steps MF1 to MF4).

The following description is made with reference to FIG. 333. Theoverflow communication line server 1880 can exchange information withthe multicast transmission terminal 1810-2 by transmitting and receivingan IP packet (Steps MG1 to MG3). The overflow communication line server1881 can exchange information with the multicast transmission terminal1810-2 by transmitting and receiving an IP packet (Steps MH1 to MH3).The overflow communication line server 1882 can exchange informationwith the multicast transmission terminal 1810-2 by transmitting andreceiving an IP packet (Steps MI1 to MI3). As such, the overflowcommunication line server transmits and receives an IP packet to andfrom each multicast data reception terminal connected to the networknode apparatus, and accordingly the multicast data transmission terminal1810-2 does not need to transmit and receive an IP packet to and fromall multicast data reception terminals, whereby the load of themulticast data transmission terminal 1810-2 is reduced. Further, forexample, when the terminal 1810-11 requests the resending multicastdata, the transmission terminal 1810-2 transmits IP packets using theabove mentioned multicast tree structure. Thereby, high reliability oftransmission can be achieved.

<<Alternative Embodiments of Address Administration Table>>

The address administration table 1811 (in FIG. 326) can be implementedin the form of the address administration table 1811-5 (in FIG. 334). Inthis embodiment, the record of the address administration table 1811-5is formed by eliminating the second item(that is, the transmissionsource external IP address) of the record of the address administrationtable 1811. For example, the second item “E01” of the record “I01, E01,E26, I26, G03, F02” in the third line of the address administrationtable 1811 is eliminated thereby to become the record “I01, E26, I26,G03, F02” in the third line of the address administration table 1811-5.The IP encapsulation function of the network node apparatus in the casethat the second item is eliminated is described also in the presentembodiment.

Further, the address management table 1811 (in FIG. 326) can beimplemented in the form of the address management table 1811-6 (in FIG.325). In this case, an address mask technique is used in the IPencapsulation by the network node apparatus.

When an external IP packet having a destination external IP address“E26” and a transmission source external IP address “E01” is inputtedfrom the communication line 1822 the internal IP address of the terminalend of which is “I01”, the records in the first line and the third lineof the address administration table 1811-6 are in question. With regardto the record in the first line, it is checked whether the result of the“and” operation between a destination-use external IP mask “M-t2” andthe destination external IP address “E26” in the external IP packetcoincides with the destination external IP address “E2x” in the recordof the first line or not(equation (9) given below). No coincidenceoccurs in this case. With regard to the record in the third line, it ischecked whether the result of the “and” operation between adestination-use external IP mask “M-t26” and the destination external IPaddress “E26” in the external IP packet coincides with the destinationexternal IP address “E26x” in the record of the third line or not(equation (10) given below). Coincidence occurs in this case.

The transmission source IP address also is compared using the equation(11) given below, similarly to the above-mentioned cases.If (“M-t2” and “E26”=“M2x”)  (9)If (“M-t26” and “E26”=“M26x”)  (10)If (“M-h01” and “E01”=“E01x”)  (11)According to the result of above-mentioned comparison, the record of thethird line is selected. Encapsulation is carried out using the internalrecords “I01” and “I26” of the record of the third line, thereby formingan internal IP packet.

The address administration table 1811 (in FIG. 326) can be separated andrepresented into the table 1811-7 and the table 181-8 shown in FIGS. 336and 337, and can then be implemented in the form of such tables on thememory. That is, the record “I01, E01, M2, IM2, (G02,G03), 0” the firstline of the address administration table 1811 is separated into therecord “I01, E01, M2, IM2, MT-1, 0” in the first line of the addressadministration table 1811-7 and the record “MT-1, G02, G03” in the firstline of the address administration table 1811-8. In other words, themulticast branching point is described in the table 1811-8.

<<Summary>>

The information of a multicast service provider and the information of amulticast service purchaser are accepted via a user service serverthereby to be used in the setting of the multicast tree structure. Atree construction server inquires to a resource administration serverfor the connection information and the communication line cost of thecommunication lines between the network node apparatuses and therouters, thereby acquiring them. The tree construction server furthernotifies, to a plurality of table administration servers, the addressadditional information to the address administration tables in thenetwork node apparatuses and the additional information to the routetable servers in the routers, thereby setting the multicast treestructure.

A multicast communication record may be set in the route table of eachrouter, whereby using the multicast communication record, a treeconstruction server can transfer the address administration tableadditional information and the route table additional information forsetting the tree structure for multicast service, to a tableadministration server.

The transmission terminal 1810-2 can resent the multicast data, therebyhigh reliability multicast can be achieved. Further, a voicetransmission terminal transmits digitized voice, and a plurality ofdigitized voice reception terminals receive the digitized voice.Furthermore, a voice/motion picture transmission terminal transmitsdigitized voice/moving image, and a plurality of digitized voice/movingimage reception terminals receive the digitized voice/moving image.

When the internal packet output specification of an addressadministration table is “0”, the IP packet is transferred to an overflowcommunication line. On the contrary, when the packet overflow parameteris not “0”, the IP packet is not transferred to the overflowcommunication line. Here, the determination value “0” of the internalpacket output specification may be replaced by another fixed value.Further, when an IP packet including a multicast IP address as thetransmission source address is detected, the IP packet is abandoned,whereby the IP packet concentration to the transmission source can beavoided.

As a first address registration test, a destination multicast address ispreviously registered in the address administration table of a networknode apparatus. When the destination multicast address in the header ofan external IP packet input to the network node apparatus is not oneregistered in the address administration table, the network nodeapparatus abandons the IP packet, thereby preventing the mixing-in of anunregistered IP packet into the IP transfer network. Similarly, as asecond address registration test, a transmission source multicastaddress is previously registered in the address administration table ofthe network node apparatus. When the transmission source multicastaddress in the header of an external IP packet inputted to the networknode apparatus is not one registered in the address administrationtable, the network node apparatus abandons the IP packet, therebypreventing the mixing-in of an unregistered IP packet into the IPtransfer network.

The registration of a multicast address into the address administrationtable of a network node apparatus on the receiver side is not permitted,whereby an ACK packet for IP packet reception confirmation from amulticast IP packet receiver to the multicast IP packet transmitter cannot pass through the network node apparatus. Accordingly, the occurrenceof congestion in the IP transfer network due to ACK packet implosion andNACK packet implosion is prevented.

The registration of the IP address of a router as a destination addressis unpermitted, whereby the intrusion of a harmful IP packet forrewriting a multicast table and the like sent from the outside of the IPtransfer network into a router within the IP transfer network isprevented. Alternatively, the registration of the IP address of anoperation administration server for multicast within the IP transfernetwork is unpermitted, whereby the access from the outside of the IPtransfer network to the operation management server within the IPtransfer network is prevented. Accordingly, the informational securityis improved. As a second address registration test, the transmissionsources for IP packets including multicast data are restricted, wherebythe occurrence of an illegal action by an illegal person is suppressed.Further, in case of the occurrence of an illegal action, thetransmission source of the IP packet is easily identified, and hence theinformational security of the IP transfer network is improved.

18. 18th Embodiment Conducting Multicast Communication

The following description is made with reference to the FIGS. 338 to341. Network node apparatuses 1901 to 1905 and routers 1907-1 to 1907-4are provided within an IP transfer network 1900. The network nodeapparatuses and the routers are interconnected by IP communication linesdirectly or indirectly via a network node apparatus or a router.Terminals 1910-2 to 1910-70 having an IP packet transmission/receptionfunction are connected via an IP communication line to a network nodeapparatus. Reference numerals 1911 to 1915 indicate addressadministration tables of the network node apparatuses. Referencenumerals 1911-3, 1911-4, 1911-5, 1912-3, 1912-4, 1912-5 indicatemulticast service proxy servers. Reference numerals 1913-3, 1913-4,1913-5 indicate overflow communication line servers. Reference numerals1941 to 1945 indicate overflow communication lines. In the presentembodiment, each server and router has a plurality of multicast IPaddresses in addition to the proper IP address, and can exchangeinformation with each other by exchanging IP packets.

<<Transmission Terminal and Transmission Administration Server>>

The terminals 1910-02 and 1910-05 serve also as a transmission terminalfor transmitting multicast data in a multicast service. The terminals1910-06 and 1910-08 serve also as a transmission administration serverfor the multicast service. Each transmission administration servercomprises a data base and a information processing mechanism, therebyexchanging the information with the multicast service proxy servers andsharing a part of the information processing of the multicast datatransmission terminals.

<<Output Destination Specification of Communication Record>>

The fifth item of a communication record of an address administrationtable is called the output destination specification of an internal IPpacket. When the value of the item is not “0”, it indicates a specifiedstate. When the value is “0”, it indicates an unspecified state.Similarly, the sixth item of the communication record of the addressadministration table is called the output destination specification ofan external IP packet. When the value of the item is not “0”, itindicates a specified state. When the value is “0”, it indicates anunspecified state. For example, in the communication record “IM2, M2,E02, I02, 0, (F11 to F30, F91)” in the first line of the addressadministration table 1913, the output destination specification of theinternal IP packet is “0”, that is, unspecified. The output destinationspecification of the external IP packet is “F11 to F30, F91”, that is,the logical communication lines F11 to F30 and F91. Here, the logicalcommunication lines F11 to F30 are communication lines 1960-11 to1960-30, and the logical communication line F91 is a communication line1960-91.

<<Overflow Communication Line>>

The overflow communication line server collects IP packets, such as ACKpackets and NACK packets, which are replied from an reception terminalto a transmission terminal, via an overflow communication line, and thentransfers them to separate multicast service proxy servers depending onthe multicast address.

<<Transfer of Multicast IP Packet, 1>>

An external IP packet 1930 having a transmission source external IPaddress “E02” and a destination external IP address “M2” is sent outfrom the terminal 1910-02 (in FIG. 338) (Step Q1 in FIG. 342), and thenreaches the network node apparatus 1901. The communication record “I02,E02, M2, IM2, . . . , 0” of the first line of the address administrationtable 1911 is used, whereby internal IP packets 1931-1 and 1931-2 areformed. The internal IP packet 1931-1 reaches the router 1907-1 (StepQ2), and then becomes to an internal IP packet 1931-3 thereby to reachthe network node apparatus 1903 (Step Q3). On the other hand, theinternal IP packet 1931-2 reaches the router 1907-2 (Step Q4). In therouter 1907-2, the internal IP packet 1931-2 is copied thereby to bebifurcated into two. The internal IP packet 1931-4 reaches the networknode apparatus 1904 (Step Q5), and the internal IP packet 1931-5 reachesthe network node apparatus 1905 (Step Q6).

On receiving the internal IP packet 1931-3, using the communicationrecord “IM2, M2, E02, I02, 0, F11 to F30, F91” in the first line of theaddress administration table 1913, the network node apparatus 1903decapsulates the internal IP packet 1931-3 thereby to restore anexternal IP packet(having the same content of the external IP packet1930), and then sends out the restored external IP packet to theterminals 1910-11 to 1910-30 and the multicast service proxy server1911-3 (Steps 07, Q7 x). Here, the terminals 1910-11 to 1910-30 areprovided with a multicast address “M2” in addition to the external IPaddresses “E11” to “E30”. Further, the multicast service proxy server1911-3 is provided with a multicast address “M2” as well as an externalIP addresses “E91”. The feature of the present embodiment is that themulticast service proxy server 1911-3 receives the multicast servicedata (Step Q7 x) at almost the same time as that of the terminals1910-11 to 1910-30.

On receiving the internal IP packet 1931-4, using the communicationrecord “IM2, M2, E02, I02, 0, (F31 to F50, F93)” in the first line ofthe address administration table 1914, the network node apparatus 1904decapsulates the internal IP packet 1931-4 thereby to restore anexternal IP packet, and then sends out the restored external IP packetto the terminals 1910-31 to 1910-50 and the multicast service proxyserver 1911-4 (Steps Q8 and Q8 x). Here, the terminals 1910-31 to1910-50 are provided with a multicast address “M2” in addition to theexternal IP addresses “E31” to “E50”. Further, the multicast serviceproxy server 1911-4 is provided with a multicast address “M2” as well asan external IP addresses “E93”.

On receiving the internal IP packet 1931-5, using the communicationrecord “IM2, M2, E02, I02, 0, (F51 to F70, F95)” in the first line ofthe address administration table 1915, the network node apparatus 1905decapsulates the internal IP packet 1931-5 thereby to restore anexternal IP packet, and then sends out the restored external IP packetto the terminals 1910-51 to 1910-70 and the multicast service proxyserver 1911-5 (Steps Q9, Q9 x). Here, the terminals 1910-51 to 1910-70are provided with a multicast address “M2” in addition to the externalIP addresses “E51” to “E70”. Further, the multicast service proxy server1911-5 is provided with a multicast address “M2” as well as an externalIP addresses “E95”.

<<Send-Out of IP Packet by Reception Terminal, 1>>

In some cases, the terminals 1910-11 to 1910-70 send out various IPpackets, such as an ACK packet for notifying a normal reception to thetransmission terminal, an NACK packet for notifying a reception failureto the transmission terminal, and an IP packet for replying a question,to the transmitter terminal 1910-02 having an external IP address “E02”.The procedure for this is described below. In this example, thetransmission source address is a multicast IP address “M2”, and thedestination address is “E02”.

The terminals 1910-11 to 1910-30 form an IP packet to be sent to theterminal 1910-02 (Step Q10) thereby to send it out to the network nodeapparatus (Step Q11). On receiving the external IP packet, the networknode apparatus 1903 transfers the external IP packet intact to thepacket overflow output line 1943 (Step Q12), because the internal IPpacket output destination specification in the communication record“IM2, M2, E02, I02, 0, (F11 to F30, F91)” in the first line of theaddress administration table 1913 corresponding to the input external IPpacket is unspecified, that is, the fifth item of the record is “0”.

<<Function of Overflow Communication Line Server, 1>>

The overflow communication line server 1913-3 receives an external IPpacket 1946-1 (FIG. 345) from the overflow communication line 1943 (StepMPS1 in FIG. 344), then confirms that the transmission source IP addressof the external IP packet 1946-1 is “M2” (Step MPS2), and then forms anIP packet 1946-2 to be sent to the multicast service proxy server 1911-3for processing the multicast service specified by the multicast address“M2”, thereby sending out the IP packet (Step MPS3). Here, thetransmission source IP address of the IP packet 1946-2 is the IP address“E90” of the overflow communication line server 1913-3, and thedestination IP address is the IP address “E91” of the multicast serviceproxy server 1911-3. The IP packet 1946-2 is sent out from the overflowcommunication line server 1913-3 (Step Q13 in FIG. 342), through thenetwork node apparatus 1903, and reaches the multicast service proxyserver 1911-3 (Step Q14). At that time, the communication record “I90,E90, E91, I91, . . . , F90” in the twelfth line and the communicationrecord “I91, E91, E90, I90, . . . , F91” in the tenth line of theaddress administration table 1913 are used.

In this case, the multicast service proxy server 1911-3 is requested forthe re-transmission of the multicast data, because the received IPpacket is an NACK packet. The multicast service proxy server 1911-3 haspreviously received the multicast data classified by the IP address “M2”in the Step Q7 x, and hence can use the multicast data for there-transmission request. The multicast service proxy server 1911-3re-transmits the multicast data requested for re-transmission to thenetwork node apparatus 1903 (Step Q15). The multicast data reaches theterminals 1910-11 to 1910-30 (Step Q16). At that time, the communicationrecord “I91, E91, M2, IM2, . . . , F91” in the third line and thecommunication record “IM2, M2, E91, I91, 0, F11 to F30” in the secondline of the address administration table 1913 are used.

<<Function of Multicast Service Proxy Server, 1>>

The multicast service proxy server 1911-3 checks the content of thereceived IP packet 1946-2 thereby to form an IP packet containing: theinformation in which ACK packets indicating the reception confirmationare concentrated and listed; the information in which NACK packetsindicating the reception failure notified from the terminals areconcentrated and listed; the concentrated information such as individualterminal information; and the like; and then sends it to the transmitterterminal 1910-2, or alternatively, receives an IP packet replied fromthe transmitter terminal 1910-2 (Steps Q41 to Q44 in FIG. 342). Here,the IP addresses of the IP packet are the external IP address “E91” ofthe multicast service proxy server 1911-3 and the external IP address“E02” of the transmitter terminal 1910-2. Further, the communicationrecord “I91, E91, E02, I02, . . . , F91” in the seventh line of theaddress administration table 1913 and the communication record “I02,E02, E91, I91, . . . , F02” in the second line of the addressadministration table 1911 are used.

<<Send-Out of IP Packet by Reception Terminal, 2>>

The terminals 1910-31 to 1910-50 receive the multicast data in the StepQ8. The terminals 1910-31 to 1910-50 form an IP packet used for areception confirmation and the like (Step Q20 in FIG. 342) thereby tosend it to the network node apparatus 1904 (Step Q21).

On receiving the external IP packet, the network node apparatustransfers the external IP packet intact without IP encapsulation to thepacket overflow output line 1944 (Step Q22), because the internal IPpacket output destination specification in the communication record“IM2, M2, E02, I02, 0, (F31 to F50, F93)” in the first line of theaddress administration table 1914 corresponding to the input external IPpacket is unspecified, that is, the fifth item of the record is “0”.

<<Overflow Communication Line Server, 2>>

The overflow communication line server 1913-4 receives the external IPpacket from the overflow communication line 1944, then confirms that thetransmission source IP address of the external IP packet is “M2”, andthen forms an IP packet to be sent to the multicast service proxy server1911-4 for processing the multicast service specified by the multicastaddress “M2”, thereby sending out the IP packet via the communicationline 1914-1 to the multicast service proxy server 1911-4 (Step Q24 inFIG. 342). In this case, the feature is that the overflow communicationline server 1913-4 and the multicast service proxy server 1911-4 areinterconnected by the communication line 1914-1.

<<Function of Multicast Service Proxy Server, 2>>

The multicast service proxy server 1911-4 has previously received themulticast data in the Step Q8 x. The multicast service proxy server1911-4 re-transmits the multicast data requested for re-transmission tothe network node apparatus 1904 (Step Q25). The multicast data reachesthe terminals 1910-31 to 1910-50 (Step Q26). At that time, thecommunication record “I93, E93, M2, IM2, . . . , F93” in the third lineand the communication record “IM2, M2, E93, I93, 0, F31 to F50” in thesecond line of the address administration table 1914 are used.

The multicast service proxy server 1911-4 checks the content of thereceived IP packet thereby to form an IP packet containing: theconcentrated ACK packet information; the concentrated NACK packetinformation; the concentrated individual terminal information; and thelike; and then sends it to the transmitter terminal 1910-2, oralternatively, receives an IP packet replied from the transmitterterminal 1910-2 (Steps Q45 to Q48 in FIG. 342). Here, the communicationrecord “I93, E93, E02, I02, . . . , F93” in the seventh line of theaddress management table 1914 and the communication record “I02, E02,E93, I93, . . . , F02” in the third line of the address administrationtable 1911 are used.

<<Send-Out of IP Packet by Reception Terminal, 3>>

The terminals 1910-51 to 1910-70 receive the multicast data in the StepQ9. The terminals 1910-51 to 1910-70 form an IP packet used for areception confirmation and the like (Step Q30 in FIG. 342) thereby tosend it to the network node apparatus 1905 (Step Q31). The network nodeapparatus 1905 transfers the external IP packet to the packet overflowoutput line 1945 (Step Q32). The overflow communication line server1913-5 receives the external IP packet from the overflow communicationline 1945, and then sends out the IP packet via the communication line1915-1 to the multicast service proxy server 1911-5 (Step Q34 in FIG.342).

The multicast service proxy server 1911-5 has previously received themulticast data in the Step Q9 x. The multicast service proxy server1911-5 re-transmits the multicast data requested for re-transmission tothe network node apparatus 1905 (Step Q35). The multicast data reachesthe terminals 1910-51 to 1910-70 (Step Q36).

The multicast service proxy server 1911-5 checks the content of thereceived IP packet thereby to form an IP packet containing theconcentrated ACK packet information and the like, and then sends it tothe transmitter terminal 1910-2, or alternatively, receives an IP packetreplied from the transmitter terminal 1910-2 (steps Q49 to Q52 in FIG.342). Further, the multicast service proxy server 1911-5 can exchangeinformation directly with the terminal 1910-70 by transmitting andreceiving an IP packet (Steps Q38, Q39). Here, the communication record“I95, E95, E70, I70, . . . , F95” in the ninth line and thecommunication record “I70, E70, E95, I95, F70” in the tenth line of theaddress administration table 1915 are used. In this case, the feature isthat the multicast service proxy server 1911-5 provides a service forcommunicating directly with the terminal 1910-70.

<<Packet Transfer of Multicast IP Address “M5”>>

An external IP packet 1932 having a transmission source external IPaddress “E05” and a destination external IP address “M5” is sent outfrom the terminal 1910-05 (in FIG. 339), and then undergoes IPencapsulation via the network node apparatus 1902, thereby becominginternal IP packets 1933-1 and 1933-2. Each packet-reaches the networknode apparatus 1903 or 1905 via the router 1907-3 or 1907-4. Eachinternal IP packet is then decapsulated and sent to the terminals1910-21 to 1910-30, 1910-41 to 1910-50, and 1910-61 to 1910-70. Thisprocedure is shown in FIG. 343. A first major difference from FIG. 342is that the terminal 1910-05 serves as the transmission terminal insteadof the terminal 1910-02 and that the routers 1907-3 and 1907-4 are usedinstead of the routers 1907-1 and 1907-2. The route through which the IPpacket is transferred is changed as shown in FIG. 343 (Steps R1 to R9,R7 x, R8 x, R9 x).

As described above, the plurality of reception terminals connected to anetwork node apparatus are provided with a proper external IP address aswell as one or more multicast IP addresses defined for each multicastservice, whereby one or more multicast services can be used.

<<Transmission Administration Server>>

A second major point is that the multicast service proxy servers 1912-3to 1912-5 can transmit the concentrated ACK information IP packet, theconcentrated NACK information IP packet, and the concentrated individualterminal information IP packet to the transmission administration server1910-08, and can receive the data sent out from the transmissionadministration server 1910-08 (Steps R41 to R44, R45 to R48 and R49 toR52 in FIG. 343). The transmission administration server 1910-08 and thetransmission terminal 1910-05 also exchange information with each otherby transmitting and receiving an IP packet (Step R55 in FIG. 343). Inthe transmission/reception of an IP packet between the multicast serviceproxy server 1912-3 (IP address “E92”) and the transmissionadministration server 1910-08 (IP address “E08”), the communicationrecord “I08, E08, E92, I92, . . . , F08” in the fifth line of theaddress administration table 1912 and the communication record “I92,E92, E08, I08, . . . , F92” in the eighth line of the addressadministration table 1913 are used. In the transmission/reception of anIP packet between the multicast service proxy server 1912-4 (IP address“E94”) and the transmission administration server 1910-08, thecommunication record “I08, E08, E94, I94, . . . , F08” in the sixth lineof the address administration table 1912 and the communication record“I94, E94, E08, I08, . . . , F94” in the eighth line of the addressadministration table 1914 are used.

In the transmission/reception of an IP packet between the multicastservice proxy server 1912-5 (IP address “E96”) and the transmissionadministration server 1910-08, the communication record “I08, E08, E96,I96, . . . , F08” in the seventh line of the address administrationtable 1912 and the communication record “I96, E96, E08, I08, . . . ,F96” in the eighth line of the address administration table 1915 areused. In the transmission/reception of an IP packet between thetransmission administration server 1910-08 (IP address “E08”) and thetransmission terminal 1910-05 (IP address “E05”) and, the communicationrecord “I08, E08, E05, I05, . . . , F08” in the eighth line and thecommunication record “I05, E05, E08, I08, . . . , F05” in the ninth lineof the address administration table 1912 are used.

<<Overflow Communication Line Server and Multicast Service ProxyServer>>

The function of the overflow communication line server and the multicastservice proxy server is the same as that of the above-mentioned case ofmulticast IP address “M2”. On receiving an IP packet from the overflowcommunication line 1943 (Step MPS1 in FIG. 344, Steps R10 to R12 in FIG.343), the overflow communication line server 1913-3 checks whether themulticast IP address of the IP packet is “M2,” “M5,” or the like (StepMPS2), and then transfers it to the multicast service proxy server1911-3 or the multicast service proxy server 1912-3 depending on thesituation (Step MPS3, Steps R13, R14 in FIG. 343).

<<Initial Setting and Cancellation of Multicast IP Address>>

The administrator of the IP transfer network 1900 has the authority torewrite the communication record of the address administration tables1911 to 1915 of the network node apparatuses. For Example, acommunication record “I07, E07, M7, IM7, . . . , 0” used by the terminal1910-7 for multicast service transmission is added to the addressadministration table 1911 in the network node apparatus 1901. Here, “M7”is a multicast IP address. The route information of the multicastaddress “M7” is added to the route tables in the routers 1907-1 to1907-4. A communication record “IM7, M7, E07, I07, 0, F11 to F20, F91-1”used by the terminals 1910-11 to 1910-20 for multicast service receptioncan be added to the address administration table 1913 in the networknode apparatus 1903. Here, “M7” is the same multicast IP address as theabove mentioned “M7”. The F11 to F20 indicate the output line interfacesconnected to the terminals 1910-11 to 1910-20. The F91-1 indicates anoutput line interface connected to a multicast service proxy servernewly installed. The administrator of the IP transfer network 1900installs the above-mentioned multicast IP address “M7” in the terminals1910-11 to 1911-20.

Similarly, a communication record “IM7, M7, E07, I07, 0, F31 to F40,F93-1” used by the terminals 1910-31 to 1910-40 for multicast servicereception is added to the address administration table 1914 in thenetwork node apparatus 1904. Further, a communication record “IM7, M7,E07, I07, 0, F51 to F60, F95-1” used by the terminals 1910-51 to 1910-60for multicast service reception can be added to the addressadministration table 1915 in the network node apparatus 1905. By virtueof the above-mentioned procedure, the terminals 1910-11 to 1910-20, theterminals 1910-31 to 1910-40, and the terminals 1910-51 to 1910-60 canreceive the new multicast service. The terminals 1910-21 to 191Q-30 cancancel the reception of the multicast IP service identified by the IPaddress “M5” by erasing a communication record “IM5, M5, E92, I92, 0,(F21 to F29)” in the fifth line of the address administration table1913.

<<Network Node Apparatus to which Transmission Administration Server isConnected>>

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the transmission terminal 1910-05 andthe transmission administration server 1910-08 are connected to thecommon network node apparatus 1902. However, it is possible that theterminal 1910-07 (IP address “E07”) connected to the network nodeapparatus 1901 is set to be a new transmission administration server,that the terminal 1910-08 (IP address “E08”) is no longer used as atransmission administration server, that the transmission terminal1910-05 is connected to the network node apparatus 1902, and that thetransmission administration server 1910-07 is connected to the networknode apparatus 1901. That is, the transmission terminal 1910-05 and thetransmission administration server 1910-08 can be connected to separatenetwork node apparatuses.

In this case, the communication record “I92, E92, E08, I08, . . . , F92”in the eighth line of the address administration table 1913 is changedinto “I92, E92, E07, I07, . . . , F92”. The communication record “I94,E94, E08, I08, . . . , F94” in the eighth line of the addressadministration table 1914 is changed into “I94, E94, E07, I07, . . . ,F94”. And, the communication record “I96, E96, E08, I08, . . . , F96” inthe eighth line of the address administration table 1915 is changed into“I96, E96, E07, I07, . . . , F96”.

Further, a communication record “I07, E07, E05, I05, F07” used betweenthe transmission administration server 1910-07 and the transmissionterminal 1910-05 and communication records “I07, E07, E92, I92, F07,”“I07, E07, E94, I94, . . . , F07”, and “I07, E07, E96, I96, . . . , F07”used between the transmission administration server 1910-07 and themulticast service proxy servers 1912-3 to 1912-5 are added in theaddress administration table 1911. Furthermore, a communication record“I05, E05, E07, I07, . . . , F05” within the address administrationtable 1912 used between the transmission terminal 1910-05 and thetransmission administration server 1910-07 is added in the addressadministration table 1912. Further, the communication record “I08, E08,E05, I05, . . . , F08” used between the terminal 1910-08 and thetransmission terminal 1910-05 and the communication records “I08, E08,E92, I92, . . . , F08” and the like used the multicast service proxyservers 1912-3 to 1912-5 are eliminated.

<<Integration of Transmission Terminal and Transmission AdministrationServer>>

Further, it is possible that the transmission terminal 1910-02 and thetransmission administration server 1910-06 are provided with a commonIP, and that the function of the transmission administration server1910-06 is integrated into the function of the transmission terminal1910-02. In that case, the function of the transmission administrationserver 1910-06 and the function of the transmission terminal 1910-02 aredistinguished with each other by TCP port numbers and UDP port numbers.

<<Variation of Overflow Communication Line>>

The overflow communication line server 1913-5 shown in FIG. 341 is meansfor classifying the multicast IP address of an IP packet received fromthe overflow communication line 1945 thereby to send it to thecommunication line 1915-1 or 1915-2. Described below is a method inwhich an overflow IP packet classification function section is providedas a variation of that means.

Reference numeral 1905-1 (FIG. 346) indicates a network node apparatus.Reference numeral 1915-1 indicates an address administration table.Reference numeral 1925-1 indicates an external line interface section.Reference numeral 1911-5X indicates a multicast service proxy serverhaving the same function as that of the server 1911-5 (FIG. 341) andidentified by the multicast IP address “M2”. Reference numeral 1912-5Xindicates a multicast service proxy server having the same function asthat of the server 1912-5 (FIG. 341) and identified by the multicast IPaddress “M5”. Reference numeral 1913-5X indicates an overflow IP packetclassification function section having a function similar to that of theoverflow communication line server 1913-5.

When the overflow IP packet classification function section 1913-5Xreceives an external IP packet the transmission source of which is amulticast IP address and when the overflow parameter of thecommunication record is specified as “0”, the overflow IP packetclassification function section determines the transmission sourcemulticast IP address thereby to transfer the IP packet to thecorresponding multicast service proxy server via the communication line1915-1X or 1915-2X.

<<Implementation of Cable Broadcast and Media Distribution CommunicationSystem>>

The multicast data includes what is called multimedia data such asdigitized voice, fax data, still images and moving images.

In case that the terminal 1910-02 is a voice transmission terminalcapable of transmitting a digitized voice and that the terminals 1910-11to 1910-70 are digitized voice reception terminals, the transmission ofthe IP packet 1930 is the transmission of a cable voice broadcast. Thus,a cable voice broadcast communication system is implemented using IPtransfer. Further, in case that the terminal 1910-02 is a voice/movingimage transmission terminal capable of transmitting a digitizedvoice/motion picture and that the terminals 1910-11 to 1910-70 aredigitized voice/moving image reception terminals, the transmission ofthe IP packet 1930 is the transmission of a cable TV broadcast. Thus, acable TV broadcast communication system is implemented using IPtransfer. In a similar way, a cable fax communication system fortransmitting and receiving a digitized still image is implemented usingIP transfer.

The above-mentioned digitized voice reception terminals and voice/movingimage reception terminals can transmit an IP packet containing theindividual reception terminal information, such as a comment on thereceived multicast data(that is, the contents of the broadcast), to thetransmission terminal 1910-02. The multicast service proxy server canreceive the IP packets from the plurality of reception terminals, andcan send an IP packet containing the concentrated information in whichthe information contained in the above-mentioned IP packets has beenedited into a list or a short message, to the transmission terminal andthe transmission administration server. The transmission terminal andthe transmission administration server can further replies an IP packetcontaining the comment on the result of the received IP packetcontaining the concentrated information, to the multicast service proxyserver. As a result, a cable broadcast communication system isimplemented in which the information can be exchanged between themulticast data transmitter and the multicast data receivers. Asdescribed above, the multicast service proxy server arbitrates theinformation exchange between the multicast data transmitter and themulticast data receivers. When the transmission media is a book, a newspaper, a music or a video, the above-mentioned cable broadcastcommunication system can implement a book distribution communicationsystem, a news paper distribution communication system, a musicdistribution communication system or a video distribution communicationsystem as a multicast service. Here, the video indicates the informationcomposed of voice and moving image which is digitized and stored on avideo tape, a CD, or a DVD.

<<Summary>>

A terminal connected to a network node apparatus via an IP communicationline can be provided with, in addition to the proper external IPaddress, one or more multicast IP addresses defined for each multicastservice. A plurality of transmission terminals are possible. Themulticast data transmitted by each multicast data transmission terminalis transferred through the IP transfer network, and then reaches aplurality of terminals. As such, each terminal can receive one or moremulticast services. Each reception terminal can install a new multicastIP address for each multicast service and cancel it at any time byrequesting to the IP transfer network operator. One of more multicastservice proxy servers can be connected to a network node apparatus.

The multicast service proxy server can transmit an IP packet whichcontains the concentrated ACK packet information, the concentrated NACKpacket information, and the concentrated individual terminal informationreceived from one or more terminals connected to the network nodeapparatus to which the multicast service proxy server is connected, tothe transmission terminal or the transmission administration serveroperating the multicast service.

The multicast service can be a high quality service by virtue of theimprovement request such as a reception confirmation notification(ACKpacket) and a reception failure notification(NACK packet). Thecommunication company can suppress the increase in communication trafficin the IP transfer network by suppressing the ACK packets, NACK packetsand individual receiver reports. Further, the distribution of multicastdata not having a contract with the communication company is prevented,and the charging to the multicast service users is carried out easily.

The multicast service proxy server can exchange information bytransmitting and receiving an IP packet with the transmission terminaland the transmission administration server which are connected to themulticast service proxy server and operate the multicast service. Themulticast service proxy server receives and retains the multicast datatransmitted from the transmitter terminal. The multicast service proxyserver can then send out the retained multicast data to the terminalsconnected to the network node apparatus to which the multicast serviceproxy server is connected, using, the multicast function of the networknode apparatus.

The multicast service proxy server can exchange information bytransmitting and receiving an IP packet with a specific terminal thecommunication record of which is set in the network node apparatus. IPencapsulation is carried out when the internal IP packet outputdestination specification in the communication record for specifying themethod of IP encapsulation and IP decapsulation is specified, whereas IPencapsulation is not carried out when the internal IP packet outputdestination specification is unspecified. The external IP packet inquestion is then outputted to the external IP packet overflowcommunication line. The overflow communication line server receives anon-IP-encapsulated external IP packet via the external IP packetoverflow communication line, and then transfers the information includedin the external IP packet through the network node apparatus to themulticast service proxy server.

The overflow communication line server receives a non-IP-encapsulatedexternal IP packet via the external IP packet overflow communicationline, and then transfers the information included in the external IPpacket to the multicast service proxy server via the communication lineinterconnecting the overflow communication line server and the multicastservice proxy server. The overflow IP packet classification functionsection connected to the external IP packet overflow communication lineis included. IP decapsulation is carried out when the external IP packetoutput destination specification in the communication record isspecified, whereas IP decapsulation is not carried out when the externalIP packet output destination specification is unspecified. The internalIP packet in question is then outputted to the internal IP packetoverflow communication line.

19. 19th Embodiment Conducting Multicast Communication

Network node apparatuses have the feature of not carrying out IPencapsulation. The following description is made with reference to theFIGS. 347 to 350. Network node apparatuses 2001 to 2005 and routers 2007to 2009 are provided within an IP transfer network 2000. The networknode apparatuses and the routers are interconnected by IP communicationlines directly or indirectly via a network node apparatus or a router.Reference numerals 2011 to 2015 indicate address administration tablesof the network node apparatuses, and each table registers the IPaddresses of the terminals connected to each network node apparatus viaa communication line. Reference numerals 2016 to 2020 indicate routetables of the network node apparatuses. Reference numerals 2021 to 2023indicate route tables of the routers. Terminals 2025 to 2039 have an IPpacket transmission/reception function, and are connected to eachnetwork node apparatus via an IP communication line. Reference numerals2045 to 2049 indicate overflow communication lines to which anunscheduled IP packet is outputted. Reference numeral 2050 indicates amulticast service proxy server. The terminal 2026 serves also as thetransmission terminal for transmitting the multicast data in a multicastservice. The multicast data includes what is called multimedia data suchas digitized voice, fax data, static images and moving images. Theterminal 2027 serves also as the transmission administration server forthe multicast service.

<<Transfer of IP Packet>>

Next, described below is the series of steps of IP packet transferstarting from the transmission of an external IP packet 2040 by thetransmission terminal 2026. The terminal 2026 transmits the external IPpacket 2040 having an transmission source external IP address “E02” anda destination IP address “M2” to the communication line 2051 (Step DD1in FIG. 350). The network node apparatus 2001 checks whether thetransmission source IP address “E02” of the received external IP packet2040 is registered in the address administration table 2011 or not(IPpacket acceptance test). In this case, the set of the logicalcommunication line name “F02” and the IP address “E02” of thecommunication line 2051 is registered as “F02, E02” in the record in thesecond line of the address administration table 2011, and hence the IPpacket 2040 is accepted. In case that the IP address is not registered,the received IP packet is transferred intact to the packet overflowcommunication line 2045, and then abandoned.

Next, with regard to the record “Msk-m2, M2, (G02, G03)” in the firstline of the route table 2016, it is checked whether the result of the“and” operation between the first item “Msk-m2” of the record and thedestination IP address “M2” of the IP packet 2040 coincides with thesecond item “M2” of the record or not(the following equation (12)).Coincidence occurs in this case. Here, the value of address mask“Msk-m2” is “255.255.255.255” in this case.If (“Msk-m2” and “M2”=“M2”).  (12)Next, with regard to the third item G02 and G03 of the record, an IPpacket 2041 is sent out to the communication line 2053 having thelogical communication line name “G02” (Step DD2), while an IP packet2042 is sent out to the communication line 2054 having the logicalcommunication line name “G03” (Step DD3). The IP packets 2041 and 2042are generated by copying the IP packet 2040. In the above-mentionedprocedure, when the destination IP address “M2” of the IP packet 2040 isnot included in the route table 2016, the IP packet 2040 isabandoned(registration test of multicast address).

The IP packet 2041 reaches the router 2007, and is then sent out as anIP packet 2043 to the communication line 2055 having a logicalcommunication line name G12 according to the record “M2, G12” in thesecond line of the route table 2021 (Step DD4). The IP packet 2043reaches the router 2008, and is then sent out as an IP packet 2034 tothe communication line 2058 having a logical communication line name G27according to the record “M2, G27” in the second line of the route table2022 (Step DD5). On the other hand, the IP packet 2042 sent out to thecommunication line 2054 reaches router 2009, and is then sent out as anIP packet 2035 to the communication line 2056 having a logicalcommunication line name “G21” (Step DD6) and as an IP packet 2036 to thecommunication line 2057 for the logical communication line name “G22”(Step DD7), according to the “M2, G21, G22” of the second line of theroute table 2023. The IP packets 2035 and 2036 are generated by copyingthe IP packet 2042. Here, the route tables 2021 to 2023 of the routersmay have address masks similar to those of the route table 2016 of thenetwork node apparatus. However, they are known to the public and henceomitted.

The IP packet 2034 reaches the network node apparatus 2003 via thecommunication line 2058. With regard to the record “Msk-m2, M2, (F10,F12, F22)” in the first line of the route table 2018, it is checkedwhether the result of the “and” operation between the first-item“Msk-m2” of the record and the destination IP address “M2” of the IPpacket 2034 coincides with the second item “M2” of the record or not(thefollowing equation (13)). Coincidence occurs in this case. Here, thevalue of address mask “Msk-m2” is “255.255.255.255” in this case.If (“Msk-m2”) and “M2”=“M2”)  (13)Next, with regard to the third item F10, F12, F22 of the record, an IPpacket 2038 is sent out to the communication line 2060 having a logicalcommunication line name “F10” (Step DD11). An IP packet 2039 is sent outto the communication line 2061 having a logical communication line name“F12” (Step DD13). An IP packet is sent out to the communication line2059 having a logical communication line name “F22” (Step DD9). Theterminals 2031, 2033 receive the multicast data via the communicationlines 2060, 2061, respectively. The multicast service proxy server 2050retains the multicast data received via the communication line 2059 inan internal data base.

The network node apparatus 2004 receives the IP packet 2035, and thensends out an IP packet 2040 copied from the IP packet 2035 using therecord “Msk-m2, M2, F13” in the first line of the route table 2019 in aprocedure similar to that of the above-mentioned network node apparatus2003, to the communication line 2062 having a logical communication linename “F13” (Step DD14).

The network node apparatus 2005 receives the IP packet 2036, and thensends out IP packets 2041, 2042 copied from the IP packet 2035 using therecord “Msk-m2, M2, (F16, F17)” in the first line of the route table2020 in a procedure similar to that of the above-mentioned network nodeapparatus 2003, to the communication lines 2063, 2064, respectively(Steps DD17, DD18).

<<Prevention of Implosion of ACK Packets and NACK Packets>>

In order to report the information relevant to the reception of the IPpacket 2038, such as an ACK packet for reception report, an NACK packetfor reception failure report, and an individual terminal report, to thetransmission terminal 2026, the terminal 2031 forms an IP packet 2044having the transmission source external IP address “M2” and thedestination external IP address “E02” thereby to send it out to thecommunication line 2060 (Step DD21 in FIG. 350). Similarly, in order toreport the reception of the IP packet 2039 to the transmission terminal2026, the terminal 2033 sends out an IP packet having the transmissionsource external IP address “M2” and the destination external IP address“E02” to the communication line 2061 (Step DD22).

On receiving the IP packets sent out by the terminals 2031, 2033 for thereport to the transmission terminal 2026, the network node apparatus2003 checks whether the transmission source external IP address “M2” ofthe IP packets is registered in the address administration table 2013 ornot. Since it is not registered in this case, the received IP packetsare transferred intact to the packet overflow communication line 2059(Step DD26).

As such, the sending-out of IP packets of individual terminal reportfrom all the terminals receiving the multicast data to the multicastdata transmission terminal is suppressed. Accordingly, the implosion ofACK packets and NACK packets within the IP transfer network isprevented.

<<Data Transmission by Multicast Service Proxy Server>>

The multicast service proxy server 2050 has received the multicast datatransmitted by the terminal 2026 in the Step DD9, and retains it in theinternal data base. When the terminal 2031 or 2033 requests there-transmission of the multicast data in the step DD21 or DD22, themulticast service proxy server 2050 can re-transmit the retainedmulticast data through the network node apparatus 2003 (Step DD27) tothe terminal 2031 (Step DD28) or to the terminal 2033 (Step DD29). Atthat time, the first line “Msk-m2, M2, (F10, F12, F22) of the routetable 2018 within the network node apparatus 2003 is used for thetransmission of this multicast data.

<<Data Transmission to and Reception from Transmission Terminal>>

The multicast service proxy server 2050 sends the formed IP packetcontaining the concentrated information to the transmission terminal2026, or alternatively, receives an IP packet replied from thetransmission terminal 2026 (Steps DD41 to DD45 in FIG. 350). Here, theIP addresses of the IP packet are the IP address “E22” of the multicastservice proxy server 2050 and the IP address “E02” of the transmissionterminal 2026. Used here are the communication record “F22, E22” in thefourth line of the address administration table 2013, the communicationrecord “Msk22, E22, F22” in the fifth line of the route table 2018, thecommunication record “F02, E02” in the second line of the addressadministration table 2011, and the communication record “Msk02, E02,F02” in the third line of the route table 2016. As such, the multicastservice proxy server can exchange information by transmitting andreceiving an IP packet with the transmission terminal 2026 which isconnected to the multicast service proxy server and operates themulticast service.

<<Data Transmission to and Reception from Transmission AdministrationServer>>

The multicast service proxy server 2050 sends the formed IP packetcontaining the concentrated information (the concentrated ACK packetinformation, the concentrated NACK packet information, and theconcentrated individual terminal information) to the transmissionadministration server 2027, or alternatively, can receive an IP packetreplied from the transmission administration server 2027 (Steps DD46 toDD50 in FIG. 350). Here, the IP addresses of the IP packet are the IPaddress “E22” of the multicast service proxy server 2050 and the IPaddress “E03” of the transmission administration server 2027. Used hereare the communication record “F22, E22” in the fourth line of theaddress administration table 2013, the communication record “Msk22, E22,F22” in the fifth line of the route table 2018, the communication record“F03, E03” in the third line of the address administration table 2011,and the communication record “Msk03, E03, F03” in the fourth line of theroute table 2016. As such, the multicast service proxy server canexchange information by transmitting and receiving an IP packet with thetransmission administration server which is connected to the multicastservice proxy server and operates the multicast service.

<<Exchange of Information Between Transmission Terminal and TransmissionAdministration Server>>

The transmission terminal and the transmission administration server canexchange information with each other by exchanging an IP packet in orderto operate the multicast service (Step DD51 in FIG. 350). Further, it ispossible that the transmission terminal 2026 and the transmissionadministration server 2027 are provided with a common IP address, andthat the function of the transmission administration server 2027 isintegrated into the function of the transmission terminal 2026. In thatcase, the function of the transmission administration server 2027 andthe function of the transmission terminal 2026 are distinguished witheach other by TCP port numbers and UDP port numbers.

<<Network Node Apparatus to which Transmission Administration Server isConnected>>

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the transmission terminal 2026 andthe transmission administration server 2027 are connected to the commonnetwork node apparatus 2001. However, it is possible that the terminal2028 (IP address “E04”) connected to the network node apparatus 2002 isset to be a new transmission administration server, and that thetransmission administration server 2027 is no longer used as thetransmission administration server. That is, the transmission terminaland the transmission administration server can be connected to separatenetwork node apparatuses. In this case, in the multicast service proxyserver 2050 and the transmission terminal 2026 which transmit andreceive an IP packet to and from the transmission administration server2028, the IP address “E04” is used for the transmission administrationserver in the transmission/reception of the IP packet.

<<Variation of Network Node Apparatus>>

The network node apparatus 2001 (in FIG. 347) can be implemented byseparating it into an address administration module 2090 and a router2091 shown in FIG. 351. Here, the address administration module 2090 andthe router 2091 can exchange information with each other via a line2092. The address administration table 2011X in the addressadministration module 2090 contains the same information of the addressadministration table 2011 in the network node apparatus 2001, and theroute table 2016X in the router 2091 contains the same information ofthe route table 2016 in the network node apparatus 2001. The addressadministration module 2090 is implemented by a server implemented by apersonal computer, or by a hardware module.

<<Transfer of IP Packet Using Address Administration Module>>

Described below is the IP packet transfer within the IP transfer network2000 with reference to FIG. 351. The terminal 2026 transmits an externalIP packet 2040 having an transmission source external IP address “E02”and a destination IP address “M2” to the communication line 2051. Therouter 2091 receives the external IP packet 2040 via the communicationline 2051, and then sends the received external IP packet 2040 throughthe line 2092 to the address administration module 2090. The addressadministration module 2090 checks whether the transmission source IPaddress “E02” of the received external IP packet 2040 is registered inthe address administration table 2011 x or not. In this case, theaddress administration module confirms that the set of the logicalcommunication line name “F02” and the IP address “E02” of thecommunication line 2051 is registered as “F02, E02” in the record in thesecond line of the address administration table 2011X, and then notifiesthe confirmation result to the router 2091. In response to the reportfrom the address administration module 2090, the router 2091 accepts theIP packet 2040. In case that the IP packet is not registered, thereceived IP packet is transferred intact to the packet overflowcommunication line 2045, and then abandoned.

Next, with regard to the record “Msk-m2, M2, (G02, G03)” in the firstline of the route table 2016 x, the router 2091 checks whether theresult of the “and” operation between the first item “Msk-m2” of therecord and the destination IP address “M2” of the IP packet 2040coincides with the second item “M2” of the record or not(the followingequation (14)). Coincidence occurs in this case. Here, the value ofaddress mask “Msk-m2” is 255.255.255.255 in this case.If (“Msk-m2”) and “M2”=“M2”)  (14)Next, with regard to the third item G02 and G03 of the record, an IPpacket 2041 is sent out to the communication line 2053 having thelogical communication line name “G02”, while an IP packet 2042 is sentout to the communication line 2054 having the logical communication linename “G03”.

The network node apparatus 2003 (FIG. 349) can be replaced by thecombination of an address administration module and a router having afunction similar to the above-mentioned one. Here, the replaced addressadministration module comprises a address administration tablecontaining the same information of the address administration table2013, and the replaced router comprises the same information of theroute table 2018. By a similar principle, the network node apparatuses2004 and 2005 can be replaced by the combinations of an addressadministration module and a router having a function similar to theabove-mentioned one. They comprise the same information of the addressadministration tables and the route tables in the network nodeapparatuses 2004 and 2005.

<<Implementation of Cable Broadcast and Media Distribution CommunicationSystem>>

In case that the terminal 2026 is a voice transmission terminal capableof transmitting a digitized voice and that the terminals 2031 to 2039are digitized voice reception terminals, the transmission of the IPpacket 2040 is the transmission of a cable voice broadcast. Thus, acable voice broadcast communication system is implemented using IPtransfer. Further, in case that the terminal 2060 is a voice/movingimage transmission terminal capable of transmitting a digitizedvoice/moving image picture and that the terminals 2031 to 2039 aredigitized voice/moving image reception terminals, the transmission ofthe IP packet 2040 is the transmission of a cable TV broadcast. Thus, acable TV broadcast communication system is implemented using IPtransfer. In a similar way, a cable fax communication system fortransmitting and receiving a digitized still image is implemented usingIP transfer. The above-mentioned digitized voice reception terminals andvoice/moving image reception terminals can transmit an IP packetcontaining the individual reception terminal information, such as acomment on the received multicast data(that is, the contents of thebroadcast), to the transmission terminal 2026. The multicast serviceproxy server can receive the IP packets from the plurality of receptionterminals, and can send an IP packet containing the concentratedinformation in which the information contained in the above-mentioned IPpackets has been edited into a list or a short message, to thetransmission terminal and the transmission administration server. Thetransmission terminal and the transmission administration server canfurther replies an IP packet containing the comment on the result of thereceived IP packet containing the concentrated information, to themulticast service proxy server. As a result, a cable broadcastcommunication system is implemented in which the information can beexchanged between the multicast data transmitter and the multicast datareceivers. As described above, the multicast service proxy serverarbitrates the information exchange between the multicast datatransmitter and the multicast data receivers. When the transmissionmedia is a book, a news paper, a music, or a video, the above-mentionedcable broadcast communication system can implement a book distributioncommunication system, a news paper distribution communication system, amusic distribution communication system, or a video distributioncommunication system as a multicast service. Here, the video indicatesthe information composed of voice and moving images which is digitizedand stored on a video tape, a CD, or a DVD.

<<Summary>>

Each terminal is connected through a communication line to a router towhich an address administration module is connected. The transmissionsource IP address is registered in the address administration table ofthe address administration module. When the transmission source IPaddress in the header of an IP packet being input to the router isregistered in the address administration table in the addressadministration module, the IP packet is transferred. When it is notregistered, the IP packet is transferred to the overflow communicationline of the router, whereby the mixing-in of an unscheduled IP packetinto the IP transfer network is prevented. Further, when the destinationmulticast IP address in the header of an IP packet being inputted to therouter is not registered in the route table of the router, the IP packetis transferred to the overflow communication line of the router, wherebythe mixing-in of an unscheduled IP packet into the IP transfer networkis prevented.

When the IP address of a terminal is registered in the addressadministration table of a network node apparatus, the IP packet istransmitted. When it is not registered, the IP packet is transferred tothe overflow communication line. The IP packet is either abandoned orsent to the multicast service proxy server. The registration of amulticast address into the address administration table of a networknode apparatus is not permitted, whereby an ACK packet for IP packetreception confirmation from a multicast IP packet receiver to themulticast IP packet transmitter, an NACK packet for reception failurenotification, and an individual report packet can not pass through thenetwork node apparatus. Further, in case that a destination multicastaddress is registered in the route table of a network node apparatus,when the destination multicast IP address in the header of an IP packetbeing inputted to the network node apparatus is registered in the routetable, the IP packet is transferred. When it is not registered in theroute table, the IP packet is abandoned by the network node apparatus,whereby the mixing-in of an unscheduled IP packet into the IP transfernetwork is prevented.

The multicast service proxy server receives the multicast datatransmitted by the transmission terminal, and retains it in the inside.The multicast service proxy server can then send out the retainedmulticast data to a terminal connected to the network node apparatus towhich the multicast service proxy server is connected, using themulticast function of the network node apparatus.

The multicast service proxy server can transmit an IP packet whichcontains the concentrated ACK packet information, the concentrated NACKpacket information, and the concentrated individual terminal informationreceived from one or more terminals connected to the network nodeapparatus to which the multicast service proxy server is connected, tothe transmission terminal or the transmission administration serveroperating the multicast service.

The multicast service proxy server can exchange information bytransmitting and receiving an IP packet with the transmission terminaland the transmission administration server which are connected to themulticast service proxy server and operate the multicast service.Further, the multicast service proxy server uses the informationcontained in an IP packet received via the IP packet overflowcommunication line.

A cable voice broadcast communication system, a cable TV broadcastcommunication system, or a cable fax communication system by IP transfercan be implemented by using a voice transmission terminal, avoice/moving image transmission terminal, or a still image transmissionterminal capable of transmitting a digitized voice, a voice/movingimage, or a still image. The cable broadcast reception terminals cantransmit an IP packet containing the individual reception terminalinformation to the transmission terminal. As a result, a cable broadcastcommunication system is implemented in which the information can beexchanged between the multicast data transmitter and the multicast datareceivers. The multicast service proxy server arbitrates the informationexchange between the multicast data transmitter and the multicast datareceivers.

The multicast service can be a high quality service by virtue of theimprovement request such as a reception confirmation notification(ACKpacket) and a reception failure notification(NACK packet). Thecommunication company can suppress the increase in communication trafficin the IP transfer network by suppressing the ACK packets, NACK packets,and individual receiver reports. Further, the distribution of multicastdata not having a contract with the communication company is prevented,and the charging to the multicast service users is carried out easily.

20. 20th Embodiment Conducting Multicast Communication

The following description is made with reference to the FIG. 352. An IPtransfer network 2100 comprises: the administration region 2101 of acommunication company X; the administration region 2102 of acommunication company Y; network node apparatuses 2103 to 2114; routers2115-1 to 2115-11; and a router 2116. The network node apparatuses andthe routers are interconnected by IP communication lines directly orindirectly via a network node apparatus or a router. Terminals 2117 to2133 having an IP packet transmission/reception function are connectedto each network node apparatus via an IP communication line. Referencenumerals 2140 to 2143 indicate multicast P service proxy servers.Reference numerals 2144 to 2147 indicate multicast Q service proxyservers. Reference numerals 2048 to 2051 indicate overflow communicationservers. The communication company X and the communication company Ymanage the router 2116 in cooperation. All of the network nodeapparatuses 2103 to 2114 are apparatuses having an IP encapsulation/IPdecapsulation function, or alternatively, all of them are apparatusesnot having an IP encapsulation/IP decapsulation function. The internalconfiguration of each network node apparatus is described in anotherembodiment.

<<Transmission Terminal and Transmission Work Server of CommunicationCompany>>

The electronic news paper distribution service by a news paperpublishing company “A” is designated to a multicast P service, whereasthe news distribution service by a broadcast station B is designated toa multicast Q service. The terminal 2117 is a multicast datatransmission terminal managed by the communication company X. Theterminal 2118 is a transmission work server managed by the communicationcompany X. The terminal 2120 is a multicast data transmission terminalmanaged by the communication company Y. The terminal 2122 is atransmission work server managed by the communication company Y. Theterminal 2123 is a terminal managed by the news paper publishing company“A”, and is a multicast P service terminal for transmitting theelectronic news paper published by the news paper publishing company “A”to the transmission work server 2118 of the communication company X andthe transmission work server 2122 of the communication company Y and forconducting the work communication on the electronic news paperdistribution. The terminal 2119 is a terminal managed by the broadcaststation B, and is a multicast Q service terminal for transmittingthe(voice/moving image) TV news distribution service provided by thebroadcast station B to the transmission administration server 2118 ofthe communication company X and the transmission work server 2122 of thecommunication company Y and for conducting the working/notifyingcommunication on the electronic news paper.

The transmission work server 2118 represents the communication companyX, and processes the administrative work on the transmission of themulticast data, such as the distribution of the electronic news paperpublished by the news paper publishing company “A”, the TV newsdistribution service by the broadcast station B, and the electronicstock price announcement service by a securities company C. Similarly,the transmission work server 2122 represents the communication companyY, and processes the administrative work on the transmission of themulticast data.

<<Transfer of Multicast IP Packet>>

The electronic news paper is stored as the digital information in alarge number of IP packets, and each packet is called an electronic newspaper IP packet. The news paper publishing company “A” transmits theelectronic news paper IP packet from the terminal 2123 of the news paperpublishing company “A” to the transmission work server 2118 of thecommunication company X(Step 2160 in FIG. 353). The electronic newspaper IP packet goes through the network node apparatus 2111, throughthe routers 2115-10, 2115-7, 2115-6, 2116, 2115-5, 2115-3, 2115-1,through the network node apparatus 2103, and then reaches thetransmission work server 2118. The transmission of the electronic newspaper IP packet from the terminal 2123 to the transmission work server2118 can be carried out by any one of UDP communicationtechnique(connection-less communication) and TCP communicationtechnique(connection communication).

The transmission work server 2118 retains the received electronic newspaper IP packet in the internal data base (Step 2161). The transmissionwork server 2118 then transmits the received and retained electronicnews paper IP packet to the transmission terminal 2117 (Step 2162). Thetransmission terminal 2117 retains the received electronic news paper IPpacket. The transmission of the electronic news paper IP packet from thetransmission work server 2118 to the terminal 2117 can be carried out byany one of UDP communication technique and TCP communication technique.

The transmission terminal 2117 transmits the retained electronic newspaper IP packet to the network node apparatus 2103 (Step 2163). Here,the destination address is a multicast address “Mx”. The transmittedelectronic news paper-IP packet is, at the same time, transferred withinthe multicast dedicated IP transfer network 2152 thereby to reach thenetwork node apparatuses 2106 to 2108 (Step 2171 to 2174), to reach theelectronic news paper IP packet reception terminals 2124 to 2128 (Step2175 to 2177), and at the same time, to reach the multicast P serviceproxy servers 2140 to 2141 (Step 2178). The terminals 2124 to 2125transmit an ACK packet notifying the normal reception of the electronicnews paper IP packet or an NACK packet notifying the failure of the IPpacket (Step 2181). The ACK or NACK packet is transferred to themulticast P service proxy server 2140 in charge of the electronic newspaper distribution service (Step 2183). Similarly, the terminals 2126 to2127 transmit an ACK packet or an NACK packet notifying the situation ofreception of the IP packet (Step 2182). The ACK or NACK packet istransferred to the multicast P service proxy server 2141 (Step 2184).The transmission of an ACK packet or an NACK packet from the terminal2128 is in a similar manner.

The multicast P service proxy servers 2140 to 2141 re-transmits theelectronic news paper IP packet as the multicast data to the terminals2124 to 2127 (Steps 2185, 2186). The multicast P service proxy servers2140 to 2141 form an IP packet for reporting the situation of receptionof the electronic news paper IP packet, and then sends it out to thenetwork node apparatuses 2106 to 2107 (Step 2187). The IP packet goesthrough the IP transfer network 2152 (Step 2188), through the networknode apparatus 2103, and then reaches the transmission work server 2118(Step 2189).

The transmission work server 2118 managed by the communication company Xcan calculate the usage charge of the IP transfer network 2101 managedby the communication company X depending on the information relevant tothe electronic news paper IP packet distribution in the Steps 2162 and2189. The transmission work server 2118 uses the information containedin the content of the received IP packet thereby to form an IP packetcontaining the report item to the news paper publishing company “A”, andthen transmits the formed IP packet to the terminal 2123 of the newspaper publishing company “A” (Step 2190). Here, the IP packet goesthrough the network node apparatus 2103 and the routers 2115-1, 2115-3,2115-5, 2116, 2115-6, 2115-7, 2115-10, 2111, and then reaches theterminal 2123. The news paper publishing company “A” receives the IPpacket, and then confirms the situation of distribution of theelectronic news paper IP packet having requested to the communicationcompany X.

On completion of the Step 2160, the news paper publishing company “A”transmits the electronic news paper IP, packet from the terminal 2123 ofthe news paper publishing company “A” to the transmission work server2122 of the communication company Y(Step 2164 in FIG. 353). Here, theelectronic news paper IP packet goes through the network node apparatus2111, through the router 2115-10, through the network node apparatus2110, and then reaches to the transmission work server 2122. Thetransmission work server 2122 retains the received electronic news paperIP packet in the internal data base (Step 2165).

The transmission work server 2122 receives an authentication that thetransmission work server 2122 is an authorized transmission work serverqualified for transmitting the electronic news paper IP packet, from thetransmission terminal 2120 (Step 2260). The transmission work server2122 then transmits the received and retained electronic news paper IPpacket to the transmission terminal 2120 (Step 2166). The transmissionterminal 2120 retains the received electronic news paper IP packet.Further, in the Step 2164, the terminal 2123 of the news paperpublishing company “A” can receive an authentication that the terminalitself is correctly the terminal 2123 of the news paper publishingcompany “A”, from the transmission work server 2122 of the communicationcompany Y.

The transmission terminal 2120 transmits the retained electronic newspaper IP packet to the network node apparatus 2109 (Step 2167). Here,the destination address is a multicast address “My”. The transmittedelectronic news paper IP packet is, at the same time, transferred withinthe multicast dedicated IP transfer network 2153 thereby to reach thenetwork node apparatuses 2112 to 2114 (Step 2191 to 2194), to reach theelectronic news paper IP packet reception terminals 2129 to 2133 (Step2195 to 2197), and at the same time, to reach the multicast P serviceproxy servers 2142 to 2143 (Step 2198). The terminals 2129 to 2133transmit an ACK packet or an NACK packet notifying the situation ofreception of the IP packet (Steps 2201, 2202). The ACK or NACK packet istransferred to the multicast P service proxy server 2142 or 2143 incharge of the electronic news paper distribution service (Steps 2203 or2204).

The multicast P service proxy servers 2142 to 2143 re-transmits theelectronic news paper IP packet as the multicast data to the terminals2129 to 2133 (Steps 2205, 2206). The multicast P service proxy servers2142 to 2143 form an IP packet for reporting the situation of receptionof the electronic news paper IP packet, and then sends it out to thenetwork node apparatuses 2112 to 2113 (Step 2207). The IP packet goesthrough the IP transfer network 2153 (Step 2208), through the networknode apparatus 2109, and then reaches the transmission work server 2122(Step 2209).

The transmission work server 2122 managed by the communication company Ycalculates the usage charge of the IP transfer network 2102 managed bythe communication company Y. The transmission work server 2122 uses theinformation contained in the content of the received IP packet therebyto form an IP packet containing the report item to the news paperpublishing company “A”, and then transmits the formed IP packet to theterminal 2123 of the news paper publishing company “A” (Step 2210).Here, the IP packet goes through the network node apparatus 2110,through the router 2115-10, through the network node apparatus 2111, andthen reaches the terminal 2123. The news paper publishing company “A”receives the IP packet, and then confirms the situation of distributionof the electronic news paper IP packet having requested to thecommunication company X. The multicast Q service can be implemented by asimilar method.

<<Procedure of Authentication>>

As a procedure of authentication in the Step 2260, there are varioustechniques known to the public. An example is described below withreference to FIG. 354. The transmission work server 2122 and thetransmission terminal 2120 retain a common function y=f(a, b) and asecret authentication key “K” in the inside. The transmission workserver 2122 transmits the information “ID2122” for identifying thetransmission work server 2122 to the transmission terminal 2120 (step2160-1). The transmission terminal 2120 receives the information“ID2122” for identifying the transmission-work server 2122, thengenerates a random number “R”, then calculates and retains C1=f(K, R),and then transmits the random number “R” to the transmission work server2122 (Step 2160-2). The transmission work server 2122 uses the receivedrandom number “R”, the authentication key “K,” and the function “f”thereby to calculate C2=f(K, R), and then transmits the “C2” to thetransmission terminal 2120 (Step 2160-3). The transmission terminalchecks whether the generated and retained “C1” coincides with thereceived “C2” or not. When the coincidence occurs, it has been confirmedthat the transmission work server 2122 has the authorized authenticationkey “K” and hence the transmission work server 2122 is the authorizedtransmission work server.

<<Variation>>

The following description is made with reference to the FIG. 355. An IPtransfer network 2100-1 comprises: the administration region 2101-1 of acommunication company X; the administration region 2102-1 of acommunication company Y; network node apparatuses 2104-1, 2105-1, 2107-1to 2114-1; routers 2230, 2232; address administration modules 2231,2233; routers 2115-1 to 2115-11; and a router 2116. All of the networknode apparatuses 2104-1, 2105-1, 2107-1 to 2114-1 are apparatuses nothaving an IP encapsulation/IP decapsulation function. The internalconfiguration of each network node apparatus is the same as thatdescribed in another embodiment. The router 2230 and the addressadministration module 2231 are interconnected and integrated through aline thereby to serve as the network node apparatus. Similarly, therouter 2232 and the address administration module 2233 areinterconnected and integrated through a line thereby to serve as thenetwork node apparatus. As such, a multicast service can be implementedsimilarly to the multicast service described with reference to FIGS. 352and 353.

The terminal 2123 of the news paper publishing company “A” providing themulticast service transmits an electronic news paper IP packet to thetransmission-work servers 2118 and 2122. The transmission work servers2118 and 2122 can distribute the received electronic news paper IPpacket through the IP transfer networks 2101-1 and 2102-1 to thereception terminals 2124 to 2133, by multicast technique. The result ofthe distribution is reported to the transmission work servers 2118 and2122, whereby the charging on the reception terminals 2124 to 2133 iscarried out.

Here, the IP transfer networks 2152 and 2153 are unnecessary to bemulticast-dedicated IP transfer networks. Thus, the multicast servicecan be implemented in the IP transfer networks being shared with the IPtransfer for IP telephone, data transfer, or voice/image transferdescribed in another embodiment.

<<Setting of Address Administration Table and Route Table>>

With regard to the address administration tables of the network nodeapparatuses and the route tables of the routers in the administrationregion 2101-1 of the communication company X and the administrationregion 2102-1 of the communication company Y, the setting of separateaddress administration tables and separate route tables for eachmulticast service is necessary(setting of multicast tree structure). Forthis purpose, a method described in another embodiment is applicable.Further, techniques, described in another embodiment, of the change ofthe multicast tree structure due to the increase or decrease in thenumber of multicast service users and of the release of the multicasttree structure due to the multicast service cancellation are alsoapplicable in the present embodiment.

<<Summary>>

By virtue of the above-mentioned method, a plurality of multicastservices are implemented using the IP transfer network interconnectingthe IP transfer networks of a plurality of communication companies. Themulticast service provider can request to the communication company forthe vicarious execution of the charging work. Multicast data istransmitted to the transmission work server managed by the communicationcompany X and the transmission work server managed by the communicationcompany Y. The transmission work server managed by the communicationcompany X distributes the multicast data through the transmissionterminal of the communication company X to a plurality of terminalsconnected to the IP transfer network managed by the communicationcompany X. Similarly, the transmission work server managed by thecommunication company Y distributes the multicast data through thetransmission terminal of the communication company Y to a plurality ofterminals connected to the IP transfer network managed by thecommunication company Y. The result of distribution within the IPtransfer network managed by the communication company X or thecommunication company Y is collected via the multicast service proxyserver by the transmission work server of the communication company X orthe communication company Y.

The terminal-to-terminal communication connection control for theterminal-to-terminal(inter-terminal) communications with employment ofthe IP transfer network can be realized by way of connecting suchmultimedia terminals for apparatus as IP terminals including personalcomputers with IP communication functions, IP telephone sets, IPvoice/image apparatus to more than one of a network node apparatuswithin an integrated IP transfer network, a gateway and a media router.In this case, while the media router is installed outside the integratedIP transfer network, and the host name made of the multimedia terminalidentifying telephone number is used through the integrated IP transfernetwork, the natural communications can be carried out, for example, theinformation can be exchanged among the multimedia terminals.

While the telephone set having the telephone number for the publicswitched telephone network is connected to the media router within theLAN, the terminal-to-terminal communication can be established from thetelephone set connected to the public switched telephone network via theintegrated IP transfer network to the telephone set contained in theLAN. Also, while a single multimedia terminal constitutes thetransmission source, electronic data and voice/image data such aselectronic books may employed for IP data multicast networks and IP baseTV broadcasting networks for transmitting to multimedia terminals whichconstitute a plurality of reception ends.

1-466. (canceled)
 467. A terminal-to-terminal communication connectioncontrol method with employment of an IP transfer network wherein: atelephone communication between two telephone sets can be carried outvia a telephone set 1, a media router, both a relay gateway and agateway equipped with a non-capsulation function, which belong to an IPtransfer network, an NNI interface communication line, a public switchedtelephone network, and a telephone set 2 in this order.
 468. Aterminal-to-terminal communication connection control method withemployment of an IP transfer network as claimed in claim 467 wherein:based upon an address administration table contained in anon-capsulation type termination gateway, such an IP packet filteringoperation is carried out, through which only an IP packet may pass intowhich a set of an IP address and a port number has been registered. 469.A terminal-to-terminal communication connection control method withemployment of an IP transfer network as claimed in claim 467 wherein:based upon an address administration table contained in anon-capsulation type termination gateway, such an IP packet filteringoperation is carried out, through which only an IP packet may pass intowhich a port number has been registered.
 470. A terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control method with employment of an IPtransfer network wherein: a telephone communication can be carried outbetween two telephone sets via a telephone set 1, a media router 1, andboth a termination gateway equipped with an encapsulation function and arelay gateway, which belong to an IP transfer network 1, and also viaboth another relay gateway and another termination gateway equipped withan encapsulation function, which belong to an IP transfer network 2, amedia router 2, and a telephone set 2 in this order.
 471. Aterminal-to-terminal communication connection control method withemployment of an IP transfer network wherein: a telephone communicationcan be carried out between two telephone sets via a telephone set 1, amedia router 1, and both a termination gateway equipped with anon-capsulation function and a non-capsulation relay gateway, whichbelong to an IP transfer network 1, and also via both another relaygateway and another termination gateway equipped with a non-capsulationfunction, which belong to an IP transfer network 2, a media router 2,and a telephone set 2 in this order.
 472. A terminal-to-terminalcommunication control method with employment of an IP transfer networkas claimed in claim 467, wherein: a terminal inside a gateway with anon-encapsulating function has a NAT function for converting an externaladdress indicating a telephone management server in an IP packet into aninternal address indicating a telephone management server.
 473. Anetwork node apparatus, wherein; an internal IP packet is incommunication code to designate a method for an IP-encapsulation and anIP-inverse-decapsulation; when said internal IP packet outputdesignating value is designated, said IP-encapsulation is carried out,when said internal IP packet output designating value is not designated,said IP-encapsulation is not carried out and outputs an external IPpacket to an external IP packet overflow communication line.
 474. Anetwork node apparatus, wherein; said network node apparatus has a firstfunction to form an internal IP packet by IP-encapsulating an externalIP packet and a second function to restore said external IP packet bydecapsulating said internal IP packet; an internal IP packet is incommunication code to designate a method for an IP-encapsulation and anIP-decapsulation; when said internal IP packet output designating valueis designated, said IP-decapsulation is carried out, and when saidinternal IP packet output designating value is not designated, saidIP-decapsulation is not carried out and outputs an external IP packet toan external IP packet overflow communication line.
 475. A network nodeapparatus as claimed in claim 473, wherein; further including anoverflow IP packet selecting functional section to connect to saidexternal IP packet overflow communication line.
 476. A network nodeapparatus as claimed in claim 473, comprising a function of adding asimple header to an external packet to make an internal capsule and aninverted encapsulating function.
 477. A network node apparatus asclaimed in claim 474, comprising a function of adding a simple header toan external packet to make an internal capsule and an invertedencapsulating function.
 478. A network node apparatus used in an IPpacket transfer network as claimed in claim
 474. 479. An IP transfernetwork wherein: an external IP packet is inputted from a logicalterminal at an end of a communication line, when a combinationcomprising a logical terminal identification information on atransmission side, a destination external IP address inside the externalIP packet and a source external IP address is determined, acommunication line which transfers an internal packet between a networknode apparatus on a transmission side and a network node apparatus on areception side is determined, a simple header is added to the externalIP packet to form an internal packet, and the simple header includes atleast a destination internal address.
 480. A terminal-to-terminalcommunication control method with employment of an IP transfer networkas claimed in claim 479, wherein: in place of the combination comprisingthree addresses, a combination comprising the logical terminalidentification information on the transmission side, the source internaladdress and the destination external address inside the external IPpacket is used.
 481. A network node apparatus used in an IP packettransfer network as claimed in claim
 479. 482. An IP transfer network asclaimed in claim 479, wherein: the internal packet is an optical frame.483. A terminal-to-terminal communication control method, wherein:inter-terminal communication connection control for telephonecommunication constituted by an initial address message, an addresscompletion message, a call pass message, and a response message isperformed by transmitting/receiving an IP packet inside an IP transfernetwork to shift a voice communication phase, and the voicecommunication phase is completed through a step comprising a releaserequest message and a release completion message bytransmitting/receiving the IP packet.
 484. A terminal, wherein anexternal packet including a destination telephone number is sent to anIP transfer network, said IP transfer network forms a destination IPaddress corresponding to said destination telephone number and repliessaid destination IP address to said terminal.
 485. A terminal accordingto claim 484, wherein a terminal discrimination number is processed as atelephone number or an IP address.
 486. An IP transfer network, whereinsaid IP transfer network includes two or more network node apparatus,said network node apparatus are connected with terminals, aterminal-to-terminal communication connection control is carried out byusing an IP packet including a call control, an external packet isconverted into an internal packet when a sender address of said externalpacket is included in a sender address of said external packet held in anetwork node apparatus on sending side, said internal packet is restoredto said external packet at a network node apparatus on receiving side,and a communication with said internal packet is carried out atinter-network node apparatus.
 487. An IP transfer network, wherein saidIP transfer network includes two or more network node apparatus, saidnetwork node apparatus are connected with terminals, aterminal-to-terminal communication connection control is carried out byusing an IP packet including a call control, an external packet isconverted into an internal packet when a destination address of saidexternal packet is included in a destination address of said externalpacket held in a network node apparatus on sending side, said internalpacket is restored to said external packet at a network node apparatuson receiving side, and a communication with said internal packet iscarried out at inter-network node apparatus.
 488. An IP transfernetwork, wherein said IP transfer network includes two or more networknode apparatus, said network node apparatus are connected withterminals, a terminal-to-terminal communication connection control iscarried out by using an IP packet including a call control, an externalpacket is converted into an internal packet at a network node apparatuson sending side, a communication with said internal packet is carriedout at inter-network node apparatus, said internal packet is restored tosaid external packet when a sender address of said external packetincluding in said internal packet received at a network node apparatuson receiving side is included in a sender address of said externalpacket registered in a network node apparatus on receiving side.
 489. AnIP transfer network, wherein said IP transfer network includes two ormore network node apparatus, a terminal-to-terminal communicationconnection control is carried out by using an IP packet including a callcontrol, an external packet is converted into an internal packet at anetwork node apparatus on sending side, a communication with saidinternal packet is carried out at inter-network node apparatus, saidinternal packet is restored to said external packet when a destinationaddress of said external packet including in said internal packetreceived at a network node apparatus on receiving side is included in adestination address of said external packet registered in a network nodeapparatus on receiving side.
 490. An IP transfer network, wherein anetwork node apparatus includes two or more communication lines, alogical terminal is defined for each communication line, a network nodeapparatus on sending side forms an internal packet from an externalpacket for each logical terminal, a network node apparatus on receivingside restores said external packet from said internal packet for eachlogical terminal on receiving side, a communication with said internalpacket is carried out at inter-network node apparatus, a header of saidinternal packet does not include a source address and does a destinationaddress only, thereby to carry out a terminal-to-terminal communicationconnection control by using said internal packet including a callcontrol.
 491. A network node apparatus, wherein said network nodeapparatus includes two or more logical terminals, forms an internalpacket based on a logical terminal on sending side and an externalpacket and decides a logical terminal on receiving side based on alogical terminal discrimination information of said formed internalpacket, a header of said internal packet does not include a sourceaddress and does a destination address only, thereby to carry out aterminal-to-terminal communication connection control by using saidinternal packet including a call control.
 492. A network node apparatus,wherein said network node apparatus includes two or more logicalterminals, a network node apparatus on sending side forms an internalpacket based on a logical terminal on sending side and an externalpacket, a network node apparatus on receiving side decides a logicalterminal on receiving side based on a logical terminal discriminationinformation of said received internal packet, a header of said internalpacket does not include a source address and does a destination addressonly, thereby to carry out a terminal-to-terminal communicationconnection control by using said internal packet including a callcontrol.
 493. A network node apparatus, wherein said network nodeapparatus includes two or more logical terminals, a network nodeapparatus on sending side forms an internal packet based on an externalpacket, a network node apparatus on receiving side restores saidexternal packet, a communication with said internal packet is carriedout at inter-network node apparatus, said internal packet includes alogical terminal discrimination information on receiving side, a headerof said internal packet does not include a source address and does adestination address only, thereby to carry out a terminal-to-terminalcommunication connection control by using said internal packet includinga call control.
 494. A network node apparatus, wherein said network nodeapparatus is connected with two or more communication lines, a logicalterminal is defined for each communication line, a network nodeapparatus on sending side forms an internal packet from an externalpacket based on an external packet for each communication line, anetwork node apparatus on receiving side restores said external packetfrom said internal packet for each logical terminal on receiving side, acommunication with said internal packet is carried out at inter-networknode apparatus, said internal packet includes a logical terminaldiscriminating information on receiving side, a header of said internalpacket does not include a source address and does a destination addressonly, thereby to carry out a terminal-to-terminal communicationconnection control by using said internal packet including a callcontrol.
 495. An IP transfer network, wherein said IP transfer networkincludes two or more network node apparatus, a network node apparatus onsending side forms an internal IP packet from an external IP packet, anetwork node apparatus on receiving side restores said external IPpacket from said internal IP packet, a communication with said internalIP packet is carried out between said network node apparatus on sendingside and said network node apparatus on receiving side, thereby to carryout a terminal-to-terminal communication connection control by usingsaid internal packet including a call control.
 496. A network nodeapparatus, wherein an IP transfer network includes two or more networknode apparatus connected with terminals, a network node apparatus onsending side forms an internal IP packet from an external IP packet, anetwork node apparatus on receiving side restores said external IPpacket from said internal IP packet, a communication with said internalIP packet is carried out between said network node apparatus on sendingside and said network node apparatus on receiving side, thereby to carryout a terminal-to-terminal communication connection control by usingsaid internal packet including a call control.